Introduction 4 Instrument Cluster 12 Warning lights and chimes 12
manual may show features as used in different models, so may appear different to you on your vehicle. Note: Always use and operate your vehicle in line with all applicable laws and regulations. Note: Pass on this manual when selling your vehicle. It is an integral part of your vehicle. This manual may qualify the location of a
owner.ford.com
ford.ca
March 2019 Second Printing
Litho in U.S.A.
KE5J 19A321 AB
2019 FUSION Owner's Manual
2019 FUSION Owner's Manual
The information contained in this publication was correct at the time of going to print. In the interest of continuous development, we reserve the right to change specifications, design or equipment at any time without notice or obligation. No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, stored in a retrieval system or translated into any language in any form by any means without our written permission. Errors and omissions excepted.
© Ford Motor Company 2019
All rights reserved.
Part Number: 201805 20190301152715
California Proposition 65
WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-highway motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
WARNING: Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and reproductive harm. Wash your hands after handling.
Table of Contents
Introduction
About This Manual ..........................................7 Symbols Glossary ............................................7 Data Recording .................................................9 Perchlorate .......................................................13 Ford Credit ........................................................13 Replacement Parts Recommendation
...........................................................................1 4 Special Notices ...............................................14 Mobile Communications Equipment
............................................................................15 Export Unique Options ................................15
Environment
Protecting the Environment .......................17
At a Glance
Instrument Panel ...........................................18
Child Safety
General Information .....................................20 Installing Child Restraints ..........................22 Booster Seats .................................................30 Child Restraint Positioning ........................32 Child Safety Locks .........................................33
Seatbelts
Principle of Operation .................................35 Fastening the Seatbelts .............................36 Seatbelt Height Adjustment .....................39 Seatbelt Warning Lamp and Indicator
Chime ............................................................40 Seatbelt Reminder .......................................40 Child Restraint and Seatbelt
Maintenance ...............................................42 Seatbelt Extension .......................................42
Personal Safety SystemTM
Personal Safety SystemTM .........................43
Supplementary Restraints System
Principle of Operation .................................44 Driver and Passenger Airbags ..................45 Front Passenger Sensing System ...........46 Side Airbags ....................................................48 Driver and Passenger Knee Airbags .......49 Safety CanopyTM ...........................................50 Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator ........51 Airbag Disposal ..............................................52
Keys and Remote Controls
General Information on Radio Frequencies .................................................53
Remote Control .............................................53 Replacing a Lost Key or Remote Control
..........................................................................5 8
MyKeyTM
Principle of Operation .................................59 Creating a MyKey ..........................................60 Clearing All MyKeys .......................................61 Checking MyKey System Status ...............61 Using MyKey With Remote Start
Systems ........................................................62 MyKey Troubleshooting ..........................62
Doors and Locks
Locking and Unlocking ...............................64 Keyless Entry ...................................................67 Interior Luggage Compartment Release
..........................................................................69
Security
Passive Anti-Theft System .........................71 Anti-Theft Alarm ............................................72
Steering Wheel
Adjusting the Steering Wheel ...................73 Audio Control ..................................................73
1
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Table of Contents
Voice Control ...................................................74 Cruise Control .................................................74 Information Display Control ......................75 Heated Steering Wheel ...............................75
Wipers and Washers
Windshield Wipers ........................................76 Autowipers .......................................................76 Windshield Washers .....................................77
Lighting
General Information .....................................78 Lighting Control .............................................78 Autolamps .......................................................79 Instrument Lighting Dimmer .....................79 Headlamp Exit Delay ..................................80 Daytime Running Lamps ...........................80 Automatic High Beam Control ..................81 Front Fog Lamps ...........................................82 Direction Indicators ......................................82 Interior Lamps ................................................82 Ambient Lighting ...........................................83
Windows and Mirrors
Power Windows ............................................85 Global Opening and Closing ....................86 Exterior Mirrors ...............................................86 Interior Mirror ..................................................88 Sun Visors ........................................................88 Moonroof .........................................................88
Instrument Cluster
Gauges ..............................................................90 Warning Lamps and Indicators ................93 Audible Warnings and Indicators ............96
Information Displays
General Information .....................................97 Information Messages ..............................106
Climate Control
Manual Climate Control .............................121 Automatic Climate Control - Vehicles
With: Touchscreen Display, Vehicles Without: Sony Audio System ..............122 Automatic Climate Control - Vehicles With: Sony Audio System/ Touchscreen Display ..............................124 Automatic Climate Control - Vehicles With: SYNC ................................................125 Hints on Controlling the Interior Climate ..........................................................................127 Heated Rear Window .................................129 Heated Exterior Mirrors ..............................129 Cabin Air Filter ..............................................130 Remote Start ................................................130
Seats
Sitting in the Correct Position ..................131 Head Restraints .............................................131 Manual Seats ................................................133 Power Seats ...................................................133 Memory Function .........................................135 Rear Seats .......................................................137 Heated Seats ................................................138 Climate Controlled Seats .........................138
Garage Door Opener
Universal Garage Door Opener ..............140
Auxiliary Power Points
Auxiliary Power Points ...............................145
Storage Compartments
Center Console .............................................147 Overhead Console .......................................147 Rear Seat Armrest .......................................147
Starting and Stopping the Engine
General Information ...................................148
2
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Table of Contents
Keyless Starting ...........................................148 Starting a Gasoline Engine ......................149 Engine Block Heater ....................................151
Unique Driving Characteristics
Auto-Start-Stop ...........................................153
Fuel and Refueling
Safety Precautions ......................................155 Fuel Quality ....................................................155 Fuel Filler Funnel Location .......................156 Running Out of Fuel ....................................157 Refueling .........................................................158 Fuel Consumption ........................................161
Engine Emission Control
Emission Law ................................................162 Catalytic Converter .....................................163
Transmission
Automatic Transmission ..........................166
All-Wheel Drive
Using All-Wheel Drive .................................171
Brakes
General Information ...................................176 Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock Brakes
.........................................................................176 Electric Parking Brake .................................177 Hill Start Assist .............................................178
Traction Control
Principle of Operation ...............................180 Using Traction Control ..............................180
Stability Control
Principle of Operation .................................181 Using Stability Control ...............................182
Parking Aids
Principle of Operation ................................183 Rear Parking Aid ...........................................183 Front Parking Aid .........................................184 Side Sensing System .................................185 Active Park Assist ........................................187 Rear View Camera ......................................193
Cruise Control
Principle of Operation ................................197 Using Cruise Control ...................................197 Using Adaptive Cruise Control ...............198
Driving Aids
Driver Alert ....................................................205 Lane Keeping System ...............................206 Blind Spot Information System ...............211 Cross Traffic Alert ........................................212 Steering ...........................................................215 Pre-Collision Assist .....................................216
Load Carrying
Load Limit .......................................................219
Towing
Towing a Trailer ............................................224 Recommended Towing Weights ...........225 Essential Towing Checks .........................226 Towing the Vehicle on Four Wheels .....228
Driving Hints
Breaking-In ....................................................230 Economical Driving ....................................230 Driving Through Water ..............................230 Floor Mats .......................................................231
Roadside Emergencies
Roadside Assistance .................................232 Hazard Flashers ...........................................233
3
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Table of Contents
Fuel Shutoff ..................................................233 Jump Starting the Vehicle .......................234 Post-Crash Alert System .........................236 Transporting the Vehicle ..........................236 Towing Points ...............................................237
Customer Assistance
Getting the Services You Need ..............238 In California (U.S. Only) ...........................239 The Better Business Bureau (BBB) Auto
Line Program (U.S. Only) ....................240 Utilizing the Mediation/Arbitration
Program (Canada Only) .......................241 Getting Assistance Outside the U.S. and
Canada ........................................................241 Ordering Additional Owner's Literature
........................................................................243 Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. Only)
........................................................................243 Reporting Safety Defects (Canada Only)
........................................................................243
Fuses
Fuse Specification Chart .........................245 Changing a Fuse .........................................254
Maintenance
General Information ..................................256 Opening and Closing the Hood .............256 Under Hood Overview - 1.5L EcoBoostTM
........................................................................2 5 7 Under Hood Overview - 2.0L EcoBoostTM
........................................................................258 Under Hood Overview - 2.5L ..................259 Under Hood Overview - 2.7L EcoBoostTM
.......................................................................2 6 0 Engine Oil Dipstick - 1.5L EcoBoostTM
.........................................................................261 Engine Oil Dipstick - 2.0L EcoBoostTM/
2.5L/2.7L EcoBoostTM ............................261 Engine Oil Check ..........................................261 Oil Change Indicator Reset .....................262
Engine Coolant Check ..............................263 Automatic Transmission Fluid Check -
1.5L EcoBoostTM/2.0L EcoBoostTM/ 2.5L ...............................................................267 Automatic Transmission Fluid Check 2.7L EcoBoostTM ......................................267 Brake Fluid Check .......................................269 Washer Fluid Check ...................................270 Fuel Filter .......................................................270 Changing the 12V Battery ........................270 Checking the Wiper Blades .....................272 Changing the Wiper Blades .....................272 Adjusting the Headlamps ........................273 Removing a Headlamp .............................274 Changing a Bulb ..........................................276 Changing the Engine Air Filter ................278
Vehicle Care
General Information ..................................280 Cleaning Products .....................................280 Cleaning the Exterior ................................280 Waxing ............................................................282 Cleaning the Engine ...................................282 Cleaning the Windows and Wiper Blades
........................................................................282 Cleaning the Interior ..................................283 Cleaning the Instrument Panel and
Instrument Cluster Lens ......................283 Cleaning Leather Seats ............................284 Repairing Minor Paint Damage .............285 Cleaning the Wheels .................................285 Vehicle Storage ...........................................285 Body Styling Kits .........................................287
Wheels and Tires
General Information ..................................288 Tire Care .........................................................288 Using Summer Tires ..................................303 Using Snow Chains ....................................303 Tire Pressure Monitoring System .........304
4
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Table of Contents
Changing a Road Wheel ...........................310 Technical Specifications - 1.5L
EcoBoostTM/2.0L EcoBoostTM/2.5L .........................................................................3 1 7 Technical Specifications - 2.7L EcoBoostTM ................................................318
Capacities and Specifications
Engine Specifications - 1.5L EcoBoostTM .........................................................................319
Engine Specifications - 2.0L EcoBoostTM .........................................................................319
Engine Specifications - 2.5L ...................320 Engine Specifications - 2.7L EcoBoostTM
.........................................................................321 Motorcraft Parts - 1.5L EcoBoostTM ......321 Motorcraft Parts - 2.0L EcoBoostTM .....323 Motorcraft Parts - 2.5L .............................324 Motorcraft Parts - 2.7L EcoBoostTM ......325 Vehicle Identification Number ...............326 Vehicle Certification Label .......................327 Transmission Code Designation ............327 Capacities and Specifications - 1.5L
EcoBoostTM ...............................................328 Capacities and Specifications - 2.0L
EcoBoostTM ................................................331 Capacities and Specifications - 2.5L
........................................................................335 Capacities and Specifications - 2.7L
EcoBoostTM ...............................................339 Bulb Specification Chart .........................344
Audio System
General Information ..................................345 Audio Unit - Vehicles With: Touchscreen
Display, Vehicles Without: Sony Audio System .......................................................346 Audio Unit - Vehicles With: Sony Audio System/Touchscreen Display ............347 Audio Unit - Vehicles With: SYNC ........349 Digital Radio .................................................353 Satellite Radio .............................................355
USB Port ........................................................358 Media Hub .....................................................358
SYNCTM
General Information ..................................359 Using Voice Recognition ...........................361 Using SYNCTM With Your Phone ...........363 SYNCTM Applications and Services ......375 Using SYNCTM With Your Media Player
.......................................................................380 SYNCTM Troubleshooting ........................389
SYNCTM 3
General Information ..................................397 Home Screen ...............................................409 Using Voice Recognition ...........................410 Entertainment ...............................................417 Climate ...........................................................426 Phone ..............................................................429 Navigation .....................................................435 Apps ................................................................443 Settings ..........................................................446 SYNCTM 3 Troubleshooting ....................460
Accessories
Accessories ...................................................472
Ford Protect
Ford Protect ..................................................474
Scheduled Maintenance
General Maintenance Information .......476 Normal Scheduled Maintenance .........479 Special Operating Conditions Scheduled
Maintenance ............................................482 Scheduled Maintenance Record ..........484
Appendices
Electromagnetic Compatibility .............494 End User License Agreement ................496
5
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Table of Contents
Type Approvals ............................................522
6
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Introduction
ABOUT THIS MANUAL
Thank you for choosing Ford. We recommend that you take some time to get to know your vehicle by reading this manual. The more that you know about your vehicle, the greater the safety and pleasure you will get from driving it.
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, crash and injury. We strongly recommend that you use extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle. We recommend against the use of any hand-held device while driving and encourage the use of voice-operated systems when possible. Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the use of electronic devices while driving.
Note: This manual describes product features and options available throughout the range of available models, sometimes even before they are generally available. It may describe options not fitted to the vehicle you have purchased.
Note: Some of the illustrations in this manual may show features as used in different models, so may appear different to you on your vehicle.
Note: Always use and operate your vehicle in line with all applicable laws and regulations.
Note: Pass on this manual when selling your vehicle. It is an integral part of your vehicle.
This manual may qualify the location of a component as left-hand side or right-hand side. The side is determined when facing forward in the seat.
E154903
A Right-hand side. B Left-hand side.
SYMBOLS GLOSSARY
These are some of the symbols you may see on your vehicle.
Air conditioning system
E162384 E231157
Air conditioning system lubricant type
Anti-lock braking system
Avoid smoking, flames or sparks
Battery
Battery acid
Brake fluid - non petroleum based
Brake system
7
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Introduction
E270480
Brake system Cabin air filter
Check fuel cap
E231160
Flammable Front airbag
E67017
Front fog lamps
Child safety door lock or unlock
Fuel pump reset
Child seat lower anchor
Fuse compartment
Child seat tether anchor
Hazard flashers
E71340
Cruise control Do not open when hot
Heated rear window Windshield defrosting system
Engine air filter Engine coolant
Interior luggage compartment release
Jack
Engine coolant temperature
Engine oil
Explosive gas
Fan warning
E71880
Fasten seatbelt
E161353
Keep out of reach of children Lighting control
Low tire pressure warning
Maintain correct fluid level
Note operating instructions
8
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Introduction
E270945
Horn control Panic alarm
E139213
Parking aid Parking brake
Power steering fluid
Power windows front/rear
Shield the eyes
E167012
Stability control
E138639
Hill descent control
E163957 E272858
Trail control Windshield wiping system
E270969
Windshield wash and wipe
Power window lockout
Requires registered technician
E231159
Safety alert
See Owner's Manual
See Service Manual
E231158
Service engine soon
E270849 E270850
Passenger airbag activated Passenger airbag deactivated Side airbag
DATA RECORDING
WARNING: Do not connect wireless plug-in devices to the data link connector. Unauthorized third parties could gain access to vehicle data and impair the performance of safety related systems. Only allow repair facilities that follow our service and repair instructions to connect their equipment to the data link connector.
We respect your privacy and are committed to protecting it. The information contained in this publication was correct at the time of going to print but as technology rapidly changes, we recommend that you visit the regional Ford website for the latest information.
9
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Introduction
Your vehicle has electronic control units that have data recording functionality and the ability to permanently or temporarily store data. This data could include information on the condition and status of your vehicle, vehicle maintenance requirements, events and malfunctions. The types of data that can be recorded are described in this section. Some of the data recorded is stored in event logs or error logs.
Note: Error logs are reset following a service or repair.
Note: We may provide information in response to requests from law enforcement, other government authorities and third parties acting with lawful authority or through a legal process. Such information could be used by them in legal proceedings.
Data recorded includes, for example:
· Operating states of system components, for example fuel level, tire pressure and battery charge level.
· Vehicle and component status, for example wheel speed, deceleration, lateral acceleration and seatbelt status.
· Events or errors in essential systems, for example headlamps and brakes.
· System responses to driving situations, for example airbag deployment and stability control.
· Environmental conditions, for example temperature.
Some of this data, when used in combination with other information, for example an accident report, damage to a vehicle or eyewitness statements, could be associated with a specific person.
Service Data
Service data recorders in your vehicle are capable of collecting and storing diagnostic information about your vehicle. This potentially includes information about the performance or status of various systems and modules in the vehicle, such as engine, throttle, steering or brake systems. In order to properly diagnose and service your vehicle, Ford Motor Company (Ford of Canada in Canada), and service and repair facilities may access or share among them vehicle diagnostic information received through a direct connection to your vehicle when diagnosing or servicing your vehicle. Additionally, Ford Motor Company (Ford of Canada, in Canada) may, where permitted by law, use vehicle diagnostic information for vehicle improvement or with other information we may have about you, (for example, your contact information), to offer you products or services that may interest you. Data may be provided to our service providers such as part suppliers that may help diagnose malfunctions, and who are similarly obligated to protect data. We retain this data only as long as necessary to perform these functions or to comply with law. We may provide information where required in response to official requests to law enforcement or other government authorities or third parties acting with lawful authority or court order, and such information may be used in legal proceedings. For U.S. only (if equipped), if you choose to use connected apps and services, you consent that certain diagnostic information may also be accessed electronically by Ford Motor Company and Ford authorized service facilities, and that the diagnostic information may be used to provide services to you, personalizing your experience, troubleshoot, and to improve products and services and offer you
10
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Introduction
products and services that may interest you, where permitted by law. For Canada only, for more information, please review the Ford of Canada privacy policy at www.ford.ca, including our U.S. data storage and use of service providers in other jurisdictions who may be subject to legal requirements in Canada, the United States and other countries applicable to them, for example, lawful requirements to disclose personal information to governmental authorities in those countries.
Event Data
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder. The main purpose of an event data recorder is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an airbag deployment or hitting a road obstacle; this data will assist in understanding how a vehicle's systems performed. The event data recorder is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less.
The event data recorder in this vehicle is designed to record such data as:
· How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
· Whether or not the driver and passenger seatbelts were buckled/fastened;
· How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or the brake pedal; and
· How fast the vehicle was traveling; and
· Where the driver was positioning the steering wheel.
This data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
Note: Event data recorder data is recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data is recorded by the event data recorder under normal driving conditions and no personal data or information (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) is recorded. However, parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the event data recorder data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an event data recorder, special equipment is required, and access to the vehicle or the event data recorder is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that have such special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the event data recorder.
Comfort, Convenience and Entertainment Data
Your vehicle has electronic control units that have the ability to store data based on your personalized settings. The data is stored locally in the vehicle or on devices that you connect to it, for example, a USB drive or digital music player. You can delete some of this data and also choose whether to share it through the services to which you subscribe. See Settings (page 446).
Comfort and Convenience Data
Data recorded includes, for example:
· Seat and steering wheel position.
· Climate control settings.
· Radio presets.
11
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Introduction
Entertainment Data
Data recorded includes, for example:
· Music, videos or album art.
· Contacts and corresponding address book entries.
· Navigation destinations.
Services That We Provide
If you use our services, we collect and use data, for example account information, vehicle location and driving characteristics, that could identify you. We transmit this data through a dedicated, protected connection. We only collect and use data to enable your use of our services to which you have subscribed, with your consent or where permitted by law. For additional information, see the terms and conditions of the services to which you have subscribed.
Services That Third Parties Provide
We recommend that you review the terms and conditions and data privacy information for any services to which you subscribe. We take no responsibility for services that third parties provide.
Vehicles With a Modem
The modem has a SIM. The modem periodically sends messages to stay connected to the cell phone network. These messages could include information that identifies your vehicle, the SIM and the electronic serial number of the modem. Cell phone network service providers could have access to additional information, for example cell phone network tower identification.
Note: The modem continues to send this information unless you have all added value services deactivated. Contact the Ford Customer Relationship Center. Refer to the regional Ford website for contact information.
Note: The service can be unavailable or interrupted for a number of reasons, for example environmental or topographical conditions and data plan coverage.
Vehicles With SYNC
Mobile Device Data
If you connect a mobile device to your vehicle, you can display data from your device on the touchscreen for example, music and album art. You can share your vehicle data with mobile apps on your device through the system. See Apps (page 443).
The mobile apps function operates by your connected device sending data to us in the United States. The data is encrypted and includes the vehicle identification number of your vehicle, the SYNC module serial number, odometer, enabled apps, usage statistics and debugging information. We retain it only as long as necessary to provide the service, to troubleshoot, for continuous improvement and to offer you products and services that may be of interest to you according to your preferences and where allowed by law.
If you connect a cell phone to the system, the system creates a profile that links to that cell phone. The cell phone profile enables more mobile features and efficient operation. The profile contains, for example data from your phonebook, read and unread text messages and call history, including history of calls when your cell phone was not connected to the system.
12
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Introduction
If you connect a media device, the system creates and retains a media device index of supported media content. The system also records a short diagnostic log of approximately 10 minutes of all recent system activity.
The cell phone profile, media device index and diagnostic log remain in your vehicle unless you delete them and are generally accessible only in your vehicle when you connect your cell phone or media device. If you no longer plan to use the system or your vehicle, we recommend you use the master reset function to erase the stored information. See Settings (page 446).
System data cannot be accessed without special equipment and access to your vehicle's module.
For additional information about our privacy policy, see the regional Ford website.
Emergency Call System (If Equipped)
When you switch on the emergency call system, it may disclose to emergency services that your vehicle has been in a crash involving the deployment of an airbag or activation of the fuel pump shut-off. Certain versions or updates to the emergency call system may also be capable of electronically or verbally disclosing to emergency services operators your vehicle location or other details about your vehicle or crash to assist emergency services operators to provide the most appropriate emergency services. If you do not want to disclose this information, do not switch the feature on.
PERCHLORATE
Certain components in your vehicle such as airbag modules, seatbelt pretensioners and remote control batteries may contain perchlorate material. Special handling may apply for service or vehicle end of life disposal.
For more information visit:
Web Address
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
FORD CREDIT
US Only
Ford Credit offers a full range of financing and lease plans to help you acquire your vehicle. If you have financed or leased your vehicle through Ford Credit, thank you for your business. We offer a number of convenient ways for you to contact us, and to manage your account. Call 1-800-727-7000. For more information about Ford Credit and access to Account Manager, go to www.ford.com/finance.
13
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Introduction
REPLACEMENT PARTS RECOMMENDATION
We have built your vehicle to the highest standards using quality parts. We recommend that you demand the use of genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts whenever your vehicle requires scheduled maintenance or repair. You can clearly identify genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts by looking for the Ford, FoMoCo or Motorcraft branding on the parts or their packaging.
Scheduled Maintenance and Mechanical Repairs
One of the best ways for you to make sure that your vehicle provides years of service is to have it maintained in line with our recommendations using parts that conform to the specifications detailed in this Owner's Manual. Genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts meet or exceed these specifications.
Collision Repairs
We hope that you never experience a collision, but accidents do happen. Genuine Ford replacement collision parts meet our stringent requirements for fit, finish, structural integrity, corrosion protection and dent resistance. During vehicle development we validate that these parts deliver the intended level of protection as a whole system. A great way to know for sure you are getting this level of protection is to use genuine Ford replacement collision parts.
Warranty on Replacement Parts
Genuine Ford and Motorcraft replacement parts are the only replacement parts that benefit from a Ford Warranty. The Ford Warranty may not cover damage caused to your vehicle as a result of failed non-Ford parts. For additional information, refer to the terms and conditions of the Ford Warranty.
SPECIAL NOTICES
New Vehicle Limited Warranty
Vehicles sold in the United States and Canada
For a detailed description of what is covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty, see your warranty guide that is available online. For more information, refer to our website and download your copy of the warranty guide.
Vehicles sold outside the United States and Canada
For a detailed description of what is covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty, see the warranty guide that is provided to you along with your Owner's Manual.
Special Instructions
For your added safety, your vehicle is fitted with sophisticated electronic controls.
WARNING: You risk death or serious injury to yourself and others if you do not follow the instruction highlighted by the warning symbol. Failure to follow the specific warnings and instructions could result in personal injury.
14
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Introduction
WARNING: NEVER use a rearward facing child restraint on a seat protected by an ACTIVE AIRBAG in front of it, DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD can occur.
On Board Diagnostics Data Link Connector
WARNING: Do not connect wireless plug-in devices to the data link connector. Unauthorized third parties could gain access to vehicle data and impair the performance of safety related systems. Only allow repair facilities that follow our service and repair instructions to connect their equipment to the data link connector.
Your vehicle has an OBD Data Link Connector (DLC) that is used in conjunction with a diagnostic scan tool for vehicle diagnostics, repairs and reprogramming services. Installing an aftermarket device that uses the DLC during normal driving for purposes such as remote insurance company monitoring, transmission of vehicle data to other devices or entities, or altering the performance of the vehicle, may cause interference with or even damage to vehicle systems. We do not recommend or endorse the use of aftermarket plug-in devices unless approved by Ford. The vehicle Warranty will not cover damage caused by an aftermarket plug-in device.
MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, crash and injury. We strongly recommend that you use extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle. We recommend against the use of any hand-held device while driving and encourage the use of voice-operated systems when possible. Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the use of electronic devices while driving.
Using mobile communications equipment is becoming increasingly important in the conduct of business and personal affairs. However, you must not compromise your own or others' safety when using such equipment. Mobile communications can enhance personal safety and security when appropriately used, particularly in emergency situations. Safety must be paramount when using mobile communications equipment to avoid negating these benefits. Mobile communication equipment includes, but is not limited to, cellular phones, pagers, portable email devices, text messaging devices and portable two-way radios.
EXPORT UNIQUE OPTIONS
For your particular global region, your vehicle may be equipped with features and options that are different from the features and options that are described in this Owner's Manual. A market unique supplement may be supplied that complements this book. By referring to the
15
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Introduction
market unique supplement, if provided, you can properly identify those features, recommendations and specifications that are unique to your vehicle. This Owner's Manual is written primarily for the U.S. and Canadian Markets. Features or equipment listed as standard may be different on units built for export. Refer to this Owner's Manual for all other required information and warnings.
16
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Environment
PROTECTING THE ENVIRONMENT
You should play your part in protecting the environment. Correct vehicle usage and the authorized disposal of waste, cleaning and lubrication materials are significant steps toward this aim. For details about Ford Motor Company's sustainability progress and initiatives visit:
Web Address www.sustainability.ford.com
17
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
At a Glance
INSTRUMENT PANEL
E271850
A Air vents. B Direction indicators. See Direction Indicators (page 82). C Information display controls. See Information Display Control (page 75). D Instrument cluster. See Instrument Cluster (page 90). E Information display controls. See Information Display Control (page 75). F Wiper lever. See Wipers and Washers (page 76). G Keyless starting. See Keyless Starting (page 148). H Hazard flashers. See Hazard Flashers (page 233). I Information and entertainment display. J Audio system. See Audio System (page 345). K Climate control. See Climate Control (page 121). L Heated windows and mirrors. See Heated Rear Window (page 129).
18
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
At a Glance
M Audio control. See Audio Control (page 73). Voice control. See Voice Control (page 74).
N Driver knee airbag. See Driver and Passenger Knee Airbags (page 49). O Steering wheel adjustment. See Adjusting the Steering Wheel (page 73). P Horn. Q Cruise control. See Cruise Control (page 74). R Lighting control. See Lighting Control (page 78).
19
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Child Safety
GENERAL INFORMATION
See the following sections for directions on how to properly use safety restraints for children.
WARNING: Always make sure your child is secured properly in a device that is appropriate for their height, age and weight. Child safety restraints must be bought separately from your vehicle. Failure to follow these instructions and guidelines may result in an increased risk of serious injury or death to your child.
WARNING: All children are shaped differently. The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration and other safety organizations, base their recommendations for child restraints on probable child height, age and weight thresholds, or on the minimum requirements of the law. We recommend that you check with a NHTSA Certified Child Passenger Safety Technician
(CPST) to make sure that you properly install the child restraint in your vehicle and that you consult your pediatrician to make sure you have a child restraint appropriate for your child. To locate a child restraint fitting station and CPST, contact NHTSA toll free at 1-888-327-4236 or go to www.nhtsa.dot.gov. In Canada, contact Transport Canada toll free at 1-800-333-0371 or go to www.tc.gc.ca to find a Child Car Seat Clinic in your area. Failure to properly restrain children in child restraints made especially for their height, age and weight, may result in an increased risk of serious injury or death to your child.
WARNING: On hot days, the temperature inside the vehicle can rise very quickly. Exposure of people or animals to these high temperatures for even a short time can cause death or serious heat related injuries, including brain damage. Small children are particularly at risk.
20
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Child Safety
Recommendations for Safety Restraints for Children
Child
Child Size, Height, Weight, or Age
Infants or toddlers
Children weighing 40 lb (18 kg) or less (generally age four or younger).
Small children
Children who have outgrown or no longer properly fit in a child restraint (generally children who are less than 57 in (1.45 m) tall, are greater than age four and less than age 12, and between 40 lb (18 kg) and 80 lb (36 kg) and upward to 100 lb
(45 kg) if recommended by your child restraint manufacturer).
Larger children
Children who have outgrown or no longer properly fit in a belt-positioning booster seat (generally children who are at least 57 in (1.45 m) tall or greater than 80 lb (36 kg) or 100 lb (45 kg) if recommended
by child restraint manufacturer).
Recommended Restraint Type
Use a child restraint (sometimes called an infant carrier, convertible seat, or toddler seat).
Use a belt-positioning booster seat.
Use a vehicle seatbelt having the lap belt snug and low across the hips, shoulder belt centered across the shoulder and chest, and seat backrest
upright.
· You are required by law to properly use child restraints for infants and toddlers in the United States and Canada.
· Many states and provinces require that small children use approved booster seats until they reach age eight, a height of 57 in (1.45 m) tall, or 80 lb (36 kg). Check your local and state or provincial laws for specific requirements about the safety of children in your vehicle.
· When possible, always properly restrain children 12 years of age and under in a rear seating position of your vehicle. Accident statistics suggest that children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in a front seating position. See Front Passenger Sensing System (page 46).
· When installing a rear facing child restraint, adjust the vehicle seats to avoid interference between the child restraint and the vehicle seat in front of the child restraint.
21
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Child Safety
INSTALLING CHILD RESTRAINTS Child Seats
E142594
Use a child safety seat (sometimes called an infant carrier, convertible seat, or toddler seat) for infants, toddlers, or children weighing 40 lb (18 kg) or less (generally age four or younger). Using Lap and Shoulder Belts
WARNING: Do not place a rearward facing child restraint in front of an active airbag. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury or death.
WARNING: Properly secure children 12 years old and under in a rear seating position whenever possible. If you are unable to properly secure all children in a rear seating position, properly secure the largest child on the front seat. If you must use a forward facing child restraint on the front seat, move the seat as far back as possible. Failure to follow these instructions could result in personal injury or death.
WARNING: Depending on where you secure a child restraint, and depending on the child restraint design, you may block access to certain seatbelt buckle assemblies and LATCH lower anchors, rendering those features potentially unusable. To avoid risk of injury, make sure occupants only use seating positions where they are able to be properly restrained.
When installing a child safety seat with combination lap and shoulder belts:
· Use the correct seatbelt buckle for that seating position.
· Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle until you hear a snap and feel it latch. Make sure the tongue is securely fastened in the buckle.
· Keep the buckle release button pointing up and away from the safety seat, with the tongue between the child restraint and the release button, to prevent accidental unbuckling.
· Place the vehicle seat upon which the child restraint will be installed in the upright position.
· Put the seatbelt in the automatic locking mode. See Step 5. This vehicle does not require the use of a locking clip.
Perform the following steps when installing the child restraint with combination lap and shoulder belts:
Note: Although the child restraint illustrated is a forward facing child restraint, the steps are the same for installing a rear facing child restraint.
22
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Standard Seatbelts
Child Safety
E142528
1. Position the child safety seat in a seat with a combination lap and shoulder belt.
E142530
3. While holding the shoulder and lap belt portions together, route the tongue through the child restraint according to the child restraint manufacturer's instructions. Be sure the belt webbing is not twisted.
E142529
2. After positioning the child safety seat in the proper seating position, pull down on the shoulder belt and then grasp the shoulder belt and lap belt together behind the belt tongue.
E142531
4. Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle (the buckle closest to the direction the tongue is coming from) for that seating position until you hear a snap and feel the latch engage. Make sure the tongue is latched securely by pulling on it.
23
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Child Safety
E142875
5. To put the retractor in the automatic locking mode, grasp the shoulder portion of the belt and pull downward until you pull all of the belt out.
Note: The automatic locking mode is available on the front passenger and rear seats. 6. Allow the belt to retract to remove
slack. The belt clicks as it retracts to indicate it is in the automatic locking mode. 7. Try to pull the belt out of the retractor to make sure the retractor is in the automatic locking mode (you should not be able to pull more belt out). If the retractor is not locked, unbuckle the belt and repeat Steps 5 and 6.
E142533
8. Remove remaining slack from the belt. Force the seat down with extra weight, for example, by pressing down or kneeling on the child restraint while pulling up on the shoulder belt in order to force slack from the belt. This is necessary to remove the remaining slack that exists once the extra weight of the child is added to the child restraint. It also helps to achieve the proper snugness of the child restraint to your vehicle. Sometimes, a slight lean toward the buckle provides extra help to remove remaining slack from the belt.
9. Attach the tether strap (if the child restraint is equipped).
E142534
10. Before placing the child in the seat, forcibly move the seat forward and back to make sure the seat is securely held in place. To check this, grab the seat at the belt path and attempt to move it side to side and forward and back. There should be no more than 1 in (2.5 cm) of movement for proper installation.
We recommend checking with a NHTSA Certified Child Passenger Safety Technician to make certain the child restraint is properly installed. In Canada, check with Transport Canada for referral to a Child Car Seat Clinic.
24
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Inflatable Seatbelts
Child Safety
E142528
1. Position the child safety seat in a seat with a combination lap and shoulder belt.
E142530
3. While holding the shoulder and lap belt portions together, route the tongue through the child restraint according to the child restraint manufacturer's instructions. Be sure the belt webbing is not twisted.
E146522
2. After positioning the child safety seat in the proper seating position, grasp the shoulder belt and lap belt together behind the belt tongue.
E146523
4. Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle (the buckle closest to the direction the tongue is coming from) for that seating position until you hear a snap and feel the latch engage. Make sure the tongue is latched securely by pulling on it.
25
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Child Safety
7. Try to pull the belt out of the retractor to make sure the retractor is in the automatic locking mode (you should not be able to pull more belt out). If the retractor is not locked, unbuckle the belt and repeat Steps 5 and 6.
E146524
5. To put the retractor in the automatic locking mode, grasp the lap portion of the inflatable seatbelt and pull upward until you pull all of the belt out.
Note: The automatic locking mode is available on the front passenger and rear seats.
Note: Unlike the standard seatbelt, the inflatable seatbelt's unique lap portion locks the child restraint for installation. The ability for the shoulder portion of the belt to move freely is normal, even after the lap belt has been put into the automatic locking mode.
Note: The lock-off device on some child restraints may not accommodate the shoulder portion of the inflatable seatbelt. Follow all instructions provided by the manufacturer of the child restraint regarding the necessary and proper use of the lock-off device. In some instances, these devices have been provided only for use in vehicles with seatbelt systems that would otherwise require a locking clip.
6. Allow the belt to retract to remove slack. The belt clicks as it retracts to indicate it is in the automatic locking mode.
E146525
8. Remove remaining slack from the belt. Force the seat down with extra weight, for example, by pressing down or kneeling on the child restraint while pulling down on the lap belt in order to force slack from the belt. This is necessary to remove the remaining slack that will exist once the extra weight of the child is added to the child restraint. It also helps to achieve the proper snugness of the child restraint to your vehicle. Sometimes, a slight lean toward the buckle will additionally help to remove remaining slack from the belt.
9. Attach the tether strap (if the child restraint is equipped).
26
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Child Safety
E142534
10. Before placing the child in the seat, forcibly move the seat forward and back to make sure the seat is securely held in place. To check this, grab the seat at the belt path and attempt to move it side to side and forward and back. There should be no more than 1 in (2.5 cm) of movement for proper installation.
We recommend checking with a NHTSA Certified Child Passenger Safety Technician to make certain the child restraint is properly installed. In Canada, check with Transport Canada for referral to a Child Car Seat Clinic.
Using Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren (LATCH)
WARNING: Depending on where you secure a child restraint, and depending on the child restraint design, you may block access to certain seatbelt buckle assemblies and LATCH lower anchors, rendering those features potentially unusable. To avoid risk of injury, make sure occupants only use seating positions where they are able to be properly restrained.
The LATCH system is composed of three vehicle anchor points: two lower anchors where the seat backrest and seat cushion meet (called the seat bight) and one top tether anchor behind that seating position.
LATCH compatible child safety seats have two rigid or webbing mounted attachments that connect to the two lower anchors at the LATCH equipped seating positions in your vehicle. This type of attachment method eliminates the need to use seatbelts to attach the child restraint. However, you can still use the seatbelt to attach the child restraint. For forward-facing child restraints, the top tether strap must also be attached to the proper top tether anchor if a top tether strap has been provided with your child restraint.
WARNING: Do not attach two child safety restraints to the same anchor. In a crash, one anchor may not be strong enough to hold two child safety restraint attachments and may break, causing serious injury or death.
E142535
27
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Child Safety
Your vehicle has LATCH lower anchors for child restraint installation at the seating positions marked with the child restraint symbol.
E144054
The LATCH anchors are at the rear section of the rear seat between the cushion and seat backrest below the symbols as shown. Follow the child restraint manufacturer's instructions to properly install a child restraint with LATCH attachments. Follow the instructions on attaching child safety seats with tether straps. Attach LATCH lower attachments of the child restraint only to the anchors shown. Use of Inboard Lower Anchors from the Outboard Seating Positions (Center Seating Use)
WARNING: The standardized spacing for LATCH lower anchors is 11 in (280 mm) center to center. Do not use LATCH lower anchors for the center seating position unless the child restraint manufacturer's instructions permit and specify using anchors spaced at least as far apart as those in this vehicle.
The lower anchors at the center of the second row rear seat are spaced 18 in (46 cm) apart. You cannot install a child restraint with rigid LATCH attachments at the center seating position. You can only use LATCH compatible child restraints (with attachments on belt webbing) at this seating position provided that the child restraint manufacturer's instructions permit use with the anchor spacing stated. Do not attach a child restraint to any lower anchor if an adjacent child restraint is attached to that anchor.
Each time you use the safety seat, check that the seat is properly attached to the lower anchors and tether anchor, if applicable. Tug the child restraint from side to side and forward and back where it is secured to your vehicle. The seat should move less than 1 in (2.5 cm) when you do this for a proper installation.
If the safety seat is not anchored properly, the risk of a child being injured in a crash greatly increases.
Combining Seatbelt and LATCH Lower Anchors for Attaching Child Safety Seats
When used in combination, either the seatbelt or the LATCH lower anchors may be attached first, provided a proper installation is achieved. Attach the tether strap afterward, if included with the child restraint.
Using Tether Straps
Many forward-facing child safety seats include a tether strap which extends from the back of the child safety seat and hooks to an anchoring point called the top tether anchor. Tether straps are available as an accessory for many older safety seats.
28
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Child Safety
Contact the manufacturer of your child restraint for information about ordering a tether strap, or to obtain a longer tether strap if the tether strap on your safety seat does not reach the appropriate top tether anchor in your vehicle.
Once you install the child safety seat using either the seatbelt, the lower anchors of the LATCH system, or both, you can attach the top tether strap.
The tether strap anchors in your vehicle are in the following positions (shown from top view):
1. Route the child safety seat tether strap over the back of the seat. For the outermost seating positions, route the tether strap under the head restraint and between the head restraint posts. For the center seating positions, route the tether strap over the top of the head restraint. If needed, you can also remove the head restraints.
E144274
2. Locate the correct anchor for the selected seating position, then open the tether anchor cover.
E142537
Perform the following steps to install a child safety seat with tether anchors:
Note: If you install a child restraint with rigid LATCH attachments, do not tighten the tether strap enough to lift the child restraint off your vehicle seat cushion when the child is seated in it. Keep the tether strap just snug without lifting the front of the child restraint. Keeping the child restraint just touching your vehicle seat gives the best protection in a severe crash.
E144275
3. Clip the tether strap to the anchor as shown.
4. Tighten the child safety seat tether strap according to the manufacturer's instructions.
If your child restraint system has a tether strap, and the child restraint manufacturer recommends its use, we also recommend its use.
29
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Child Safety
BOOSTER SEATS
WARNING: Do not put the shoulder section of the seatbelt or allow the child to put the shoulder section of the seatbelt under their arm or behind their back. Failure to follow this instruction could reduce the effectiveness of the seatbelt and increase the risk of injury or death in a crash.
Note: Some booster seat seatbelt guides may not accommodate the shoulder portion of the inflatable seatbelt.
Use a belt-positioning booster seat for children who have outgrown or no longer properly fit in a child safety seat (generally children who are less than 57 in (1.45 m) tall, are greater than age four (4) and less than age twelve (12), and between 40 lb (18 kg) and 80 lb (36 kg) and upward to 100 lb (45 kg) if recommended by your child restraint manufacturer). Many state and provincial laws require that children use approved booster seats until they reach age eight, a height of 57 in (1.45 m) tall, or 80 lb (36 kg).
Booster seats should be used until you can answer YES to ALL of these questions when seated without a booster seat:
· Can the child sit all the way back against their vehicle seat backrest with knees bent comfortably at the edge of the seat cushion?
· Can the child sit without slouching? · Does the lap belt rest low across the
hips? · Is the shoulder belt centered on the
shoulder and chest? · Can the child stay seated like this for
the whole trip? Always use booster seats in conjunction with your vehicle lap and shoulder belt. Types of Booster Seats
E68924
· Backless booster seats If your backless booster seat has a removable shield, remove the shield. If a vehicle seating position has a low seat backrest or no head restraint, a backless booster seat may place your child's head (as measured at the tops of the ears) above the top of the seat. In this case, move the backless booster to another seating position with a higher seat backrest or head restraint and lap and shoulder belts, or consider using a high back booster seat.
E142595
30
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Child Safety
E70710
· High back booster seats
If, with a backless booster seat, you cannot find a seating position that adequately supports your child's head, a high back booster seat would be a better choice.
Children and booster seats vary in size and shape. Choose a booster that keeps the lap belt low and snug across the hips, never up across the stomach, and lets you adjust the shoulder belt to cross the chest and rest snugly near the center of the shoulder. The following drawings compare the ideal fit (center) to a shoulder belt uncomfortably close to the neck and a shoulder belt that could slip off the shoulder. The drawings also show how the lap belt should be low and snug across the child's hips.
E142596
E142597
31
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Child Safety
If the booster seat slides on the vehicle seat upon which it is being used, placing a rubberized mesh sold as shelf or carpet liner under the booster seat may improve this condition. Do not introduce any item thicker than this under the booster seat. Check with the booster seat manufacturer's instructions.
CHILD RESTRAINT POSITIONING
WARNING: Do not place a rearward facing child restraint in front of an active airbag. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury or death.
WARNING: Properly secure children 12 years old and under in a rear seating position whenever possible. If you are unable to properly secure all children in a rear seating position, properly secure the largest child on the front seat. If you must use a forward facing child restraint on the front seat, move the seat as far back as possible. Failure to follow these instructions could result in personal injury or death.
WARNING: Always carefully follow the instructions and warnings provided by the manufacturer of any child restraint to determine if the restraint device is appropriate for your child's size, height, weight, or age. Follow the child restraint manufacturer's instructions and warnings provided for installation and use in conjunction with
the instructions and warnings provided by your vehicle manufacturer. A safety seat that is improperly installed or utilized, is inappropriate for your child's height, age, or weight or does not properly fit the child may increase the risk of serious injury or death.
WARNING: Do not allow a passenger to hold a child on their lap when your vehicle is moving. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury or death in the event of a sudden stop or crash.
WARNING: Do not use pillows, books or towels to boost your child's height. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury or death.
WARNING: Properly secure child restraints or booster seats when they are not in use. They could become projectiles in a sudden stop or crash. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury or death.
WARNING: Do not put the shoulder section of the seatbelt or allow the child to put the shoulder section of the seatbelt under their arm or behind their back. Failure to follow this instruction could reduce the effectiveness of the seatbelt and increase the risk of injury or death in a crash.
WARNING: Do not leave children or pets unattended in your vehicle. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury or death.
32
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Child Safety
Recommendations for Attaching Child Safety Restraints for Children
Use Any Attachment Method as Indicated Below by X
Restraint Type
Combined Weight of Child and
Child Restraint
LATCH (Lower Anchors and Top Tether Anchor)
LATCH (Lower Anchors Only)
Seatbelt and Top Tether Anchor
Seatbelt and LATCH
(Lower Anchors and Top Tether Anchor)
Seatbelt Only
Rear facing child
restraint
Up to 65 lb (29.5 kg)
X
X
Rear facing child
restraint
Over 65 lb (29.5 kg)
X
Forward
facing Up to 65 lb
child
(29.5 kg)
X
restraint
X
X
Forward facing child
restraint
Over 65 lb (29.5 kg)
X
X
Note: The child restraint must rest tightly against the vehicle seat upon which it is installed. It may be necessary to lift or remove the head restraint. See Seats (page 131).
CHILD SAFETY LOCKS
When these locks are set, the rear doors cannot be opened from the inside.
33
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Child Safety
E112197
The childproof locks are located on the rear edge of each rear door and must be set separately for each door. Left-Hand Side Turn counterclockwise to lock and clockwise to unlock. Right-Hand Side Turn clockwise to lock and counterclockwise to unlock.
34
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Seatbelts
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNING: Always drive and ride with your seatback upright and the lap belt snug and low across the hips.
WARNING: Children must always be properly restrained.
WARNING: Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap while the vehicle is moving. The passenger cannot protect the child from injury in a crash.
WARNING: All occupants of your vehicle, including the driver, should always properly wear their seatbelts, even when an airbag supplemental restraint system is provided. Failure to properly wear your seatbelt could seriously increase the risk of injury or death.
WARNING: It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a crash, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seatbelts. Make sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and properly using a seatbelt. Failure to follow this warning could result in serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seatbelt.
WARNING: Each seating position in your vehicle has a specific seatbelt assembly made up of one buckle and one tongue designed to be used as a pair. Use the shoulder belt on the outside shoulder only. Never wear the shoulder belt under the arm. Never use a single seatbelt for more than one person.
WARNING: Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child restraint. Properly restrain children 12 and under in the rear seat whenever possible.
WARNING: Seatbelts and seats may be hot in a vehicle that is in the sunshine. The hot seatbelts or seats may burn a small child. Check seat covers and buckles before you place a child anywhere near them.
All seating positions in your vehicle have lap and shoulder seatbelts. All occupants of the vehicle should always properly wear their seatbelts, even when an airbag supplemental restraint system is provided.
The seatbelt system consists of: · Lap and shoulder seatbelts. · Shoulder seatbelt with automatic
locking mode, (except driver seatbelt). · Height adjuster at the front outboard
seating positions. · Seatbelt pretensioner at the front
outboard seating positions. · Belt tension sensor at the outboard
passenger seating position.
E71880
· Seatbelt warning light and chime.
35
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Seatbelts
E67017
· Crash sensors and monitoring system with readiness indicator.
The seatbelt pretensioners at the front seating positions are designed to tighten the seatbelts when activated. In frontal and near-frontal crashes, the seatbelt pretensioners may be activated alone or, if the crash is of sufficient severity, together with the front airbags. The pretensioners may also activate when the Safety Canopy deploys.
FASTENING THE SEATBELTS
Standard belts shown, inflatable belts similar
The front outboard and rear safety restraints in the vehicle are combination lap and shoulder belts.
E142588
2. To unfasten, press the release button and remove the tongue from the buckle.
Using Seatbelts During Pregnancy
WARNING: Always ride and drive with your seatback upright and properly fasten your seatbelt. Fit the lap portion of the seatbelt snugly and low across the hips. Position the shoulder portion of the seatbelt across your chest. Pregnant women must follow this practice. See the following figure.
E142587
1. Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle (the buckle closest to the direction the tongue is coming from) until you hear a snap and feel it latch. Make sure you securely fasten the tongue in the buckle.
E142590
36
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Seatbelts
Pregnant women should always wear their seatbelt. Position the lap belt portion of a combination lap and shoulder belt low across the hips below the belly and worn as tight as comfort allows. Position the shoulder belt to cross the middle of the shoulder and the center of the chest.
Seatbelt Locking Modes
WARNING: If your vehicle is involved in a crash, have the seatbelts and associated components inspected as soon as possible. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury or death.
All safety restraints in the vehicle are combination lap and shoulder belts. The driver seatbelt has the vehicle sensitive locking mode. The front outboard passenger and rear seatbelts have both the vehicle sensitive locking mode and the automatic locking mode.
Vehicle Sensitive Mode
This is the normal retractor mode, which allows free shoulder belt length adjustment to your movements and locking in response to vehicle movement. For example, if the driver brakes suddenly or turns a corner sharply, or the vehicle receives an impact of about 5 mph (8 km/h) or more, the combination seatbelts lock to help reduce forward movement of the driver and passengers.
In addition, the retractor is designed to lock if you pull the webbing out too quickly. If the seatbelt retractor locks, slowly lower the height adjuster to allow the seatbelt to retract. If the retractor does not unlock, pull the seatbelt out slowly then feed a
small length of webbing back toward the stowed position. For rear seatbelts, recline the rear seat backrest or push the seat backrest cushion away from the seatbelt. Feed a small length of webbing back toward the stowed position. Automatic Locking Mode In this mode, the shoulder belt automatically pre-locks. The belt retracts to remove any slack in the shoulder belt. The automatic locking mode is not available on the driver seatbelt. When to Use the Automatic Locking Mode Use this mode any time a child safety seat, except a booster, is installed in passenger front or rear seating positions. Properly restrain children 12 years old and under in a rear seating position whenever possible. See Child Safety (page 20). How to Use the Automatic Locking Mode Standard seatbelts
E142591
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
37
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Seatbelts
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until you pull the entire belt out. As the belt retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the seatbelt is now in the automatic locking mode.
Rear outboard inflatable seatbelts (second row onlyif equipped)
E146363
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the lap portion of the belt and pull upward until you pull the entire belt out.
3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the seatbelt is now in the automatic locking mode.
How to Disengage the Automatic Locking Mode Unbuckle the combination lap and shoulder belt and allow it to retract completely to disengage the automatic locking mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode.
Rear Inflatable Seatbelt (If Equipped)
WARNING: Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the supplementary restraint system or associated components. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury or death.
WARNING: If a supplementary restraint system component has deployed, it will not function again. Have the system and associated components inspected as soon as possible. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury or death.
The rear inflatable seatbelts are in the shoulder portion of the seatbelts of the second-row outboard seating positions.
Note: The rear inflatable seatbelts are compatible with most infant and child safety car seats and belt positioning booster seats when properly installed. This is because they are designed to fill with a cooled gas at a lower pressure and at a slower rate than traditional airbags. After inflation, the shoulder portion of the seatbelt remains cool to the touch.
The rear inflatable seatbelt consists of the following:
· An inflatable bag in the shoulder seatbelt webbing.
· Lap seatbelt webbing with automatic locking mode.
· The same warning light, electronic control and diagnostic unit as used for the front seatbelts.
· Impact sensors in various parts of the vehicle.
38
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Seatbelts
How does the rear inflatable seatbelt system work?
The rear inflatable seatbelts function like standard restraints in everyday usage.
The rear inflatable seatbelts are designed to inflate in frontal or near-frontal crashes and in some side impact crashes and rollover crashes. The fact that the rear inflatable seatbelt did not inflate in a crash does not mean that something is wrong with the system. Rather, it means the forces were not of the type sufficient to cause activation.
SEATBELT HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT
E146364
During a crash of sufficient force, the inflatable belt inflates from inside the webbing.
WARNING: Position the seatbelt height adjuster so that the seatbelt rests across the middle of your shoulder. Failure to adjust the seatbelt correctly could reduce its effectiveness and increase the risk of injury in a crash.
E146365
The fully inflated belt's increased diameter more effectively holds the occupant in the appropriate seating position, and spreads crash forces over more area of the body than regular seatbelts. This helps reduce pressure on the chest and helps control head and neck motion for passengers.
E145664
1. Pull the button and slide the height adjuster up or down.
2. Release the button and pull down on the height adjuster to make sure it is locked in place.
39
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Seatbelts
SEATBELT WARNING LAMP AND INDICATOR CHIME
Conditions of operation
This lamp illuminates and an
indicator chime will sound if the
E71880
driver seatbelt has not been
fastened when the vehicle's ignition is
turned on.
If
Then
The driver seatbelt is not buckled before The seatbelt warning lamp illuminates and
the ignition switch is turned to the on posi- the indicator chime sounds for a few
tion...
seconds.
The driver seatbelt is buckled while the The seatbelt warning lamp and indicator
warning lamp is illuminated and the indic-
chime turn off.
ator chime is sounding...
The driver seatbelt is buckled before the The seatbelt warning lamp and indicator
ignition switch is turned to the on position...
chime remain off.
SEATBELT REMINDER
Belt-MinderTM
This feature supplements the seatbelt warning function by providing additional reminders that intermittently sound a chime and illuminate the seatbelt warning lamp when you are in the driver seat or you have a front seat passenger and a seatbelt is unbuckled.
The system uses information from the front passenger sensing system to determine if a front seat passenger is present and therefore potentially in need of a warning. To avoid the system turning on the Belt-Minder feature for objects you place on the front passenger seat, only the front seat passengers receive warnings as determined by the front passenger sensing system.
If the Belt-Minder warnings expire (warnings for about five minutes) for one passenger (driver or front passenger), the other passenger can still cause the Belt-Minder feature to turn on.
40
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Seatbelts
If...
Then...
You and the front seat passenger buckle The Belt-Minder feature will not activate. your seatbelts before you switch the ignition on or less than 12 minutes elapse after you switch the ignition on...
You or the front seat passenger do not
The Belt-Minder feature activates, the
buckle your seatbelts before your vehicle seatbelt warning lamp illuminates and an
reaches at least 6 mph (9.7 km/h) and 12 indicator chime sounds for 6 seconds every
minutes elapse after you switch the ignition 25 seconds, repeating for about 5 minutes
on...
or until you and the front seat passenger
buckle your seatbelts.
The seatbelt for the driver or front
The Belt-Minder feature activates, the
passenger is unbuckled for about 1 minute seatbelt warning lamp illuminates and an
while the vehicle is traveling at least 6 mph indicator chime sounds for 6 seconds every
(9.7 km/h) and more than 12 minutes 25 seconds, repeating for about 5 minutes
elapse after you switch the ignition on... or until you and the front seat passenger
buckle your seatbelts.
Deactivating and Activating the Belt-Minder Feature
WARNING: While the system allows you to switch it off, this system is designed to improve your chances of being safely belted and surviving a crash. We recommend you leave the system switched on. To reduce the risk of injury, do not switch the system on or off while driving your vehicle.
Note: The driver and front passenger warnings switch on and off independently. When you perform this procedure for one seating position, do not buckle the other position as this will terminate the process.
Read Steps 14 thoroughly before proceeding with the programming procedure.
Before following the procedure, make sure that:
· The parking brake is set.
· The transmission is in park (P) or neutral (N).
· The ignition is off.
· The driver and front passenger seatbelts are unbuckled.
1. Switch the ignition on. Do not start the vehicle.
2. Wait until the seatbelt warning lamp turns off (about 1 minute). After Step 2, wait an additional 5 seconds before proceeding with Step 3. Once you start Step 3, you must complete the procedure within 30 seconds.
3. For the seating position you are switching off, buckle then unbuckle the seatbelt three times at a moderate speed, ending in the unbuckled state. After Step 3, the seatbelt warning lamp turns on.
41
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Seatbelts
4. While the seatbelt warning lamp is on, buckle and then unbuckle the seatbelt. After Step 4, the seatbelt warning lamp flashes for confirmation.
· This will switch the feature off for that seating position if it is currently on.
· This will switch the feature on for that seating position if it is currently off.
CHILD RESTRAINT AND SEATBELT MAINTENANCE
Inspect the vehicle seatbelts and child safety seat systems periodically to make sure they work properly and are not damaged. Inspect the vehicle and child restraint seatbelts to make sure there are no nicks, tears or cuts. Replace if necessary. All vehicle seatbelt assemblies, including retractors, buckles, front seatbelt buckle assemblies, buckle support assemblies (slide bar-if equipped), shoulder belt height adjusters (if equipped), shoulder belt guide on seat backrest (if equipped), child safety seat LATCH and tether anchors, and attaching hardware, should be inspected after a crash. Read the child restraint manufacturer's instructions for additional inspection and maintenance information specific to the child restraint.
We recommend that all seatbelt assemblies in use in vehicles involved in a crash be replaced. However, if the crash was minor and an authorized dealer finds that the belts do not show damage and continue to operate properly, they do not need to be replaced. Seatbelt assemblies not in use during a crash should also be inspected and replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted.
Properly care for seatbelts. See Vehicle Care (page 280).
SEATBELT EXTENSION
WARNING: Persons who fit into the vehicle's seatbelt should not use an extension. Unnecessary use could result in serious personal injury in the event of a crash.
WARNING: Only use extensions provided free of charge by our dealers. The dealer will provide an extension designed specifically for this vehicle, model year and seating position. The use of an extension intended for another vehicle, model year or seating position may not offer you the full protection of your vehicle's seatbelt restraint system.
WARNING: Never use seatbelt extensions to install child restraints.
WARNING: Do not use a seatbelt extension with an inflatable seatbelt.
WARNING: Do not use extensions to change the way the seatbelt fits across the torso, over the lap or to make the seatbelt buckle easier to reach.
If, because of body size or driving position, it is not possible to properly fasten the seatbelt over your lap and shoulder, an extension that is compatible with the seatbelts is available free of charge from our dealers. Only use our seatbelt extensions made by the original equipment seatbelt manufacturer with our seatbelts. Ask your authorized dealer if your extension is compatible with your vehicle restraint system.
42
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Personal Safety SystemTM
The Personal Safety System provides an improved overall level of frontal crash protection to front seat occupants and is designed to help further reduce the risk of airbag-related injuries. The system is able to analyze different occupant conditions and crash severity before activating the appropriate safety devices to help better protect a range of occupants in a variety of frontal crash situations.
The Vehicle Personal Safety System consists of:
· Driver and passenger dual-stage airbag supplemental restraints.
· Front seat outermost seatbelts with pretensioners, energy management retractors and seatbelt usage sensors.
· Driver seat position sensor.
· Passenger seat position sensor.
· Front passenger sensing system.
· Passenger airbag off and on indicators.
· Front crash severity sensors.
· Restraints control module with impact and safing sensors.
· Restraint system warning lamp and tone.
· The electrical wiring for the airbags, crash sensors, seatbelt pretensioners, front seatbelt usage sensors, driver seat position sensor, front passenger sensing system and indicators.
How Does the Personal Safety System Work?
The Personal Safety System can adapt the deployment strategy of the safety devices according to crash severity and occupant conditions. A collection of crash and occupant sensors provides information to the restraints control module. During a crash, the restraints control module may deploy the seatbelt pretensioners, one or both stages of the dual-stage airbags based on crash severity and occupant conditions.
43
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNING: Airbags do not inflate slowly or gently, and the risk of injury from a deploying airbag is the greatest close to the trim covering the airbag module.
WARNING: All occupants of your vehicle, including the driver, should always properly wear their seatbelts, even when an airbag supplemental restraint system is provided. Failure to properly wear your seatbelt could seriously increase the risk of injury or death.
WARNING: Even with advanced restraints systems, properly restrain children 12 and under in a rear seating position. Failure to follow this could seriously increase the risk of injury or death.
WARNING: Do not place your arms on the airbag cover or through the steering wheel. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury.
WARNING: Keep the areas in front of the airbags free from obstruction. Do not affix anything to or over the airbag covers. Objects could become projectiles during airbag deployment or in a sudden stop. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury or death.
WARNING: Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child restraint. Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an active airbag. If you must use a forward-facing child restraint in the front seat, move the seat upon which the child restraint is installed all the way back.
WARNING: Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the supplementary restraint system or associated components. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury or death.
WARNING: Several airbag system components get hot after inflation. To reduce the risk of injury, do not touch them after inflation.
WARNING: If a supplementary restraint system component has deployed, it will not function again. Have the system and associated components inspected as soon as possible. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury or death.
The airbags are a supplemental restraint system and are designed to work with the seatbelts to help protect the driver and right front passenger from certain upper body injuries. Airbags do not inflate slowly; there is a risk of injury from a deploying airbag.
Note: You will hear a loud bang and see a cloud of harmless powdery residue if an airbag deploys. This is normal.
The airbags inflate and deflate rapidly upon activation. After airbag deployment, it is normal to notice a smoke-like, powdery residue or smell the burnt propellant. This may consist of cornstarch, talcum powder (to lubricate the bag) or sodium compounds (for example, baking soda) that result from the combustion process that inflates the airbag. Small amounts of sodium hydroxide may be present which may irritate the skin and eyes, but none of the residue is toxic.
44
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
While the system is designed to help reduce serious injuries, contact with a deploying airbag may also cause abrasions or swelling. Temporary hearing loss is also a possibility as a result of the noise associated with a deploying airbag. Because airbags must inflate rapidly and with considerable force, there is the risk of death or serious injuries such as fractures, facial and eye injuries or internal injuries, particularly to occupants who are not properly restrained or are otherwise out of position at the time of airbag deployment. Thus, it is extremely important that occupants be properly restrained as far away from the airbag module as possible while maintaining vehicle control.
Routine maintenance of the airbags is not required.
DRIVER AND PASSENGER AIRBAGS
WARNING: Do not place your arms on the airbag cover or through the steering wheel. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury.
WARNING: Keep the areas in front of the airbags free from obstruction. Do not affix anything to or over the airbag covers. Objects could become projectiles during airbag deployment or in a sudden stop. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury or death.
WARNING: Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child restraint. Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an active airbag. If you must use a forward-facing child restraint in the front seat, move the seat upon which the child restraint is installed all the way back.
E151127
The driver and front passenger airbags will deploy during significant frontal and near frontal crashes.
The driver and passenger front airbag system consists of:
· Driver and passenger airbag modules.
· Front passenger sensing system.
· Crash sensors and monitoring
system with readiness indicator.
E67017
See Crash Sensors and Airbag
Indicator (page 51).
Proper Driver and Front Passenger Seating Adjustment
WARNING: National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) recommends a minimum distance of at least 10 in (25 cm) between an occupant's chest and the driver airbag module.
To properly position yourself away from the airbag:
· Move your seat to the rear as far as you can while still reaching the pedals comfortably.
· Recline the seat slightly (one or two degrees) from the upright position.
45
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
After all occupants have adjusted their seats and put on seatbelts, it is very important that they continue to sit properly. A properly seated occupant sits upright, leaning against the seatback, and centered on the seat cushion, with their feet comfortably extended on the floor. Sitting improperly can increase the chance of injury in a crash event. For example, if an occupant slouches, lies down, turns sideways, sits forward, leans forward or sideways, or puts one or both feet up, the chance of injury during a crash is greatly increased.
Children and Airbags
WARNING: Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child restraint. Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an active airbag. If you must use a forward-facing child restraint in the front seat, move the seat upon which the child restraint is installed all the way back.
E142846
Children must always be properly restrained. Accident statistics suggest that children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seating position. Failure to follow these instructions may increase the risk of injury in a crash.
FRONT PASSENGER SENSING SYSTEM
WARNING: Even with advanced restraints systems, properly restrain children 12 and under in a rear seating position. Failure to follow this could seriously increase the risk of injury or death.
WARNING: Sitting improperly, out of position or with the seatback reclined too far can take weight off the seat cushion and affect the decision of the passenger sensing system, resulting in serious injury or death in the event of a crash. Always sit upright against your seat back, with your feet on the floor.
WARNING: Do not stow objects in the seatback map pocket or hang objects off a seatback if a child is in the front passenger seat. Do not place objects under the front passenger seat or between the seat and the center console. Check the passenger airbag indicator lamp for proper airbag status. Failure to follow these instructions may interfere with the front passenger seat sensing system and increase the risk of serious injury.
WARNING: Any alteration or modification to the front passenger seat may affect the performance of the front passenger sensing system. This could seriously increase the risk of injury or death.
This system works with sensors that are part of the front passenger seat and seatbelt to detect the presence of a properly-seated occupant and determine if the front passenger frontal airbag should be enabled (may inflate) or not.
46
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
E227975
The front passenger sensing system uses a passenger airbag status indicator that illuminates indicating that the front passenger frontal airbag is either ON (enabled) or OFF (disabled).
The indicator lamp is at the top center of the instrument panel.
Note: The passenger airbag status indicator OFF and ON indicator lamps illuminate for a short period of time when you first switch the ignition on to confirm it is functional.
The front passenger sensing system is designed to disable (will not inflate) the front passenger frontal airbag when the front passenger seat is unoccupied, or a rear facing infant seat, a forward-facing child restraint, or a booster seat is detected. Even with this technology, parents are strongly encouraged to always properly restrain children in the rear seat. The sensor also turns off the passenger front airbag when the passenger seat is empty.
· When the front passenger sensing system disables (will not inflate) the front passenger frontal airbag, the passenger airbag status indicator illuminates the OFF lamp and stays lit to remind you that the front passenger frontal airbag is disabled.
· If you install the child restraint and the passenger airbag status indicator illuminates the ON lamp, then switch the vehicle off, remove the child restraint from the vehicle and reinstall the restraint following the child restraint manufacturer's instructions.
The front passenger sensing system is designed to enable (may inflate) the front passenger frontal airbag anytime the system senses that a person of adult size is sitting properly in the front passenger seat.
· When the front passenger sensing system enables the front passenger frontal airbag (may inflate), the passenger airbag status indicator illuminatse the ON lamp and remains illuminated.
If a person of adult size is sitting in the front passenger seat, but the airbag off indicator lamp is lit, it is possible that the person is not sitting properly in the seat. If this happens:
· Switch the vehicle off and ask the person to place the seat backrest in an upright position.
· Have the person sit upright in the seat, centered on the seat cushion, with the person's legs comfortably extended.
· Restart the vehicle and have the person remain in this position for about two minutes. This will allow the system to detect that person and enable the passenger frontal airbag.
· If the indicator OFF lamp remains lit even after this, advise the person to ride in the rear seat.
47
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
Occupant Empty Child Adult
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator OFF: Lit ON: Unlit OFF: Lit ON: Unlit OFF: Unlit ON: Lit
Passenger Airbag Disabled Disabled Enabled
After all occupants have adjusted their seats and put on seatbelts, it is very important that they continue to sit properly. A properly seated occupant sits upright, leaning against the seat backrest, and centered on the seat cushion, with their feet comfortably extended on the floor. Sitting improperly can increase the chance of injury in a crash event. For example, if an occupant slouches, lies down, turns sideways, sits forward, leans forward or sideways, or puts one or both feet up, the chance of injury during a crash is greatly increased.
The conditions listed above may cause the weight of a properly seated occupant to be incorrectly interpreted by the front passenger sensing system. The person in the front passenger seat may appear heavier or lighter due to the conditions described in the list above.
Make sure the front passenger
sensing system is operating
E67017
properly. See Crash Sensors
and Airbag Indicator (page 51).
Do not attempt to repair or service the system. Take your vehicle immediately to an authorized dealer.
If it is necessary to modify an advanced front airbag system to accommodate a person with disabilities, contact the Ford Customer Relationship Center. See Getting the Services You Need (page 238).
SIDE AIRBAGS
WARNING: Do not place objects or mount equipment on or near the airbag cover, on the side of the front or rear seatbacks, or in areas that may come into contact with a deploying airbag. Failure to follow these instructions may increase the risk of personal injury in the event of a crash.
WARNING: Do not use accessory seat covers. The use of accessory seat covers may prevent the deployment of the side airbags and increase the risk of injury in an accident.
WARNING: Do not lean your head on the door. The side airbag could injure you as it deploys from the side of the seatback.
48
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
WARNING: Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the supplementary restraint system or associated components. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury or death.
WARNING: If a supplementary restraint system component has deployed, it will not function again. Have the system and associated components inspected as soon as possible. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury or death.
The side airbags are on the outboard side of the seat backrests of the front seats. In certain sideways crashes, the side airbags will be inflated. The airbag was designed to inflate between the door panel and occupant to further enhance the protection provided occupants in side impact crashes.
E152533
The system consists of the following: · A label or embossed side panel
indicating that side airbags are fitted to your vehicle. · Side airbags inside the driver and front passenger seat backrests. · Front passenger sensing system.
E67017
· Crash sensors and monitoring system with readiness indicator. See Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator (page 51).
The design and development of the side airbag system included recommended testing procedures that were developed by a group of automotive safety experts known as the Side Airbag Technical Working Group. These recommended testing procedures help reduce the risk of injuries related to the deployment of side airbags.
DRIVER AND PASSENGER KNEE AIRBAGS
Driver and passenger knee airbags are located under or within the instrument panel. During a crash, the restraints control module may activate the driver and passenger knee airbags (individually or both) based on crash severity and respective occupant conditions. Under certain crash and occupant conditions, the driver and passenger knee airbags may deploy (individually or both) but the corresponding front airbag may not activate. As with front and side airbags, it is important to be properly seated and restrained to reduce the risk of death or serious injury.
Make sure the knee airbags are
operating properly. See Crash
E67017
Sensors and Airbag Indicator
(page 51).
49
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
SAFETY CANOPYTM
WARNING: Do not place objects or mount equipment on or near the headliner at the siderail that may come into contact with a deploying curtain airbag. Failure to follow these instructions may increase the risk of personal injury in the event of a crash.
WARNING: Do not lean your head on the door. The curtain airbag could injure you as it deploys from the headliner.
WARNING: Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the supplementary restraint system or associated components. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury or death.
WARNING: All occupants of your vehicle, including the driver, should always properly wear their seatbelts, even when an airbag supplemental restraint system is provided. Failure to properly wear your seatbelt could seriously increase the risk of injury or death.
WARNING: To reduce risk of injury, do not obstruct or place objects in the deployment path of the airbag.
WARNING: If a supplementary restraint system component has deployed, it will not function again. Have the system and associated components inspected as soon as possible. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury or death.
The Safety Canopy deploys during significant side crashes or when a certain likelihood of a rollover event is detected by the rollover sensor. The Safety Canopy is mounted to the roof side rail sheet metal, behind the headliner, above each row of seats. In certain sideways crashes or rollover events, the Safety Canopy will be activated, regardless of which seats are occupied. The Safety Canopy is designed to inflate between the side window area and occupants to further enhance protection provided in side impact crashes and rollover events.
E75004
The system consists of the following:
· Safety Canopy curtain airbags above the trim panels over the front and rear side windows identified by a label or wording on the headliner or roof-pillar trim.
· A flexible headliner which opens above the side doors to allow air curtain deployment
· Crash sensors and monitoring
system with a readiness
E67017
indicator. See Crash Sensors
and Airbag Indicator (page 51).
50
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
Properly restrain children 12 years old and under in the rear seats. The Safety Canopy will not interfere with children restrained using a properly installed child or booster seat because it is designed to inflate downward from the headliner above the doors along the side window opening.
The design and development of the Safety Canopy included recommended testing procedures that were developed by a group of automotive safety experts known as the Side Airbag Technical Working Group. These recommended testing procedures help reduce the risk of injuries related to the deployment of side airbags (including the Safety Canopy).
CRASH SENSORS AND AIRBAG INDICATOR
WARNING: Modifying or adding equipment to the front end of the vehicle (including frame, bumper, front end body structure and tow hooks) may affect the performance of the airbag system, increasing the risk of injury. Do not modify the front end of the vehicle.
Your vehicle has a collection of crash and occupant sensors which provide information to the restraints control module. The restraints control module deploys (activates) the front seatbelt system, the adaptive collapsible steering column, driver airbag, passenger airbag, knee airbag(s), seat mounted side airbags, Safety Canopy and optional rear inflatable seatbelts. Based on the type of crash, the restraints control module will deploy the appropriate safety devices.
The restraints control module also monitors the readiness of the above safety devices plus the crash and occupant sensors. The readiness of the safety system is indicated by a warning indicator light in the instrument cluster or a backup tone (if equipped). Routine maintenance of the airbag is not required.
A difficulty with the system is indicated by one or more of the following:
E67017
The readiness light will not illuminate immediately after the ignition is turned on.
· The readiness light will either flash or stay lit.
· A series of five beeps will be heard (If equipped). The tone pattern will repeat periodically until the problem, the light or both are repaired.
If any of these things happen, even intermittently, have the supplemental restraint system serviced at an authorized dealer immediately. Unless serviced, the system may not function properly in the event of a crash.
The seatbelt pretensioners and the front airbag supplemental restraint system are designed to activate when the vehicle sustains frontal deceleration sufficient to cause the restraints control module to deploy a safety device.
51
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
The fact that the seatbelt pretensioners or front airbags did not activate for both front seat occupants in a crash does not mean that something is wrong with the system. Rather, it means the restraints control module determined the accident conditions (crash severity, belt usage) were not appropriate to activate these safety devices. · The design of the front airbags is to
activate only in frontal and near-frontal crashes (not rollovers, side impacts or rear impacts) unless the crash causes sufficient frontal deceleration. · The seatbelt pretensioners and rear inflatable seatbelts are designed to activate in frontal, near-frontal and side crashes and rollovers. · The knee airbag(s) may deploy based on crash severity and occupant conditions. · The design of the side airbags is to inflate in certain side impact crashes. Side airbags may activate in other types of crashes if the vehicle experiences sufficient sideways motion or deformation. · The design of the Safety Canopy is to inflate in certain side impact crashes or rollover events. The Safety Canopy may activate in other types of crashes if the vehicle experiences sufficient sideways motion or deformation, or a certain likelihood of rollover.
AIRBAG DISPOSAL
Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible. Airbags must be disposed of by qualified personnel.
52
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Keys and Remote Controls
GENERAL INFORMATION ON RADIO FREQUENCIES
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with Licence exempt RSS Standards of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
· This device may not cause harmful interference, and
· This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Note: Changes or modifications not expressively approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. The term "IC:" before the radio certification number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met.
The typical operating range for your transmitter is approximately 33 ft (10 m). Vehicles with the remote start feature have a greater range. One of the following could cause a decrease in operating range:
· Weather conditions.
· Nearby radio towers.
· Structures around the vehicle.
· Other vehicles parked next to your vehicle.
The radio frequency used by your remote control can also be used by other short distance radio transmissions, for example amateur radios, medical equipment, wireless headphones, remote controls and alarm systems. If the frequencies are jammed, you will not be able to use your remote control. You can lock and unlock the doors with the key.
Note: Make sure to lock your vehicle before leaving it unattended.
Note: If you are in range, the remote control will operate if you press any button unintentionally.
Intelligent Access (If Equipped)
The system uses a radio frequency signal to communicate with your vehicle and authorize your vehicle to unlock when one of the following conditions are met: · You activate the front exterior door
handle switch. · You press the luggage compartment
button. · You press a button on the transmitter.
If excessive radio frequency interference is present in the area or if the transmitter battery is low, you may need to mechanically unlock your door. You can use the mechanical key blade in your intelligent access key to open the driver door in this situation. See Remote Control (page 53).
REMOTE CONTROL
Intelligent Access Key
Note: You may not be able to shift out of park (P) unless the intelligent access key is inside your vehicle.
53
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Keys and Remote Controls
E218399
Your remote control operates the power locks and the remote start system. The key must be in your vehicle to use the push button start.
Removable Key Blade
The remote control also contains a removable key blade that you can use to unlock your vehicle.
E218400
Push the release button and pull the key blade out.
E151795
Note: Your vehicle keys came with a security label that provides important key cut information. Keep the label in a safe place for future reference. Using the Key Blade The key cylinder is under a cap on the driver door handle. To remove the cap:
54
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Keys and Remote Controls
E151956
1. Insert the key blade into the slot on the bottom of the handle and apply upward pressure.
2. While maintaining upward pressure, move the cap rearward to release it. Gently remove the key while doing so.
To install the cap:
Make sure you have properly installed the cap by trying to move it rearward.
Replacing the Battery
Note: Refer to local regulations when disposing of your remote control batteries.
Note: Do not wipe off any grease on the battery terminals or on the back surface of the circuit board.
Note: Replacing the battery does not erase the programmed key from your vehicle. Your remote control should operate normally.
A message appears in the information display when the remote control battery is low. See Information Messages (page 106).
The remote control uses one coin-type three-volt lithium battery.
E151957
1. Place the cap just forward of the key cylinder.
2. Applying pressure to the cap, move it forward until it is in place. You may hear a snap as it engages.
E218400
1. Push the release button and pull the key blade out.
55
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Keys and Remote Controls
E218401
2. Twist a thin coin under the tab hidden behind the key blade head to remove the battery cover.
E218402
3. Insert a suitable tool, for example a screwdriver, in the position shown and carefully remove the battery.
4. Install a new battery with the + facing upward.
5. Reinstall the battery cover and the key blade.
Car Finder
Press the button twice within three seconds. The horn sounds E138623 and the direction indicators flash. We recommend you use this method to locate your vehicle, rather than using the panic alarm.
Sounding the Panic Alarm
Note: The panic alarm only operates when the ignition is off.
Press the button to sound the panic alarm. Press the button E138624 again or switch the ignition on to turn it off.
56
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Keys and Remote Controls
Remote Start (If Equipped)
WARNING: To avoid exhaust fumes, do not use remote start if your vehicle is parked indoors or in areas that are not well ventilated.
Note: Do not use remote start if your fuel level is low.
E138625
The remote start button is on the remote control.
This feature allows you to start your vehicle from the outside. Your remote control has an extended operating range.
If your vehicle has automatic climate control, you can configure it to operate when you remote start your vehicle. See Climate Control (page 121). A manual climate control system will run at the setting it was set to when you switched your vehicle off.
Many states and provinces have restrictions for the use of remote start. Check your local and state or provincial laws for specific requirements regarding remote start systems.
The remote start system does not work when any of the following conditions occur:
· The ignition is on.
· The anti-theft alarm triggers.
· You switch the feature off in the information display.
· The hood is open.
· The transmission is not in park (P).
· The battery voltage is below the minimum operating voltage.
Remote Control Feedback (If Equipped)
An LED on the remote control provides status feedback of remote start or stop commands.
LED Solid green
Solid red Blinking red Blinking green
Status
Remote start successful
Remote stop successful
Request failed or status not received
Status incomplete
Remote Starting your Vehicle
Note: You must press each button within three seconds of each other. Your vehicle will not remote start if you do not follow this sequence.
E138626
To remote start your vehicle:
1. Press the lock button to lock all the doors.
2. Press the remote start button twice. The exterior lamps flash twice.
The horn sounds if the system fails to start.
Note: You must press the push button ignition switch on the instrument panel once while applying the brake pedal before driving your vehicle.
57
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Keys and Remote Controls
The power windows do not work during remote start and the radio does not turn on automatically.
The parking lamps remain on and your vehicle will run for 5, 10 or 15 minutes, depending on the setting.
Extending the Engine Running Time
To extend the engine running time duration of your vehicle during remote start, repeat steps 1 and 2 while the engine is running. If the duration is set to 15 minutes, the duration extends by another 15 minutes. For example, if your vehicle had been running from the first remote start for 10 minutes, your vehicle continues to run now for a total of 30 minutes. You can extend the engine running time duration to a maximum of 30 minutes.
Wait at least five seconds before remote starting after the engine stops running.
Turning Your Vehicle Off After Remote Starting
E138625
Press the button once. Your vehicle and the parking lamps turn off.
You may have to be closer to your vehicle than when starting due to ground reflection and the added noise of your running vehicle.
You can switch this feature on or off in the information display.
Memory Feature
You can program your remote control to recall memory positions. See Memory Function (page 135).
REPLACING A LOST KEY OR REMOTE CONTROL
Replacement keys or remote controls can be purchased from an authorized dealer. Authorized dealers can program remote controls for your vehicle. See Passive Anti-Theft System (page 71).
58
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
MyKeyTM
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
MyKey allows you to program keys with restricted driving modes to promote good driving habits. You can program the restrictions to all keys except one. Any keys that you did not program are administrator keys or admin keys.
You can use admin keys to:
· Create a MyKey with certain vehicle restrictions.
· Program certain MyKey settings.
· Clear all MyKey restrictions.
After you program a MyKey, you can view the following information through the information display:
· The total number of admin keys and MyKeys for your vehicle.
· The total distance a MyKey driver traveled with your vehicle.
Note: Every MyKey receives the same restrictions and settings. You cannot program them individually.
Note: For vehicles equipped with a push-button start switch: When both a MyKey and an admin key are present when you start your vehicle, the system recognizes the admin key only.
Standard Settings
Not every vehicle includes the features listed below. If your vehicle has this equipment, then you cannot change the following settings when using a MyKey:
· Seatbelt reminder or Belt-MinderTM. MyKey mutes the audio system until drivers, and in some instances, passengers, fasten their seatbelts. Note: If your vehicle includes an AM/FM radio or a very basic audio system, then the radio may not mute.
· Earlier low-fuel warning. The low-fuel warning activates earlier for MyKey drivers, giving them more time to refuel.
· Certain driver alerts, stability systems or parking aids turn on automatically when you use the MyKey system. For example, Blind Spot Information System (BLIS), cross traffic alert, lane departure warning or forward collision warning. Note: MyKey drivers may be able to turn the lane departure warning feature off, but this feature turns back on automatically with every new key cycle.
· Restricted touchscreen operation in some markets. For example, MyKey may prevent manual navigation destination input while the vehicle is in any gear other than park (P) or when the vehicle reaches a certain rate of speed.
· Satellite radio adult content restrictions, if this feature is available in your market.
Optional Settings
You can configure certain vehicle feature settings when you first create a MyKey. You can also change the settings afterward with an admin key.
59
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
MyKeyTM
Note: Not every feature applies to every vehicle in every market. When they are available for your vehicle, then they appear in your information display, providing choices to switch them on or off, or to select a more specific setting.
· Various vehicle speed limits so the MyKey driver cannot exceed certain speeds. The information display shows warnings followed by an audible tone when the MyKey driver reaches the set speed. You cannot override the set speed by fully depressing the accelerator pedal.
WARNING: Do not set MyKey maximum speed limit to a limit that will prevent the driver from maintaining a safe speed considering posted speed limits and prevailing road conditions. The driver is always responsible to drive in accordance with local laws and prevailing conditions. Failure to do so could result in accident or injury.
· Various vehicle speed reminders so MyKey drivers know when their vehicle speed approaches the limits. Warnings appear in your information display and a tone sounds when the MyKey drivers exceed the set vehicle speed.
· The audio system's maximum volume limits to 45% so MyKey drivers can concentrate on the road. A message appears in the information display when MyKey drivers attempt to exceed the limited volume. MyKey also disables the automatic volume control. Note: If your vehicle includes an AM/FM radio or a very basic audio system, then the radio may not limit.
· Always on setting. This setting forces certain features to remain on and active for MyKey drivers. For example, E911 or emergency assistance and the do not disturb features stay on even if a MyKey driver uses the feature's control to switch it off. When selected, you will not be able to turn off Advance Trac or traction control (if your vehicle has this feature).
CREATING A MYKEY
Use the information display to create a MyKey.
1. Switch the ignition on using the key or the transmitter you want to program. If your vehicle has a push-button start, place the transmitter into the backup slot. See Passive Anti-Theft System (page 71).
2. Access the main menu in the information display and then scroll through the menus to begin programming your MyKey. See Information Displays (page 97).
3. Follow the instructions in the display.
60
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
MyKeyTM
4. A confirmation message appears in the display after you finish programming your MyKey. The programmed restrictions apply when you key off, open and close driver door and restart your vehicle with the programmed key or transmitter.
Note: Make sure you label the programmed MyKey so you can distinguish it from the admin keys.
You can also program the optional MyKey settings.
Programming or Changing Configurable Settings
Use the information display to program or change your optional MyKey settings.
1. Switch the ignition on using the key or the transmitter you want to program.
2. Access the main menu in the information display and then scroll through the menus to change the settings of your MyKey. See Information Displays (page 97).
3. Follow the instructions in the display.
4. A confirmation message appears in the display after you finish programming your MyKey. The programmed restrictions apply when you key off, open and close the driver door and restart your vehicle with the programmed key or transmitter.
Note: You can clear or change your MyKey settings at any time during the same key cycle as you created the MyKey. If you switch the engine off, you must use an admin key to change or clear your optional MyKey settings.
CLEARING ALL MYKEYS
When you clear your MyKeys, you remove all restrictions and return all MyKeys to their original admin key status at once. To clear all MyKeys of all MyKey settings, use the information display.
1. Switch the ignition on using an admin key.
2. Access the main menu in the information display and then scroll through the menus to begin clearing your MyKey programming. See Information Displays (page 97).
3. Follow the instructions in the display.
4. A confirmation message appears in the display after you finish clearing your MyKeys.
Note: When you clear your MyKeys, you remove all restrictions and return all MyKeys to their original admin key status. You cannot remove the MyKey restrictions individually.
CHECKING MYKEY SYSTEM STATUS
You can find information about your programmed MyKeys by using the information display. See Information Displays (page 97).
MyKey Distance
Tracks the distance when drivers use a MyKey. The only way to delete the accumulated distance is by using an admin key to clear all MyKeys. If the distance does not accumulate as expected, then the intended user is not using the MyKey, or an admin key user recently cleared and then recreated a MyKey.
61
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
MyKeyTM
Number of MyKeys
Indicates the number of MyKeys programmed to your vehicle. Use this feature to detect how many MyKeys you have for your vehicle and determine when all MyKeys have been deleted.
Number of Admin Keys
Indicates how many admin keys are programmed to your vehicle. Use this feature to determine how many admin keys you have for your vehicle, and detect if an additional MyKey has been programmed.
USING MYKEY WITH REMOTE START SYSTEMS
MyKey is not compatible with non Ford-approved, aftermarket remote start systems. If you choose to install a remote start system, see an authorized dealer for a Ford-approved remote start system.
MYKEY TROUBLESHOOTING
Condition
Potential causes
I cannot create a MyKey.
· The key or transmitter used to start the vehicle does not have admin privileges. · Vehicles with keyless start: Make sure you place the transmitter into the backup slot. See Passive Anti-Theft System (page 71). · The key or transmitter used to start the vehicle is the only admin key. There always has to be at least one admin key. · SecuriLock passive anti-theft system is disabled or in unlimited mode.
I cannot program the configurable settings. · The key or transmitter used to start the vehicle does not have admin privileges. · There are no MyKeys programmed to the vehicle. See Creating a MyKey (page 60).
I cannot clear the MyKeys.
· The key or transmitter used to start the vehicle does not have admin privileges. · No MyKeys are created. See Creating a MyKey (page 60).
62
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
MyKeyTM
Condition I lost the only admin key. I lost a key.
MyKey distances do not accumulate.
Potential causes
· Purchase a new key or transmitter from your authorized dealer.
· Program a spare key or transmitter. You may need to see your authorized dealer. See Passive Anti-Theft System (page 71).
· The MyKey user is not using the MyKey. · An admin key holder cleared the MyKeys and created new MyKeys. · The key system has been reset.
63
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Doors and Locks
LOCKING AND UNLOCKING
You can use the power door lock control or the remote control to lock and unlock your vehicle. Power Door Locks The power door lock control is on the driver and front passenger door panels.
E138628
A Unlock. B Lock.
Door Lock Indicator An LED on the door window trim illuminates when you lock the door. It remains illuminated for up to five minutes after you switch the ignition off. Door Lock Switch Inhibitor When you electronically lock your vehicle, the power door lock switch no longer operates after 20 seconds. You must unlock your vehicle with the remote control or keyless keypad, or switch the ignition on, to restore function to these switches. You can switch this feature off in the information display. See General Information (page 97). Note: Switch the ignition on and off after changing the setting in the information display.
Rear Door Unlocking and Opening
Pull the interior door handle twice to unlock and open a rear door. The first pull unlocks the door and the second pull opens the door.
Remote Control
You can use the remote control at any time. The luggage compartment release button only works when your vehicle speed is less than 3 mph (5 km/h).
Unlocking the Doors (Two-Stage Unlock)
Press the button to unlock the driver door. Press the button E138629 again within three seconds to unlock all doors. The direction indicators flash.
Press and hold both the lock and unlock buttons on the remote control for three seconds to change between driver door or all doors unlock mode. The direction indicators flash twice to indicate a change to the unlocking mode. Driver door mode only unlocks the driver door when you press the unlock button once. All door mode unlocks all doors when you press the unlock button once. The unlocking mode applies to the remote control, keyless entry keypad and intelligent access. You can also change between the unlocking modes using the information display. See General Information (page 97).
Locking the Doors
E138623
Press the button to lock all doors. The direction indicators will flash.
64
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Doors and Locks
Press the button again within three seconds to confirm that all the doors are closed. The doors will lock again, the horn will sound and the direction indicators will flash if all the doors and the luggage compartment are closed.
E112203
If the central locking function does not operate, lock the doors individually using the key in the position shown. On the left-hand side, turn the key clockwise to lock. On the right-hand side, turn the key counterclockwise to lock.
Mislock
If any door or the luggage compartment is open, or if the hood is open on vehicles with an anti-theft alarm or remote start, the horn sounds twice and the lamps do not flash. You can enable or disable this feature in the information display. See General Information (page 97).
Opening the Luggage Compartment
E138630
Press twice within three seconds to open the luggage compartment.
Activating Intelligent Access (If
Equipped)
General Information
You can unlock and lock the vehicle without taking the keys out of your pocket or purse when your intelligent access key is within 3 ft (1 m) of your vehicle. Intelligent access uses a sensor on the back of the door handle for unlocking and a separate sensor on the face of each door handle for locking. The system will not function if: · Your vehicle battery has no charge. · The key battery has no charge. · The passive key frequencies are
jammed. Note: The system may not function if the passive key is close to metal objects or electronic devices, for example keys or a cell phone. Note: If the system does not function, use the key blade to lock and unlock your vehicle. See Remote Control (page 53).
Unlocking Using Intelligent Access
E248553
With your intelligent access key within 3 ft (1 m) of your vehicle, touch the unlock sensor on the back of the door handle for a brief period and then pull on the door handle to unlock, being careful to not touch the lock sensor at the same time or pulling the door handle too quickly. The intelligent access system requires a brief delay to authenticate your intelligent access key fob.
65
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Doors and Locks
Locking Using Intelligent Access
E248554
With your intelligent access key within 3 ft (1 m) of your vehicle, touch the outer door handle lock sensor for approximately one second to lock, being careful to not touch the unlock sensor on the back of the door handle at the same time. After locking, you can immediately pull on the door handle to confirm locking occurred without inadvertently unlocking. Opening the Luggage Compartment
E207425
Press the exterior release button hidden above the license plate.
Smart Unlocks for Intelligent Access Keys
This feature helps to prevent you from locking your intelligent access key inside your vehicle's passenger compartment or rear cargo area.
When you electronically lock your vehicle with any door open, the transmission is in park (P) and the ignition is off, the system searches for an intelligent access key inside your vehicle after you close the last door. If the system finds a key, all of the doors will immediately unlock and the horn will sound twice, indicating that a key is inside.
You can override the smart unlock feature and intentionally lock the intelligent access key inside your vehicle.
To do this, lock your vehicle after you have closed all the doors by:
· Using the keyless entry keypad.
· Pressing the lock button on another intelligent access key.
· Touching the locking area on the front of the door handle with another intelligent access key in your hand.
When you open one of the front doors and lock your vehicle using the power door lock control, all doors will lock then unlock if:
· The ignition is on.
· The ignition is off and the transmission is not in park (P).
Autolock (If Equipped)
Autolock locks all the doors when all of the following occur:
· All doors are closed.
· The ignition is on.
· You shift into any gear putting your vehicle in motion.
· Your vehicle reaches a speed greater than 12 mph (20 km/h).
66
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Doors and Locks
Autolock repeats when:
· You open then close any door when the ignition is on and your vehicle speed is 9 mph (15 km/h) or lower.
· Your vehicle reaches a speed greater than 12 mph (20 km/h).
Autounlock
Autounlock unlocks all the doors when all of the following occur:
· The ignition is on, all the doors are closed, and your vehicle has been moving at a speed greater than 12 mph (20 km/h).
· Your vehicle comes to a stop and you switch the ignition off or to the accessory position.
· You open the driver door within 10 minutes of switching the ignition off or to accessory.
Note: If you electronically lock your vehicle after you switch the ignition off with the driver door closed, the doors will not autounlock.
Enabling or Disabling Autounlock
Note: You can switch autounlock and autolock on or off independently of each other.
Autolock is not configurable in all markets. If the autolock settings are not available in your information display, then the system is not configurable. See General Information (page 97).
Illuminated Entry
The interior lamps and some exterior lamps illuminate when you unlock the doors with the remote control.
The illuminated entry system turns off the lights if: · The ignition is on. · You press the remote control lock
button. · After 25 seconds of illumination.
The lights will not turn off if: · You turn them on with the lamp
control. · Any door is open.
Illuminated Exit
The interior lamps and some exterior lamps illuminate when all doors are closed and you switch the ignition off.
The lamps turn off if all the doors remain closed and: · 25 seconds have elapsed. · You press the push button ignition
switch.
Battery Saver
If you leave the courtesy lamps, interior lamps or headlamps on, the battery saver shuts them off 10 minutes after you switch the ignition off.
Battery Saver for Intelligent Access Keys
If you leave the ignition switched on, it shuts off when it detects a certain amount of battery drain, or after 45 minutes.
KEYLESS ENTRY (IF EQUIPPED)
SECURICODETM Keyless Entry Keypad
The keypad is near the driver window. It illuminates when touched.
67
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Doors and Locks
Note: If you enter your entry code too fast on the keypad, the unlock function may not work. Enter your entry code again more slowly.
E138637
You can use the keypad to do the following: · Lock or unlock the doors. · Release the luggage compartment. · Program and erase user codes. · Arm and disarm the anti-theft alarm. You can operate the keypad with the factory-set five-digit entry code. The code is on the owner's wallet card in the glove box and is available from an authorized dealer. You can also program up to five of your own five-digit personal entry codes. Programming a Personal Entry Code 1. Enter the factory-set five-digit code. 2. Press 1·2 on the keypad within five
seconds. 3. Enter your personal five-digit code.
You must press each number within five seconds of each other. 4. Press 1·2 on the keypad to save personal code 1.
The doors lock then unlock to confirm that programming was successful.
To program additional personal entry codes, repeat steps 1 through 3, then for step 4: · Press 3·4 to save personal code 2. · Press 5·6 to save personal code 3. · Press 7·8 to save personal code 4. · Press 9·0 to save personal code 5.
You can also program a personal entry code using the touchscreen.
Hints: · Do not set a code that uses five of the
same number. · Do not use five numbers in sequential
order. · The factory-set code works even if you
have set your own personal code.
Erasing a Personal Code
1. Enter the factory-set five-digit code.
2. Press and release 1·2 on the keypad within five seconds.
3. Press 1·2 and hold for two seconds. You must do this within five seconds of completing step 2.
All personal codes erase and only the factory-set five-digit code works.
Anti-Scan Feature
The keypad goes into an anti-scan mode if you enter the wrong code seven times. This mode turns off the keypad for one minute and the keypad lamp flashes.
Anti-scan turns off after any of the following occur: · One minute of keypad inactivity. · You press the unlock button on the
remote control.
68
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Doors and Locks
· You switch the ignition on. · You unlock the vehicle using intelligent
access.
Locking and Unlocking the Doors
Locking All Doors
Press and hold 7·8 and 9·0 on the keypad simultaneously with the driver door closed. You do not need to enter a code first.
Unlocking Only the Driver Door
Enter the factory-set or your personal five-digit code. You must press each number within five seconds of each other. The interior lamps illuminate.
Note: All doors unlock if you switch on the all door unlocking mode. See Locking and Unlocking (page 64).
Unlocking All Doors
Enter the factory-set code or your personal code, then press 3·4 on the keypad within five seconds.
Opening the Luggage Compartment
Enter the factory-set code or your personal code, then press 5·6 on the keypad within five seconds.
Displaying the Factory-Set Code
Note: You need to have two programmed keys for this procedure.
1. Remove the key blade from the transmitter.
E155835
2. Remove the rubber covering (A) from the cup holder. With the buttons facing upward and the unlock button facing the front of your vehicle, place the first intelligent access key into the backup slot (B).
3. Press the push button ignition switch once and wait a few seconds.
4. Press the push button ignition switch again and remove the key.
5. Insert the second programmed key into the backup slot, and then press the push button ignition switch.
The factory-set code appears in the information display for a few seconds.
Note: The code may not display until after any other warning messages first display.
INTERIOR LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT RELEASE
WARNING: Keep vehicle doors and luggage compartment locked and keep keys and remote transmitters out of a child's reach. Unsupervised children could lock themselves in the trunk and risk injury. Children should be taught not to play in vehicles.
69
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Doors and Locks
WARNING: Do not leave children or animals unattended in the vehicle. On hot days, the temperature in the trunk or vehicle interior can rise very quickly. Exposure of people or animals to these high temperatures for even a short time can cause death or serious heat-related injuries, including brain damage. Small children are particularly at risk.
Your vehicle is equipped with a release handle that provides a means of escape for children and adults if they become locked inside the luggage compartment.
Adults should familiarize themselves with the operation and location of the release handle.
The handle is located inside the luggage compartment either on the luggage compartment door (lid) or near the tail lamps. It is composed of a material that will glow for hours in darkness following brief exposure to ambient light.
Pull the handle and push up on the luggage compartment door (lid) to open from within the luggage compartment.
E144403
70
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Security
PASSIVE ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM
Note: The system is not compatible with non-Ford aftermarket remote start systems. Use of these systems may result in engine starting problems and a loss of security protection.
Note: Metallic objects, electronic devices or a second coded key on the same key chain may result in vehicle starting problems, especially if they are too close to the key when starting your vehicle. Prevent these objects from touching the coded key when starting your vehicle. Switch the ignition off, move all objects on the key chain away from the coded key and restart your vehicle if a problem occurs.
Note: Do not leave a duplicate coded key in your vehicle. Always take your keys and lock all doors when leaving your vehicle.
SecuriLock®
The system helps prevent the engine from starting unless you use a coded key programmed to your vehicle. Using the wrong key may prevent your vehicle from starting. A message may appear in the information display.
If you are unable to start your vehicle with a coded key, it is not operating correctly. A message may appear in the information display.
Automatic Arming
The system arms when you switch the ignition off.
Automatic Disarming
The system disarms when you switch the ignition on with a coded key.
Replacement Keys
Note: Your vehicle comes with two keys.
The intelligent access key functions as a programmed key that operates the driver door lock and turns on the intelligent access with push button start system, as well as a remote control.
If your programmed transmitters are lost or stolen and you do not have an extra coded key, you will need to have your vehicle towed to an authorized dealer. You need to erase the key codes from your vehicle and program new coded keys.
Store a spare intelligent access key away from your vehicle in a safe place. You can purchase replacement keys or remote controls from an authorized dealer.
Programming a Spare Intelligent Access Key
Note: You can program a maximum of four keys to your vehicle.
You must have two previously programmed intelligent access keys inside your vehicle and the new unprogrammed intelligent access key readily accessible. You can purchase replacement keys or remote controls from an authorized dealer.
Make sure that the ignition is switched off before beginning this procedure. Make sure that you close all the doors before beginning and that they remain closed throughout the procedure. Carry out all steps within 30 seconds of starting the sequence. Stop and wait for at least one minute before starting again if you carry out any steps out of sequence.
Read and understand the entire procedure before you begin.
1. Remove the key blade from the transmitter.
71
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Security
E155835
2. Remove the rubber covering (A) from the cup holder. With the buttons facing upward and the unlock button facing the front of your vehicle, place the first intelligent access key into the backup slot (B).
3. Press the push button ignition switch.
4. Wait five seconds and then press the push button ignition switch again.
5. Remove the intelligent access key.
6. Within 10 seconds, place a second programmed intelligent access key in the backup slot and press the push button ignition switch.
7. Wait five seconds and then press the push button ignition switch again.
8. Remove the intelligent access key.
9. Wait five seconds, then place the unprogrammed intelligent access key in the backup slot and press the push button ignition switch.
Programming is now complete. Check that the remote control functions operate and your vehicle starts with the new intelligent access key.
If programming was unsuccessful, wait 10 seconds and repeat steps 1 through 7. If it still does not work, take your vehicle to an authorized dealer.
ANTI-THEFT ALARM
The system will warn you of an unauthorized entry to your vehicle. It will be triggered if any door, the luggage compartment or the hood is opened without using the key, remote control or keyless entry keypad.
The direction indicators will flash and the horn will sound if unauthorized entry is attempted while the alarm is armed.
Take all remote controls to an authorized dealer if there is any potential alarm problem with your vehicle.
Arming the Alarm
The alarm is ready to arm when there is not a key in your vehicle. Electronically lock your vehicle to arm the alarm.
Disarming the Alarm
Disarm the alarm by any of the following actions:
· Unlock the doors or luggage compartment with the remote control or keyless entry keypad.
· Switch your vehicle on or start your vehicle.
· Use a key in the driver door to unlock your vehicle, then switch your vehicle on within 12 seconds.
Note: Pressing the panic button on the remote control will stop the horn and signal indicators, but will not disarm the system.
72
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Steering Wheel
ADJUSTING THE STEERING WHEEL
WARNING: Do not adjust the steering wheel when your vehicle is moving. Note: Make sure that you are sitting in the correct position. See Sitting in the Correct Position (page 131).
E259855
3. Lock the steering column.
AUDIO CONTROL
E259854
1. Unlock the steering column. 2. Adjust the steering wheel to the desired
position.
E196496
A B C D E
Volume up. Volume down. Mute. Seek down or previous. Seek up or next.
73
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Steering Wheel
Seek, Next or Previous
Press the seek button to: · Tune the radio to the next or previous
stored preset. · Play the next or the previous track. Press and hold the seek button to: · Tune the radio to the next station up
or down the frequency band. · Seek through a track.
VOICE CONTROL
CRUISE CONTROL Type One
E191246
Type Two
E168194
Press the button to select or deselect voice control. See your SYNC information.
E222797
See Cruise Control (page 197).
74
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Steering Wheel
INFORMATION DISPLAY CONTROL
E144636
See Information Displays (page 97).
HEATED STEERING WHEEL (IF
EQUIPPED)
Switch the heated steering wheel on and off using the touchscreen.
Touch the button to switch the heated steering wheel on and off. Note: You can use the heated steering wheel only when the engine is running. Note: The system uses a sensor and is designed to control the temperature of the steering wheel and to prevent it from overheating. Note: In warm temperatures, the steering wheel quickly reaches its maximum temperature and the system reduces the current to the heating element. This could cause you to think that the system has stopped working but it has not. This is normal.
75
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Wipers and Washers
WINDSHIELD WIPERS
E270969
Push the lever up or down to operate the windshield wiper.
Intermittent Wipe
E197525
A Single wipe.
B Intermittent wipe.
C Normal wipe.
D High speed wipe.
Note: Fully defrost the windshield before you switch the windshield wipers on.
Note: Make sure that you switch the windshield wipers off before entering a car wash.
Note: If streaks or smears appear on the windshield, clean the windshield and the wiper blades. If that does not resolve the issue, install new wiper blades.
Note: Do not operate the wipers on a dry windshield. This may scratch the glass, damage the wiper blades or cause the wiper motor to burn out. Always use the windshield washers before wiping a dry windshield.
E197526
A Shortest wipe interval. B Intermittent wipe. C Longest wipe interval.
Use the rotary control to adjust the intermittent wipe interval.
Speed Dependent Wipers
When your vehicle speed increases, the interval between wipes decreases.
AUTOWIPERS (IF EQUIPPED)
Note: Fully defrost the windshield before you switch the windshield wipers on. Note: Make sure that you switch the windshield wipers off before entering a car wash. Note: If streaks or smears appear on the windshield, clean the windshield and the wiper blades. If that does not resolve the issue, install new wiper blades. Note: If you switch autolamps and autowipers on, the headlamps turn on when the windshield wipers continuously operate.
76
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Wipers and Washers
Wet or winter driving conditions with ice, snow or salty road mist can cause inconsistent and unexpected wiping or smearing.
Autowipers Settings
Autowipers defaults to on and remains on until you switch it off in the information display. When you switch off autowipers, the wipers operate in intermittent mode.
WINDSHIELD WASHERS
E197526
A High sensitivity.
B Autowipers on.
C Low sensitivity.
Move the wiper lever upward to the first position to switch the autowipers on.
Use the rotary control to adjust the sensitivity of the autowipers. When you select low sensitivity, the wipers operate when the sensor detects a large amount of water on the windshield. When you select high sensitivity, the wipers operate when the sensor detects a small amount of water on the windshield.
Keep the outside of the windshield clean. The rain sensor is very sensitive and the wipers may operate if dirt, mist or insects hit the windshield.
In these conditions, you can do the following:
· Lower the sensitivity of the autowipers to reduce the amount of smearing on the windshield.
· Switch to normal or high-speed wipe.
· Switch autowipers off.
E197528 E270967
Pull the lever toward you to operate the windshield washers.
When you release the lever, the wipers operate for a short time. When activated, a courtesy wipe occurs a short time after the wipers stop to clear any remaining washer fluid.
Note: You can switch courtesy wipe on or off in the information display See Information Messages (page 106).
Note: Do not operate the washers when the washer reservoir is empty. This could cause the washer pump to overheat.
Front Camera Washer (If Equipped)
Operating the windshield washer also turns on the front camera washer.
77
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Lighting
GENERAL INFORMATION
Condensation in the Exterior Front Lamps and Rear Lamps
Exterior front lamps and rear lamps have vents to accommodate normal changes in air pressure.
Condensation can be a natural by-product of this design. When moist air enters the lamp assembly through the vents, there is a possibility that condensation can occur when the temperature is cold. When normal condensation occurs, a fine mist can form on the interior of the lens. The fine mist eventually clears and exits through the vents during normal operation.
Clearing time may take as long as 48 hours under dry weather conditions.
Examples of acceptable condensation are:
· The presence of a fine mist (no streaks, drip marks or large droplets).
· A fine mist covers less than 50% of the lens.
Examples of unacceptable condensation are:
· A water puddle inside the lamp.
· Streaks, drip marks or large droplets present on the interior of the lens.
If you see any unacceptable condensation, have your vehicle checked by an authorized dealer.
LIGHTING CONTROL
E142449
A Lamps off. B Parking lamps, instrument panel
lamps, license plate lamps and tail lamps. C Headlamps. Headlamp High Beam
E162679
Push the lever away from you to switch the high beam on.
Push the lever forward again or pull the lever toward you to switch the high beams off.
78
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Lighting
Flashing the Headlamp High Beam
E162680
Slightly pull the lever toward you and release it to flash the headlamps.
AUTOLAMPS
WARNING: The system does not relieve you of your responsibility to drive with due care and attention. You may need to override the system if it does not turn the headlamps on in low visibility conditions, for example daytime fog.
The headlamps remain on for a period of time after you switch the ignition off. Use the information display controls to adjust the period of time that the headlamps remain on.
Note: If you switch the autolamps on, you cannot switch the high beams on until the system turns the low beams on.
Windshield Wiper Activated Headlamps
When you switch the autolamps on, the headlamps turn on within 10 seconds of switching the wipers on. They turn off approximately 60 seconds after you switch the windshield wipers off.
The headlamps do not turn on with the wipers: · During a single wipe. · When using the windshield washers. · If the wipers are in intermittent mode.
Note: If you switch the autolamps and the autowipers on, the headlamps turn on when the windshield wipers continuously operate.
INSTRUMENT LIGHTING DIMMER
Note: When disconnecting the battery or when it runs out of charge, the illuminated components turn to the maximum setting.
E142451
When the lighting control is in the autolamps position, the headlamps turn on in low light situations, or when the wipers turn on.
79
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Lighting
Vehicles With Front Fog Lamps
HEADLAMP EXIT DELAY
After you switch the ignition off, you can switch the headlamps on by pulling the direction indicator lever toward you. You will hear a short tone. The headlamps will switch off automatically after three minutes with any door open or 30 seconds after the last door has been closed. You can cancel this feature by pulling the direction indicator toward you again or switching the ignition on.
DAYTIME RUNNING LAMPS
E231828
Press repeatedly or press and hold until you reach the desired level.
Vehicles Without Front Fog Lamps
A
B
E165366
A Press repeatedly or press and hold to dim.
B Press repeatedly or press and hold to brighten.
WARNING: The daytime running lamps system does not activate the rear lamps and may not provide adequate lighting during low visibility driving conditions. Make sure you switch the headlamps on, as appropriate, during all low visibility conditions. Failure to do so may result in a crash.
Type One - Conventional (NonConfigurable)
The daytime running lamps turn on when:
1. Switching the ignition on.
2. The transmission is not in park (P) for vehicles with automatic transmissions, or releasing the parking brake for vehicles with manual transmissions.
3. The lighting control is in the off, parking lamp or autolamps positions.
4. The headlamps are off.
Type Two - Configurable
Switch the daytime running lamps on or off using the information display. See Information Displays (page 97).
80
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Lighting
The daytime running lamps turn on when: 1. The lamps are on in the information
display. 2. Switching the ignition on. 3. The transmission is not in park (P) for
vehicles with automatic transmissions, or releasing the parking brake for vehicles with manual transmissions. 4. The lighting control is in the autolamps position. 5. The headlamps are off.
The other lighting control switch positions do not turn on the daytime running lamps.
If the daytime running lamps are off in the information display, the lamps stay off in all switch positions.
AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM CONTROL (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: The system does not relieve you of your responsibility to drive with due care and attention. You may need to override the system if it does not turn the high beams on or off.
The system turns on high beams if it is dark enough and no other traffic is present. If it detects an approaching vehicle's headlamps or tail lamps, or street lighting ahead, the system turns off high beams before they can distract other road users. Low beams remain on.
Note: The system may not operate properly if the sensor is blocked. Keep the windshield free from obstruction or damage.
Note: The system may not operate properly in cold or inclement conditions. You can switch on the high beams by overriding the system.
Note: If the system detects a blockage, for example bird droppings, bug splatter, snow or ice, the system goes into low beam mode until you clear the blockage. A message may appear in the information display if the camera is blocked.
Note: Using much larger tires or equipping vehicle accessories such as snowplows can modify your vehicle's ride height and degrade automatic high beam control performance.
A camera sensor, centrally mounted behind the windshield of your vehicle, continuously monitors conditions to turn the high beams on and off.
Once the system is active, the high beams turn on if:
· The ambient light level is low enough.
· There is no traffic in front of your vehicle.
· The vehicle speed is greater than approximately 32 mph (51 km/h).
The system turns the high beams off if:
· The ambient light level is high enough that high beams are not required.
· The system detects an approaching vehicle's headlamps or tail lamps.
· The vehicle speed falls below approximately 27 mph (44 km/h).
· The system detects severe rain, snow or fog.
· The camera is blocked.
Switching the System On and Off
Switch the system on using the information display. See Information Displays (page 97).
81
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Lighting
You can switch the fog lamps on when the lighting control is in any position except Off and the high beams are not on.
DIRECTION INDICATORS
E142451
Switch the lighting control to the autolamps position. See Autolamps (page 79).
Overriding the System Push the lever away from you to switch between high beam and low beam.
Automatic High Beam Indicator
The indicator illuminates to confirm when the system is ready to assist.
FRONT FOG LAMPS (IF EQUIPPED)
E162681
Push the lever up or down to use the direction indicators. Note: Tap the lever up or down to make the direction indicators flash three times to indicate a lane change.
INTERIOR LAMPS
The lamps turn on under the following conditions: · You open any door. · You press a remote control button. · You press the all lamps on button on
the overhead console.
E142453
Press the control to switch the fog lamps on or off.
82
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Lighting
Front Interior Lamp
E262162
The front interior lamp switches are on the overhead console. Note: The position of each button on the overhead console depends on your vehicle.
All Lamps On
Press to switch all interior lamps on.
All Lamps Off
E262185
Press to switch all interior lamps off.
Individual Dome Lamps
E262193
Press to switch the left-hand individual dome lamp on and off.
Press to switch the right-hand individual dome lamp on and off.
When the interior lamp function is on and you open a door, the courtesy and door lamps turn on.
Note: The indicator lamp lights amber when the door function is off.
Individual Map Lamps
Press a map lens to switch individual map lamps on and off independently.
Rear Interior Lamps
The rear interior lamps may be above the rear seat or above the rear windows.
Press to switch the lamps on or off.
AMBIENT LIGHTING (IF EQUIPPED)
Use the touchscreen to select the following:
Select the settings option on the feature bar.
E279027
Select ambient lighting.
Interior Lamp Function
Press to switch the interior lamp function on and off.
When the interior lamp function is off and you open a door, the courtesy and door lamps stay off.
E273192
Switching Ambient Lighting On Touch a color once.
83
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Lighting
Changing the Color Touch any color once. Adjusting the Brightness Drag the selected color up or down. Switching Ambient Lighting Off Touch the selected color once or drag the selected color down to zero brightness.
84
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Windows and Mirrors
POWER WINDOWS
WARNING: Do not leave children unattended in your vehicle and do not let them play with the power windows. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury.
WARNING: When closing the power windows, verify they are free of obstruction and make sure that children and pets are not in the proximity of the window openings.
Resetting One-Touch Up
Start the engine.
1. Lift and hold the window switch until you fully close the door window. Continue to hold the switch for a few seconds after you close the window.
2. Release the window switch. 3. Press and hold the window switch until
you fully open the door window. 4. Release the window switch. 5. Lift and hold the window switch until
you fully close the window. 6. Test for correct window operation by
carrying out the one-touch down and one-touch up features.
Bounce-Back
The window stops automatically while closing. It reverses some distance if there is an obstacle in the way.
Overriding the Bounce-Back Feature
E146043
Note: You may hear a pulsing noise when only one of the windows is open. Lower the opposite window slightly to reduce this noise. Press the switch to open the window. Lift the switch to close the window.
One-Touch Down
Press the switch fully and release it. Press again or lift it to stop the window.
One-Touch Up
Lift the switch fully and release it. Press again or lift it to stop the window.
WARNING: If you override bounce-back, the window does not reverse if it detects an obstacle. Take care when closing the windows to avoid personal injury or damage to your vehicle.
Pull up the window switch and hold within a few seconds of the window reaching the bounce-back position. The window travels up with no bounce-back protection. The window stops if you release the switch before the window fully closes.
85
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Windows and Mirrors
Window Lock
Opening the Windows
You can only open the windows for a short time after you unlock your vehicle with the remote control. After you unlock your vehicle, press and hold the remote control unlock button to open the windows and vent the moonroof. Release the button once movement starts. Press the lock or unlock button to stop movement.
Closing the Windows
E259237
Press the control to lock or unlock the rear window controls. It illuminates when you lock the rear window controls.
Accessory Delay
You can use the window switches for several minutes after you switch the ignition off or until you open either front door.
GLOBAL OPENING AND CLOSING
You can use the remote control to operate the windows with the ignition off.
Note: You can enable or disable this feature in the information display or see an authorized dealer. See General Information (page 97).
Note: To operate this feature, accessory delay must not be active.
WARNING: When closing the windows and moonroof, you should verify they are free of obstructions and make sure that children and pets are not in the proximity of the window openings.
To close the windows and moonroof, press and hold the remote control lock button. Release the button once movement starts. Press the lock or unlock button to stop movement.
EXTERIOR MIRRORS
Power Exterior Mirrors
WARNING: Do not adjust the mirrors when your vehicle is moving. This could result in the loss of control of your vehicle, serious personal injury or death.
86
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Windows and Mirrors
E144073
A Left-hand mirror. B Adjustment control. C Right-hand mirror.
To adjust a mirror: 1. Select the mirror you want to adjust.
The control will illuminate. 2. Adjust the position of the mirror. 3. Press the mirror switch again.
Fold-Away Exterior Mirrors
Push the mirror toward the door window glass. Make sure that you fully engage the mirror in its support when returning it to its original position.
Power-Folding Mirrors (If Equipped)
To fold both mirrors, make sure you switch your vehicle on (with the ignition in accessory mode or the engine running) and then: 1. Press the control to fold the mirrors. 2. Press the control again to unfold. Note: Once you press the control, you cannot stop the mirrors midway through their movement. Wait until the mirrors stop moving and press the control again.
Heated Exterior Mirrors (If Equipped)
See Heated Exterior Mirrors (page 129).
Memory Mirrors (If Equipped)
You can save and recall the mirror positions through the memory function. See Memory Function (page 135).
Auto-Dimming Feature (If Equipped)
The driver exterior mirror automatically dims when the interior auto-dimming mirror turns on.
Signal Indicator Mirrors (If Equipped)
The outer portion of the appropriate mirror housing will blink when you switch on the turn signal.
Puddle Lamps (If Equipped)
The lamps on the bottom part of the mirror housing light when you use your transmitter to unlock the doors or when you open a door.
Blind Spot Monitor (If Equipped)
See Blind Spot Information System (page 211).
E195334
87
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Windows and Mirrors
INTERIOR MIRROR
SUN VISORS
WARNING: Do not adjust the mirrors when your vehicle is moving. This could result in the loss of control of your vehicle, serious personal injury or death.
Note: Do not clean the mirror housing or glass with harsh abrasives, fuel or other petroleum-based cleaning products.
You can adjust the interior mirror to your preference. Some mirrors also have a second pivot point. This lets you move the mirror hear up or down and from side to side.
Manual Dimming Mirror
Pull the tab below the mirror toward you to reduce the effect of bright light from behind.
Auto-Dimming Mirror (If Equipped)
Note: Do not block the sensors on the front and back of the mirror. A rear center passenger or raised rear center head restraint may also block light from reaching the sensor.
The mirror dims to reduce glare when bright lights are detected from behind your vehicle. It automatically returns to normal reflection when you shift the transmission into reverse (R) to make sure you have a clear view when backing up.
E138666
Rotate the sun visor toward the side window and extend it rearward for extra shade. Illuminated Vanity Mirror
E162197
Lift the cover to switch the lamp on.
MOONROOF (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: Do not let children play with the moonroof or leave them unattended in the vehicle. They may seriously hurt themselves.
88
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Windows and Mirrors
WARNING: When closing the moonroof, you should verify that it is free of obstructions and make sure that children and pets are not in the proximity of the roof opening.
The sliding shade can be manually opened or closed when the moonroof is closed. Pull the shade toward the front of the vehicle to close it.
The moonroof controls are located on the overhead console and have a one-touch open and close feature. To stop it during one-touch operation, touch the control a second time.
Bounce-Back
The moonroof will stop automatically and reverse some distance if an obstacle is detected while closing.
Touch and hold (C) within two seconds of a bounce-back event to override this function.
Venting the Moonroof
Touch (B) to vent the moonroof. Touch (C) to close it.
E144499
A B C
Open Vent Close
Opening and Closing the Moonroof
Touch (A) to open the moonroof. It will stop short of the fully opened position.
Note: This position helps to reduce wind noise or rumbling which may happen with the moonroof fully open. Touch (A) again to fully open the moonroof.
Touch (C) to close the moonroof.
89
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
GAUGES Type 1 and 2
Instrument Cluster
E271817
A Tachometer B Information Display (Type 2 shown Type 1 similar) C Speedometer D Fuel Gauge E Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge
Information Display
Odometer
Located in the bottom of the information display. Registers the accumulated distance your vehicle has traveled.
Compass Displays the vehicle's heading direction. Trip Computer See General Information (page 97).
90
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Instrument Cluster
Vehicle Settings and Personalization
See General Information (page 97).
Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge
WARNING: Do not remove the coolant reservoir cap when the engine is on or the cooling system is hot. Wait 10 minutes for the cooling system to cool down. Cover the coolant reservoir cap with a thick cloth to prevent the possibility of scalding and slowly remove the cap. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury.
Indicates engine coolant temperature. At normal operating temperature, the level indicator will be in the normal range. If the engine coolant temperature exceeds the normal range, stop your vehicle as soon as safely possible, switch off the engine and let the engine cool.
Note: Do not restart the engine until the cause of overheating has been resolved.
Fuel Gauge
The fuel gauge indicates about how much fuel is in the fuel tank.
The arrow adjacent to the fuel pump symbol indicates on which side of your vehicle the fuel filler door is located.
Note: The fuel gauge may vary slightly when your vehicle is moving or on a slope.
Low Fuel Reminder
A low fuel level reminder displays and sounds when the distance to empty reaches 75 mi (120 km) to empty for MyKey, and at 50 mi (80 km), 25 mi (40 km), 10 mi (20 km) and 0 mi (0 km) for all vehicle keys.
Note: The low fuel reminder can appear at different fuel gauge positions depending on fuel economy conditions. This variation is normal.
91
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Type 3
Instrument Cluster
E272460
A Left Information Display B Speedometer C Right Information Display. See General Information (page 97).
Left Information Display
Odometer
Located in the bottom of the information display. Registers the accumulated distance your vehicle has traveled.
Trip Computer
See General Information (page 97).
Vehicle Settings and Personalization See General Information (page 97).
92
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Instrument Cluster
WARNING LAMPS AND INDICATORS
The following warning lamps and indicators alert you to a vehicle condition that may become serious. Some lamps illuminate when you start your vehicle to make sure they work. If any lamps remain on after starting your vehicle, refer to the respective system warning lamp for further information.
Note: Some warning indicators appear in the information display and operate the same as a warning lamp but do not illuminate when you start your vehicle.
Adaptive Cruise Control (If Equipped)
The speed control system indicator light changes color to E144524 indicate what mode the system is in: See Using Cruise Control (page 197).
On (white light): Illuminates when the adaptive cruise control system is turned on. Turns off when the speed control system is turned off.
Engaged (green light): Illuminates when the adaptive cruise control system is engaged. Turns off when the speed control system is disengaged.
Anti-Lock Braking System
If it illuminates when you are driving, this indicates a malfunction. You will continue to have the normal braking system (without ABS) unless the brake system warning lamp is also illuminated. Have the system checked by your authorized dealer.
Auto Start-stop (If Equipped)
It will illuminate to inform you when the engine shuts down or in conjunction with a message.
Battery
If it illuminates while driving, it indicates a malfunction. Switch off all unnecessary electrical equipment and have the system checked by your authorized dealer immediately.
Blind Spot Monitor (If Equipped)
It will illuminate when you switch
E151262
this feature off or in conjunction with a message. See Blind Spot
Information System (page 211). See
Information Messages (page 106).
Brake System Warning Lamp
WARNING: Driving your vehicle with the warning lamp on is dangerous. A significant decrease in braking performance may occur. It may take you longer to stop your vehicle. Have your vehicle checked as soon as possible. Driving extended distances with the parking brake engaged can cause brake failure and the risk of personal injury.
Note: Indicators vary depending on region.
This lamp is a dual function lamp and will illuminate when:
· You apply the parking brake with the ignition on.
· Your vehicle has a brake fault or low brake fluid level, regardless of parking brake position.
If the lamp illuminates while you are moving, you may have the E270480 parking brake applied. Be sure that the parking brake is off. Have your vehicle checked as soon as possible if the lamp continues to illuminate.
93
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Instrument Cluster
Cruise Control
E71340
It will illuminate when you switch this feature on.
Direction Indicator
Illuminates when the left or right turn signal or the hazard warning flasher is turned on. If the indicators stay on or flash faster, check for a burned out bulb. See Changing a Bulb (page 276).
Door Ajar
Displays when the ignition is on and any door is not completely closed.
Electric Park Brake
E146190
It will illuminate when the electric parking brake has a malfunction.
Engine Coolant Temperature
Illuminates when the engine coolant temperature is high. Stop the vehicle as soon as possible, switch off the engine and let cool.
Engine Oil
If it illuminates with the engine running or when you are driving, this indicates a malfunction. Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so and switch the engine off. Check the engine oil level. See Engine Oil Check (page 261).
Note: Do not resume your journey if it illuminates despite the level being correct. Have the system checked by your authorized dealer immediately.
Fasten Seatbelt
It will illuminate and a chime will
sound to remind you to fasten
E71880
your seatbelt. See Seatbelt
Reminder (page 40).
Front Airbag
If it fails to illuminate when you
start your vehicle, continues to
E67017
flash or remains on, it indicates
a malfunction. Have the system checked
by your authorized dealer.
Front Fog Lamps (If Equipped)
It will illuminate when you switch the front fog lamps on.
Grade Assist (If Equipped)
E144523
Lights when you switch on the grade assist function.
Heads Up Display (If Equipped)
A red beam of lights will illuminate on the windshield in E156133 certain instances when using adaptive cruise control and/or the collision warning system. It will also illuminate momentarily when you start your vehicle to make sure the display works.
High Beam
It will illuminate when you switch the high beam headlamps on. It will flash when you use the headlamp flasher.
Hood Ajar
E159324
Displays when the ignition is on and the hood is not completely closed.
94
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Instrument Cluster
Lane Keeping System Lamp (If
Equipped)
E144813
Illuminates when the lane keeping system is activated.
Low Fuel Level
It will illuminate when the fuel level is low or the fuel tank is nearly empty. Refuel as soon as possible.
Low Tire Pressure Warning
It will illuminate when your tire pressure is low. If the lamp remains on with the engine running or when driving, check your tire pressure as soon as possible.
It will also illuminate momentarily when you switch the ignition on to confirm the lamp is functional. If it does not illuminate when you switch the ignition on, or begins to flash at any time, have the system checked by your authorized dealer.
Parking Lamps
It will illuminate when you switch the parking lamps on.
Powertrain Fault
Illuminates when a powertrain or an AWD fault has been detected. Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Service Engine Soon
If it illuminates when the engine is running this indicates a malfunction. The On Board Diagnostics system has detected a malfunction of the vehicle emission control system.
If it flashes, engine misfire may be occurring. Increased exhaust gas temperatures could damage the catalytic converter or other vehicle components. Drive in a moderate fashion (avoid heavy acceleration and deceleration) and have your vehicle immediately serviced.
It illuminates when you switch the ignition on prior to engine start to check the bulb and to indicate whether your vehicle is ready for Inspection and Maintenance (I/M) testing.
Normally, it illuminates until the engine is cranked and automatically turns off if no malfunctions are present. However, if after 15 seconds it flashes eight times, this indicates that your vehicle is not ready for Inspection and Maintenance (I/M) testing.
See Emission Law (page 162).
Sport Mode
E176099
Illuminates when you switch the sport mode on.
Stability Control
It will flash when the system is active. If it remains illuminated E138639 or does not illuminate when you switch the ignition on, this indicates a malfunction. During a malfunction the system will switch off. Have the system checked by your authorized dealer immediately. See Using Stability Control (page 182).
Stability Control Off
It will illuminate when you switch the system off. It will go out E130458 when you switch the system back on or when you switch the ignition off. See Using Stability Control (page 182).
95
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Instrument Cluster
Trunk Ajar
E159323
Displays when the ignition is on and the trunk is not completely closed.
AUDIBLE WARNINGS AND INDICATORS
Keyless Warning Alert
The horn will sound twice when you exit your vehicle with the intelligent access key and your vehicle is in RUN, indicating your vehicle is still on.
Headlamps On Warning Chime
Sounds when you have left the headlamps or parking lamps on and open the driver door with the vehicle off.
Parking Brake On Warning Chime
Sounds when you have left the parking brake on and drive your vehicle. If the warning chime remains on after you have released the parking brake, have the system checked by your authorized dealer immediately.
96
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Information Displays
GENERAL INFORMATION
Information Display Controls (Type 1 and Type 2)
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, crash and injury. We strongly recommend that you use extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle. We recommend against the use of any hand-held device while driving and encourage the use of voice-operated systems when possible. Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the use of electronic devices while driving.
Note: Your vehicle may or may not be equipped with all the messages listed in this chapter. Your vehicle will not display messages of systems it is not equipped with.
Various systems on your vehicle can be controlled using the information display controls on the steering wheel. Corresponding information is displayed in the information display.
E144637
· Press the up or down arrow buttons to scroll through the list.
· Press the right arrow button to enter a sub-menu.
· Press the left arrow button to exit a menu.
· Press and hold the left arrow button at any time to return to the main menu display (escape button).
· Press the OK button to choose and confirm settings or messages.
Menu
You can access the menu using the information display control.
Note: Some options may appear slightly different or not at all if the items are optional.
Digital Speedometer Distance to E Trip Odometer Trip Timer Fuel Used
Trip 1 and 2
97
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Information Displays
Trip 1 and 2
Average Fuel
Outside Temperature
All Values1 1 Type 2 · Digital Speedometer - Shows the speed your vehicle is traveling. · Distance to E - Shows the approximate distance your vehicle can travel before running
out of fuel. · Trip Odometer -- Registers the distance of individual journeys. · Trip Timer -- The timer stops when you turn your vehicle off and restarts when you
restart your vehicle. · Fuel Used -- Shows the amount of fuel used for a given trip. · Average Fuel -- Shows the average fuel economy for a given trip. · Outside Temperature -- Shows the outside air temperature. · All Values -- Shows the Distance to E, Trip Odometer, Trip Timer and Average Fuel. Note: Press and hold OK on the current screen to reset the respective trip, distance, time and fuel information.
Distance to Empty Inst Fuel Econ Avg MPG 1 Long Term Fuel Economy
Fuel History 1 Average Fuel
Fuel Economy
98
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Information Displays
Fuel Economy
All Values 1
Auto StartStop
1 Type 2
· Distance to Empty - Shows the approximate distance your vehicle can travel before running out of fuel.
· Inst Fuel Economy - Shows a visual graph of your instantaneous fuel economy along with your Avg MPG since the function was last reset.
· Long Term Fuel Economy - Shows your long term fuel economy. · Fuel History - Shows a bar chart of your fuel history. · Average Fuel -- Shows the average fuel economy for a given trip. · All Values -- Shows all fuel economy values (DTE, Inst Fuel Econ, Avg Fuel). · Auto StartStop - Available Auto Start-Stop messaging will provide details about what
is happening with your system. See Information Messages (page 106). Note: You can reset your average fuel economy by pressing and holding the OK button on the left hand steering wheel controls.
Driver Assist Traction Ctrl - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Blind Spot - check enabled or uncheck disabled1
Cross Traffic - check enabled or uncheck disabled1
Cruise Control1
Adaptive or Normal
Driver Alert1
Driver Alert or Driver Alert Display
Hill Start Assist - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Intelligent AWD1 Lane Keeping System1
Pre-Collision
Mode
Alert, Aid or Both
Intensity
High, Normal or Low
Alert Sensitivity
High, Normal or Low
Active Braking - check enabled or uncheck disabled
99
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Information Displays
Driver Assist
Rear Park Aid - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Tire Monitor 1 Type 2
Tire Pressure
Vehicle MyKey
Settings
Auto Engine Off - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Easy Entry/Exit - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Lighting Auto Highbeam - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Autolamp delay
Off or XX Seconds
Daytime Lights - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Locks Autolock - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Autounlock - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Mislock - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Remote Unlock
All Doors or Driver's Door
Switches inhibit - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Oil Life oil Life XXX% - Hold OK to Reset Rest
Remote Climate Control
Auto or Last Settings
Start
Driver Seat or Seats and Wheel Automatic or Off
Duration
5, 10 or 15 minutes
System - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Windows Remote Open or Remote Close
Wipers Courtesy Wipe or Rain Sensing
Create Hold OK to Create MyKey MyKey
911
Always On or User Selectable
Assist
100
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Information Displays
Display Setup
1 Type 2
Settings
Do Not On or Off Disturb
Traction Always On or User Selectable Control
Max
Choose desired speed or Off
Speed
Speed Choose desired speed or Off Minder
Volume Limiter - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Clear Hold OK to Clear All MyKeys MyKeys
Distance Miles & Gallons, L/100km or km/L
Temper- Fahrenheit (°F) or Celsius (°C) ature
Tire
psi, kPa or bar
Pressure
Language Choose your applicable setting
Information Display Controls (Type 3)
E144638
· Press the up or down arrow buttons to scroll through the list.
· Press the right arrow button to enter a sub-menu.
· Press the left arrow button to exit a menu.
· Press and hold the left arrow button at any time to return to the main menu display (escape button).
· Press the OK button to choose and confirm settings or messages.
Main menu
From the main menu bar on the left side of the information display, you can choose from the following categories:
101
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Information Displays
· Display Mode · Trip 1 & 2 · Fuel Economy · Driver Assist · Settings
Scroll up or down to highlight one of the categories, then press the right arrow key or OK to enter into that category. Press the left arrow key as needed to exit back to the main menu.
Display Mode
Use the up/down arrow buttons to choose between the following display options.
Display mode
Option 1 Option 2 Option 3 Option 4 Option 5 Option 6
XXX mi (km) to
X
X
-
-
-
-
empty
Fuel gauge
X
X
X
X
X
X
Round tachometer
-
-
X
X
-
-
Vertical tachometer
-
X
-
-
X
X
Engine coolant
-
-
-
X
-
-
temp gauge
Tire Pressure
-
-
-
-
X
-
Speedometer
-
-
-
-
-
X
Intelligent AWD - AWD Gauge
· XXX mi (km) to empty - Shows the approximate distance the vehicle will travel.
· Fuel gauge - Indicates approximately how much fuel is left in the fuel tank. The fuel gauge may vary slightly when the vehicle is in motion or on a grade. When the fuel level becomes low, the level indicator will change to amber. When the fuel level becomes critically low, the level indicator will change to red. Note: When a MyKey® is in use, low fuel warnings will display earlier. The fuel icon and arrow indicates which side of the vehicle the fuel filler door is located.
· Round tachometer - Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute. Driving with your tachometer pointer continuously at the top of the scale may damage the engine. During SelectShift AutomaticTM transmission (SST) use, the currently selected gear will appear in the display.
· Engine coolant temperature gauge - Indicates engine coolant temperature. At normal operating temperature, the level indicator will be in the normal range. If the engine coolant temperature exceeds the normal range, stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible, switch off the engine and let the engine cool.
· Tire Pressure - Shows the tire pressure of each wheel on your vehicle.
· Speedometer - Shows the speed your vehicle is traveling.
102
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Information Displays
Trip 1 & 2
You can access the menu using the information display control.
Note: Some options may appear slightly different or not at all if the items are optional.
Trip 1 and 2
All Values
All Values -- shows all trip values (Trip Timer, Odometer and Average Fuel). · Trip Odometer -- Shows your accumulated trip distance. · Trip Timer-- The timer stops when you turn your vehicle off and restarts when you
restart your vehicle. · Average Fuel -- Shows your average fuel economy for a given trip. Note: You can reset your trip information by pressing and holding the OK button on the left hand steering wheel controls.
Fuel Economy
Use the left and right arrow buttons to choose the desired fuel economy display.
Fuel Economy
Instant Fuel Economy - Hold OK to Reset
Fuel History
Average Speed - Hold OK to Reset
Auto StartStop
· Inst Fuel Economy - Shows a visual graph of your instantaneous fuel economy, average fuel economy and distance to empty.
· Fuel History - Shows a bar chart of your fuel history from the past 30 min, average fuel economy and distance to empty.
· Average Speed - Shows your vehicles average speed since the function was last reset. · Auto StartStop - Available Auto Start-Stop messaging will provide details about what
is happening with your system. See Information Messages (page 106).
Note: You can reset your average fuel economy by pressing and holding the OK button on the left hand steering wheel controls.
Driver Assist
In this mode, you can configure different driver setting choices.
Note: Some items are optional and may not appear.
103
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Information Displays
Driver Assist
Traction Control - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Blind Spot - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Cross Traffic Alert - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Cruise Control
Adaptive or Normal
Driver Alert
Driver Alert or Driver Alert Display
Hill Start Assist - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Lane Keeping System
Mode
Alert, Aid or Both
Intensity
High, Normal or Low
Pre-Collision
Alert Sensitivity
High, Normal or Low
Active Braking - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Rear Park Aid - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Tire Monitor
Tire Monitor - Hold OK to Reset
Settings
In this mode, you can configure different driver setting choices.
Note: Some items are optional and may not appear.
Vehicle
Settings
Auto Engine Off - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Easy Entry/Exit - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Lighting Auto Highbeam - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Autolamp Delay
Off or XX Seconds
Daytime Lights - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Locks Autolock - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Autounlock - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Mislock - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Remote Unlock
All Doors or Driver First
104
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Information Displays
MyKey
Display Setup
Settings
Switch Inhibit - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Mirrors Autofold - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Oil Life XXX% - Hold OK to Reset Rest
Remote Start
Climate Control
Seats or Seats and Wheel
Auto or Last setting Auto or Off
Duration
5, 10 or 15 minutes
System - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Seatbelts
Windows Remote Open or Remote Close
Wipers Courtesy Wipe or Rain Sensing
Create Hold OK to Create MyKey MyKey
911 Assist
Always On or User Selectable
Do Not On or Off Disturb
Traction Always On or User Selectable Control
Max
Choose desired speed or Off
Speed
Speed Choose desired speed or Off Minder
Volume Limiter - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Clear Hold OK to Clear All MyKeys MyKeys
Distance Miles & Gallons, l/100km or km/l
Gauge Fuel Gauge or Fuel + Tach Display
105
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Information Displays
Settings
Temper- °Fahrenheit or °Celsius ature
Tire Pres- psi, kPa or bar sure
Language Choose your applicable setting
INFORMATION MESSAGES
Note: Depending on your vehicle options and instrument cluster type, not all messages display or are available. Certain messages may be abbreviated or shortened depending upon which cluster type you have.
Active Park
Message Active Park Fault
E144636
Press the OK button to acknowledge and remove some messages from the information display. The display removes other messages after a short time. Certain messages need to be confirmed before you can access the menus.
Action The system has detected a fault that requires service. Have
the system checked by an authorized dealer.
106
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Information Displays
Adaptive Cruise Control
Message
Action
Adaptive Cruise Malfunction
A radar malfunction is preventing the adaptive cruise control from engaging. See Using Adaptive Cruise Control (page
198).
Adaptive Cruise Not Available
A condition exists such that the adaptive cruise cannot function properly. See Using Adaptive Cruise Control (page 198).
Adaptive Cruise Not Available Sensor
Blocked See Manual
You have a blocked sensor due to inclement weather, ice, mud or water in front of the radar sensor. You can typically clean the sensor to resolve. See Using Adaptive Cruise
Control (page 198).
Normal Cruise Active Automatic Braking Turned Off
The system has disabled the automatic braking.
Front Sensor Not Aligned A radar malfunction is preventing the adaptive cruise control from engaging.
Adaptive Cruise - Driver Resume Control
The adaptive cruise has reinstated controls to the driver.
Adaptive Cruise Speed Your vehicle speed is too slow to activate the adaptive cruise. Too Low to Activate
Adaptive Cruise Shift Down
The adaptive cruise is automatically adjusting the gap distance and you need to shift the transmission into a lower
gear.
AdvanceTrac®
Message Service AdvanceTrac AdvanceTrac Off On
Action The system detects a malfunction due to a blocked sensor.
The traction control has been switch on or off.
107
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Information Displays
Airbag
Message
Action
Occupant Sensor BLOCKED Remove Objects Near Passenger
Seat
The system detects a malfunction due to a blocked sensor. Remove blockage.
Alarm
Message
Vehicle Alarm To Stop Alarm, Start Vehicle.
Action
Alarm triggered due to unauthorized entry. See Anti-Theft Alarm (page 72).
Auto Start-Stop
Message
Action
Auto StartStop Press You need to restart the engine, press the brake pedal to start. Brake to Start Engine
Auto StartStop Press You need to restart the engine, press the brake pedal harder
Brake Harder to Activate
to start.
Auto StartStop Press a Pedal to Start Engine
You need to restart the engine, press any pedal to start.
Auto StartStop Shift to P, then Restart Engine
Select park for the system to restart the engine.
Auto StartStop Manual The system is not functioning. You need to restart the engine. Restart Required
Auto StartStop Not Available
Displays when conditions are not met for the Auto StartStop system to function properly. See Auto-Start-Stop (page 153).
Engine Stopped
StartStop has shut off the engine automatically.
Engine Starting
StartStop is starting the engine automatically.
Engine On due to Vehicle The wheels are at a sharp angle or the steering wheel is being
Maneuvering
turned.
108
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Information Displays
Message
Action
Engine On due to The wheels are at a sharp angle or the steering wheel is being
Steering Wheel Maneuv-
turned.
ering
Engine On due to Accessory Usage
Engine may be on to support high demand for electrical accessories, such as operating power windows, rear defroster,
or when using the power point.
Engine On Normal Oper- Engine is on to support normal vehicle operation. Includes
ation
external vehicle conditions, such as altitude, traffic, low
ambient temperature. Also includes battery outside optimal
operating conditions (state of charge and temperature), and
inadequate brake vacuum (can occur if the brake pedal is
depressed a number of times in succession).
Engine On due to Low Engine is on in order to increase the engine temperature to an
Temperature
acceptable level.
Engine On due to Outside Air Temp
Engine is on to support normal vehicle operation due to low outside ambient temperature.
Engine On due to Engine Engine is on in order to increase the engine temperature to an
Warming
acceptable level.
Engine On due to Selected Gear
Engine is on due to a low gear selection by the transmission.
Engine On due to Steep Grade
Engine is on due to a steep road grade.
Engine On due to Key not Engine is on due to no key being detected by the vehicle. Detected
Engine On due to Driver Door Opened
Engine is on due to the driver door being opened.
Engine On due to Driver Belt Unbuckled
Engine is on due to the driver seat belt being unbuckled.
Engine On due to Heating /Cooling
Engine is on to achieve or maintain interior compartment at an acceptable level.
Engine On due to Power Engine is on, which is required to support the use of the power
Outlet in Use
outlet (110V).
Engine On due to Vehicle Engine is on due to the vehicle battery needing to be charged. Charging
Deactivated by Driver
You have disabled the Start Stop feature.
109
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Information Displays
Automatic Engine Shutdown
Message
Action
Engine Shuts Off In {seconds to shut off:#0}
Seconds
The engine is getting ready to shut off.
Engine Shut Off For Fuel Economy
The engine has shut off to help increase fuel economy.
Engine Shuts Off in {seconds to shut off:#0}
Seconds Press Ok to Override
The engine is getting ready to shut off. You can press OK on the left steering wheel button to override the shut down.
All-Wheel Drive
Message AWD Temporarily
Disabled AWD OFF
AWD Restored
AWD Malfunction Service Required
Action
The all-wheel drive system temporarily turns off to protect itself from overheating.
The all-wheel drive system temporarily turns off to protect itself from overheating or if you are using the temporary spare
tire.
The all-wheel drive system will resume normal function and clear this message after driving a short distance with the road
tire re-installed or after the system cools.
The all-wheel drive system is not operating properly. If the warning stays on or continues to come on, contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
110
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Information Displays
Battery and Charging System
Message
Action
Check Charging System The charging system needs servicing. If the warning stays on or continues to come on, contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Low Battery Features Temporarily Turned Off
The battery management system detects an extended lowvoltage condition. Your vehicle will disable various features to help preserve the battery. Turn off as many of the electrical loads as soon as possible to improve system voltage. If the
system voltage has recovered, the disabled features will operate again as normal.
Battery State of Charge Low
The battery management system determines that the 12V battery is at a low state of charge. Start the engine to charge the battery or charge the battery using an aftermarket battery
charger. This message clears once you restart your vehicle and the battery state of charge has recovered.
Turn Power Off To Save Battery
The battery management system determines that the battery is at a low state of charge. Turn the ignition off as soon as
possible to protect the battery. This message will clear once the vehicle has been started and the battery state of charge has recovered. Turning off unnecessary electrical loads will
allow faster battery state-of-charge recovery.
Blind Spot Information and Cross Traffic Alert System
Message
Action
Blindspot System Fault A fault with the system has occurred. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Blindspot Not Available The system sensors are blocked. See Blind Spot Informa-
Sensor Blocked See
tion System (page 211).
Manual
Cross Traffic Vehicle The system detects a vehicle. See Blind Spot Information
Coming From X
System (page 211).
Cross Traffic Not Avail- The blind spot information system and cross traffic alert
able Sensor Blocked See system sensors are blocked. See Blind Spot Information
Manual
System (page 211).
Cross Traffic System A fault with the system has occurred. Contact an authorized
Fault
dealer as soon as possible.
111
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Information Displays
Doors and Locks
Message
Action
X Door Ajar
The door(s) listed is not completely closed.
Trunk Ajar
The luggage compartment is not completely closed.
Hood Ajar
The hood is not completely closed.
Switches Inhibited Security Mode
The system has disabled the door switches.
Factory Keypad Code {X The factory keypad code displays in the information display
X X X X}
after system resets the keypad.
Driver Alert
Message
Driver Alert Warning Rest Now
Driver Alert Warning Rest Suggested
Action Stop and rest as soon as it is safe to do so.
Take a rest soon.
Fuel
Message Fuel Level Low Check Fuel Fill Inlet
Action An early reminder of a low fuel condition. The fuel fill inlet may not be properly closed.
Hill Start Assist
Message
Hill Start Assist Not Available
Action
Hill start assist is not available. Contact an authorized dealer. See Hill Start Assist (page 178).
112
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Information Displays
Keys and Intelligent Access
Message
Action
To START Press Brake A reminder to press the brake while starting your vehicle.
No Key Detected
The system does not detect a key in your vehicle. See Keyless Starting (page 148).
Restart Now or Key is Needed
You pressed the start/stop button to switch off the engine and your vehicle does not detect your intelligent access key
inside your vehicle.
Accessory Power is Active
Your vehicle is in the run ignition state.
Starting System Fault There is a problem with your vehicle's starting system. Contact an authorized dealer for service.
Key Program Successful You have successfully programmed an intelligent access key to the system.
Key Program Failure
You have failed to program an intelligent access key to the system.
Max Number of Keys You have programmed the maximum number of keys to the
Learned
system.
Not Enough Keys Learned
You have not programmed enough keys to the system.
Key Battery Low Replace The key battery is low. Change the battery as soon as possible. Soon
Could Not Program An attempt is made to program a spare key using two existing
Integrated Key
keys.
Vehicle is ON
A reminder that you are exiting your vehicle and the engine is on.
113
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Information Displays
Lane Keeping System
Message
Action
Lane Keeping Sys. Malfunction Service
Required
The system has malfunctioned. Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Front Camera Tempor- The system has detected a condition that has caused the
arily Not Available
system to be temporarily unavailable.
Front Camera Low Visib- The system has detected a condition that requires the wind-
ility Clean Screen
shield to be cleaned to operate properly.
Front Camera Malfunc- The system has malfunctioned. Contact your authorized
tion Service Required
dealer as soon as possible.
Keep Hands on Steering The system requests you to keep your hands on the steering
Wheel
wheel.
Maintenance
Message
Action
Low Engine Oil Pressure Stop your vehicle as soon as safely possible and turn off the engine. Check the oil level. If the warning stays on or continues to come on with your engine running, contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Change Engine Oil Soon
The engine oil life remaining is 10% or less.
Oil Change Required
The oil life left is at 0%.
Brake Fluid Level Low The brake fluid level is low, inspect the brake system immediately. See Brake Fluid Check (page 269).
Check Brake System The brake system needs servicing. Stop your vehicle in a safe place. Contact an authorized dealer.
Engine Coolant Over Temperature
The engine coolant temperature is excessively high. Stop your vehicle in a safe place and allow the engine to cool. If
the problem persists, contact an authorized dealer. See Engine Coolant Check (page 263).
114
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Information Displays
Message Power Reduced to Lower Engine Temp Transport / Factory
Mode
See Manual
Action
The engine has reduced power to help reduce high engine temperature.
Your vehicle is still in Transport or Factory mode. This may not allow some features to operate properly. See an author-
ized dealer.
The powertrain needs service due to a powertrain malfunction.
MyKey
Message
Action
MyKey not Created
You cannot program a MyKey.
MyKey Active Drive Safely
MyKey is active.
Speed Limited to XX When switching on your vehicle and MyKey is in use, displays
MPH/km/h
that the MyKey speed limit is on.
Near Vehicle Top Speed MyKey is in use, the MyKey speed limit is on and your vehicle speed is approaching 80 mph (130 km/h).
Vehicle at Top Speed of MyKey Setting
You have reached the speed limit set for your MyKey.
Check Speed Drive Safely
You have an active MyKey with a programmed set speed limit.
Buckle Up to Unmute Audio
The belt-minder turns on with a MyKey in use.
AdvanceTrac On MyKey Setting
With a MyKey in use, AdvanceTrac turns on.
Traction Control On MyKey Setting
With a MyKey in use, traction control turns on.
MyKey Park Aid Cannot be Deactivated
With a MyKey in use, park aid is always on.
Lane Keeping Alert On MyKey Setting
With a MyKey in use, lane keeping alert turns on.
115
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Information Displays
Park Aid
Message Check Front Park Aid
Check Rear Park Aid
Front Park Aid On Off Rear Park Aid On Off
Action
The system has detected a fault that requires service. Contact an authorized dealer. See Principle of Operation (page 183).
The system has detected a fault that requires service. Contact an authorized dealer. See Principle of Operation (page 183).
Front park aid status.
Rear park aid status.
Park Brake
Message
Action
To Release: Press Brake and Switch
The electric parking brake is set and a manual release is attempted without the brake pedal being pressed.
Park Brake Use Switch The electric parking brake is set and an automatic release is
to Release
attempted but cannot be performed. Perform a manual
release.
Release Park Brake
The electric parking brake is set and your vehicle speed exceeds 3 mph (5 km/h). Release park brake before continued
driving.
Park Brake Not Applied
The electric parking brake is not fully applied.
Park Brake Not Released
The electric parking brake is not fully released.
Park Brake Maintenance The electric parking brake system has been put into a special
Mode
mode that is used to allow service of the rear brakes. Contact
an authorized dealer.
Park Brake Limited Function Service Required
The electric park brake system has detected a condition that requires service. Some functionality may still be available. See an authorized dealer.
Park Brake Malfunction The electric parking brake system has detected a condition
Service Now
that requires service. See an authorized dealer.
Park Brake System Overheated
Numerous park brake applies have overheated the system. Wait 2 minutes before attempting to apply again.
116
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Information Displays
Power Steering
Message
Steering Fault Service Now
Steering Loss Stop Safely
Steering Assist Fault Service Required
Action
The power steering system detects a condition that requires service. Contact an authorized dealer.
The power steering system is not working. Stop your vehicle in a safe place. Contact an authorized dealer.
The power steering system detects a condition that requires service. Contact an authorized dealer.
Pre-Collision Assist
Message
Action
Pre-Collision Assist Malfunction
There is a system malfunction with the pre-collision assist system. The system will be disabled. Contact an authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
Pre-Collision Assist Not Available Sensor Blocked
The pre-collision assist system radar is blocked because of poor radar visibility due to bad weather or ice, mud, water in
front of the radar. Driver can typically clean the sensor to resolve. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Pre-Collision Assist Not There is a system malfunction with the pre-collision assist
Available
system. The system will be disabled. Contact an authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
Remote Start
Message
Action
To Drive: Turn Key to On A reminder to turn the key on to drive your vehicle after a remote start.
To Drive: Press Brake A reminder to apply the brake and push the gearshift button
and Start Button
to drive your vehicle after a remote start.
117
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Information Displays
Seats
Message
Action
Memory Recall Not A reminder that memory seats are not available while driving. Permitted While Driving
Memory {0} Saved
Shows where you have saved your memory setting.
Starting System
Message
Action
To START Press Brake A reminder to apply the brake when starting your vehicle.
Engine Start Pending Please Wait
The starter is attempting to start your vehicle.
Pending Start Cancelled
The system has cancelled the pending start.
Cranking Time Exceeded The starter has exceeded its cranking time in attempting to start your vehicle.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Message Tire Pressure Low
Tire Pressure Monitor Fault
Tire Pressure Sensor Fault
Action
One or more tires on your vehicle has low tire pressure. See Tire Pressure Monitoring System (page 304).
The tire pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning. If the warning stays on or continues to come on, contact an
authorized dealer. See Tire Pressure Monitoring System (page 304).
A tire pressure sensor is malfunctioning or your spare tire is in use. See Tire Pressure Monitoring System (page 304). If
the warning stays on or continues to come on, contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
118
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Information Displays
Traction Control
Message
Traction Control Off / Traction Control On
Spinout Detected Hazards Activated
Action
The status of the traction control system after you switched it off or on. See Using Traction Control (page 180).
A spinout has occurred and the hazards are on.
Transmission
Message
Action
Transmission Malfunction Service Now
Contact an authorized dealer.
Transmission Over- The transmission is overheating and needs to cool. Stop in a
heating Stop Safely
safe place as soon as it is possible.
Transmission Over Temperature Stop
Safely
The transmission has overheated and needs to cool. Stop in a safe place as soon as it is possible.
Transmission Service Required
Contact an authorized dealer.
Transmission Too Hot Press Brake
Transmission is getting hot. Stop to let it cool.
Transmission Limited The transmission has limited functionality. See an authorized
Function See Manual
dealer.
Transmission Warming Transmission is too cold. Wait for it to warm up before you
Up Please Wait
drive.
Transmission Not in Park
A reminder to shift into park.
Press Brake Pedal
You need to depress the brake pedal.
Select S to confirm Stay Displays when a button needs to be pressed again to enter
in Neutral Mode
neutral hold. See Automatic Transmission (page 166).
Select L to Confirm Stay in Neutral Mode
Transmission Adjusted
The transmission has adjusted the shift strategy.
119
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Information Displays
Message
Transmission AdaptMode
Transmission IndicatMode Lockup On
Transmission IndicatMode Lockup Off
Action The transmission is adjusting the shift strategy. The transmission is locked and unable to select gears. The transmission is unlocked and free to select gears.
120
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Climate Control
MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL Directing Air to the Instrument Panel Air Vents
Press and release the button to direct airflow to instrument panel air vents. Directing Air to the Footwell Air Vents Press and release the button to direct airflow to footwell air vents. Setting the Blower Motor Speed
E265389
Turn the control to adjust the volume of air circulated in the vehicle. Note: Lights on the control illuminate to indicate the fan speed.
Setting the Temperature
E244106
Turn the control to set the temperature. Switching Defrost On and Off
Press and release the button to distribute air through the windshield air vents and de-mister. Air directed to the instrument panel and footwell air vents turns off. You can also use this setting to defog and clear the windshield of a thin covering of ice. Switching the Air Conditioning On and Off Press and release the button to switch the air conditioning on or off. Use air conditioning with recirculated air to improve cooling performance and efficiency. Note: In certain conditions (for example, maximum defrost) the air conditioning compressor may continue to operate even though you switch off the air conditioning.
121
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Climate Control
Switching the Climate Control On and Off
Press and release the button.
Switching the Heated Seats On and Off
Press and release the button to cycle through the various heat settings and off.
See Heated Seats (page 138).
Switching Maximum Air Conditioning On and Off
Turn the temperature control counterclockwise to the lowest setting for maximum cooling.
The left-hand and right-hand settings set to LO, recirculated air flows through the instrument panel air vents, air conditioning turns on and the blower motor adjusts to the highest speed.
Switching Maximum Defrost On and Off
Turn the temperature control clockwise to the highest setting for maximum defrosting.
The left-hand and right-hand settings set to HI, air flows through the windshield air vents, and the blower motor adjusts to the highest speed. You can also use this setting to defog and clear the windshield of a thin covering of ice. The heated rear window also turns on when you select maximum defrost.
Note: To prevent window fogging, you cannot select recirculated air when maximum defrost is on.
Switching Recirculated Air On and Off
Press and release the button to switch between outside air and recirculated air.
The air currently in the passenger compartment recirculates. This may reduce the time needed to cool the interior (when used with A/C) and reduce unwanted odors from entering your vehicle.
Note: Recirculated air may turn off (or prevent you from switching on) in all air flow modes except MAX A/C to reduce the risk of fogging. Recirculation may also turn on and off in various air distribution control combinations during hot weather in order to improve cooling efficiency.
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL - VEHICLES WITH: TOUCHSCREEN DISPLAY, VEHICLES WITHOUT: SONY AUDIO SYSTEM
Accessing the Air Distribution Controls
Press and release the button to activate the selection screen.
E265283
From the screen, switch directed air from the windshield, instrument panel or footwell vents on or off. You can direct air through any combination of these vents. See Climate (page 426).
Setting the Blower Motor Speed
Press and release + or - to adjust the volume of air circulated in the vehicle.
122
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Climate Control
Setting the Temperature
Press and release + or - on the left-hand side of the climate control to set the left-hand temperature.
Note: This control also adjusts the right-hand side temperature when you switch off dual zone mode.
Press and release + or - on the right-hand side of the climate control to set the right-hand temperature.
Switching Auto Mode On and Off
Press and release the button to switch on automatic operation, then set the temperature.
The system adjusts the blower motor speed, air distribution, air conditioning operation, and outside or recirculated air to reach and maintain the temperature you have set.
Note: You can also switch off dual zone mode by pressing and holding the button for more than two seconds.
Switching the Air Conditioning On and Off
Press and release the button to switch the air conditioning on or off.
Use air conditioning with recirculated air to improve cooling performance and efficiency.
Note: In certain conditions (for example, maximum defrost) the air conditioning compressor may continue to operate even though you switch off the air conditioning.
Switching the Climate Control On and Off
Press and release the button.
Switching the Climate Controlled Seats On and Off
E265282
Press and release the button to cycle through the various climate controlled seat settings and off.
See Climate Controlled Seats (page 138).
Switching the Heated Seats On and Off
Press and release the button to cycle through the various heat settings and off.
See Heated Seats (page 138).
Switching Maximum Air Conditioning On and Off
Press and release the button for maximum cooling.
The left-hand and right-hand settings set to LO, recirculated air flows through the instrument panel air vents, air conditioning turns on and the blower motor adjusts to the highest speed.
Switching Maximum Defrost On and Off
Press and release the button to switch on maximum defrost.
The left-hand and right-hand settings set to HI, air flows through the windshield air vents, and the blower motor adjusts to the highest speed. You can also use this setting to defog and clear the windshield of a thin covering of ice.
Note: To prevent window fogging, you cannot select recirculated air when maximum defrost is on.
123
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Climate Control
Switching Recirculated Air On and Off
Press and release the button to switch between outside air and recirculated air.
The air currently in the passenger compartment recirculates. This may reduce the time needed to cool the interior (when used with A/C) and reduce unwanted odors from entering your vehicle.
Note: Recirculated air may turn off (or prevent you from switching on) in all air flow modes except MAX A/C to reduce the risk of fogging. Recirculation may also turn on and off in various air distribution control combinations during hot weather to improve cooling efficiency.
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL - VEHICLES WITH: SONY AUDIO SYSTEM/ TOUCHSCREEN DISPLAY
Note: You can switch temperature units between Fahrenheit and Celsius. See your SYNC information.
Setting the Blower Motor Speed
Press and release + or - to adjust the volume of air circulated in the vehicle.
Setting the Temperature
Press and release + or - on the right-hand side of the climate control to set the right-hand temperature.
Switching Auto Mode On and Off
Press and release the button to switch on automatic operation, then set the temperature.
The system adjusts the blower motor speed, air distribution, air conditioning operation, and outside or recirculated air to reach and maintain the temperature you have set.
Note: You can also switch off dual zone mode by pressing and holding the button for more than two seconds.
Switching the Air Conditioning On and Off
Press and release the button to switch the air conditioning on or off.
Use air conditioning with recirculated air to improve cooling performance and efficiency.
Note: In certain conditions (for example, maximum defrost) the air conditioning compressor may continue to operate even though you switch off the air conditioning.
Switching the Climate Control On and Off
Press and release the button.
E265400
Press and release + or - on the left-hand side of the climate control to set the left-hand temperature.
Note: This control also adjusts the right-hand side temperature when you switch off dual zone mode.
Switching the Climate Controlled Seats On and Off
E265282
Press and release the button to cycle through the various climate controlled seat settings and off.
See Climate Controlled Seats (page 138).
124
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Climate Control
Switching Defrost On and Off
Press and release the button to distribute air through the windshield air vents and de-mister.
Air directed to the instrument panel and footwell air vents turns off. You can also use this setting to defog and clear the windshield of a thin covering of ice.
Switching the Heated Seats On and Off
Press and release the button to cycle through the various heat settings and off.
See Heated Seats (page 138).
Switching Maximum Air Conditioning On and Off
Press and release the button for maximum cooling.
The left-hand and right-hand settings set to LO, recirculated air flows through the instrument panel air vents, air conditioning turns on and the blower motor adjusts to the highest speed.
Switching Maximum Defrost On and Off
Press and release the button to switch on maximum defrost.
The left-hand and right-hand settings set to HI, air flows through the windshield air vents, and the blower motor adjusts to the highest speed. You can also use this setting to defog and clear the windshield of a thin covering of ice. The heated rear window also turns on when you select maximum defrost.
Note: To prevent window fogging, you cannot select recirculated air when maximum defrost is on.
Switching Recirculated Air On and Off
Press and release the button to switch between outside air and recirculated air.
The air currently in the passenger compartment recirculates. This may reduce the time needed to cool the interior (when used with A/C) and reduce unwanted odors from entering your vehicle.
Note: Recirculated air may turn off (or prevent you from switching on) in all air flow modes except MAX A/C to reduce the risk of fogging. Recirculation may also turn on and off in various air distribution control combinations during hot weather in order to improve cooling efficiency.
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL - VEHICLES WITH: SYNC
Directing Air to the Instrument Panel Air Vents
Press and release the button to direct airflow to instrument panel air vents.
Directing Air to the Footwell Air Vents
Press and release the button to direct airflow to footwell air vents.
Setting the Blower Motor Speed
Press and release + or - to adjust the volume of air circulated in the vehicle.
125
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Climate Control
Setting the Temperature
E265862
Turn the control on the left-hand side of the climate control to set the left-hand temperature. Note: This control also sets the right-hand side temperature when you switch off dual zone mode. Turn the control on the right-hand side of the climate control to set the right-hand temperature. Switching Auto Mode On and Off
Press and release the button to switch on automatic operation, then set the temperature. The system adjusts the blower motor speed, air distribution, air conditioning operation, and outside or recirculated air to reach and maintain the temperature you have set. Note: You can also switch off dual zone mode by pressing and holding the button for more than two seconds.
Switching the Air Conditioning On and Off
Press and release the button to switch the air conditioning on or off.
Use air conditioning with recirculated air to improve cooling performance and efficiency.
Note: In certain conditions (for example, maximum defrost) the air conditioning compressor may continue to operate even though you switch off the air conditioning.
Switching the Climate Control On and Off
Press and release the button.
Switching Defrost On and Off
Press and release the button to distribute air through the windshield air vents and de-mister.
Air directed to the instrument panel and footwell air vents turns off. You can also use this setting to defog and clear the windshield of a thin covering of ice.
Switching Maximum Air Conditioning On and Off
Press and release the button for maximum cooling.
The left-hand and right-hand settings set to LO, recirculated air flows through the instrument panel air vents, air conditioning turns on and the blower motor adjusts to the highest speed.
126
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Climate Control
Switching Maximum Defrost On and Off
Press and release the button to switch on maximum defrost.
The left-hand and right-hand settings set to HI, air flows through the windshield air vents, and the blower motor adjusts to the highest speed. You can also use this setting to defog and clear the windshield of a thin covering of ice. The heated rear window also turns on when you select maximum defrost.
Note: To prevent window fogging, you cannot select recirculated air when maximum defrost is on.
Switching Recirculated Air On and Off
Press and release the button to switch between outside air and recirculated air.
The air currently in the passenger compartment recirculates. This may reduce the time needed to cool the interior (when used with A/C) and reduce unwanted odors from entering your vehicle.
Note: Recirculated air may turn off (or prevent you from switching on) in all air flow modes except MAX A/C to reduce the risk of fogging. Recirculation may also turn on and off in various air distribution control combinations during hot weather in order to improve cooling efficiency.
HINTS ON CONTROLLING THE INTERIOR CLIMATE
General Hints
Note: Prolonged use of recirculated air may cause the windows to fog up.
Note: You may feel a small amount of air from the footwell air vents regardless of the air distribution setting.
Note: To reduce humidity build-up inside your vehicle, do not drive with the system switched off or with recirculated air always switched on.
Note: Do not place objects under the front seats as this may interfere with the airflow to the rear seats.
Note: Remove any snow, ice or leaves from the air intake area at the base of the windshield.
Note: To improve the time to reach a comfortable temperature in hot weather, drive with the windows open until you feel cold air through the air vents.
Manual Climate Control
Note: To reduce fogging of the windshield during humid weather, adjust the air distribution control to the windshield air vents position.
Automatic Climate Control
Note: Adjusting the settings when your vehicle interior is extremely hot or cold is not necessary. The system automatically adjusts to heat or cool the interior to your selected temperature as quickly as possible. For the system to function efficiently, the instrument panel and side air vents should be fully open.
Note: If you select AUTO during cold temperatures, the system directs airflow to the windshield and side window vents. In addition, the fan may run at a slower speed until the engine warms up.
Note: If you select AUTO during hot temperatures and the inside of the vehicle is hot, the system automatically uses recirculated air to maximize interior cooling. Fan speed may also reduce until the air cools.
127
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Climate Control
Quickly Heating the Interior
Manual climate control
1 Adjust the fan speed to the highest setting.
2 Adjust the temperature control to the full heat setting.
3 Direct air to the footwell using the air distribution buttons.
Automatic climate control Press AUTO.
Adjust the temperature control to the desired setting.
Recommended Settings for Heating
Manual climate control 1 Adjust the fan speed to the center
setting. 2 Adjust the temperature control to the
midway point of the hot settings.
3 Direct air to the footwell using the air distribution buttons.
Automatic climate control
Press AUTO.
Adjust the temperature control to the desired setting. Use 72°F (22°C) as a starting point, then adjust the setting as necessary.
Quickly Cooling the Interior
Manual climate control
1 Select MAX A/C.
2 Drive with the windows open until you feel cold air through the air vents.
Automatic climate control Select MAX A/C.
128
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Climate Control
Recommended Settings for Cooling
Manual climate control
Automatic climate control
1 Adjust the fan speed to the center setting.
Press AUTO.
2 Adjust the temperature control to the midway point of the cold settings.
Adjust the temperature control to the desired setting. Use 72°F (22°C) as a starting point, then adjust the setting as necessary.
3 Direct air to the instrument panel using the air distribution buttons.
Defogging the Side Windows in Cold Weather
Manual climate control
Automatic climate control
1 Direct air to the windshield using the air Press the defrost button. distribution buttons.
2 Press A/C.
Adjust the temperature control to the desired setting. Use 72°F (22°C) as a starting point, then adjust the setting as necessary.
3 Adjust the temperature control to the desired setting.
4 Adjust the fan speed to the highest setting.
HEATED REAR WINDOW
Press the button to clear the rear window of thin ice and fog. The E184884 heated rear window turns off after a short period of time.
Note: Do not use harsh chemicals, razor blades or other sharp objects to clean or remove decals from the inside of the heated rear window. The vehicle warranty may not cover damage to the heated rear window grid lines.
HEATED EXTERIOR MIRRORS
(IF EQUIPPED)
When you switch the heated rear window on, the heated exterior mirrors turn on. Note: Do not remove ice from the mirrors with a scraper or adjust the mirror glass when it is frozen in place.
129
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Climate Control
Note: Do not clean the mirror housing or glass with harsh abrasives, fuel or other petroleum-based cleaning products. The vehicle warranty may not cover damage caused to the mirror housing or glass.
CABIN AIR FILTER
Your vehicle is equipped with a cabin air filter, which gives you and your passengers the following benefits:
· It improves your driving comfort by reducing particle concentration.
· It improves the interior compartment cleanliness.
· It protects the climate control components from particle deposits.
You can locate the cabin air filter behind the glove box.
Note: Make sure you have a cabin air filter installed at all times. This prevents foreign objects from entering the system. Running the system without a filter in place could result in degradation or damage to the system.
Replace the filter at regular intervals. See Scheduled Maintenance (page 476).
For additional cabin air filter information, or to replace the filter, see an authorized dealer.
REMOTE START (IF EQUIPPED)
The climate control system adjusts the interior temperature during remote start.
You can switch this feature on or off and adjust the settings using the information display controls. See Information Displays (page 97).
You cannot adjust the climate control setting during remote start operation. Switch the ignition on to make adjustments.
Based on your remote start settings, the following vehicle-dependent features may or may not remain on after remote starting your vehicle: · Climate controlled seats. · Heated steering wheel. · Heated mirrors. · Heated rear window. · Windshield wiper de-icer.
Note: For dual zone climate controlled seats, the passenger seat setting defaults to match the driver seat during remote start.
Automatic Settings
If Auto is on, the system sets the interior temperature to 72°F (22°C) and heats or cools the vehicle interior as required to achieve comfort.
Note: In cold weather, the heated rear window and heated mirrors turn on.
Last Settings
If Last Settings is on, the system uses the settings last selected before you turned off the vehicle.
Heated and Cooled Features
In Auto mode, certain heated features may switch on during cold weather, and cooled features during hot weather.
130
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Seats
SITTING IN THE CORRECT POSITION
WARNING: Sitting improperly, out of position or with the seatback reclined too far can take weight off the seat cushion and affect the decision of the passenger sensing system, resulting in serious injury or death in the event of a crash. Always sit upright against your seat back, with your feet on the floor.
WARNING: Do not recline the seatback too far as this can cause the occupant to slide under the seatbelt, resulting in serious injury in the event of a collision.
WARNING: Do not place objects higher than the top of the seat backrest. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury or death in the event of a sudden stop or crash.
We recommend that you follow these guidelines:
· Sit in an upright position with the base of your spine as far back as possible.
· Do not recline the seat backrest so that your torso is more than 30° from the upright position.
· Adjust the head restraint so that the top of it is level with the top of your head and as far forward as possible. Make sure that you remain comfortable.
· Keep sufficient distance between yourself and the steering wheel. We recommend a minimum of 10 in (25 cm) between your breastbone and the airbag cover.
· Hold the steering wheel with your arms slightly bent.
· Bend your legs slightly so that you can press the pedals fully.
· Position the shoulder strap of the seatbelt over the center of your shoulder and position the lap strap tightly across your hips.
Make sure that your driving position is comfortable and that you can maintain full control of your vehicle.
HEAD RESTRAINTS
E68595
When you use them properly, the seat, head restraint, seatbelt and airbags will provide optimum protection in the event of a crash.
WARNING: Fully adjust the head restraint before you sit in or operate your vehicle. This will help minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a crash. Do not adjust the head restraint when your vehicle is moving.
131
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Seats
WARNING: The head restraint is a safety device. Whenever possible it should be installed and properly adjusted when the seat is occupied. Failure to adjust the head restraint properly could reduce its effectiveness during certain impacts.
Note: Adjust the seat backrest to an upright driving position before adjusting the head restraint. Adjust the head restraint so that the top of it is level with the top of your head and as far forward as possible. Make sure that you remain comfortable. If you are extremely tall, adjust the head restraint to its highest position. Front Seat and Rear Seat Outboard Head Restraints
E138642
Rear Center Head Restraint
The head restraints consist of:
A An energy absorbing head restraint.
B Two steel stems. C Guide sleeve adjust and unlock
button. D Guide sleeve unlock and remove
button (If Equipped).
Adjusting the Head Restraint
Raising the Head Restraint
Pull the head restraint up.
Lowering the Head Restraint
1. Press and hold button C. 2. Push the head restraint down.
Removing the Head Restraint (If Equipped)
1. Pull the head restraint up until it reaches its highest position.
2. Press and hold buttons C and D. 3. Pull the head restraint up.
Installing the Head Restraint
Align the steel stems into the guide sleeves and push the head restraint down until it locks.
E138645
132
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Seats
Tilting Head Restraints (If Equipped)
WARNING: Reclining the seatback can cause an occupant to slide under the seat's safety belt, resulting in severe personal injuries in the event of a crash.
The driver and passenger manual seats may consist of:
E144727
The front head restraints tilt for extra comfort.
1. Adjust the seat backrest to an upright driving or riding position.
2. Pivot the head restraint forward toward your head to the desired position.
After the head restraint reaches the forward-most tilt position, pivot it forward again to release it to the rearward, un-tilted position.
MANUAL SEATS (IF EQUIPPED)
E144631
A B C D
A BC D
A bar to move the seat backward and forward.
A control to adjust the lumbar of the seatback (driver seat only).
A lever to adjust the height of the seat (driver seat only).
A lever to adjust the angle of the seatback.
WARNING: Do not adjust the driver seat or seatback when your vehicle is moving.
WARNING: Rock the seat backward and forward after releasing the lever to make sure that it is fully engaged.
POWER SEATS (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: Do not adjust the driver seat or seatback when your vehicle is moving.
WARNING: Do not place cargo or any objects behind the seatback before returning it to the original position.
133
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Seats
Note: Driver seat shown, passenger seat similar. 6-way power seat
E176793
134
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
10-way power seat
Seats
E144632
Power Lumbar (If Equipped)
E165608
MEMORY FUNCTION (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: Before activating the memory seat, make sure that the area immediately surrounding the seat is clear of obstructions and that all occupants are clear of moving parts.
WARNING: Do not use the memory function when your vehicle is moving.
This feature automatically recalls the position of the following features:
135
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Seats
· Driver seat. · Power mirrors. · Power steering column. The memory control is on the driver door.
E223340
Saving a PreSet Position 1. Adjust the memory features to your
desired position. 2. Press the SET button until you hear a
single tone. 3. Press the desired preset button until
you hear a single tone. You can save up to two preset memory positions. You can save a memory preset at any time.
Recalling a PreSet Position Press and release the preset button associated with your desired driving position. The memory features move to the position stored for that preset. Note: You can only recall a preset memory position when you switch the ignition off, or when the transmission is in park (P) or neutral (N) if the ignition is on and the vehicle is not moving. You can also recall a preset memory position by: · Pressing the unlock button on your
intelligent access key fob if it is linked to a preset position. · Unlocking the intelligent driver door handle if a linked key fob is present.
Note: Using a linked key fob to recall your memory position when the ignition is off moves the seat to the Easy Entry position.
Note: Pressing any active memory feature control - power seat, mirror, or steering column (or any memory button) during a memory recall cancels the operation.
Linking a PreSet Position to your Remote Control or Intelligent Access Key Fob
Your vehicle can save the preset memory positions for up to two remote controls or intelligent access (IA) keys.
After you have saved your desired memory preset positions:
1. Press and hold the desired preset button for about three seconds until you hear a single tone.
2. Within three seconds, press the lock button on the remote control you are linking.
To unlink a remote control, follow the same procedure except in step 2, press the unlock button on the remote control.
Note: If more than one linked remote control or intelligent access key is in range, the memory function moves to the settings of the first key to initiate a memory recall.
Easy Entry and Exit Feature
If you enable the easy entry and exit feature, it automatically moves the driver seat position rearward up to 2 in (5 cm) when you switch the ignition off.
The driver seat returns to the previous position when you switch the ignition on.
You can enable or disable this feature in the information display. See General Information (page 97).
136
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Seats
REAR SEATS
Note: Your vehicle may have split seatbacks that you must fold individually. Note: Make sure the center safety belt is unbuckled before folding the seatback. To lower the seat back(s) from inside the vehicle, do the following:
E164098
3. Stow the safety belt in the stowage clip. This will prevent the safety belt from getting caught in the seat latch.
When raising the seat back(s), make sure you hear the seat latch into place.
E144634
1. Pull the handle to release the seatback. 2. Push the seatback forward.
137
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Seats
HEATED SEATS (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: Use caution when using the heated seat if you are unable to feel pain to your skin because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical conditions. The heated seat could cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if used for long periods of time. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury.
WARNING: Do not place anything on the seat that blocks the heat, for example a seat cover or a cushion. This could cause the seat to overheat. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury.
WARNING: Do not poke sharp objects into the seat cushion or seat backrest. This could damage the heated seat element and cause it to overheat. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury.
Do not do the following:
· Place heavy objects on the seat.
· Operate the heated seat if water or any other liquid is spilled on the seat. Allow the seat to dry thoroughly.
· Operate the heated seats unless the engine is running. Doing so can cause the battery to lose charge.
E146941
Press the heated seat symbol to cycle through the various heat settings and off. Warmer settings are indicated by more indicator lights.
CLIMATE CONTROLLED SEATS
(IF EQUIPPED)
Heated Seats
WARNING: Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other physical conditions, must exercise care when using the seat heater. The seat heater may cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if used for long periods of time. Do not place anything on the seat that insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion, because this may cause the seat heater to overheat. Do not puncture the seat with pins, needles, or other pointed objects because this may damage the heating element which may cause the seat heater to overheat. An overheated seat may cause serious personal injury.
138
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Seats
Do not do the following:
· Place heavy objects on the seat.
· Operate the seat heater if water or any other liquid spills on the seat. Allow the seat to dry thoroughly.
· Operate the heated seats unless the engine is running. Doing so can cause the battery to lose charge.
Climate controlled seat air filter replacement
Your vehicle is equipped with lifetime air filters that are integrated with the seats. Regular maintenance or replacement is not needed.
E146322
Press the heated seat symbol to cycle through the various heat settings and off. More indicator lights indicate warmer settings.
Cooled Seats
The cooled seats will only function when the engine is running.
E146309
To operate the cooled seats: Press the cooled seat symbol to cycle through the various cooling settings and off. More indicator lights indicate cooler settings. If the engine falls below 350 RPM while the cooled seats are on, the feature will turn itself off. You will need to reactivate it.
139
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Garage Door Opener (If Equipped)
UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR OPENER
HomeLink Wireless Control System
WARNING: Do not use the system with any garage door opener that does not have the safety stop and reverse feature as required by U.S. Federal Safety Standards (this includes any garage door opener manufactured before April 1, 1982). A garage door opener which cannot detect an object, signaling the door to stop and reverse, does not meet current federal safety standards. Using a garage door opener without these features increases the risk of serious injury or death.
Note: Make sure that the garage door and security device are free from obstruction when you are programming. Do not program the system with the vehicle in the garage.
Note: Make sure you keep the original remote control transmitter for use in other vehicles as well as for future system programming.
Note: We recommend that upon the sale or lease termination of your vehicle, you erase the programmed function buttons for security reasons. See Erasing the Function Button Codes.
Note: You can program a maximum of three devices. To change or replace any of the three devices after it has been initially programmed, you must first erase the current settings. See Erasing the Function Button Codes.
E142657
The universal garage door opener replaces the common hand-held garage door opener with a three-button transmitter that is integrated into the driver's sun visor.
The system includes two primary features, a garage door opener and a platform for remote activation of devices within the home. As well as being programmed for garage doors, the system transmitter can be programmed to operate entry gate operators, security systems, entry door locks and home or office lighting.
Additional system information can be found online at www.homelink.com, www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex or by calling the toll-free help line on 1-800-355-3515.
In-Vehicle Programming
This process is to program your hand-held transmitter and your in-vehicle HomeLink button.
Note: The programming steps below assume you will be programming HomeLink that was not previously programmed.
Note: Put a new battery in the hand-held transmitter. This will ensure quicker training and accurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal.
140
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Garage Door Opener (If Equipped)
E142658
1. With your vehicle parked outside of the garage, turn your ignition to the on position, but do not start your vehicle.
2. Hold your hand-held garage door transmitter 26 in (514 cm) away from the HomeLink button you want to program.
3. Using both hands, simultaneously, press and hold the desired HomeLink button and the hand-held transmitter button. DO NOT release either one until the HomeLink indicator light flashes slowly and then rapidly. When the indicator light flashes rapidly, both buttons may be released. The rapid flashing indicates successful training.
Note: You may need to use a different method if you live in Canada or have difficulties programming your gate operator or garage door opener. See Gate Operator / Canadian Programming.
4. Press and hold the HomeLink button you programmed for two seconds, then release. You may need to do this twice to activate the door. If your garage door does not operate, watch the HomeLink indicator light.
If the indicator light stays on, the programming is complete. No further action is needed.
If the indicator light flashes rapidly for 2 seconds and then turns to a constant light, the HomeLink button is not programmed yet. See Programming Your Garage Door Opener Motor.
To program additional buttons, repeat Steps 1 4. For questions or comments, please contact HomeLink at www.homelink.com, www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex or 1-800-355-3515. Programming Your Garage Door Opener Motor Note: You may need a ladder to reach the unit and you may need to remove the cover or lamp lens on your garage door opener.
E142659
1. Press the learn button on the garage door opener motor and then you have 30 seconds to complete the next two steps.
2. Return to your vehicle.
E142658
3. Press and hold the function button you want to program for 2 seconds, then release. Repeat this step. Depending on your brand of garage door opener, you may need to repeat this sequence a third time.
141
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Garage Door Opener (If Equipped)
Gate Operator / Canadian Programming
Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter signals to "time-out" (or quit) after several seconds of transmission which may not be long enough for HomeLink to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to "time-out" in the same manner.
Note: If programming a garage door opener or gate operator, it is advised to unplug the device during the "cycling" process to prevent possible overheating.
1. Press and hold the HomeLink button while you press and release, every two seconds, your hand-held transmitter until the HomeLink indicator light changes from a slow to a rapidly blinking light.
2. Release both the HomeLink and hand-held transmitter buttons.
3. Continue programing HomeLink. See In-Vehicle Programming.
Erasing the Function Button Codes
Note: You cannot erase individual buttons.
1. Press and hold the outer two function buttons simultaneously for approximately 20 seconds until the indicator lights above the buttons flash rapidly.
2. When the indicator lights flash, release the buttons. The codes for all buttons are erased.
Reprogramming a Single Button
To program a device to a previously trained button, follow these steps:
1. Press and hold the desired button. Do NOT release the button.
2. The indicator light will begin to flash after 20 seconds. Without releasing the button, follow Step 1 in the Programming section.
For questions or comments, contact HomeLink at www.homelink.com, www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex or 1-800-355-3515.
Programming to a Genie Intellicode 2 Garage Door Opener
Note: The Genie Intellicode 2 transmitter must already be programmed to operate with the garage door opener.
Note: To program HomeLink to the transmitter you must first put the transmitter into programming mode.
E142660
142
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Garage Door Opener (If Equipped)
A
B
E142661
A. Red indicator light
B. Green indicator light
1. Press and hold one of the buttons on the hand-held transmitter for 10 seconds. The indicator light will change from green to red and green.
2. Press the same button twice to confirm the change to programming mode. If done properly the indicator light will appear red.
3. Hold the transmitter within 13 in (28 cm) of the button on the visor you want to program.
4. Press and hold both the programmed Genie button on the hand-held transmitter and the button you want to program. The indicator light on the visor will flash rapidly when the programming is successful.
Note: The Genie transmitter will transmit for up to 30 seconds. If HomeLink does not program within 30 seconds the Genie transmitter will need to be pressed again. If the Genie transmitter indicator light displays green and red, release the button until the indicator light turns off before pressing the button again.
Once HomeLink has been programmed successfully, the Genie transmitter must be changed out of program mode. To do this:
1. Press and hold the previously programmed Genie button on the hand-held transmitter for 10 seconds. The indicator light will change from red to red and green.
2. Press the same button twice to confirm the change. If done correctly the indicator light will turn green.
Programming HomeLink to the Genie Intellicode Garage Door Opener Motor Note: You may need a ladder to access the garage door opener motor.
E142662
1. Press and hold the program button on the garage door opener motor until both blue indicator lights turn on.
2. Release the program button. Only the smaller round indicator light should be on.
3. Press and release the program button. The larger purple indicator light will flash.
Note: The next two steps must be completed in 30 seconds. 4. Press and release the Genie Intellicode
2 hand-held transmitter's previously programmed button. Both indicator lights on the garage door opener motor unit should now flash purple.
143
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Garage Door Opener (If Equipped)
5. Press and hold the previously programmed button on the visor for 2 seconds. Repeat this step up to 3 times until the garage door moves.
Programming is now complete. Clearing a HomeLink Device To erase programming from the three HomeLink buttons press and hold the two outer HomeLink buttons until the indicator light begins to flash. The indicator light will begin flashing in 10 to 20 seconds, at which time both buttons should be released. Programming has now been erased, and the indicator light should blink slowly to indicate the device is in train mode when any of the three HomeLink buttons are pressed. FCC and RSS-210 Industry Canada Compliance This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Changes or modifications to your device not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance can void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
144
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Auxiliary Power Points
12 Volt DC Power Point
WARNING: Do not plug optional electrical accessories into the cigar lighter socket. Incorrect use of the cigar lighter can cause damage not covered by the vehicle warranty, and can result in fire or serious injury.
Note: When you switch the ignition on, you can use the socket to power 12 volt appliances with a maximum current rating of 15 amps.
If the power supply does not work after you switch the ignition off, switch the ignition on. Note: Do not hang any accessory from the accessory plug.
Note: Do not use the power point over the vehicle capacity of 12 volt DC 180 watts or a fuse may blow.
Note: Always keep the power point caps closed when not in use.
Do not insert objects other than an accessory plug into the power point. This damages the power point and may blow the fuse.
Run the vehicle for full capacity use of the power point.
To prevent the battery from running out of charge:
· Do not use the power point longer than necessary when the vehicle is not running.
· Do not leave devices plugged in overnight or when you park your vehicle for extended periods.
Locations Power points may be in the following locations: · On the instrument panel. · Inside the center console. · On the rear of the center console. 110 Volt AC Power Point (If Equipped)
WARNING: Do not keep electrical devices plugged in the power point whenever the device is not in use. Do not use any extension cord with the 110 volt AC power point, since it will defeat the safety protection design. Doing so may cause the power point to overload due to powering multiple devices that can reach beyond the 150 watt load limit and could result in fire or serious injury.
Note: The power point turns off when you switch the ignition off, or when the battery voltage drops below 11 volts. You can use the power point for electric devices that require up to 150 watts. It is on the rear of the center console.
E193395
Note: Depending on your vehicle, the power point may open to the right or upward.
145
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Auxiliary Power Points
When the indicator light on the power point is: · On: The power point is working, the
ignition is on and a device is plugged in. · Off: The power point is off, the ignition is off or no device is plugged in. · Flashing: The power point is in fault mode. The power outlet temporarily turns off power when in fault mode if the device exceeds the 150 watt limit. Unplug your device and switch the ignition off. Switch the ignition back on, but do not plug your device back in. Let the system cool off and switch the ignition off to reset the fault mode. Switch the ignition back on and make sure the indicator light remains on. Do not use the power point for certain electric devices, including: · Cathode-ray, tube-type televisions. · Motor loads, such as vacuum cleaners, electric saws and other electric power tools or compressor-driven refrigerators. · Measuring devices, which process precise data, such as medical equipment or measuring equipment. · Other appliances requiring an extremely stable power supply such as microcomputer-controlled electric blankets or touch-sensor lamps.
146
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Storage Compartments
CENTER CONSOLE
Stow items in the cup holder carefully as items may become loose during hard braking, acceleration or crashes, including hot drinks which may spill.
Available console features include:
OVERHEAD CONSOLE
E224352
Press near the rear edge of the door to open it.
REAR SEAT ARMREST
E222012
A
B C D E F
Front storage compartment with USB ports and auxiliary power point.
Cup holder.
Storage compartment.
AC power point.
Auxiliary power point.
Switch pack.
E144635
Fold the armrest down to use the armrest and cupholder.
147
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Starting and Stopping the Engine
GENERAL INFORMATION
WARNING: Extended idling at high engine speeds can produce very high temperatures in the engine and exhaust system, creating the risk of fire or other damage.
WARNING: Do not park, idle or drive your vehicle on dry grass or other dry ground cover. The emission system heats up the engine compartment and exhaust system, creating the risk of fire.
WARNING: Do not start the engine in a closed garage or in other enclosed areas. Exhaust fumes can be toxic. Always open the garage door before you start the engine.
WARNING: Exhaust leaks may result in entry of harmful and potentially lethal fumes into the passenger compartment. If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle, have your vehicle inspected immediately. Do not drive if you smell exhaust fumes.
If you disconnect the battery, your vehicle may exhibit some unusual driving characteristics for approximately 5 mi (8 km) after you reconnect it. This is because the engine management system must realign itself with the engine. You can disregard any unusual driving characteristics during this period.
The powertrain control system meets all Canadian interference-causing equipment standard requirements regulating the impulse electrical field or radio noise.
When you start the engine, avoid pressing the accelerator pedal before and during operation. Only use the accelerator pedal when you have difficulty starting the engine.
KEYLESS STARTING
Note: The system may not function if the intelligent access key is close to metal objects or electronic devices, for example keys or a cell phone. Note: A valid intelligent access key must be located inside your vehicle to switch the ignition on and start your vehicle. Ignition Modes
E144447
The keyless starting system has three modes: Off: Turns the ignition off. · Without applying the brake pedal,
press and release the button once when the ignition is in the on mode, or when your vehicle is running but is not moving. On: All electrical circuits are operational and the warning lamps and indicators illuminate. · Without applying the brake pedal, press and release the button once.
148
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Starting and Stopping the Engine
Start: Starts your vehicle. The engine may not start when your vehicle starts.
· Press the brake pedal, and then press the button for any length of time. An indicator light on the button illuminates when the ignition is on and when your vehicle starts.
STARTING A GASOLINE ENGINE
When you start the engine, the idle speed increases. This helps to warm up the engine. If the engine idle speed does not slow down automatically, have your vehicle checked by an authorized dealer.
Note: You can crank the engine for a total of 60 seconds without the engine starting before the starting system temporarily disables. The 60 seconds does not have to be all at once. For example, if you crank the engine three times for 20 seconds each time, without the engine starting, you reached the 60-second time limit. A message appears in the information display alerting you that you exceeded the cranking time. You cannot attempt to start the engine for at least 15 minutes. After 15 minutes, you are limited to a 15-second engine cranking time. You need to wait 60 minutes before you can crank the engine for 60 seconds again.
Before starting your vehicle, check the following:
· Make sure all occupants have fastened their seatbelts.
· Make sure the headlamps and electrical accessories are off.
· Make sure the parking brake is on.
· Make sure the transmission is in park (P).
Starting Your Vehicle
Note: Do not touch the accelerator pedal.
Note: You must have your intelligent access key in your vehicle to shift the transmission out of park (P). 1. Fully depress the brake pedal. 2. Press the push button ignition switch. Failure to Start The system does not function if: · The key frequencies are jammed. · The key battery has no charge. If you are unable to start your vehicle, do the following: 1. Remove the key blade from the
transmitter.
E155835
2. Remove the rubber covering (A) from the cup holder. With the buttons facing upward and the unlock button facing the front of your vehicle, place the first intelligent access key into the backup slot (B).
3. Press the push button ignition switch. If you cannot start the engine after three attempts, wait 10 seconds and follow this procedure: 1. Apply the parking brake. 2. Fully depress the brake pedal. 3. Shift into park (P). 4. Fully press the accelerator pedal.
149
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Starting and Stopping the Engine
5. Briefly press the push button ignition switch.
Fast Restart
The fast restart feature allows you to restart your vehicle within 20 seconds of switching it off, even if it does not detect a valid passive key.
Within 20 seconds of switching the engine off, press the brake pedal and press the push button ignition switch. After 20 seconds, you can no longer start your vehicle if it does not detect a valid passive key.
Once your vehicle starts, it remains running until you press the push button ignition switch, even if your vehicle does not detect a valid passive key. If you open and close a door while your vehicle is running, the system searches for a valid passive key. After 20 seconds, you can no longer start your vehicle if it does not detect a valid passive key.
Automatic Engine Shutdown
This feature automatically shuts down your vehicle if it has been idling for an extended period. The ignition also turns off to save battery power. Before your vehicle shuts down, a message appears in the information display showing a timer counting down. If you do not intervene within 30 seconds, your vehicle shuts down. Another message appears in the information display to inform you that your vehicle has shut down to save fuel. Start your vehicle as normal.
Automatic Engine Shutdown Override
Note: You cannot permanently switch off the automatic shutdown. When you switch it off temporarily, it turns on at the next ignition cycle.
You can stop the shutdown, or reset the timer, at any point before the 30-second countdown has expired by doing any of the following:
· Interacting with your vehicle, for example pressing the brake or accelerator pedal.
· You can temporarily switch off the shutdown any time the ignition is on using the information display. See Information Displays (page 97).
· During the countdown before shutdown, you are prompted to press OK or RESET (depending on your type of information display) to temporarily switch the feature off (for the current ignition cycle only).
Stopping the Engine When Your Vehicle is Stationary
Note: The ignition, all electrical circuits and all warning lamps and indicators will be turned off.
Note: If your vehicle is left running for 30 minutes without any interaction, it automatically shuts down.
1. Apply the parking brake.
2. Shift into park (P).
3. Briefly press the push button ignition switch.
150
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Starting and Stopping the Engine
Stopping the Engine When Your Vehicle is Moving
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (IF
EQUIPPED)
WARNING: Switching off the engine when the vehicle is still moving will result in a loss of brake and steering assistance. The steering will not lock, but higher effort will be required. When the ignition is switched off, some electrical circuits, including air bags, warning lamps and indicators may also be off. If the ignition was turned off accidentally, you can shift into neutral (N) and re-start the engine.
1. Shift into neutral and use the brakes to bring your vehicle to a safe stop.
2. When your vehicle has stopped, shift into park (P).
3. Apply the parking brake.
4. Press and hold the push button ignition switch, or press it three times within two seconds.
Guarding Against Exhaust Fumes
WARNING: If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle, have your vehicle checked by your authorized dealer immediately. Do not drive your vehicle if you smell exhaust fumes. Carbon monoxide is present in exhaust fumes. Take precautions to avoid its dangerous effects.
Important Ventilating Information
If you stop your vehicle and then leave the engine idling for long periods, we recommend that you do one of the following: · Open the windows at least 1 in (3 cm). · Set your climate control to outside air.
WARNING: Failure to follow engine block heater instructions could result in property damage or serious personal injury.
WARNING: Do not use your heater with ungrounded electrical systems or two-pronged adapters. There is a risk of electrical shock.
Note: The heater is most effective when outdoor temperatures are below 0°F (-18°C).
The heater acts as a starting aid by warming the engine coolant. This allows the climate control system to respond quickly. The equipment includes a heater element (installed in the engine block) and a wire harness. You can connect the system to a grounded 120-volt AC electrical source.
We recommend that you do the following for a safe and correct operation:
· Use a 16-gauge outdoor extension cord that is product certified by Underwriter's Laboratory (UL) or Canadian Standards Association (CSA). This extension cord must be suitable for use outdoors, in cold temperatures, and be clearly marked Suitable for Use with Outdoor Appliances. Do not use an indoor extension cord outdoors. This could result in an electric shock or become a fire hazard.
· Use as short an extension cord as possible.
· Do not use multiple extension cords.
151
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Starting and Stopping the Engine
· Make sure that when in operation, the extension cord plug and heater cord plug connections are free and clear of water. This could cause an electric shock or fire.
· Make sure your vehicle is parked in a clean area, clear of combustibles.
· Make sure the heater, heater cord and extension cord are firmly connected.
· Check for heat anywhere in the electrical hookup once the system has been operating for approximately 30 minutes.
· Make sure the heater system is checked for proper operation before winter.
Using the Engine Block Heater The engine block heater plug is located in a housing in the left fog lamp bezel. Open the hinged, circular door and make sure the receptacle terminals are clean and dry prior to use. Clean them with a dry cloth if necessary. The heater uses 0.4 to 1.0 kilowatt-hours of energy per hour of use. The system does not have a thermostat. It will achieve maximum temperature after approximately three hours of operation. If you use the heater longer than three hours, this will not improve system performance and will use unnecessary electricity.
152
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Unique Driving Characteristics
AUTO-START-STOP (IF EQUIPPED)
The system helps reduce fuel consumption by automatically shutting off and restarting the engine while your vehicle is stopped. The engine will restart automatically when you release the brake pedal. In some situations, your vehicle may restart automatically, for example:
· To maintain interior comfort · To recharge the battery
Note: Power assist steering is turned off when the engine is off.
WARNING: Always fully apply the parking brake. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury or death.
WARNING: Apply the parking brake, shift into park (P), switch the ignition off and remove the key before you leave your vehicle. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury or death.
WARNING: The system may require the engine to automatically restart when the auto-start-stop indicator illuminates green or flashes amber. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury.
The Auto-Start-Stop system status is available at a glance within the information display. See Information Displays (page 97).
Enabling Auto-Start-Stop
The system is automatically enabled every time you start your vehicle if the following conditions are met:
· The Auto-Start-Stop button is not pressed (not illuminated).
· Your vehicle exceeds an initial speed of 3 mph (5 km/h) after you have initially started the vehicle.
· Your vehicle is stopped.
· Your foot is on the brake pedal.
· The transmission is in drive (D).
· The driver's door is closed.
· There is adequate brake vacuum.
· The interior compartment has been cooled or warmed to an acceptable level.
· The front windshield defroster is off.
· The steering wheel is not turned rapidly or is not at a sharp angle.
· The vehicle is not on a steep road grade.
· The battery is within optimal operating conditions (battery state of charge and temperature in range).
· The engine coolant is at operating temperature.
· Elevation is below approximately 12,000 ft (3,650 m).
· Ambient temperature is moderate.
The green Auto-Start-Stop indicator light on the instrument cluster will illuminate to indicate when the automatic engine stop occurs.
If the instrument cluster is equipped with a grey E146361 Auto-Start-Stop indicator light, it is illuminated when automatic engine stop is not available due to one of the above noted conditions not being met.
Automatic Engine Restart
Any of the following conditions will result in an automatic restart of the engine:
153
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Unique Driving Characteristics
· Your foot is removed from the brake pedal.
· You press the accelerator pedal.
· You press the accelerator and the brake pedal at the same time.
· The driver safety belt becomes unfastened or the driver door is ajar.
· The transmission is moved into reverse (R).
· Your vehicle is moving.
· The battery is not within optimal operating conditions.
· The maximum engine off time is exceeded.
· When you press the Auto-Start-Stop button while the engine is stopped automatically.
· The heated windshield is turned on.
Any of the following conditions may result in an automatic restart of the engine:
· The blower fan speed is increased or the climate control temperature is changed.
· An electrical accessory is turned on or plugged in.
Disabling Auto-Start-Stop
Press the Auto-Start-Stop button located on the center console to switch the system off. The button will illuminate. The system will only be deactivated for the current ignition cycle. Press the button again to restore Auto-Start-Stop function.
If your vehicle is in an Auto-Start-Stop state and you shift the transmission to reverse without pressing the brake, a message telling you to press the brake appears. You must press the brake pedal within 60 seconds, or you will need to shift to park and manually restart your vehicle.
Note: If the Shift to P, Restart Engine message appears and the amber Auto-Start-Stop indicator light is flashing, automatic restart is not available. The vehicle must be restarted manually. See Information Displays (page 97).
154
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Fuel and Refueling
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: Do not overfill the fuel tank. The pressure in an overfilled tank may cause leakage and lead to fuel spray and fire.
WARNING: The fuel system may be under pressure. If you hear a hissing sound near the fuel filler inlet, do not refuel until the sound stops. Otherwise, fuel may spray out, which could cause serious personal injury.
WARNING: Fuels can cause serious injury or death if misused or mishandled.
WARNING: Fuel may contain benzene, which is a cancer-causing agent.
WARNING: When refueling always shut the engine off and never allow sparks or open flames near the fuel tank filler valve. Never smoke or use a cell phone while refueling. Fuel vapor is extremely hazardous under certain conditions. Avoid inhaling excess fumes.
Follow these guidelines when refueling: · Extinguish all smoking materials and
any open flames before refueling your vehicle. · Always switch the engine off before refueling. · Automotive fuels can be harmful or fatal if swallowed. Fuel is highly toxic and if swallowed can cause death or permanent injury. If fuel is swallowed immediately call a physician, even if no symptoms are immediately apparent. The toxic effects of fuel may not be apparent for hours.
· Avoid inhaling fuel vapors. Inhaling fuel vapor can lead to eye and respiratory tract irritation. In severe cases, excessive or prolonged breathing of fuel vapor can cause serious illness and permanent injury.
· Avoid getting fuel in your eyes. If you splash fuel in your eyes, immediately remove contact lenses (if worn), flush with water for 15 minutes and seek medical attention. Failure to seek proper medical attention could lead to permanent injury.
· Fuels can be harmful if absorbed through the skin. If you splash fuel on your skin, clothing or both, promptly remove contaminated clothing and thoroughly wash your skin with soap and water. Repeated or prolonged skin contact causes skin irritation.
· Be particularly careful if you are taking Antabuse or other forms of Disulfiram for the treatment of alcoholism. Breathing fuel vapors could cause an adverse reaction, serious personal injury or sickness. Immediately call a physician if you experience any adverse reactions.
FUEL QUALITY
Choosing the Right Fuel
E161513
Your vehicle is designed to operate on regular unleaded gasoline with a minimum pump (R+M)/2 octane rating of 87.
155
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Fuel and Refueling
Some fuel stations, particularly those in high altitude areas, offer fuels posted as regular unleaded gasoline with an octane rating below 87. The use of these fuels could result in engine damage that will not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
For best overall vehicle and engine performance, premium fuel with an octane rating of 91 or higher is recommended. The performance gained by using premium fuel is most noticeable in hot weather as well as other conditions, for example when towing a trailer. See Towing (page 224).
Do not be concerned if the engine sometimes knocks lightly. However, if the engine knocks heavily while using fuel with the recommended octane rating, contact an authorized dealer to prevent any engine damage.
We recommend Top Tier detergent gasolines, where available to help minimize engine deposits and maintain optimal vehicle and engine performance. For additional information, refer to www.toptiergas.com.
Note: Use of any fuel for which the vehicle was not designed can impair the emission control system, cause loss of vehicle performance, and cause damage to the engine which may not be covered by the vehicle Warranty.
Do not use:
· Diesel fuel.
· Fuels containing kerosene or paraffin.
· Fuel containing more than 15% ethanol or E85 fuel.
· Fuels containing methanol.
· Fuels containing metallic-based additives, including manganese-based compounds.
· Fuels containing the octane booster additive, methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl (MMT).
· Leaded fuel, using leaded fuel is prohibited by law.
The use of fuels with metallic compounds such as methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl (commonly known as MMT), which is a manganese-based fuel additive, will impair engine performance and affect the emission control system.
FUEL FILLER FUNNEL LOCATION
The fuel filler funnel is under the luggage compartment floor covering.
E162864
156
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Fuel and Refueling
RUNNING OUT OF FUEL
Running out of fuel can cause damage not covered by the vehicle Warranty.
If your vehicle runs out of fuel: · Add a minimum of 1.3 gal (5 L) of fuel
to restart the engine. · You may need to switch the ignition
from off to on several times after refueling to allow the fuel system to pump the fuel from the tank to the engine. When restarting, cranking time takes a few seconds longer than normal.
Note: If your vehicle is on a steep slope, more fuel may be required.
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
WARNING: Flow of fuel through a fuel pump nozzle can produce static electricity. This can cause a fire if you are filling an ungrounded fuel container.
Use the following guidelines to avoid electrostatic charge build-up, which can produce a spark, when filling an ungrounded fuel container: · Only use an approved fuel container to
transfer fuel to your vehicle. Place the container on the ground when filling it. · Do not fill a fuel container when it is inside your vehicle (including the cargo area). · Keep the fuel pump nozzle in contact with the fuel container when filling it. · Do not use a device that holds the fuel pump nozzle lever in the fill position.
Adding Fuel From a Portable Fuel Container
WARNING: Do not insert the nozzle of a fuel container or an aftermarket funnel into the fuel filler neck. This may damage the fuel system filler neck or its seal and cause fuel to run onto the ground.
WARNING: Do not try to pry open or push open the capless fuel system with foreign objects. This could damage the fuel system and its seal and cause injury to you or others.
WARNING: Do not dispose of fuel in the household refuse or the public sewage system. Use an authorized waste disposal facility.
When refueling the vehicle fuel tank from a fuel container, use the fuel filler funnel included with your vehicle. See Fuel Filler Funnel Location (page 156).
Note: Do not use aftermarket funnels as they may not work with the capless fuel system and can damage it.
When refueling the vehicle fuel tank from a fuel container, do the following:
1. Fully open the fuel filler door. 2. Fully insert the fuel filler funnel into the
fuel filler inlet.
157
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Fuel and Refueling
REFUELING Refueling System Overview
A
B
E157452
3. Add fuel to your vehicle from the fuel container.
4. Remove the fuel filler funnel.
5. Fully close the fuel filler door.
6. Clean the fuel filler funnel and place it back in your vehicle or correctly dispose of it.
Note: Extra funnels can be purchased from an authorized dealer if you choose to dispose of the funnel.
C
E267248
A Fuel filler door. B Fuel tank filler valve. C Fuel tank filler pipe.
Your vehicle does not have a fuel tank filler cap.
158
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Fuel and Refueling
A
B
C
D
E206911
A Left-hand side. To open the fuel filler door, press the center rear edge of the fuel filler door and then release.
B Right-hand side. To open the fuel filler door, press the center rear edge of the fuel filler door and then release.
C Left-hand side. Pull the rear of the fuel filler door to open it.
D Right-hand side. Pull the rear of the fuel filler door to open it.
Refueling Your Vehicle
WARNING: When refueling always shut the engine off and never allow sparks or open flames near the fuel tank filler valve. Never smoke or use a cell phone while refueling. Fuel vapor is extremely hazardous under certain conditions. Avoid inhaling excess fumes.
WARNING: The fuel system may be under pressure. If you hear a hissing sound near the fuel filler inlet, do not refuel until the sound stops. Otherwise, fuel may spray out, which could cause serious personal injury.
WARNING: Do not pry open the fuel tank filler valve. This could damage the fuel system. Failure to follow this instruction could result in fire, personal injury or death.
WARNING: Do not remove the fuel pump nozzle from its fully inserted position when refueling.
WARNING: Stop refueling when the fuel pump nozzle automatically shuts off for the first time. Failure to follow this will fill the expansion space in the fuel tank and could lead to fuel overflowing.
WARNING: Do not overfill the fuel tank. The pressure in an overfilled tank may cause leakage and lead to fuel spray and fire.
WARNING: Wait at least five seconds before removing the fuel pump nozzle to allow any residual fuel to drain into the fuel tank.
1. Fully open the fuel filler door.
2. Select the correct fuel pump nozzle for your vehicle.
159
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Fuel and Refueling
A
B
A
E206912
5. Operate the fuel pump nozzle within the area shown.
E139202
3. Insert the fuel pump nozzle up to the first notch on the nozzle A. Keep the fuel pump nozzle resting on the fuel tank filler pipe.
A
B
E139203
4. Hold the fuel pump nozzle in position B when refueling. Holding the fuel pump nozzle in position A can affect the flow of fuel and shut off the fuel pump nozzle before the fuel tank is full.
E119081
6. When you finish refueling slightly raise the fuel pump nozzle and slowly remove it.
7. Fully close the fuel filler door. Do not attempt to start the engine if you have filled the fuel tank with incorrect fuel. Incorrect fuel use could cause damage not covered by the vehicle Warranty. Have your vehicle immediately checked.
Refueling System Warning(IfEquipped)
If the fuel tank filler valve does not fully close, a message could appear in the information display.
Message
Check Fuel Fill Inlet
If the message appears, do the following: 1. Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe
to do so and switch the engine off. 2. Shift into park (P) or neutral (N).
160
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Fuel and Refueling
3. Apply the parking brake.
4. Fully open the fuel filler door.
5. Check the fuel tank filler valve for any debris that may be restricting its movement.
6. Remove any debris from the fuel tank filler valve.
7. Fully insert a fuel pump nozzle or the fuel filler funnel provided with your vehicle into the fuel filler pipe. See Fuel Filler Funnel Location (page 156). This action should dislodge any debris that may be preventing the fuel tank filler valve from fully closing.
8. Remove the fuel pump nozzle or fuel filler funnel from the fuel filler pipe.
9. Fully close the fuel filler door.
Note: The message may not immediately reset. If the message continues to appear and a warning lamp illuminates, have your vehicle checked as soon as possible.
FUEL CONSUMPTION
Advertised Capacity
The advertised capacity is the maximum amount of fuel that you can add to the fuel tank after running out of fuel. Included in the advertised capacity is an empty reserve. The empty reserve is an unspecified amount of fuel that remains in the fuel tank when the fuel gauge indicates empty.
Note: The amount of fuel in the empty reserve varies and should not be relied upon to increase driving range.
Fuel Economy
Your vehicle calculates fuel economy figures through the trip computer average fuel function. See General Information (page 97).
The first 1,000 mi (1,500 km) of driving is the break-in period of the engine. A more accurate measurement is obtained after 2,000 mi (3,000 km).
Impacting Fuel Economy
· Incorrect tire inflation pressures.
· Fully loading your vehicle.
· Carrying unnecessary weight.
· Adding certain accessories to your vehicle such as bug deflectors, rollbars or light bars, running boards and ski racks.
· Using fuel blended with alcohol. See Fuel Quality (page 155).
· Fuel economy may decrease with lower temperatures.
· Fuel economy may decrease when driving short distances.
· You may get better fuel economy when driving on flat terrain than when driving on hilly terrain.
161
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Engine Emission Control
EMISSION LAW
WARNING: Do not remove or alter the original equipment floor covering or insulation between it and the metal floor of the vehicle. The floor covering and insulation protect occupants of the vehicle from the engine and exhaust system heat and noise. On vehicles with no original equipment floor covering insulation, do not carry passengers in a manner that permits prolonged skin contact with the metal floor. Failure to follow these instructions may result in fire or personal injury.
U.S. federal laws and certain state laws prohibit removing or rendering inoperative emission control system components. Similar federal or provincial laws may apply in Canada. We do not approve of any vehicle modification without first determining applicable laws.
Tampering with emissions control systems including related sensors or the Diesel Exhaust Fluid system can result in reduced engine power and the illumination of the service engine soon light.
Tampering With a Noise Control System
Federal laws prohibit the following acts:
· Removal or rendering inoperative by any person other than for purposes of maintenance.
· Repair or replacement of any device or element of the design incorporated into a new vehicle for the purpose of noise control prior to its sale or delivery to the ultimate purchaser or while it is in use.
· The use of the vehicle after any person removes or renders inoperative any device or element of the design.
The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency may presume to constitute tampering as follows:
· Removal of hood blanket, fender apron absorbers, fender apron barriers, underbody noise shields or acoustically absorptive material.
· Tampering or rendering inoperative the engine speed governor, to allow engine speed to exceed manufacturer specifications.
If the engine does not start, runs rough, experiences a decrease in engine performance, experiences excess fuel consumption or produces excessive exhaust smoke, check for the following:
· A plugged or disconnected air inlet system hose.
· A plugged engine air filter element.
· Water in the fuel filter and water separator.
· A clogged fuel filter.
· Contaminated fuel.
· Air in the fuel system, due to loose connections.
· An open or pinched sensor hose.
· Incorrect engine oil level.
162
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Engine Emission Control
· Incorrect fuel for climatic conditions.
· Incorrect engine oil viscosity for climactic conditions.
Note: Some vehicles have a lifetime fuel filter that is integrated with the fuel tank. Regular maintenance or replacement is not needed.
Note: If these checks do not help you correct the concern, have your vehicle checked as soon as possible.
Noise Emissions Warranty, Prohibited Tampering Acts and Maintenance
On January 1, 1978, Federal regulation became effective governing the noise emission on trucks over 10,000 lb (4,536 kg) Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR). The preceding statements concerning prohibited tampering acts and maintenance, and the noise warranty found in the Warranty Guide, are applicable to complete chassis cabs over 10,000 lb (4,536 kg) GVWR.
CATALYTIC CONVERTER
WARNING: Do not park, idle or drive your vehicle on dry grass or other dry ground cover. The emission system heats up the engine compartment and exhaust system, creating the risk of fire.
WARNING: The normal operating temperature of the exhaust system is very high. Never work around or attempt to repair any part of the exhaust system until it has cooled. Use special care when working around the catalytic converter. The catalytic converter heats up to a very high temperature after only a short period of engine operation and stays hot after the engine is switched off.
WARNING: Exhaust leaks may result in entry of harmful and potentially lethal fumes into the passenger compartment. If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle, have your vehicle inspected immediately. Do not drive if you smell exhaust fumes.
Your vehicle has various emission control components and a catalytic converter that enables it to comply with applicable exhaust emission standards.
To make sure that the catalytic converter and other emission control components continue to work properly:
· Do not crank the engine for more than 10 seconds at a time.
· Do not run the engine with a spark plug lead disconnected.
· Do not push-start or tow-start your vehicle. Use booster cables. See Jump Starting the Vehicle (page 234).
· Use only the specified fuel listed.
· Do not switch the ignition off when your vehicle is moving.
· Avoid running out of fuel.
· Have the items listed in scheduled maintenance information performed according to the specified schedule.
Note: Resulting component damage may not be covered by the vehicle Warranty.
The scheduled maintenance items listed in scheduled maintenance information are essential to the life and performance of your vehicle and to its emissions system.
If you use anything other than Ford, Motorcraft or Ford-authorized parts for maintenance replacements or for service of components affecting emission control, such non-Ford parts should be equivalent to genuine Ford Motor Company parts in performance and durability.
163
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Engine Emission Control
Illumination of the service engine soon indicator, charging system warning light or the temperature warning light, fluid leaks, strange odors, smoke or loss of engine power could indicate that the emission control system is not working properly.
An improperly operating or damaged exhaust system may allow exhaust to enter the vehicle. Have a damaged or improperly operating exhaust system inspected and repaired immediately.
Do not make any unauthorized changes to your vehicle or engine. By law, vehicle owners and anyone who manufactures, repairs, services, sells, leases, trades vehicles, or supervises a fleet of vehicles are not permitted to intentionally remove an emission control device or prevent it from working. Information about your vehicle's emission system is on the Vehicle Emission Control Information Decal located on or near the engine. This decal also lists engine displacement.
Please consult your warranty information for complete details.
On-Board Diagnostics (OBD-II)
Your vehicle has a computer known as the on-board diagnostics system (OBD-II) that monitors the engine's emission control system. The system protects the environment by making sure that your vehicle continues to meet government emission standards. The OBD-II system also assists a service technician in properly servicing your vehicle.
When the service engine soon indicator illuminates, the OBD-II system has detected a malfunction. Temporary malfunctions may cause the service engine soon indicator to illuminate. Examples are:
1. Your vehicle has run out of fuel--the engine may misfire or run poorly.
2. Poor fuel quality or water in the fuel--the engine may misfire or run poorly.
3. The fuel fill inlet may not have closed properly. See Refueling (page 158).
4. Driving through deep water--the electrical system may be wet.
You can correct these temporary malfunctions by filling the fuel tank with good quality fuel, properly closing the fuel fill inlet or letting the electrical system dry out. After three driving cycles without these or any other temporary malfunctions present, the service engine soon indicator should stay off the next time you start the engine. A driving cycle consists of a cold engine startup followed by mixed city and highway driving. No additional vehicle service is required.
If the service engine soon indicator remains on, have your vehicle serviced at the first available opportunity. Although some malfunctions detected by the OBD-II may not have symptoms that are apparent, continued driving with the service engine soon indicator on can result in increased emissions, lower fuel economy, reduced engine and transmission smoothness and lead to more costly repairs.
Readiness for Inspection and Maintenance (I/M) Testing
Some state and provincial and local governments may have Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) programs to inspect the emission control equipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass this inspection could prevent you from getting a vehicle registration.
If the service engine soon indicator is on or the bulb does not work, your vehicle may need service. See On-Board Diagnostics.
164
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Engine Emission Control
Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test if the service engine soon indicator is on or not working properly (bulb is burned out), or if the OBD-II system has determined that some of the emission control systems have not been properly checked. In this case, the vehicle is not ready for I/M testing.
If the vehicle's engine or transmission has just been serviced, or the battery has recently run down or been replaced, the OBD-II system may indicate that the vehicle is not ready for I/M testing. To determine if the vehicle is ready for I/M testing, turn the ignition key to the on position for 15 seconds without cranking the engine. If the service engine soon indicator blinks eight times, it means that the vehicle is not ready for I/M testing; if the service engine soon indicator stays on solid, it means that your vehicle is ready for I/M testing.
The OBD-II system checks the emission control system during normal driving. A complete check may take several days.
If the vehicle is not ready for I/M testing, you can perform the following driving cycle consisting of mixed city and highway driving:
1. 15 minutes of steady driving on an expressway or highway followed by 20 minutes of stop-and-go driving with at least four 30-second idle periods.
2. Allow your vehicle to sit for at least eight hours with the ignition off. Then, start the vehicle and complete the above driving cycle. The vehicle must warm up to its normal operating temperature. Once started, do not turn off the vehicle until the above driving cycle is complete.
If the vehicle is still not ready for I/M testing, you need to repeat the above driving cycle.
165
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Transmission
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Low (L)
WARNING: Always fully apply the parking brake and make sure you shift into park (P). Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury or death.
WARNING: Do not apply the brake pedal and accelerator pedal simultaneously. Applying both pedals simultaneously for more than a few seconds will limit engine performance, which may result in difficulty maintaining speed in traffic and could lead to serious injury.
WARNING: When your vehicle is stationary, keep the brake pedal fully pressed when shifting gears. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury, death or property damage.
Note: You may not be able to shift out of park (P) unless the intelligent access key is inside your vehicle. Understanding the Positions of Your Rotary Shift Transmission Sport (S)
E222981
E224178
Your vehicle has an electronic transmission shifter. The transmission selector is on the center console, below the climate control system.
To place your vehicle in gear from park (P):
1. Fully press down and hold on the brake pedal through shifts out of park (P).
2. Rotate the outer ring of the transmission selector clockwise from park (P), until the desired gear illuminates on the transmission selector. The instrument cluster also displays the current gear selected.
3. Release the brake pedal and the transmission remains in the selected gear.
Park (P)
With the transmission in park (P), your vehicle locks the transmission and prevents the wheels from turning. Always come to a complete stop before putting your vehicle into and out of park (P). An audible chime sounds once you select park (P).
When the ignition is turned off, your vehicle automatically shifts into park (P). If the ignition is turned off when the vehicle is moving, it first shifts into neutral (N) until a slow enough speed is reached and then shifts into park (P) automatically.
166
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Transmission
Automatic Return to Park
Note: This feature does not operate when your vehicle is in Stay in Neutral mode or neutral tow.
Your vehicle has a feature that automatically shifts your vehicle into park (P) when any of the following conditions occur:
· You turn the vehicle off.
· You open the driver's door with your seatbelt unlatched.
· Your seatbelt is unlatched when the driver's door is open.
If you turn your vehicle off when moving, your vehicle first shifts into neutral (N) until it slows down enough to shift into park (P) automatically.
Note: If you have waited an extended period of time (2-15 minutes) before starting your vehicle, unlatching your seatbelt causes this feature to activate, even with the driver's door closed.
Note: This feature may not work properly if the door ajar switch is malfunctioning. If your door ajar indicator does not illuminate when you open the driver's door or the indicator illuminates with the driver's door closed, see your authorized dealer.
Reverse (R)
With the selector in reverse (R), your vehicle moves backward. Always come to a complete stop before shifting into and out of reverse (R).
Neutral (N)
With the selector in neutral (N), your vehicle can be started and is free to roll. Hold the brake pedal down when in this position.
Stay in Neutral Mode
Note: Always put your vehicle in Stay in Neutral mode when entering an automatic car wash. Failure to do this could result in vehicle damage not covered by warranty.
Note: When entering an automatic car wash, always shift to Neutral (N). If you are exiting the vehicle before the car wash, Stay in Neutral Mode is available.
Stay in Neutral mode allows your vehicle to stay in neutral when you exit your vehicle. Your vehicle must be stationary to enter this mode.
To enter Stay in Neutral mode:
1. Switch your vehicle on but do not start the engine. See Keyless Starting (page 148).
2. Place your foot on the brake pedal and rotate the transmission selector to neutral (N).
Note: When in neutral (N), a message appears in the display screen informing you how to access Stay in Neutral mode.
3. Press either the low (L) or sport (S) button in the middle of the transmission selector to enter Stay in Neutral mode.
A message appears in the display screen confirming your vehicle is in Stay in Neutral mode. The neutral (N) indicator light on the transmission selector also flashes.
To exit Stay in Neutral mode, place your foot on the brake pedal and rotate the transmission selector to park (P).
Drive (D)
Drive (D) is the normal driving position for the best fuel economy. The overdrive function allows automatic upshifts and downshifts through gears one through six.
167
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Transmission
Grade Assist - If Equipped
E224429
Press the grade assist button to activate grade assist. The grade assist lamp appears in the instrument cluster when the system is active. Press the button again to switch it off. Grade assist: · Provides additional grade braking with
a combination of engine motoring and high-voltage battery charging to help maintain vehicle speed when descending a grade. · As your vehicle determines the amount of engine motoring and high-voltage battery charging, you may notice the engine speed increasing and decreasing to help maintain your vehicle speed when descending a grade. · The grade assist lamp in the instrument cluster is illuminated.
Sport (S) (If Equipped)
Putting the vehicle in sport (S):
· Provides additional engine braking and extends lower gear operation to enhance performance for uphill climbs, hilly terrain or mountainous areas. This increases engine RPM during engine braking.
· Provides additional lower gear operation through the automatic transmission shift strategy.
· Provides gear selection more quickly and at higher engine speeds.
Low (L) (If Equipped)
· Provides maximum engine braking.
· The transmission may be shifted into low (L) at any vehicle speed.
· Is not intended for use under extended or normal driving conditions and results in lower fuel economy.
SelectShiftTM Automatic Transmission (If Equipped)
Your vehicle is equipped with a SelectShift Automatic transmission. The SelectShift Automatic transmission gives you the ability to change gears up or down, without a clutch as desired.
In order to prevent the engine from running at too low an RPM, which may cause it to stall, SelectShift still automatically makes some downshifts if it has determined that you have not downshifted in time. Although SelectShift makes some downshifts for you, it still allows you to downshift at any time as long as the SelectShift determines that damage to the engine does not occur from over-revving.
Note: Engine damage may occur if you maintain excessive engine revving without shifting.
168
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Transmission
SelectShift does not automatically upshift, even if the engine is approaching the RPM limit. It must be shifted manually by pressing the + button. Pull the + paddle on the steering wheel to activate SelectShift. · Pull the right paddle (+) to upshift. · Pull the left paddle () to downshift.
E144821
SelectShift in drive (D): · Provides a temporary manual mode
for performing more demanding maneuvers where extra control of gear selection is required (for example, when towing or overtaking). This mode holds a selected gear for a temporary period of time dependent on driver inputs (for example, steering or accelerator pedal input). SelectShift in sport (S): · Provides a permanent manual gear selection where full control of gear selection is required. To exit SelectShift mode shift the transmission into another gear (for example, drive [D]). Upshift to the recommended shift speeds according to the following chart:
Upshifts when accelerating (recommended for best fuel economy)
Shift from:
1 - 2
15 mph (24 km/h)
2 - 3
25 mph (40 km/h)
3 - 4
40 mph (64 km/h)
4 - 5
45 mph (72 km/h)
5 - 6
50 mph (80 km/h)
The instrument cluster displays your currently selected gear. If a gear is requested but not available due to vehicle conditions (low speed, too high engine speed for requested gear selection), the current gear flashes three times.
Note: At full accelerator pedal travel, the transmission automatically downshifts for maximum performance.
Brake-Shift Interlock Override
WARNING: When doing this procedure, you need to take the transmission out of park (P) which means your vehicle can roll freely. To avoid unwanted vehicle movement, always fully apply the parking brake prior to doing this procedure. Use wheels chocks if appropriate.
WARNING: If the parking brake is fully released, but the brake warning lamp remains illuminated, the brakes may not be working properly. Have your vehicle checked as soon as possible.
WARNING: Do not drive your vehicle until you verify that the stoplamps are working.
169
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Transmission
Note: See your authorized dealer as soon as possible if this procedure is used. Note: For some markets this feature is disabled. Note: This feature only functions if your 12-volt battery has power. If vehicle battery voltage is not sufficient, an external 12-volt power source (for example, jumper cables, battery charger or jump pack) may be required to function the interlock override switch. Use the brake-shift interlock override to move your transmission from the park position in the event of an electrical malfunction. If your vehicle has a dead battery, you need an external power source. 1. Apply the parking brake and turn your
ignition off before performing this procedure.
E258561
2. Locate your brake-shift interlock access slot. The slot is located in your center console storage bin. The access slot does not have a label.
Note: Make sure that you correctly identify the access hole as not to damage the media hub. 3. Using a tool, press and hold the brake
shift interlock switch. The indication in the rotary dial flashes when your vehicle is in override mode.
4. With the override switch still held, rotate the selector to neutral (N) to shift from park (P).
5. Release the override button.
6. Your vehicle remains in Stay in Neutral mode for wrecker towing purposes or can be shifted to the desired gear and driven (if possible).
7. Release the parking brake.
Automatic Transmission Adaptive Learning
This feature may increase durability and provide consistent shift feel over the life of your vehicle. A new vehicle or transmission may have firm shifts, soft shifts or both. This operation is considered normal and does not affect function or durability of the transmission. Over time, the adaptive learning process fully updates transmission operation.
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck In Mud or Snow
Note: Do not rock the vehicle if the engine is not at normal operating temperature or damage to the transmission may occur.
Note: Do not rock the vehicle for more than a minute or damage to the transmission and tires may occur, or the engine may overheat.
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow, you may rock it out by shifting between forward and reverse gears, stopping between shifts in a steady pattern. Press lightly on the accelerator in each gear.
170
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
All-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
USING ALL-WHEEL DRIVE
All-wheel drive uses all four wheels to power the vehicle. This increases traction, enabling you to drive over terrain and road conditions that a conventional two-wheel drive vehicle cannot. The AWD system turns on when needed and does not require input from you.
Note: The AWD feature gives your vehicle some limited off-road capabilities in which driving surfaces are relatively level, obstruction-free and otherwise similar to normal on-road driving conditions. Operating your vehicle under other than those conditions could subject the vehicle to excessive stress which might result in damage which is not covered under your warranty.
Note: A warning message will be displayed in the information display when an AWD system fault is present See General Information (page 97). An AWD system fault will cause the AWD system to default to front-wheel drive only mode. When this warning message is displayed, have your vehicle serviced at an authorized dealer
Note: A warning message will be displayed in the information display if the AWD system has overheated See General Information (page 97). This condition may occur if the vehicle was operated in extreme conditions with excessive wheel slip, such as deep sand. To resume normal AWD function as soon as possible, stop the vehicle in a safe location and stop the engine for at least 10 minutes. After the engine has been restarted and the AWD system has adequately cooled, the warning message will turn off and normal AWD function will return.
Do not use a spare tire of a different size other than the tire provided. If the mini-spare tire is installed, the AWD system may disable automatically and enter front-wheel drive only mode to protect driveline components. This
condition will be indicated by a warning in the information display See General Information (page 97). If there is a warning message in the information display from using the spare tire, this indicator should turn off after reinstalling the repaired or replaced normal road tire and cycling the ignition off and on. It is recommended to reinstall the repaired or replaced road tire as soon as possible. Major dissimilar tire sizes between the front and rear axles could cause the AWD system to stop functioning and default to front-wheel drive or damage the AWD system.
Driving In Special Conditions With All-Wheel Drive (AWD)
AWD vehicles are equipped for driving on sand, snow, mud and rough roads and have operating characteristics that are somewhat different from conventional vehicles, both on and off the highway.
Under severe operating conditions, the A/C may cycle on and off to protect overheating of the engine.
Basic operating principles in special conditions
· Drive slower in strong crosswinds which can affect the normal steering characteristics of your vehicle.
· Be extremely careful when driving on pavement made slippery by loose sand, water, gravel, snow or ice.
171
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
All-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
If Your Vehicle Goes Off the Edge of the Pavement
· If your vehicle goes off the edge of the pavement, slow down, but avoid severe brake application, ease the vehicle back onto the pavement only after reducing your speed. Do not turn the steering wheel too sharply while returning to the road surface.
· It may be safer to stay on the apron or shoulder of the road and slow down gradually before returning to the pavement. You may lose control if you do not slow down or if you turn the steering wheel too sharply or abruptly.
· It often may be less risky to strike small objects, such as highway reflectors, with minor damage to your vehicle rather than attempt a sudden return to the pavement which could cause the vehicle to slide sideways out of control or rollover. Remember, your safety and the safety of others should be your primary concern.
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck
WARNING: Always set the parking brake fully and make sure you shift the gearshift lever to first gear. Switch the ignition off and remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle.
WARNING: If the parking brake is fully released, but the brake warning lamp remains illuminated, the brakes may not be working properly. Have your vehicle checked as soon as possible.
WARNING: Do not spin the wheels at over 34 mph (55 km/h). The tires may fail and injure a passenger or bystander.
Note: Do not rock the vehicle if the engine is not at normal operating temperature or damage to the transmission may occur.
Note: Do not rock the vehicle for more than a few minutes or damage to the transmission and tires may occur or the engine may overheat.
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow it may be rocked out by shifting between forward and reverse gears, stopping between shifts, in a steady pattern. Press lightly on the accelerator in each gear.
If your vehicle is equipped with AdvanceTrac® with Roll Stability ControlTM, it may be beneficial to disengage the AdvanceTrac® with Roll Stability ControlTM system while attempting to rock the vehicle.
Emergency Maneuvers
· In an unavoidable emergency situation where a sudden sharp turn must be made, remember to avoid "over-driving" your vehicle (i.e., turn the steering wheel only as rapidly and as far as required to avoid the emergency). Excessive steering will result in less vehicle control, not more. Additionally, smooth variations of the accelerator and/or brake pedal pressure should be utilized if changes in vehicle speed are called for. Avoid
172
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
All-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
abrupt steering, acceleration or braking which could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover and/or personal injury. Use all available road surface to return the vehicle to a safe direction of travel.
· In the event of an emergency stop, avoid skidding the tires and do not attempt any sharp steering wheel movements.
· If the vehicle goes from one type of surface to another (i.e., from concrete to gravel) there will be a change in the way the vehicle responds to a maneuver (steering, acceleration or braking). Again, avoid these abrupt inputs.
Sand
When driving over sand, try to keep all four wheels on the most solid area of the trail. Avoid reducing the tire pressures but shift to a lower gear and drive steadily through the terrain. Apply the accelerator slowly and avoid spinning the wheels.
Do not drive your AWD vehicle in deep sand. This will cause the AWD system to overheat. After the system has cooled down, normal AWD function will return.
Under severe operating conditions, the A/C may cycle on and off to protect overheating of the engine.
Avoid excessive speed because vehicle momentum can work against you and cause the vehicle to become stuck to the point that assistance may be required from another vehicle. Remember, you may be able to back out the way you came if you proceed with caution.
Mud and Water
If you must drive through high water, drive slowly. Traction or brake capability may be limited.
When driving through water, determine the depth; avoid water higher than the bottom of the wheel rims (for cars) or the bottom of the hubs (for trucks) (if possible) and proceed slowly. If the ignition system gets wet, the vehicle may stall.
E142667
Once through water, always try the brakes. Wet brakes do not stop the vehicle as effectively as dry brakes. Drying can be improved by moving your vehicle slowly while applying light pressure on the brake pedal. Be cautious of sudden changes in vehicle speed or direction when you are driving in mud. Even AWD vehicles can lose traction in slick mud. As when you are driving over sand, apply the accelerator slowly and avoid spinning your wheels. If the vehicle does slide, steer in the direction of the slide until you regain control of the vehicle. After driving through mud, clean off residue stuck to rotating driveshafts and tires. Excess mud stuck on tires and rotating driveshafts causes an imbalance that could damage drive components. Note: Driving through deep water may damage the transmission. If the front or rear axle is submerged in water, have the power transfer unit (PTU) or rear axle serviced by an authorized dealer.
173
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
All-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
E143950
"Tread Lightly" is an educational program designed to increase public awareness of land-use regulations and responsibilities in our nations wilderness areas. Ford Motor Company joins the U.S. Forest Service and the Bureau of Land Management in encouraging you to help preserve our national forest and other public and private lands by "treading lightly."
Driving on Hilly or Sloping Terrain
Note: Avoid driving crosswise or turning on steep slopes or hills. A danger lies in losing traction, slipping sideways and possibly rolling over. Whenever driving on a hill, determine beforehand the route you will use. Do not drive over the crest of a hill without seeing what conditions are on the other side. Do not drive in reverse over a hill without the aid of an observer.
Although natural obstacles may make it necessary to travel diagonally up or down a hill or steep incline, you should always try to drive straight up or straight down.
When climbing a steep slope or hill, start in a lower gear rather than downshifting to a lower gear from a higher gear once the ascent has started. This reduces strain on the engine and the possibility of stalling.
If you do stall out, do not try to turnaround because you might roll over. It is better to back down to a safe location.
Apply just enough power to the wheels to climb the hill. Too much power will cause the tires to slip, spin or lose traction, resulting in loss of vehicle control.
E143949
Descend a hill in the same gear you would use to climb up the hill to avoid excessive brake application and brake overheating. Do not descend in neutral; instead, disengage overdrive or manually shift to a lower gear. When descending a steep hill, avoid sudden hard braking as you could lose control. The front wheels have to be turning in order to steer the vehicle.
Your vehicle has anti-lock brakes, therefore apply the brakes steadily. Do not "pump" the brakes.
Driving on Snow and Ice
WARNING: If you are driving in slippery conditions that require tire chains or cables, then it is critical that you drive cautiously. Keep speeds down, allow for longer stopping distances and avoid aggressive steering to reduce the chances of a loss of vehicle control which can lead to serious injury or death. If the rear end of your vehicle slides while cornering, steer in the direction of the slide until you regain control of your vehicle.
Note: Excessive tire slippage can cause driveline damage.
AWD vehicles have advantages over 2WD vehicles in snow and ice but can skid like any other vehicle.
174
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
All-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
Should you start to slide while driving on snowy or icy roads, turn the steering wheel in the direction of the slide until you regain control.
Avoid sudden applications of power and quick changes of direction on snow and ice. Apply the accelerator slowly and steadily when starting from a full stop.
Avoid sudden braking as well. Although an AWD vehicle may accelerate better than a two-wheel drive vehicle in snow and ice, it won't stop any faster, because as in other vehicles, braking occurs at all four wheels. Do not become overconfident as to road conditions.
Make sure you allow sufficient distance between you and other vehicles for stopping. Drive slower than usual and consider using one of the lower gears. In emergency stopping situations, apply the brake steadily. Since your vehicle is equipped with a four wheel (ABS), do not "pump" the brakes. See Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock Brakes (page 176).
Maintenance and Modifications
The suspension and steering systems on your vehicle have been designed and tested to provide predictable performance whether loaded or empty and durable load carrying capability. For this reason, Ford Motor Company strongly recommends that you do not make modifications such as adding or removing parts (such as lowering kits or stabilizer bars) or by using replacement parts not equivalent to the original factory equipment.
Any modifications to a vehicle that raise the center of gravity can make it more likely the vehicle will rollover as a result of a loss of control. Ford Motor Company recommends that caution be used with any vehicle equipped with a high load or device (such as ladder or luggage racks).
Failure to maintain your vehicle properly may void the warranty, increase your repair cost, reduce vehicle performance and operational capabilities and adversely affect driver and passenger safety. Frequent inspection of vehicle chassis components is recommended if the vehicle is subjected to off-highway usage.
175
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Brakes
GENERAL INFORMATION
Note: Occasional brake noise is normal. If a metal-to-metal, continuous grinding or continuous squeal sound is present, the brake linings may be worn-out and an authorized dealer should check them. If the vehicle has continuous vibration or shudder in the steering wheel while braking, an authorized dealer should check your vehicle.
Note: Brake dust may accumulate on the wheels, even under normal driving conditions. Some dust is inevitable as the brakes wear and does not contribute to brake noise. See Cleaning the Wheels (page 285).
E138644
See Warning Lamps and Indicators (page 93).
Wet brakes result in reduced braking efficiency. Gently press the brake pedal a few times when driving from a car wash or standing water to dry the brakes.
Brake Over Accelerator
In the event the accelerator pedal becomes stuck or entrapped, apply steady and firm pressure to the brake pedal to slow the vehicle and reduce engine power. If you experience this condition, apply the brakes and bring your vehicle to a safe stop. Switch the engine off, move the transmission to park (P) and apply the parking brake. Inspect the accelerator pedal and the area around it for any items or debris that may be obstructing its movement.If none are found and the condition persists, have your vehicle towed to the nearest authorized dealer.
Emergency Brake Assist
Emergency brake assist detects when you brake heavily by measuring the rate at which you press the brake pedal. It provides maximum braking efficiency as long as you press the pedal. Emergency brake assist can reduce stopping distances in critical situations.
Anti-lock Brake System
This system helps you maintain steering control during emergency stops by keeping the brakes from locking.
This lamp momentarily illuminates when you switch the ignition on. If the light does not illuminate during start up, remains on or flashes, the anti-lock braking system may be disabled. Have the system checked by an authorized dealer. If the anti-lock brake system is disabled, normal braking is still effective.
If the brake warning lamp illuminates with the parking E138644 brake released, have your brake system serviced immediately.
It also illuminates momentarily when you switch the ignition on to confirm the lamp is functional. If it does not illuminate when you switch the ignition on, or begins to flash at any time, have the system checked by an authorized dealer.
HINTS ON DRIVING WITH ANTI-LOCK BRAKES
The anti-lock braking system does not eliminate the risks when:
· You drive too closely to the vehicle in front of you.
· Your vehicle is hydroplaning.
176
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Brakes
· You take corners too fast. · The road surface is poor.
Note: If the system activates, the brake pedal may pulse and may travel further. Maintain pressure on the brake pedal. You may also hear a noise from the system. This is normal.
ELECTRIC PARKING BRAKE
WARNING: Always fully apply the parking brake and make sure you shift into park (P). Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury or death.
WARNING: If you drive extended distances with the parking brake applied, you could cause damage to the brake system.
WARNING: The electric parking brake does not operate if the vehicle battery is running out of charge.
Your vehicle has an electric parking brake. You operate it with a switch instead of a lever. The switch is on the center console or to the left-hand side of the steering wheel, on the lower part of the instrument panel.
Note: The electric parking brake makes noises during operation. This is normal.
Applying the Electric Parking Brake
Pull the switch upward.
E267156
E270480
applied.
The red warning lamp flashes during operation and illuminates when the parking brake is
Note: It remains illuminated for a short period of time after you switch the ignition off.
If it continues to flash or does not illuminate, the system has malfunctioned. Have your vehicle checked as soon as possible.
Note: You can apply the electric parking brake when the ignition is off.
Note: The electric parking brake could automatically apply when you shift into park (P). See Transmission (page 166).
Applying the Electric Parking Brake in an Emergency
Note: Do not apply the electric parking brake when your vehicle is moving, except in an emergency. If you repeatedly use the electric parking brake to slow or stop your vehicle, you could cause damage to the brake system.
You can use the electric parking brake to slow or stop your vehicle in an emergency.
E267156
Pull the switch upward and hold it.
E270480
The red warning lamp illuminates, a tone sounds and the stoplamps turn on.
The electric parking brake continues to slow your vehicle down unless you release the switch.
Manually Releasing the Electric Parking Brake
Switch the ignition on.
Press and hold the brake pedal.
177
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Brakes
Push the switch downward.
E267156
E270480
The red warning lamp turns off.
If it remains illuminated or flashes, the system has malfunctioned. Have your vehicle checked as soon as possible.
Pulling Away on a Hill When Towing a Trailer
Press and hold the brake pedal.
E267156
Pull the switch upward and hold it.
Shift into gear.
Press the accelerator pedal until engine has developed sufficient torque to prevent your vehicle from rolling down the hill.
E267156
Release the switch and pull away in a normal manner.
Automatically Releasing the Electric Parking Brake
Close the driver door. Shift into gear. Press the accelerator pedal and pull away in a normal manner.
The red warning lamp turns off.
E270480
If it remains illuminated or flashes, the electric parking brake has not released. Manually release the parking brake.
Releasing the Electric Parking Brake if the Vehicle Battery is Running Out of Charge
Connect a booster battery to the vehicle battery to release the electric parking brake if the vehicle battery is running out of charge. See Jump Starting the Vehicle (page 234).
HILL START ASSIST
WARNING: The system does not replace the parking brake. When you leave your vehicle, always apply the parking brake.
WARNING: You must remain in your vehicle when the system turns on. At all times, you are responsible for controlling your vehicle, supervising the system and intervening, if required. Failure to take care may result in the loss of control of your vehicle, serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: The system turns off if there is a malfunction or if you excessively rev the engine.
The system makes it easier to pull away when your vehicle is on a slope without the need to use the parking brake.
When the system is active, your vehicle remains stationary on the slope for two to three seconds after you release the brake pedal. This allows time to move your foot from the brake to the accelerator pedal. The system releases the brakes automatically once the engine has
178
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Brakes
developed sufficient drive to prevent your vehicle from rolling down the slope. This is an advantage when pulling away on a slope, for example from a car park ramp, traffic lights or when reversing uphill into a parking space.
Note: The system only functions when you bring your vehicle to a complete standstill. Shift the gearshift lever to reverse (R) when facing downhill and first gear (1) when facing uphill.
Note: There is no warning light to indicate the system is either on or off.
Using Hill Start Assist
1. Press the brake pedal to bring your vehicle to a complete standstill. Keep the brake pedal pressed.
2. If the sensors detect that your vehicle is on a slope, the system activates automatically.
3. When you remove your foot from the brake pedal, your vehicle remains on the slope without rolling away for about two to three seconds. This hold time automatically extends if you are in the process of driving off.
4. Drive off in the normal manner. The system releases the brakes automatically.
Note: When you remove your foot from the brake pedal and press the pedal again when the system is active, you will experience significantly reduced brake pedal travel. This is normal.
Switching the System On and Off
Vehicles with Manual Transmission
You can switch this feature on or off in the information display.
The system remembers the last setting when you start your vehicle.
Vehicles with Automatic Transmission
The system turns on when you switch the ignition on and you cannot switch the system off.
179
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Traction Control
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
The traction control system helps avoid drive wheel spin and loss of traction.
If your vehicle begins to slide, the system applies the brakes to individual wheels and, when needed, reduces engine power at the same time. If the wheels spin when accelerating on slippery or loose surfaces, the system reduces engine power in order to increase traction.
USING TRACTION CONTROL
WARNING: The stability and traction control light illuminates steadily if the system detects a failure. Make sure you did not manually disable the traction control system using the information display controls or the switch. If the stability control and traction control light is still illuminating steadily, have the system serviced by an authorized dealer immediately. Operating your vehicle with the traction control disabled could lead to an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.
The system automatically turns on each time you switch the ignition on.
If your vehicle is stuck in mud or snow, switching traction control off may be beneficial as this allows the wheels to spin.
Note: When you switch traction control off, stability control remains fully active.
Switching the System Off
When you switch the system off or on, a message appears in the information display showing system status.
You can switch the system off by either using the information display controls or the switch.
Using the Information Display Controls
You can switch this feature off or on in the information display. See General Information (page 97).
Using a Switch (If Equipped)
Use the traction control switch on the instrument panel to switch the system off or on.
System Indicator Lights and Messages
E138639
The stability and traction control light:
· Temporarily illuminates on engine start-up.
· Flashes when a driving condition activates either of the systems.
· Illuminates if a problem occurs in either of the systems.
The stability and traction control off light temporarily illuminates E130458 on engine start-up and stays on when you switch the traction control system off.
180
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Stability Control
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNING: Vehicle modifications involving braking system, aftermarket roof racks, suspension, steering system, tire construction and wheel and tire size may change the handling characteristics of your vehicle and may adversely affect the performance of the electronic stability control system. In addition, installing any stereo loudspeakers may interfere with and adversely affect the electronic stability control system. Install any aftermarket stereo loudspeaker as far as possible from the front center console, the tunnel, and the front seats in order to minimize the risk of interfering with the electronic stability control sensors. Reducing the effectiveness of the electronic stability control system could lead to an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.
WARNING: Remember that even advanced technology cannot defy the laws of physics. It's always possible to lose control of a vehicle due to inappropriate driver input for the conditions. Aggressive driving on any road condition can cause you to lose control of your vehicle increasing the risk of personal injury or property damage. Activation of the electronic stability control system is an indication that at least some of the tires have exceeded their ability to grip the road; this could reduce the operator's ability to control the vehicle potentially resulting in a loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death. If your electronic stability control system activates, SLOW DOWN.
The system automatically turns on each time you switch the ignition on.
If a fault occurs in either the stability control or the traction control system, you may experience the following conditions:
· The stability and traction control light illuminates steadily.
· The stability control and traction control systems do not enhance your vehicle's ability to maintain traction of the wheels.
If a driving condition activates either the stability control or the traction control system you may experience the following conditions:
· The stability and traction control light flashes.
· Your vehicle slows down.
· Reduced engine power.
· A vibration in the brake pedal.
· The brake pedal is stiffer than usual.
· If the driving condition is severe and your foot is not on the brake, the brake pedal may move as the system applies higher brake force.
The stability control system has several features built into it to help you maintain control of your vehicle:
Electronic Stability Control
The system enhances your vehicle's ability to prevent skids or lateral slides by applying brakes to one or more of the wheels individually and, if necessary, reducing engine power.
Traction Control
The system enhances your vehicle's ability to maintain traction of the wheels by detecting and controlling wheel spin. See Using Traction Control (page 180).
181
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Stability Control
B
B
B
A
A
B
A
E72903
A B
Vehicle without stability control skidding off its intended route.
Vehicle with stability control maintaining control on a slippery surface.
USING STABILITY CONTROL
The system automatically turns on each time you switch the ignition on.
You cannot switch the stability control system off, but when you shift into reverse (R), the system deactivates.
You can switch the traction control system off or on. See Using Traction Control (page 180).
182
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Parking Aids
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNING: To help avoid personal injury, always use caution when in reverse (R) and when using the sensing system.
WARNING: The system may not detect objects with surfaces that absorb reflection. Always drive with due care and attention. Failure to take care may result in a crash.
WARNING: Traffic control systems, inclement weather, air brakes, external motors and fans may affect the correct operation of the sensing system.This may cause reduced performance or false alerts.
WARNING: The system may not detect small or moving objects, particularly those close to the ground.
Note: If your vehicle has MyKeyTM, the sensing system cannot be switched off when a MyKeyTM is present. See Principle of Operation (page 59).
Note: Keep the sensors on the bumper or fascia free from snow, ice and large accumulations of dirt. If the sensors are covered, the system's accuracy can be affected. Do not clean the sensors with sharp objects.
Note: If your vehicle sustains damage to the bumper or fascia, leaving it misaligned or bent, the sensing zone may be altered causing inaccurate measurement of obstacles or false alerts.
Note: Certain add-on devices installed around the bumper or fascia may create false alerts. For example, large trailer hitches, bike or surfboard racks, license plate brackets, bumper covers or any other device that may block the normal detection zone of the system. Remove the add-on device to prevent false alerts.
Note: When you connect a trailer to your vehicle, the rear parking aid may detect the trailer and therefore provide an alert. Disable the rear parking aid when you connect a trailer to prevent the alert.
The sensing system warns the driver of obstacles within a certain range of your vehicle. The system turns on automatically whenever you switch the ignition on.
You can switch the system off through the information display menu or from the pop-up message that appears once you shift the transmission into reverse (R). See General Information (page 97). If your vehicle has a parking aid button, you can switch the system off by pressing the button.
If a fault is present in the system, a warning message appears in the information display. See Information Messages (page 106).
REAR PARKING AID (IF EQUIPPED)
The rear sensors are only active when the transmission is in reverse (R). As your vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the rate of the audible warning increases. When the obstacle is less than 12 in (30 cm) away, the warning sounds continuously. If the system detects a stationary or receding object farther than 12 in (30 cm) from the corners of the bumper, the tone sounds for only three seconds. Once the system detects an object approaching, the warning sounds again.
183
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Parking Aids
E130178
Coverage area of up to 6 ft (1.8 m) from the rear bumper. There may be decreased coverage area at the outer corners of the bumper.
The system detects certain objects while the transmission is in reverse (R):
· Your vehicle is moving toward a stationary object at a speed of 3 mph (5 km/h) or less.
· Your vehicle is not moving, but a moving object is approaching the rear of your vehicle at a speed of 3 mph (5 km/h) or less.
· Your vehicle is moving at a speed of less than 3 mph (5 km/h) and a moving object is approaching the rear of your vehicle at a speed of less than 3 mph (5 km/h).
The system provides audio warnings only when your vehicle is moving or when your vehicle is stationary and the detected obstacle is less than 12 in (30 cm) away from the bumper.
Obstacle Distance Indicator (If
Equipped)
The system provides obstacle distance indication through the information display. The distance indicator displays when the transmission is in reverse (R). The indicator displays: · As the distance to the obstacle
decreases the indicator blocks illuminate and move towards the vehicle icon. · If there is no obstacle detected, the distance indicator blocks are greyed out.
FRONT PARKING AID(IFEQUIPPED)
The front sensors are active when the transmission is in any position other than park (P) and your vehicle is traveling at low speed.
E187330
Coverage area of up to 28 in (70 cm) from the front bumper. The coverage area decreases at the outer corners. When your vehicle approaches an object, a warning tone sounds. When your vehicle moves closer to an object, the warning tone repeat rate increases. The warning tone sounds continuously when an object is 12 in (30 cm) or less from the front bumper.
184
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Parking Aids
You can switch the system off through the information display menu or from the pop-up message that appears once you shift the transmission into reverse (R). See General Information (page 97). If your vehicle has a parking aid button, you can switch the system off by pressing the button.
Obstacle Distance Indicator (If
Equipped)
The system provides obstacle distance indication through the information display.
The indicator displays:
· As the distance to the obstacle decreases the indicator blocks illuminate and move towards the vehicle icon.
· If there is no obstacle detected, the distance indicator blocks turn grey.
If the transmission is in reverse (R), the front sensing system provides audio warnings when your vehicle is moving and the detected obstacle is moving towards your vehicle. Once the vehicle is stationary, the audio warning stops after two seconds. Visual indication is always present in reverse (R).
If the transmission is in drive (D) or any other forward gear (for example, low (L), sport (S) or any forward gear in a manual transmission), the front sensing system provides audio and visual warnings when your vehicle is moving below a speed of 5 mph (8 km/h) and an obstacle is inside the detection area. Once the vehicle is stationary, the audio warning stops after two seconds and the visual indication stops after four seconds. If the obstacles detected are within 12 in (30 cm), the visual indication remains on.
If the transmission is in neutral (N), the system provides visual indication only when your vehicle is moving at 5 mph (8 km/h) or below and an obstacle is inside the detection area. Once your vehicle is stationary, the visual indication stops after four seconds.
SIDE SENSING SYSTEM (IF
EQUIPPED)
The side sensing system uses the front and rear side sensors to detect and map obstacles within the vehicle's driving path, located near the sides of your vehicle. The side sensors are active when the transmission is in any position other than park (P). Note: Obstacles that enter the side detection area without being detected and mapped by the front or rear side sensors will not be detected.
E187810
Coverage area is up to 24 in (60 cm) from the sides of your vehicle. When the system detects an object close to the side of your vehicle, an audible warning sounds. As your vehicle moves closer to obstacles within the driving path of your vehicle, the rate of the audible warning increases.
185
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Parking Aids
Obstacle Distance Indicator (If
Equipped)
E190459
The system provides obstacle distance indication through the information display. As the distance to the obstacle decreases, the indicator blocks illuminate and move toward the vehicle icon. If there is no obstacle detected, the distance indicator blocks show greyed out. When you shift to reverse (R), the side sensing system provides audible warnings when your vehicle is moving and obstacles are detected within 24 in (60 cm) and are inside the driving path of your vehicle. When you stop your vehicle the audible warning stops after two seconds. Note: Visual distance indication remains on when the transmission is in reverse (R). When you shift to drive (D) or any other forward gear, for example, low (L), sport (S) or any forward gear in manual transmission, the side sensing system provides audible and visual distance warnings when your vehicle is moving below a speed of 5 mph (8 km/h) and
obstacles are detected within 24 in (60 cm) and are inside the driving path of your vehicle. Once your vehicle reaches a standstill condition, the audible warning stops after two seconds and visual indication stops after four seconds.
If the transmission is in neutral (N), the side sensing system provides visual distance indication only when your vehicle is moving below a speed of 5 mph (8 km/h) and there is a front or rear parking aid obstacle detected, and the side obstacle is within 24 in (60 cm) from the side of your vehicle. When you stop your vehicle the visual distance indication stops after four seconds.
If the side sensing system is not available, the side distance indicator blocks do not appear.
The side sensing system is not available under the following condition:
· If you switch the traction control system off.
The side sensing system may not be available until you have driven approximately the length of your vehicle in order for the system to reinitialize if:
· You switch the ignition on, off and back on.
· Your vehicle remains stationary for over two minutes.
· The anti-lock brake system is activated.
· The traction control system is activated.
· When the steering wheel angle information is not available, the side sensing system is not available. The vehicle must be driven at least 492 ft (150 m) above 19 mph (30 km/h) to recover the steering wheel angle information.
186
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Parking Aids
ACTIVE PARK ASSIST (IF
EQUIPPED)
WARNING: You must remain in your vehicle when the system turns on. At all times, you are responsible for controlling your vehicle, supervising the system and intervening, if required. Failure to take care may result in the loss of control of your vehicle, serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: The sensors may not detect objects in heavy rain or other conditions that cause interference.
WARNING: Active park assist does not apply the brakes under any circumstances.
WARNING: You are responsible for controlling your vehicle at all times. The system is designed to be an aid and does not relieve you of your responsibility to drive with due care and attention. Failure to follow this instruction could result in the loss of control of your vehicle, personal injury or death.
Note: Keep the sensors free from snow, ice and large accumulations of dirt.
Note: Do not cover up the sensors.
Note: Do not clean the sensors with sharp objects.
Note: The sensors may not detect objects with surfaces that absorb ultrasonic waves. The sensors may falsely detect objects due to ultrasonic interference caused by motorcycle exhausts, truck air brakes or horns, for example.
Note: If you change any tires, the system must recalibrate and may not correctly operate for a short time.
Active park assist is a multi-step process and may require you to shift the transmission multiple times. Follow the onscreen instructions until the parking maneuver is complete.
If you are uncomfortable with the proximity to any vehicle or object, you may choose to override the system by grabbing the steering wheel, or by taking full control of your vehicle after pressing the active park assist button.
Keep your hands, hair, clothing and any loose items clear of the steering wheel when using active park assist.
The sensors are on the front and rear bumpers.
The system may not correctly operate in any of the following conditions:
· You use a spare tire or a tire that is significantly worn more than the other tires.
· One or more tires are incorrectly inflated.
· You try to park on a tight curve.
· Something passes between the front bumper and the parking space. For example, a pedestrian or cyclist.
· The edge of the neighboring parked vehicle is high off the ground. For example, a bus, tow truck or flatbed truck.
· The weather conditions are poor. For example, during heavy rain, snow, fog, high humidity and high temperatures.
Do not use the system if:
· You have attached an add-on accessory close to the sensors on the front or rear of your vehicle. For example, a bike rack or trailer.
· You have attached an overhanging object to the roof. For example, a surfboard.
187
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Parking Aids
· The front bumper, rear bumper or the side sensors are damaged.
· The correct tire size is not in use on your vehicle. For example, a mini-spare tire.
Using Active Park Assist
Selecting an Active Park Assist Mode
Press the button once to activate parallel parking. Press E146186 the button a second time to activate perpendicular parking. If you press the button again the system switches off.
If your vehicle is parked and after you switch the ignition on, you can use the information display to toggle through the modes. Press the button to switch the system on and open the system menu in the information display.
Note: If your vehicle is parked, the default mode is parallel park out assist. However, if you did not use active park assist to parallel park your vehicle, use the information display to select park out assist.
Note: You can repeatedly press the active park assist button to toggle through the modes only after moving your vehicle approximately 33 ft (10 m).
To toggle through the modes, use the buttons on the information display to select the following:
· Parallel parking.
· Perpendicular parking.
· Parallel park out assist.
· Switch the system off.
Note: There is no time limit for toggling through the modes.
Parallel Parking
The system detects available parallel parking spaces and steers your vehicle into the space. You control the accelerator, gearshift and brakes. The system visually and audibly guides you into a parallel parking space.
Press the button once to search
E146186
for a parking space.
Note: You can also switch the system on
after you have already driven partially or
completely past a parking space. Press the
active park assist button and the system
informs you if you have recently passed a
suitable parking space.
When the vehicle speed is less than 22 mph (35 km/h), the system scans both sides of your vehicle for an available parking space. A message and a graphic appear in the information display to indicate the system is searching for a parking space. Use the direction indicator lever to search for a parking space on the driver or passenger side of your vehicle.
Note: The system scans both sides of your vehicle and offers parking spaces one side at a time if you do not use the direction indicator.
Note: The system defaults to the passenger side if you do not use the direction indicator.
E130107
Drive your vehicle approximately 3 ft (1 m) and parallel to the other parked vehicles when searching for a parking space.
Note: If you drive your vehicle less than 2 ft (0.5 m) or greater than 5 ft (1.5 m) away from other parked vehicles, the system may not be able to detect an available parking space.
188
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Parking Aids
When the system detects a suitable space, a message displays and a tone sounds. Stop your vehicle and follow the onscreen instructions. If your vehicle is moving very slowly, you may have to move forward a short distance before the system is ready to park.
Note: You must observe that the space the system selects remains clear of obstructions at all times during the maneuver.
Note: The system always offers the last parking space it detects. For example, if your vehicle detects multiple spaces when you are driving, it offers the last one.
Note: If the vehicle speed is greater than approximately 22 mph (35 km/h), the system shows a message to instruct you to reduce the vehicle speed.
Automatically Steering into a Parallel Parking Space
When you shift into reverse (R), with your hands off the steering wheel and nothing obstructing its movement, your vehicle steers itself into the space. The system displays instructions to move your vehicle backward and forward in the space.
Note: If the vehicle speed exceeds approximately 6 mph (9 km/h), you interrupt the maneuver, or the system switches off, you must take full control of your vehicle.
Note: If the system detects an object is very close to your vehicle and it may be unsafe to continue the maneuver, it may instruct you to stop your vehicle. The system may not provide any further instruction. Steering assistance continues to operate but you must decide if it is safe to continue the maneuver.
E130108
When you believe your vehicle is correctly parked, or a solid tone sounds and an information message appears, bring your vehicle to a complete stop.
When the Active Park Assist maneuver is complete, a tone sounds and an information message appears.
Note: You are responsible for checking how your vehicle is parked and making any necessary corrections before leaving your vehicle.
Deactivating Active Park Assist
You can manually deactivate the system by:
· Pressing the Active Park Assist button during an active maneuver.
· Grabbing the steering wheel during an active maneuver.
· Driving above 22 mph (35 km/h) for 30 seconds when searching for a parking space.
· Driving above 6 mph (9 km/h) during an active maneuver.
· Switching the traction control system off.
Certain vehicle conditions may also deactivate the system, for example:
· The traction control system activates or fails.
· The anti-lock brake system activates or fails.
If the system malfunctions, a message appears and a tone sounds. Have your vehicle checked as soon as possible.
189
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Parking Aids
Perpendicular Parking
The system detects available perpendicular parking spaces and steers your vehicle into the space. You control the accelerator, gearshift and brakes. The system visually and audibly guides you into a perpendicular parking space.
E146186
Press the button twice to search for a parking space.
When the vehicle speed is less than 19 mph (30 km/h), the system scans both sides of your vehicle for an available parking space. A message and a graphic appear in the information display to indicate the system is searching for a parking space. Use the direction indicator lever to search for a parking space on the driver or passenger side of your vehicle.
Note: The system scans both sides of your vehicle and offers parking spaces one side at a time if you do not use the direction indicator.
Note: The system defaults to the passenger side if you do not use the direction indicator.
E186193
Drive your vehicle approximately 3 ft (1 m) and perpendicular to the other parked vehicles when searching for a parking space.
Note: If you drive your vehicle less than 2 ft (0.5 m) or greater than 5 ft (1.5 m) away from other parked vehicles, the system may not be able to detect an available parking space.
When the system detects a suitable space, a message displays and a tone sounds. Stop your vehicle and follow the onscreen instructions. If your vehicle is moving very slowly, you may have to move forward a short distance before the system is ready to park.
Note: You must observe that the space the system selects remains clear of obstructions at all times during the maneuver.
Note: The system always offers the last detected parking space. For example, if your vehicle detects multiple spaces when you are driving, it offers the last one.
Note: If the vehicle speed is greater than approximately 19 mph (30 km/h), the system shows a message to instruct you to reduce the vehicle speed.
Automatically Steering into a Perpendicular Parking Space
When you shift into reverse (R), with your hands off the steering wheel and nothing obstructing its movement, your vehicle steers itself into the space. The system displays instructions to move your vehicle backward and forward in the space.
Note: If the vehicle speed exceeds approximately 6 mph (9 km/h), you interrupt the maneuver, or the system switches off, you must take full control of your vehicle.
Note: If the system detects an object is very close to your vehicle and it may be unsafe to continue the maneuver, it may instruct you to stop your vehicle. The system may not provide any further instruction. Steering assistance continues to operate but you must decide if it is safe to continue the maneuver.
190
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Parking Aids
E186191
When you believe your vehicle is correctly parked, or a solid tone sounds and an information message appears, bring your vehicle to a complete stop.
When the active park assist maneuver is complete, a tone sounds and a message appears.
Note: You are responsible for checking how your vehicle is parked and making any necessary corrections before leaving your vehicle.
Deactivating Active Park Assist
You can manually deactivate the system by:
· Pressing the Active Park Assist button during an active maneuver.
· Grabbing the steering wheel during an active maneuver.
· Driving above 19 mph (30 km/h) for 30 seconds when searching for a parking space.
· Driving above 6 mph (9 km/h) during an active maneuver.
· Switching the traction control system off.
Certain vehicle conditions may also deactivate the system, for example:
· The traction control system activates or fails.
· The anti-lock brake system activates or fails.
If the system malfunctions, a message appears and a tone sounds. Have your vehicle checked as soon as possible.
Parallel Park Out Assist
The system steers your vehicle out of a parallel parking space. You control the accelerator, gearshift and brakes. The system visually and audibly guides you out of a parallel parking space.
Note: This system is not intended to assist when exiting a perpendicular parking space.
E146186
Press the button once when your vehicle is stationary in a parallel parking space.
Note: If you did not use active park assist to parallel park your vehicle, pressing the button once selects parallel park. You must use the information display to select park out assist.
The system displays a message instructing you to switch a direction indicator on. Use the direction indicator to select which side of your vehicle you want to exit the parking space. The system displays instructions to move your vehicle backward and forward in the space.
Note: If the system detects an object is very close to your vehicle and it may be unsafe to continue the maneuver, it may instruct you to stop your vehicle. The system may not provide any further instruction. Steering assistance continues to operate but you must decide if it is safe to continue the maneuver.
191
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Parking Aids
E188012
After the system directs your vehicle to a position where you can exit the parking space in a forward movement, a message appears instructing you to take full control of your vehicle. Generally, hand-over is when your vehicle is still inside the parking space.
Troubleshooting
Note: Parallel Park Out Assist may not be available when the clearance to the front or the rear of your vehicle is too small.
Note: If the vehicle speed exceeds approximately 6 mph (9 km/h), you interrupt the maneuver, or the system switches off, you must take full control of your vehicle.
Note: You are responsible for controlling your vehicle and making sure the path is clear prior to pulling into traffic.
Symptom
Possible Cause
The system does not search for You may have switched the traction control off.
a parking space.
The transmission is in reverse (R). Your vehicle must
be moving forward to be able to detect a parking space.
The system does not offer a parking space.
The sensors may be blocked. For example, snow, ice or dirt buildup. Blocked sensors can affect how the system functions.
There is not enough room in the parking space for your vehicle to safely park.
There is not enough space for the parking maneuver on the opposite side of the parking space.
The parking space is more than 5 ft (1.5 m) or less than 2 ft (0.5 m) away.
The vehicle speed is greater than 22 mph (35 km/h) for parallel parking or greater than 19 mph (30 km/h) for perpendicular parking.
You recently disconnected or replaced the battery. After you reconnect the battery you must drive your vehicle on a straight road for a short period of time.
The system does not correctly Your vehicle is rolling in the opposite direction of the
position your vehicle in a
current transmission position. For example, rolling
parking space.
forward when in reverse (R).
An irregular curb along the parking space prevents the system from correctly aligning your vehicle.
192
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Parking Aids
Symptom
Possible Cause
Vehicles or objects bordering the space may not be correctly parked.
Your vehicle stopped too far past the parking space.
The tires may not be correctly installed or maintained. For example, not inflated correctly, improper size, or of different sizes.
A repair or alteration changes the detection capabilities.
A parked vehicle has a high attachment. For example, a salt sprayer, snowplow or moving truck bed.
The parking space length or position of parked objects changes after your vehicle passes the space.
The temperature around your vehicle quickly changes. For example, driving from a heated garage into the cold, or after leaving a car wash.
REAR VIEW CAMERA
WARNING: The rear view camera system is a reverse aid supplement device that still requires the driver to use it in conjunction with the interior and exterior mirrors for maximum coverage.
WARNING: Objects that are close to either corner of the bumper or under the bumper, might not be seen on the screen due to the limited coverage of the camera system.
WARNING: Reverse your vehicle slowly. Failure to follow this instruction could result in the loss of control of your vehicle, personal injury or death.
WARNING: Use caution when the rear cargo door is ajar. If the rear cargo door is ajar, the camera will be out of position and the video image may be incorrect. All guidelines disappear when the rear cargo door is ajar. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury.
WARNING: Use caution when turning camera features on or off when the transmission is not in park (P). Make sure your vehicle is not moving.
The rear view camera system provides a video image of the area behind your vehicle.
During operation, lines appear in the display which represent your vehicle's path and proximity to objects behind your vehicle.
193
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Parking Aids
E142435
The camera is located on the luggage compartment door.
Using the Rear View Camera System
The rear view camera system displays what is behind your vehicle when you place the transmission in reverse (R). Note: The reverse sensing system is not effective at speeds above 7 mph (12 km/h) and may not detect certain angular or moving objects. The system uses three types of guides to help you see what is behind your vehicle: · Active guidelines: Show the intended
path of your vehicle when reversing. · Fixed guidelines: Show the actual path
your vehicle is moving in while reversing in a straight line. This can be helpful when backing into a parking space or aligning your vehicle with another object behind you. · Centerline: Helps align the center of your vehicle with an object (for example, a trailer). Note: If the transmission is in reverse (R) and the luggage compartment is ajar, no rear view camera features display.
The camera may not operate correctly under the following conditions:
· Nighttime or dark areas if one or both reverse lamps are not operating.
· Mud, water or debris obstructs the camera's view. Clean the lens with a soft, lint-free cloth and non-abrasive cleaner.
· The rear of your vehicle is hit or damaged, causing the camera to become misaligned.
Camera Guidelines
Note: Active guidelines are only available when the transmission is in reverse (R).
A
BC D E
F
E142436
A Active guidelines B Centerline C Fixed guideline: Green zone
194
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Parking Aids
D Fixed guideline: Yellow zone
E Fixed guideline: Red zone
F Rear bumper
Active guidelines only show with fixed guidelines. To use active guidelines, turn the steering wheel to point the guidelines toward an intended path. If the steering wheel position changes while reversing, your vehicle might deviate from the original intended path.
The fixed and active guidelines fade in and out depending on the steering wheel position. The active guidelines do not display when the steering wheel position is straight.
Always use caution while reversing. Objects in the red zone are closest to your vehicle and objects in the green zone are farther away. Objects are getting closer to your vehicle as they move from the green zone to the yellow or red zones. Use the side view mirrors and rear view mirror to get better coverage on both sides and rear of your vehicle.
Camera System Settings
You can access the rear view camera system settings through the display screen. See General Information (page 97).
Enhanced Park Aids or Park Pilot
(If Equipped)
E190459
The system uses red, yellow and green highlights that appear on top of the video image when any of the sensing systems detect an object. Selectable settings for this feature are ON and OFF. Manual Zoom
WARNING: When manual zoom is on, the full area behind your vehicle may not show. Be aware of your surroundings when using the manual zoom feature. Note: Manual zoom is only available when the transmission is in reverse (R). Note: When you enable manual zoom, only the centerline is shown.
195
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Parking Aids
Selectable settings for this feature are zoom in (+) and zoom out (-). Press the symbol in the camera screen to change the view. The default setting is Zoom OFF. This allows you to get a closer view of an object behind your vehicle. The zoomed image keeps the bumper in the image to provide a reference. The zoom is only active while the transmission is in reverse (R). Rear Camera Delay Selectable settings for this feature are ON and OFF. The default setting for the rear camera delay is OFF. When shifting the transmission out of reverse (R) and into any gear other than park (P), the camera image remains in the display until: · Your vehicle speed sufficiently
increases. · You shift your vehicle into park (P).
196
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Cruise Control
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
Cruise control lets you maintain a set speed without keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal. You can use cruise control when your vehicle speed is greater than 20 mph (30 km/h).
USING CRUISE CONTROL (IF
EQUIPPED)
WARNING: Do not use cruise control on winding roads, in heavy traffic or when the road surface is slippery. This could result in loss of vehicle control, serious injury or death.
WARNING: When you are going downhill, your vehicle speed could increase above the set speed. The system does not apply the brakes.
To help the system to maintain the set speed when going downhill, downshift to a lower gear. Your vehicle speed could decrease below the set speed when driving uphill. Note: The system cancels if your vehicle speed drops below 10 mph (16 km/h) under the set speed when driving uphill.
The cruise controls are on the steering wheel. See Cruise Control (page 74).
Switching Cruise Control On
E265296
For vehicles without Speed Limiter, press and release the button.
E71340
For vehicles with Speed Limiter, press and release the button.
The indicator displays in the instrument cluster.
Setting the Cruise Speed
Drive to your preferred speed.
Press and release to set the current speed.
Press and release to set the current speed.
Take your foot off the accelerator pedal. Note: The indicator changes color.
Changing the Set Speed
Press and release to increase the set speed in small increments.
Press and release to decrease the set speed in small increments.
Press and hold either button to accelerate or decelerate, respectively. Release the button when you reach your preferred speed.
Press the accelerator or brake pedal until you reach your preferred speed. Press either button.
E262918
197
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Cruise Control
Note: If you accelerate by pressing only the accelerator pedal, the set speed does not change. When you release the accelerator pedal, your vehicle returns to the speed you previously set.
Canceling the Set Speed
E265298
Press and release the button, or tap the brake pedal to cancel the set speed.
Note: The system remembers the set speed.
Resuming the Set Speed
Press and release to resume the set speed.
Switching Cruise Control Off
For vehicles without Speed Limiter, press and release the E265297 button when the system is in standby mode or switch the ignition off.
For vehicles with Speed Limiter,
press and release the button
E71340
when the system is in standby
mode or switch the ignition off.
Note: You erase the set speed when you switch the system off.
USING ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: Always pay close attention to changing road conditions when using adaptive cruise control. The system does not replace attentive driving. Failing to pay attention to the road may result in a crash, serious injury or death.
WARNING: Do not use the adaptive cruise control when entering or leaving a highway, on roads with intersections or roundabouts or non-vehicular traffic or roads that are winding, slippery, unpaved, or steep slopes.
WARNING: Do not use the system in poor visibility, for example fog, heavy rain, spray or snow.
WARNING: Do not use the system when towing a trailer that has aftermarket electronic trailer brake controls. Failure to follow this instruction could result in the loss of control of your vehicle, personal injury or death.
WARNING: Do not use tire sizes other than those recommended because this can affect the normal operation of the system. Failure to do so may result in a loss of vehicle control, which could result in serious injury.
WARNING: Adaptive cruise control may not detect stationary or slow moving vehicles below 6 mph (10 km/h).
WARNING: Adaptive cruise control does not detect pedestrians or objects in the road.
WARNING: Adaptive cruise control does not detect oncoming vehicles in the same lane.
WARNING: Adaptive cruise control is not a crash warning or avoidance system.
198
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Cruise Control
The system adjusts your vehicle speed to maintain the set gap between you and the vehicle in front of you in the same lane. You can select four gap settings.
The system uses a radar sensor which projects a beam directly in front of your vehicle.
Note: It is your responsibility to stay alert, drive safely and be in control of the vehicle at all times.
E164805
Setting the Adaptive Cruise Speed Drive to your preferred speed.
Press and release the button.
Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
The indicator, current gap setting and set speed appear in the information display.
E262918
The cruise controls are on the steering wheel. See Cruise Control (page 74).
Switching Adaptive Cruise Control On
E265296
For vehicles without Speed Limiter, press and release the button.
E144529
For vehicles with Speed Limiter, press and release the button.
The indicator, current gap setting and set speed appear in the information display.
E164805
A vehicle graphic illuminates if there is a vehicle detected in front of you.
Note: When adaptive cruise control is active, the speedometer may vary slightly from the set speed displayed in the information display.
Setting the Adaptive Cruise Speed When Your Vehicle is Stationary
Follow a vehicle to a complete stop.
Press while keeping the brake pedal fully pressed.
E265299
The set speed adjusts to 20 mph (30 km/h).
199
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Cruise Control
The indicator, current gap setting and set speed appear in the information display.
Following a Vehicle
WARNING: When following a vehicle, your vehicle does not always decelerate quickly enough to avoid a crash without driver intervention. Always apply the brakes when necessary. Failing to do so may result in a crash, serious injury or death.
WARNING: Adaptive cruise control only warns of vehicles detected by the radar sensor. In some cases there may be no warning or a delayed warning. You should always apply the brakes when necessary. Failure to do so may result in a crash, serious injury or death.
When a vehicle ahead of you enters the same lane or a slower vehicle is ahead in the same lane, the vehicle speed adjusts to maintain a preset gap distance. A vehicle graphic illuminates in the instrument cluster.
Note: The brakes may emit noise when applied by the system.
Note: When you are following a vehicle and you switch on a direction indicator, adaptive cruise control may provide a small temporary acceleration to help you pass.
Your vehicle maintains a consistent gap from the vehicle ahead until:
· The vehicle in front of you accelerates to a speed above the set speed.
· The vehicle in front of you moves out of the lane you are in.
· You set a new gap distance.
The system applies the brakes to slow your vehicle to maintain a safe gap distance from the vehicle in front. The system only applies limited braking. You can override the system by applying the brakes.
If the system determines that its maximum braking level is not sufficient, an audible warning sounds, a message appears in the information display and an indicator flashes when the system continues to brake. Take immediate action.
Following a Vehicle to a Complete Stop
If your vehicle follows a vehicle to a complete stop and remains stationary for less than three seconds, your vehicle accelerates from a stationary position to follow the vehicle ahead.
If your vehicle follows a vehicle to a complete stop and remains E265299 stationary for more than three seconds, press to follow the vehicle ahead. Or press the accelerator pedal.
Setting the Gap Distance
You can decrease or increase the distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front by pressing the gap control.
E263697 E263696
Press and release to decrease the gap distance.
Press and release to increase the gap distance.
E164805
200
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Cruise Control
The selected gap appears in the information display as shown by the bars in the image.
Note: The gap setting is time dependent and therefore the distance adjusts with your vehicle speed.
Note: It is your responsibility to select a gap appropriate to the driving conditions.
Adaptive Cruise Control Gap Settings
Graphic Display, Bars Indic-
ated Between Vehicles
1
2
3
Distance Gap
Closest. Close. Medium.
Dynamic Behavior
Sport. Normal. Normal.
4
Far.
Comfort.
Each time you switch the system on, it selects the last chosen gap setting.
Overriding the Set Speed
WARNING: If you override the system by pressing the accelerator pedal, it does not automatically apply the brakes to maintain a gap from any vehicle ahead.
When you press the accelerator pedal, you override the set speed and gap distance.
E144529
Use the accelerator pedal normally to intentionally exceed the set speed limit.
When you override the system, the green indicator light illuminates and the vehicle image does not appear in the information display.
The system resumes operation when you release the accelerator pedal. The vehicle speed decreases to the set speed, or a lower speed if following a slower vehicle.
Changing the Set Speed
E265299
Press and release to increase the set speed in small increments.
Press and release to decrease the set speed in small increments.
Press and hold either button to change the set speed in large increments. Release the button when you reach your preferred speed.
Press the accelerator or brake pedal until you reach your preferred speed. Press either button.
The system may apply the brakes to slow the vehicle to the new set speed. The set speed displays continuously in the information display when the system is active.
Canceling the Set Speed
Press and release the button or tap the brake pedal.
E265298
Note: The system remembers the set speed.
Resuming the Set Speed Press and release the button.
E265299
Your vehicle speed returns to the previously set speed and gap setting. The set speed displays continuously in the information display when the system is active.
Note: Only use resume if you are aware of the set speed and intend to return to it.
201
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Cruise Control
Automatic Cancellation
Automatic cancellation can also occur when:
· The tires lose traction.
· You apply the parking brake.
Park Brake Application
Automatic parking brake application and cancellation occurs if:
· You unbuckle the seatbelt and open the door after you stop the vehicle.
· You hold the vehicle at a stop continuously for more than three minutes.
Hilly Condition Usage
You should select a lower gear when the system is active in situations such as prolonged downhill driving on steep grades, for example in mountainous areas. The system needs additional engine braking in these situations to reduce the load on the vehicle's regular brake system to prevent it from overheating.
Note: An audible alarm sounds and the system shuts down if it applies brakes for an extended period of time. This allows the brakes to cool. The system functions normally again after the brakes cool.
Switching Adaptive Cruise Control Off
For vehicles without Speed Limiter, press and release the E265297 button when the system is in standby mode or switch the ignition off.
For vehicles with Speed Limiter, press and release the button E144529 when the system is in standby mode or switch the ignition off.
Note: You erase the set speed when you switch the system off.
Detection Issues
WARNING: On rare occasions, detection issues can occur due to the road infrastructures, for example bridges, tunnels and safety barriers. In these cases, the system may brake late or unexpectedly. At all times, you are responsible for controlling your vehicle, supervising the system and intervening, if required.
WARNING: If the system malfunctions, have your vehicle checked as soon as possible.
The radar sensor has a limited field of view. It may not detect vehicles at all or detect a vehicle later than expected in some situations. The lead vehicle graphic does not illuminate if the system does not detect a vehicle in front of you.
202
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Cruise Control
Optimal system performance requires a clear view of the road by the windshield-mounted camera. Optimal performance may not occur if: · The camera is blocked. · There is poor visibility or lighting
conditions. · There are bad weather conditions.
System Not Available
Conditions that can cause the system to deactivate or prevent the system from activating when requested include: · A blocked sensor. · High brake temperature. · A failure in the system or a related
system.
Blocked Sensor
E71621
Detection issues can occur:
A When driving on a different line than the vehicle in front.
B With vehicles that edge into your lane. The system can only detect these vehicles once they move fully into your lane.
C There may be issues with the detection of vehicles in front when driving into and coming out of a bend or curve in the road.
In these cases, the system may brake late or unexpectedly. You should stay alert and take action when necessary.
If something hits the front end of your vehicle or damage occurs, the radar-sensing zone may change. This could cause missed or false vehicle detection.
E249424
203
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Cruise Control
A message displays if something obstructs the radar signals from the sensor. The sensor is in the lower grille. The system cannot detect a vehicle ahead and does not function when something blocks the sensor.
Note: You cannot see the sensor. It is behind a fascia panel.
Keep the front of your vehicle free of dirt, metal badges or objects. Vehicle front protectors and aftermarket lights may also block the sensor.
Possible Causes and Actions for This Message Displaying:
Cause
Action
The surface of the radar is dirty or obstructed.
Clean the grille surface in front of the radar or remove the object causing the obstruction.
The surface of the radar is clean but the message remains in the display.
Wait a short time. It may take several minutes for the radar to detect that it is free from obstruction.
Heavy rain or snow is interfering with the radar signals.
Do not use the system in these conditions because it may not detect any vehicles ahead.
Water, snow or ice on the surface of the Do not use the system in these conditions road may interfere with the radar signals. because it may not detect any vehicles
ahead.
You are in a desert or remote area with no Wait a short time or switch to normal cruise other vehicles and no roadside objects. control.
Due to the nature of radar technology, it is possible to get a blockage warning with no actual block. A false blocked condition either self clears, or clears after you restart your vehicle.
Switching to Normal Cruise Control
WARNING: Normal cruise control will not brake when your vehicle is approaching slower vehicles. Always be aware of which mode you have selected and apply the brakes when necessary.
The cruise control indicator light
replaces the adaptive cruise
E71340
control indicator light if you
select normal cruise control. The gap
setting does not display, and the system
does not respond to lead vehicles.
Automatic braking remains active to
maintain set speed.
You can change from adaptive cruise control to normal cruise control through the information display.
204
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Driving Aids
DRIVER ALERT
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNING: You are responsible for controlling your vehicle at all times. The system is designed to be an aid and does not relieve you of your responsibility to drive with due care and attention. Failure to follow this instruction could result in the loss of control of your vehicle, personal injury or death.
WARNING: The system may not function if the sensor is blocked.
WARNING: Take regular rest breaks if you feel tired. Do not wait for the system to warn you.
WARNING: Certain driving styles may result in the system warning you even if you are not feeling tired.
WARNING: In cold and severe weather conditions the system may not function. Rain, snow and spray can all limit sensor performance.
WARNING: The system will not operate if the sensor cannot track the road lane markings.
WARNING: If damage occurs in the immediate area surrounding the sensor, have your vehicle checked as soon as possible.
WARNING: The system may not correctly operate if your vehicle is fitted with a suspension kit not approved by us.
Note: The system may not operate correctly if you modify the ride height.
Note: Keep the windshield free from obstructions. For example, bird droppings, insects, snow or ice. Note: If the camera is blocked or if the windshield is damaged, the system may not function. Note: If enabled in the menu, the system activates at speeds above 40 mph (64 km/h). When below the activation speed, the information display informs the driver that the system is unavailable.
E249505
The system automatically monitors your driving behavior using various inputs including the front camera sensor. If the system detects that your driving alertness is reduced below a certain threshold, the system alerts you using a chime and a message in the information display. USING DRIVER ALERT Switching the System On and Off Switch the system on or off using the information display. See General Information (page 97). When active, the system monitors your alertness level based upon your driving behavior in relation to the lane markings and other factors.
205
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Driving Aids
System Warnings Note: The system does not issue warnings below approximately 40 mph (64 km/h). The warning system has two stages. First, the system issues a temporary warning that you need to take a rest. This message only appears for a short time. If the system detects further reduction in driving alertness, it may issue another warning that remains in the information display for a longer time. You can press OK on the steering wheel control to clear the warning. System Display When active, the system runs automatically in the background and only issues a warning if required. You can view the status at any time using the information display. See General Information (page 97). The alertness level is shown by six steps in a colored bar.
E131358
The current assessment of your alertness is within a typical range.
E131359
The current assessment of your alertness indicates that you should rest as soon as safely possible.
The status bar travels from left to right as the calculated alertness level decreases. As the meter approaches the rest icon, the color turns from green to yellow to red.
The yellow position indicates the first warning is active and the red position indicates the second warning is active.
Note: If you have recently received a warning, you should consider resting, even if the current assessment is within the typical range.
Note: If the camera sensor cannot track the road lane markings, or if your vehicle speed drops below approximately 40 mph (64 km/h), the alertness level changes to grey for a short time and the information display informs you that the system is unavailable.
Resetting the System
You can reset the system by either:
· Switching the ignition off and on. · Stopping the vehicle and then opening
and closing the driver's door.
LANE KEEPING SYSTEM (IF
EQUIPPED)
WARNING: You are responsible for controlling your vehicle at all times. The system is designed to be an aid and does not relieve you of your responsibility to drive with due care and attention. Failure to follow this instruction could result in the loss of control of your vehicle, personal injury or death.
WARNING: Always drive with due care and attention when using and operating the controls and features on your vehicle.
206
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Driving Aids
WARNING: In cold and severe weather conditions the system may not function. Rain, snow and spray can all limit sensor performance.
WARNING: The system will not operate if the sensor cannot track the road lane markings.
WARNING: The sensor may incorrectly track lane markings as other structures or objects. This can result in a false or missed warning.
WARNING: Large contrasts in outside lighting can limit sensor performance.
WARNING: The system may not operate properly if the sensor is blocked. Keep the windshield free from obstruction.
WARNING: If damage occurs in the immediate area surrounding the sensor, have your vehicle checked as soon as possible.
WARNING: The system may not correctly operate if your vehicle is fitted with a suspension kit not approved by us.
Note: The system works above 40 mph (64 km/h).
Note: The system works as long as the camera can detect one lane marking.
Note: When aid mode is on and the system detects no steering activity for a short period, the system alerts you to put your hands on the steering wheel. The system may detect a light grip or touch on the steering wheel as hands off driving.
Note: The system may not function if the camera is blocked, or if the windshield is damaged or dirty.
E249505
When you switch the system on and it detects an unintentional drift out of your lane is likely to occur, the system notifies or assists you to stay in your lane through the steering system and information display. Depending on the feature operation mode you select, the system provides a warning by vibrating the steering wheel or a steering assistance by gently counter steering your vehicle back into the lane. Switching the System On and Off Note: The system on or off setting is stored until it is manually changed, unless a MyKeyTM is detected. If the system detects a MyKeyTM, it defaults to on and the mode is set to alert.
E132099
Press the button on the direction indicator stalk to switch the system on or off.
207
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Driving Aids
System Settings The system has optional setting menus available. The system stores the last-known selection for each of these settings. You do not need to readjust your settings each time you switch on the system. Mode: This setting allows you to select which of the system features you can enable.
E165515
Alert only Provides a steering wheel vibration when the system detects an unintended lane departure.
E165517
A Alert
B Aid
Alert + Aid Provides steering assistance toward the lane center.
If your vehicle continues drifting out of the lane after the lane keeping aid corrects the vehicle, the system provides a steering wheel vibration.
Note: The alert and aid diagrams illustrate general zone coverage. They do not provide exact zone parameters.
Intensity: This setting affects the intensity of the steering wheel vibration used for the alert and alert + aid modes. This setting does not affect the aid mode.
· Low · Normal · High
E165516
Aid only Provides steering assistance toward the lane center when the system detects an unintended lane departure.
208
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Driving Aids
System Display
E151660
If you switch the system on in alert mode, an overhead graphic of a vehicle with lane markings appears in the information display. If you switch the system on in aid or alert and aid mode, a separate white icon also appears, or in some vehicles, arrows display with the lane markings. When you switch the system off, the lane marking graphics do not display. While the system is on, the color of the lane markings change to indicate the system status. Gray: Indicates that the system is temporarily unable to provide a warning or intervention on the indicated side. This may be because: · Your vehicle is under the activation
speed. · The direction indicator is active. Troubleshooting
· Your vehicle is in a dynamic maneuver.
· The road has no or poor lane markings in the camera field of view.
· The camera is obscured or unable to detect the lane markings due to environmental, traffic or vehicle conditions. For example, significant sun angles, shadows, snow, heavy rain or fog, following a large vehicle that is blocking or shadowing the lane, poor headlamp illumination.
See Troubleshooting for additional information.
Green: Indicates that the system is available or ready to provide a warning or intervention, on the indicated side.
Yellow: Indicates that the system is providing or has just provided a lane keeping aid intervention.
Red: Indicates that the system is providing or has just provided a lane keeping alert warning.
The system can be temporarily suppressed at any time by the following:
· Quick braking.
· Fast acceleration.
· Using the turn signal indicator.
· Evasive steering maneuver.
· Driving too close to the lane marking.
Why is the feature not available (line markings are gray) when I can see the lane markings on the road?
Your vehicle speed is outside the operational range of the feature. The sun is shining directly into the camera lens. A quick intentional lane change has occurred.
209
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Driving Aids
Why is the feature not available (line markings are gray) when I can see the lane markings on the road?
Your vehicle stays too close to the lane markings. Driving at high speeds in curves. The last alert warning or aid intervention occurred a short time ago. Ambiguous lane markings, for example in construction zones. Rapid transition from light to dark, or from dark to light. Sudden offset in lane markings. ABS or AdvanceTracTM is active. There is a camera blockage due to dirt, grime, fog, frost or water on the windshield. You are driving too close to the vehicle in front of you. Transitioning between no lane markings to lane markings or vice versa. There is standing water on the road. Faint lane markings, for example partial yellow lane markings on concrete roads. Lane width is too narrow or too wide. The camera has not been calibrated after a windshield replacement. Driving on tight roads or on uneven roads.
Why does the vehicle not come back toward the middle of the lane, as expected, in the Aid or Aid + Alert mode?
High cross winds are present. There is a large road crown. Rough roads, grooves or shoulder drop-offs. Heavy uneven loading of the vehicle or improper tire inflation pressure. The tires have been changed, or the suspension has been modified.
210
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Driving Aids
BLIND SPOT INFORMATION SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: Do not use the blind spot information system as a replacement for using the interior and exterior mirrors or looking over your shoulder before changing lanes. The blind spot information system is not a replacement for careful driving.
WARNING: The system may not operate properly during severe weather conditions, for example snow, ice, heavy rain and spray. Always drive with due care and attention. Failure to take care may result in a crash.
A
Using the Blind Spot Information System
Vehicles with Automatic Transmission
The system turns on when all of the following occur: · You start your vehicle. · You shift into drive (D). · The vehicle speed is greater than
6 mph (10 km/h).
Note: The system does not operate in park (P) or reverse (R).
Vehicles with Manual Transmission
The system turns on when all of the following occur: · You start your vehicle. · The vehicle speed is greater than
6 mph (10 km/h).
Note: The system does not operate in reverse (R).
System Lights and Messages
A
E124788
The system is designed to detect vehicles that may have entered the blind spot zone (A). The detection area is on both sides of your vehicle, extending rearward from the exterior mirrors to approximately 13 ft (4 m) beyond the rear bumper.
Note: The system does not prevent contact with other vehicles. It is not designed to detect parked vehicles, pedestrians, animals or other infrastructures.
E142442
When the system detects a vehicle, an alert indicator illuminates in the exterior mirror on the side the approaching vehicle is coming from. If you turn the direction indicator on for that side of your vehicle, the alert indicator flashes.
211
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Driving Aids
Note: The system may not alert you if a vehicle quickly passes through the detection zone.
Blocked Sensors
E205199
The sensors are behind the rear bumper on both sides of your vehicle. Note: Keep the sensors free from snow, ice and large accumulations of dirt. Note: Do not cover the sensors with bumper stickers, repair compound or other objects. Note: Blocked sensors could affect system performance. If the sensors are blocked, a message may appear in the information display. See Information Messages (page 106). The alert indicators remain illuminated but the system does not alert you.
System Errors If the system detects a fault, a warning lamp illuminates and a message displays. See Information Messages (page 106).
Switching the System Off and On You can switch the system off using the information display. See General Information (page 97). When you switch the system off, a warning lamp illuminates and a message displays. When you switch the system on or off, the alert indicators flash twice. Note: The system remembers the last setting when you start your vehicle.
Note: The system may not correctly operate when towing a trailer. For vehicles with a trailer tow module and tow bar approved by us, the system turns off when you attach a trailer. For vehicles with an aftermarket trailer tow module or tow bar, we recommend that you switch the system off when you attach a trailer.
To permanently switch the system off, contact an authorized dealer.
CROSS TRAFFIC ALERT (IF
EQUIPPED)
WARNING: Do not use the cross traffic alert system as a replacement for using the interior and exterior mirrors or looking over your shoulder before reversing out of a parking space. The cross traffic alert system is not a replacement for careful driving.
WARNING: The system may not operate properly during severe weather conditions, for example snow, ice, heavy rain and spray. Always drive with due care and attention. Failure to take care may result in a crash.
The system is designed to alert you of vehicles approaching from the sides when you shift into reverse (R).
Using the Cross Traffic Alert System
The system is designed to detect vehicles that approach with a speed up to 37 mph (60 km/h). Coverage decreases when the sensors are partially, mostly or fully obstructed. Slowly reversing helps increase the coverage area and effectiveness.
212
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Driving Aids
The system turns on when you start the engine and you shift into reverse (R). The
system turns off when you shift out of reverse (R).
E142440
The sensor on the left-hand side is only partially obstructed and zone coverage on the right-hand side is maximized.
E142441
213
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Driving Aids
Zone coverage also decreases when parking at narrow angles. The sensor on the left-hand side is mostly obstructed and zone coverage on that side is severely reduced. System Lights, Messages and Audible Alerts
E142442
When the system detects a vehicle, an indicator illuminates in the exterior mirror on the side the approaching vehicle is coming from. A tone sounds and a message appears in the information display. Note: In exceptional conditions, the system could alert you even when there is nothing in the detection zone, for example a vehicle passing in the distance. Blocked Sensors
E205199
The sensors are behind the rear bumper on both sides of your vehicle.
Note: Keep the sensors free from snow, ice and large accumulations of dirt.
Note: Do not cover the sensors with bumper stickers, repair compound or other objects.
Note: Blocked sensors could affect system performance.
If the sensors are blocked, a message may appear in the information display when you shift into reverse (R). See Information Messages (page 106).
System Limitations
The system may not correctly operate when any of the following occur:
· The sensors are blocked.
· Adjacently parked vehicles or objects are obstructing the sensors.
· Vehicles approach at speeds greater than 37 mph (60 km/h).
· The vehicle speed is greater than 7 mph (12 km/h).
· You reverse out of an angled parking space.
System Errors
If the system detects a fault a message displays. See General Information (page 97).
Switching the System Off and On
You can temporarily switch the system off using the information display. See General Information (page 97). When you switch system off, a message displays. See Information Messages (page 106).
Note: The system turns on each time you switch the ignition on and you shift into reverse (R). If you temporarily switch the system off, it turns on the next time you switch the ignition on.
214
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Driving Aids
Note: The system may not correctly operate when towing a trailer. For vehicles with a trailer tow module and tow bar approved by us, the system turns off when you attach a trailer. For vehicles with an aftermarket trailer tow module or tow bar, we recommend that you switch the system off when you attach a trailer.
To permanently switch the system off, contact an authorized dealer.
STEERING
Electric Power Steering
WARNING: The electric power steering system has diagnostic checks that continuously monitor the system. If a fault is detected, a message displays in the information display. Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so. Switch the ignition off. After at least 10 seconds, switch the ignition on and watch the information display for a steering system warning message. If a steering system warning message returns, have the system checked as soon as possible.
WARNING: If the system detects an error, you may not feel a difference in the steering, however a serious condition may exist. Have your vehicle checked as soon as possible. Failure to do so may result in loss of steering control.
Your vehicle has an electric power steering system, there is no fluid reservoir, no maintenance is required.
If your vehicle loses electrical power while you are driving, electric power steering assistance is lost. The steering system still operates and you can steer your vehicle manually. Manually steering your vehicle requires more effort.
Extreme continuous steering may increase the effort required for you to steer your vehicle, this increased effort prevents overheating and permanent damage to the steering system. You do not lose the ability to steer your vehicle manually. Typical steering and driving maneuvers allow the system to cool and return to normal operation.
Steering Tips
If the steering wanders or pulls, check for:
· Correct tire pressures.
· Uneven tire wear.
· Loose or worn suspension components.
· Loose or worn steering components.
· Improper vehicle alignment.
Note: A high crown in the road or high crosswinds may also make the steering seem to wander or pull.
Adaptive Learning
The electronic power steering system adaptive learning helps correct road irregularities and improves overall handling and steering feel. It communicates with the brake system to help operate advanced stability control and accident avoidance systems. Additionally, whenever the battery is disconnected or a new battery installed, you must drive your vehicle a short distance before the system relearns the strategy and reactivates all systems.
215
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Driving Aids
PRE-COLLISION ASSIST (IF
EQUIPPED)
WARNING: You are responsible for controlling your vehicle at all times. The system is designed to be an aid and does not relieve you of your responsibility to drive with due care and attention. Failure to follow this instruction could result in the loss of control of your vehicle, personal injury or death.
WARNING: The system does not detect vehicles that are driving in a different direction, pedestrians at night, cyclists or animals. Failure to take care may result in the loss of control of your vehicle, serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: The system does not operate during hard acceleration or steering. Failure to take care may lead to a crash or personal injury.
WARNING: The system may fail or operate with reduced function during cold and severe weather conditions. Snow, ice, rain, spray and fog can adversely affect the system. Keep the front camera and radar free of snow and ice. Failure to take care may result in the loss of control of your vehicle, serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: In situations where the vehicle camera has limited detection capability, this may reduce system performance. These situations include but are not limited to direct or low sunlight, vehicles at night without tail lights, unconventional vehicle types, pedestrians with complex backgrounds,
running pedestrians, partly obscured pedestrians, or pedestrians that the system cannot distinguish from a group. Failure to take care may result in the loss of control of your vehicle, serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: The system cannot help prevent all crashes. Do not rely on this system to replace driver judgment and the need to maintain a safe distance and speed.
Using the Pre-Collision Assist System The Pre-Collision Assist system is active at speeds above approximately 3 mph (5 km/h) and pedestrian detection is active at speeds up to 50 mph (80 km/h).
E156130
If your vehicle is rapidly approaching another stationary vehicle, a vehicle traveling in the same direction as yours, or a pedestrian within your driving path, the system design is to provide three levels of functionality: 1. Alert 2. Brake Support 3. Active Braking
E156131
216
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Driving Aids
Alert: When active, the system provides a flashing visual warning and an audible warning sound.
Brake Support: The system design is to help reduce the impact speed by preparing the brakes for rapid braking. The system does not automatically apply the brakes. If you press the brake pedal, the system could apply additional braking up to maximum braking force, even if you lightly press the brake pedal.
Active Braking: Active braking may activate if the system determines that a collision is imminent. The system may help the driver reduce impact damage or avoid the crash completely.
Note: If you perceive Pre-Collision Assist alerts as being too frequent or disturbing, then you can reduce the alert sensitivity, though the manufacturer recommends using the highest sensitivity setting where possible. Setting lower sensitivity would lead to fewer and later system warnings.
Adjusting Pre-Collision Assist Settings
You can adjust the Alert sensitivity to one of three possible settings by using the information display control. See General Information (page 97).
If required, you can switch active braking off using the information display controls. See General Information (page 97).
Note: Active braking automatically turns on every time you switch your vehicle on.
Blocked Sensors
E236695
If a message regarding a blocked sensor or camera appears in the information display, the radar signals or camera images are obstructed. The radar sensor is located behind a fascia cover near the driver side of the lower grille. With an obstructed radar, the Pre-Collision Assist system does not function and cannot detect a vehicle ahead. With the front camera obstructed, the Pre-Collision Assist system does not respond to pedestrians or stationary vehicles and the system performance on moving vehicles reduces. The following table lists possible causes and actions for when this message displays.
217
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Driving Aids
Cause
Action
The surface of the radar in the grille is dirty or obstructed in some way.
Clean the grille surface in front of the radar or remove the object causing the obstruc-
tion.
The surface of the radar in the grille is clean but the message remains in the display.
Wait a short time. It may take several minutes for the radar to detect that there
is no obstruction.
The Pre-Collision Assist system is tempor-
Heavy rain, spray, snow, or fog is interfering arily disabled. Pre-Collision Assist should
with the radar signals.
automatically reactivate a short time after
the weather conditions improve.
Swirling water, or snow or ice on the surface of the road may interfere with the radar signals.
The Pre-Collision Assist system is temporarily disabled. Pre-Collision Assist should automatically reactivate a short time after
the weather conditions improve.
Radar is out of alignment due to a front end impact.
Contact an authorized dealer to have the radar checked for proper coverage and operation.
The windshield in front of the camera is Clean the outside of the windshield in front
dirty or obstructed in some way.
of the camera.
The windshield in front of the camera is
Wait a short time. It may take several
clean but the message remains in the minutes for the camera to detect that there
display.
is no obstruction.
Note: Proper system operation requires a clear view of the road by the camera. Have any windshield damage in the area of the camera's field of view repaired.
Note: If something hits the front end of your vehicle or damage occurs, the radar sensing zone may change. This could cause missed or false vehicle detections. Contact an authorized dealer to have the radar checked for proper coverage and operation.
Note: If your vehicle detects excessive heat at the camera or a potential misalignment condition, a message may display in the information display indicating temporary sensor unavailability. This message deactivates automatically when operational conditions are correct. For example, when the ambient temperature around the sensor decreases or the sensor automatically recalibrates successfully.
218
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Load Carrying
LOAD LIMIT
Vehicle Loading - with and without a Trailer
This section guides you in the proper loading of your vehicle, trailer, or both. Keep your loaded vehicle weight within its design rating capability, with or without a trailer. Properly loading your vehicle provides maximum return of vehicle design performance. Before you load your vehicle, become familiar with the following terms for determining your vehicle's weight rating, with or without a trailer, from the vehicle's Tire and Loading Information label or Safety Compliance Certification label.
Tire and Loading Label Information Example:
E198719
Payload
Payload is the combined weight of cargo and passengers that your vehicle is carrying. The maximum payload for your vehicle appears on the Tire and Loading label. The label is either on the B-pillar or the edge of the driver door. Vehicles exported outside the US and Canada may not have a tire and loading label. Look for "The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg OR XXX lb" for maximum payload. The payload listed on the Tire and Loading Information label
219
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Load Carrying
is the maximum payload for your vehicle as built by the assembly plant. If you install any additional equipment on your vehicle, you must determine the new payload. Subtract the weight of the equipment from the payload listed on the Tire and Loading label. When towing, trailer tongue weight or king pin weight is also part of payload.
WARNING: The appropriate loading capacity of your vehicle can be limited either by volume capacity (how much space is available) or by payload capacity (how much weight the vehicle should carry). Once you have reached the maximum payload of your vehicle, do not add more cargo, even if there is space available. Overloading or improperly loading your vehicle can contribute to loss of vehicle control and vehicle rollover.
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)
GAWR is the maximum allowable weight that a single axle (front or rear) can carry. These numbers are on the Safety Compliance Certification label. The label is located on the door hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge that meets the door-latch post, next to the driver seating position.
The total load on each axle must never exceed its Gross Axle Weight Rating.
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)
GVWR is the maximum allowable weight of the fully loaded vehicle. This includes all options, equipment, passengers and cargo. It appears on the Safety Compliance Certification label. The label is located on the door hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge that meets the door-latch post, next to the driver seating position. The gross vehicle weight must never exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating.
Safety Compliance Certification Label Example:
E198828
220
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Load Carrying
WARNING: Exceeding the Safety Compliance Certification label vehicle weight limits can adversely affect the performance and handling of your vehicle, cause vehicle damage and can result in the loss of control of your vehicle, serious personal injury or death.
Maximum Loaded Trailer Weight
Maximum loaded trailer weight is the highest possible weight of a fully loaded trailer the vehicle can tow. Consult an authorized dealer (or the RV and Trailer Towing Guide available at an authorized dealer) for more detailed information.
GCWR (Gross Combined Weight Rating)
GCWR is the maximum allowable weight of the vehicle and the loaded trailer, including all cargo and passengers, that the vehicle can handle without risking damage. (Important: The towing vehicle's braking system is rated for operation at Gross Vehicle Weight Rating, not at Gross Combined Weight Rating.) Separate functional brakes should be used for safe control of towed vehicles and for trailers where the Gross Combined Weight of the towing vehicle plus the trailer exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating of the towing vehicle.
The gross combined weight must never exceed the Gross Combined Weight Rating.
Note: For trailer towing information refer to the RV and Trailer Towing Guide available at an authorized dealer.
WARNING: Do not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR specified on the certification label.
WARNING: Do not use replacement tires with lower load carrying capacities than the original tires because they may lower your vehicle's GVWR and GAWR limitations. Replacement tires with a higher limit than the original tires do not increase the GVWR and GAWR limitations.
WARNING: Exceeding any vehicle weight rating can adversely affect the performance and handling of your vehicle, cause vehicle damage and can result in the loss of control of your vehicle, serious personal injury or death.
Steps for determining the correct load limit:
1. Locate the statement "The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lb." on your vehicle's placard.
221
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Load Carrying
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lb.
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the "XXX" amount equals 1,400 lb. and there will be five 150 lb. passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lb. (1400-750 (5 x 150) = 650 lb.)
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
Helpful examples for calculating the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity
Suppose your vehicle has a 1400-pound (635-kilogram) cargo and luggage capacity. You decide to go golfing. Is there enough load capacity to carry you, four of your friends and all the golf bags? You and four friends average 220 pounds (99 kilograms) each and the golf bags weigh approximately 30 pounds (13.5 kilograms) each. The calculation would be: 1400 (5 x 220) - (5 x 30) = 1400 - 1100 - 150 = 150 pounds. Yes, you have enough load capacity in your vehicle to transport four friends and your golf bags. In metric units, the calculation would be: 635 kilograms - (5 x 99 kilograms) (5 x 13.5 kilograms) = 635 - 495 67.5 = 72.5 kilograms.
Suppose your vehicle has a 1400-pound (635-kilogram) cargo and luggage capacity. You and one of your friends decide to pick up cement from the local home improvement store to finish that patio you have been planning for the past two years. Measuring the inside of the vehicle with the rear seat folded down, you have room for twelve 100-pound (45-kilogram) bags of cement. Do you have enough load capacity to transport the cement to your home? If you and your friend each weigh 220 pounds (99 kilograms), the calculation would be: 1400 (2 x 220) - (12 x 100) = 1400 - 440
222
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Load Carrying
- 1200 = - 240 pounds. No, you do not have enough cargo capacity to carry that much weight. In metric units, the calculation would be: 635 kilograms - (2 x 99 kilograms) - (12 x 45 kilograms) = 635 - 198 - 540 = -103 kilograms. You will need to reduce the load weight by at least 240 pounds (104 kilograms). If you remove three 100-pound (45-kilogram) cement bags, then the load calculation would be:1400 - (2 x 220) - (9 x 100) = 1400 - 440 900 = 60 pounds. Now you have the load capacity to transport the cement and your friend home. In metric units, the calculation would be: 635 kilograms - (2 x 99 kilograms) - (9 x 45 kilograms) = 635 - 198 - 405 = 32 kilograms.
The above calculations also assume that the loads are positioned in your vehicle in a manner that does not overload the front or the rear gross axle weight rating specified for your vehicle on the Safety Compliance Certification label.
Special Loading Instructions for Owners of Pick-up Trucks and Utility-type Vehicles
handle differently than unloaded vehicles. Take extra precautions, such as slower speeds and increased stopping distance, when driving a heavily loaded vehicle.
WARNING: When loading the roof racks, we recommend you evenly distribute the load, as well as maintain a low center of gravity. Loaded vehicles, with higher centers of gravity, may
223
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Towing
TOWING A TRAILER
WARNING: Do not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR specified on the certification label.
WARNING: Towing trailers beyond the maximum recommended gross trailer weight exceeds the limit of your vehicle and could result in engine damage, transmission damage, structural damage, loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover and personal injury.
Note: Your vehicle may have electrical items, such as fuses or relays, related to towing. See Fuses (page 245).
Your vehicle's load capacity designation is by weight, not by volume, so you cannot necessarily use all available space when loading a vehicle or trailer.
Towing a trailer places an extra load on your vehicle's engine, transmission, axle, brakes, tires and suspension. Inspect these components periodically during, and after, any towing operation.
Load Placement
To help minimize how trailer movement affects your vehicle when driving:
· Load the heaviest items closest to the trailer floor.
· Load the heaviest items centered between the left and right side trailer tires.
· Load the heaviest items above the trailer axles or just slightly forward toward the trailer tongue. Do not allow the final trailer tongue weight to go above or below 10-15% of the loaded trailer weight.
· Select a ball mount with the correct rise or drop. When both the loaded vehicle and trailer are connected, the trailer frame should be level, or slightly angled down toward your vehicle, when viewed from the side.
When driving with a trailer or payload, a slight takeoff vibration or shudder may be present due to the increased payload weight. Additional information regarding proper trailer loading and setting your vehicle up for towing is located in the Load Carrying chapter. See Load Limit (page 219).
You can also find information in the RV & Trailer Towing Guide available at your authorized dealer, or online.
224
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Towing
RV & Trailer Towing Guide Online Website http://www.fleet.ford.com/towing-guides/
RECOMMENDED TOWING WEIGHTS
Note: Do not exceed the trailer weight for your vehicle configuration listed in the chart below.
Note: Make sure to take into consideration trailer frontal area. Do not exceed 12 feet2 (1.11 meters2) for 1.5L GTDI and 2.5L TiVCT or 20 feet2 (1.86 meters2) for 2.0L GTDI.
Note: For high altitude operation, reduce the gross combined weight by 2% per 1,000 ft (300 m) starting at the 1,000 ft (300 m) elevation point.
Note: Certain states require electric trailer brakes for trailers over a specified weight. Be sure to check state regulations for this specified weight. The maximum trailer weights listed may be limited to this specified weight, as the vehicle's electrical system may not include the wiring connector needed to activate electric trailer brakes.
Your vehicle may tow a trailer provided the maximum trailer weight is less than or equal to the maximum trailer weight listed for your vehicle configuration on the following chart.
Powertrain 1.5L GTDI 2.0L GTDI 2.5L TiVCT 2.7L GTDI *Calculated with SAE J2807 method.
Maximum trailer weight* 1000 lb (454 kg) 2000 lb (907 kg) 1000 lb (454 kg) 1000 lb (454 kg)
225
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Towing
ESSENTIAL TOWING CHECKS
Follow these guidelines for safe towing:
· Do not tow a trailer until you drive your vehicle at least 1,000 mi (1,600 km).
· Consult your local motor vehicle laws for towing a trailer.
· See the instructions included with towing accessories for the proper installation and adjustment specifications.
· Service your vehicle more frequently if you tow a trailer. See your scheduled maintenance information.
· If you use a rental trailer, follow the instructions the rental agency gives you.
You can find information on load specification terms found on the tire label and Safety Compliance label as well as instructions on calculating your vehicle's load in the Load Carrying chapter. See Load Limit (page 219).
Remember to account for the trailer tongue weight as part of your vehicle load when calculating the total vehicle weight.
Hitches
Do not use a hitch that either clamps onto the bumper or attaches to the axle.
Distribute the trailer load so 10-15% of the total trailer weight is on the tongue.
Safety Chains
Note: Never attach safety chains to the bumper.
Always connect the safety chains to the hook retainers of your vehicle hitch.
To connect the safety chains, cross them under the trailer tongue and allow enough slack for turning tight corners. Do not allow the chains to drag on the ground.
Trailer Brakes
WARNING: Do not connect a trailer's hydraulic brake system directly to your vehicle's brake system. Your vehicle may not have enough braking power and your chances of having a collision greatly increase.
Electric brakes and manual, automatic or surge-type trailer brakes are safe if you install them properly and adjust them to the manufacturer's specifications. The trailer brakes must meet local and federal regulations.
The rating for the tow vehicle's braking system operation is at the gross vehicle weight rating, not the gross combined weight rating.
Separate functioning brake systems are required for safe control of towed vehicles and trailers weighing more than 1500 lb (680 kg) when load.
Trailer Lamps
WARNING: Never connect any trailer lamp wiring to the vehicle's tail lamp wiring; this may damage the electrical system resulting in fire. Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible for assistance in proper trailer tow wiring installation. Additional electrical equipment may be required.
Trailer lamps are required on most towed vehicles. Make sure all running lights, brake lights, turn signals and hazard lights are working.
226
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Towing
Before Towing a Trailer
Practice turning, stopping and backing up to get the feel of your vehicle-trailer combination before starting on a trip. When turning, make wider turns so the trailer wheels clear curbs and other obstacles.
When Towing a Trailer
· Do not drive faster than 70 mph (113 km/h) during the first 500 mi (800 km).
· Do not make full-throttle starts.
· Check your hitch, electrical connections and trailer wheel lug nuts thoroughly after you have traveled 50 mi (80 km).
· When stopped in congested or heavy traffic during hot weather, place the transmission in park (P) to aid engine and transmission cooling and to help A/C performance.
· Turn off the speed control with heavy loads or in hilly terrain. The speed control may turn off automatically when you are towing on long, steep grades.
· Shift to a lower gear when driving down a long or steep hill. Do not apply the brakes continuously, as they may overheat and become less effective.
· If your transmission is equipped with a Grade Assist or Tow/Haul feature, use this feature when towing. This provides engine braking and helps eliminate excessive transmission shifting for optimum fuel economy and transmission cooling.
· Allow more distance for stopping with a trailer attached. Anticipate stops and brake gradually.
· Avoid parking on a grade. However, if you must park on a grade:
1. Turn the steering wheel to point your vehicle tires away from traffic flow.
2. Set your vehicle parking brake.
3. Place the transmission in park (P).
4. Place wheel chocks in front and back of the trailer wheels. Chocks are not included with your vehicle.
Launching or Retrieving a Boat or Personal Watercraft (PWC)
Note: Disconnect the wiring to the trailer before backing the trailer into the water.
Note: Reconnect the wiring to the trailer after removing the trailer from the water.
When backing down a ramp during boat launching or retrieval:
· Do not allow the static water level to rise above the bottom edge of the rear bumper.
· Do not allow waves to break higher than 6 in (15 cm) above the bottom edge of the rear bumper.
Exceeding these limits may allow water to enter vehicle components:
· Causing internal damage to the components.
· Affecting driveability, emissions, and reliability.
Replace the rear axle lubricant anytime you submerge the rear axle in water. Water may contaminate the rear axle lubricant, which is not a normal maintenance inspection item unless there is a possibility of a leak or other axle repair is required.
227
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Towing
TOWING THE VEHICLE ON FOUR WHEELS
Emergency Towing
WARNING: If your vehicle has a steering wheel lock make sure the ignition is in the accessory or on position when being towed.
If your vehicle becomes inoperable (without access to wheel dollies, car-hauling trailer, or flatbed transport vehicle), it can be flat-towed (all wheels on the ground, regardless of the powertrain and transmission configuration) under the following conditions:
· Your vehicle is facing forward for towing in a forward direction.
· Shift the transmission into neutral (N). If you cannot shift the transmission into neutral (N), you may need to override the shifter and enable Stay in Neutral mode. Failing to do so may result in damage to the transmission. See Transmission (page 166).
· Maximum distance is 50 mi (80 km).
· Maximum speed is 35 mph (56 km/h).
Recreational Towing
Note: Put your climate control system in recirculated air mode to prevent exhaust fumes from entering the vehicle. See Climate Control (page 121).
Follow these guidelines if you have a need for recreational (RV) towing. An example of recreational towing would be towing your vehicle behind a motorhome. We designed these guidelines to prevent damage to your transmission.
Vehicles Equipped with 1.5L, 2.0L, and 2.5L Engines
Front-wheel Drive Vehicles
Front-wheel drive vehicles CANNOT be flat-towed (all wheels on the ground) as vehicle or transmission damage may occur. It is recommended to tow your vehicle with the front wheels off the ground by using a tow dolly. If you are using a tow dolly, follow the instructions specified by the equipment provider.
All-wheel Drive Vehicles
All-wheel drive vehicles CANNOT be flat-towed (all wheels on the ground) as vehicle or transmission damage may occur. It is recommended to tow your vehicle with all four (4) wheels off the ground such as when using a car-hauling trailer. Otherwise, you cannot recreational tow your vehicle.
Vehicles Equipped with a 2.7L Engine
Your vehicle can be towed with all four wheels on the ground using the Stay in Neutral mode feature, or with all four wheels off the ground using a vehicle transport trailer. If you are using a vehicle transport trailer, follow the instruction specified by the equipment provider.
If you tow your vehicle with all four wheels on the ground:
· Tow only in the forward direction.
· Release the parking brake.
· Place the vehicle in Stay in Neutral mode. See Automatic Transmission (page 166).
· Do not exceed 65 mph (105 km/h).
Note: If the parking brake is applied, a message appears in the information display.
228
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Towing
Note: Start the engine and allow it to run for a few minutes at the beginning of each day, and every six hours or fewer. With the engine running and your foot on the brake, shift into drive (D) and then into reverse (R) before shifting back into neutral (N). BEFORE CONTINUING TO TOW, YOU MUST RE-ENABLE STAY IN NEUTRAL MODE.
229
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Driving Hints
BREAKING-IN
You need to break in new tires for approximately 300 mi (480 km). During this time, your vehicle may exhibit some unusual driving characteristics.
Avoid driving too fast during the first 1,000 mi (1,600 km). Vary your speed frequently and change up through the gears early. Do not labor the engine.
Do not tow during the first 1,000 mi (1,600 km).
ECONOMICAL DRIVING
Fuel economy is affected by several things such as how you drive, the conditions you drive under and how you maintain your vehicle.
There are some things to keep in mind that may improve your fuel economy:
· Accelerate and slow down in a smooth, moderate fashion.
· Drive at steady speeds.
· Anticipate stops; slowing down may eliminate the need to stop.
· Combine errands and minimize stop-and-go driving (When running errands, go to the furthest destination first and then work your way back home).
· Close the windows for high-speed driving.
· Drive at reasonable speeds.
· Keep the tires properly inflated and use only the recommended size.
· Use the recommended engine oil.
· Perform all regularly scheduled maintenance.
There are also some things you may want to avoid doing because they reduce your fuel economy: · Avoid sudden or hard accelerations. · Avoid revving the engine before turning
off the car. · Avoid long idle periods. · Do not warm up your vehicle on cold
mornings. · Reduce the use of air conditioning and
heat. · Avoid using speed control in hilly
terrain. · Do not rest your foot on the brake
pedal while driving. · Avoid carrying unnecessary weight. · Avoid adding particular accessories to
your vehicle (e.g. bug deflectors, rollbars/light bars, running boards, ski racks). · Avoid driving with the wheels out of alignment.
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
WARNING: Do not drive through flowing or deep water as you may lose control of your vehicle.
Note: Driving through standing water can cause vehicle damage.
Note: Engine damage can occur if water enters the air filter.
Before driving through standing water, check the depth. Never drive through water that is higher than the bottom of the front rocker area of your vehicle.
230
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Driving Hints
E259345
When driving through standing water, drive very slowly and do not stop your vehicle. Your brake performance and traction may be limited. After driving through water and as soon as it is safe to do so:
· Lightly press the brake pedal to dry the brakes and to check that they work.
· Check that the horn works. · Check that the exterior lights work. · Turn the steering wheel to check that
the steering power assist works.
FLOOR MATS
WARNING: Secure the floor mat to both retention devices so that it cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals. Failure to follow this instruction could result in the loss of control of your vehicle, personal injury or death.
WARNING: Do not place additional floor mats or any other covering on top of the original floor mats. This could result in the floor mat interfering with the operation of the pedals. Failure to follow this instruction could result in the loss of control of your vehicle, personal injury or death.
WARNING: Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the driver foot well while your vehicle is moving. Objects that are loose can become trapped under the pedals causing a loss of vehicle control.
WARNING: Use a floor mat designed to fit the footwell of your vehicle that does not obstruct the pedal area. Failure to follow this instruction could result in the loss of control of your vehicle, personal injury or death.
WARNING: Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of vehicle control and increase the risk of serious personal injury.
E142666
To install the floor mats, position the floor mat eyelet over the retention post and press down to lock in position.
To remove the floor mat, reverse the installation procedure.
Note: Regularly check the floor mats to make sure they are secure.
231
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Roadside Emergencies
ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE
Vehicles Sold in the United States: Getting Roadside Assistance
To fully assist you should you have a vehicle concern, Ford Motor Company offers a complimentary roadside assistance program. This program is separate from the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
The service is available:
· 24 hours a day, seven days a week.
· For the coverage period supplied with your vehicle.
Roadside Assistance covers:
· A flat tire change with a good spare (except vehicles supplied with a tire inflation kit).
· Battery jump start.
· Lock-out assistance (key replacement cost is the customer's responsibility).
· Fuel delivery -- independent service contractors, if not prohibited by state, local or municipal law, shall deliver up to 2 gal (8 L) of gasoline or 5 gal (20 L) of diesel fuel to a disabled vehicle. Roadside Assistance limits fuel delivery service to two no-charge occurrences within a 12-month period.
· Winch out -- available within 100 ft (30 m) of a paved or county maintained road, no recoveries.
· Towing -- independent service contractors, if not prohibited by state, local or municipal law, shall tow Ford eligible vehicles to an authorized dealer within 35 mi (56 km) of the disablement location or to the nearest authorized dealer. If a member requests a tow to an authorized dealer that is more than 35 mi (56 km) from the disablement location, the member shall be responsible for any mileage costs in excess of 35 mi (56 km).
· Roadside Assistance includes up to $200 for a towed trailer if the disabled eligible vehicle requires service at the nearest authorized dealer. If the towing vehicle is operational but the trailer is not, then the trailer does not qualify for any roadside services.
Vehicles Sold in the United States: Using Roadside Assistance
Complete the roadside assistance identification card and place it in your wallet for quick reference. This card is in the Owner's Manual kit.
United States vehicle customers who require Roadside Assistance, call 1-800-241-3673.
If you need to arrange roadside assistance for yourself, Ford Motor Company reimburses a reasonable amount for towing to the nearest dealership within 35 mi (56 km). To obtain reimbursement information, United States vehicle customers call 1-800-241-3673. Customers need to submit their original receipts.
232
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Roadside Emergencies
Vehicles Sold in Canada: Getting Roadside Assistance
To fully assist you should you have a vehicle concern, Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited offers a complimentary roadside assistance program. This program is eligible within Canada or the continental United States.
The service is available 24 hours a day, seven days a week.
This program is separate from the New Vehicle Limited Warranty, but the coverage is concurrent with the powertrain coverage period of your vehicle. Canadian roadside coverage and benefits may differ from the U.S. coverage.
If you require more information, please call us in Canada at 1-800-665-2006, or visit our website at www.ford.ca.
HAZARD FLASHERS
Note: The hazard flashers operate when the ignition is in any position, or if the key is not in the ignition. If used when the vehicle is not running, the battery loses charge. As a result, there may be insufficient power to restart your vehicle.
The flasher control is on the instrument panel. Use your hazard flashers when your vehicle is creating a safety hazard for other motorists.
· Press the flasher control and all front and rear direction indicators flash.
· Press the button again to switch them off.
FUEL SHUTOFF
WARNING: If your vehicle has been involved in a crash, have the fuel system checked. Failure to follow this instruction could result in fire, personal injury or death.
Note: When you try to restart your vehicle after a fuel shutoff, the vehicle makes sure that various systems are safe to restart. Once the vehicle determines the systems are safe, then the vehicle allows you to restart.
Note: In the event that your vehicle does not restart after your third attempt, contact a qualified technician.
The fuel pump shutoff stops the flow of fuel to the engine in the event of a moderate to severe crash. Not every impact causes a shutoff.
Should your vehicle shut off after a crash, you may restart your vehicle.
1. Press START/STOP to switch off your vehicle.
2. Press the brake pedal and START/STOP to switch on your vehicle.
3. Remove your foot from the brake pedal and press START/STOP to switch off your vehicle.
4. You can attempt to start the vehicle by pressing the brake pedal and START/STOP, or press START/STOP without pressing the brake pedal.
5. If the vehicle does not start, repeat steps 1 through 4.
233
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Roadside Emergencies
JUMP STARTING THE VEHICLE Connecting the Jumper Cables
WARNING: Batteries normally produce explosive gases which can cause personal injury. Therefore, do not allow flames, sparks or lighted substances to come near the battery. When working near the battery, always shield your face and protect your eyes. Always provide correct ventilation.
WARNING: Keep batteries out of reach of children. Batteries contain sulfuric acid. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Shield your eyes when working near the battery to protect against possible splashing of acid solution. In case of acid contact with skin or eyes, flush immediately with water for a minimum of 15 minutes and get prompt medical attention. If acid is swallowed, call a physician immediately.
WARNING: Use only adequately sized cables with insulated clamps.
Preparing Your Vehicle
Do not attempt to push-start your automatic transmission vehicle.
Note: Attempting to push-start a vehicle with an automatic transmission may cause transmission damage.
Note: Use only a 12-volt supply to start your vehicle.
Note: Do not disconnect the battery of the disabled vehicle as this could damage the vehicle electrical system.
Park the booster vehicle close to the hood of the disabled vehicle, making sure the two vehicles do not touch.
WARNING: Do not connect the end of the second cable to the negative (-) terminal of the battery to be jumped. A spark may cause an explosion of the gases that surround the battery.
WARNING: Do not use fuel lines, engine valve covers, windshield wiper arms, the intake manifold, or hood latch as ground points.
Note: Do not attach the end of the positive cable to the studs or L-shaped eyelet located above the positive (+) terminal of your vehicle's battery. High current may flow through and cause damage to the fuses. Note: To avoid reverse polarity connections, make sure that you correctly identify the positive (+) and negative (-) terminals on both the disabled and booster vehicles before connecting the cables. Note: Remove the red cap from the positive prong (B) on your vehicle before connecting the cables.
E226509
A. Negative prong (). B. Positive prong (+).
234
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Roadside Emergencies
Jump Starting
1. Start the engine of the booster vehicle
and rev the engine moderately, or press
the accelerator gently to keep your
engine speed between 2000 and 3000
1
RPM, as shown in your tachometer. 2. Start the engine of the disabled vehicle.
3. Once the disabled vehicle has been
started, run both vehicle engines for an
additional three minutes before
disconnecting the jumper cables.
3
4
Removing the Jumper Cables
2
Remove the jumper cables in the reverse
order that they were connected.
4
E142664
Note: In the illustration, the bottom vehicle represents the booster vehicle.
1. Connect the positive (+) jumper cable to the positive (+) terminal of the discharged battery.
2. Connect the other end of the positive (+) cable to the positive (+) terminal of the booster vehicle battery.
3. Connect the negative (-) cable to the negative (-) terminal of the booster vehicle battery.
4. Make the final connection of the negative (-) cable to an exposed metal part of the stalled vehicle's engine, away from the battery and the fuel injection system, or connect the negative (-) cable to a ground connection point if available.
1 2
3
E142665
1. Remove the negative (-) jumper cable from the disabled vehicle.
235
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Roadside Emergencies
2. Remove the jumper cable on the negative (-) terminal of the booster vehicle battery.
3. Remove the jumper cable from the positive (+) terminal of the booster vehicle battery.
4. Remove the jumper cable from the positive (+) terminal of the disabled vehicle battery.
5. Allow the engine to idle for at least one minute.
POST-CRASH ALERT SYSTEM
The system flashes the direction indicators and sounds the horn (intermittently) in the event of a serious impact that deploys an airbag (front, side, side curtain or Safety Canopy) or the seatbelt pretensioners.
The horn and indicators turn off when:
· You press the hazard control button.
· You press the panic button on the remote entry transmitter (if equipped).
· Your vehicle runs out of power.
· Sounding of the horn is only enabled in specific markets.
TRANSPORTING THE VEHICLE
E143886
If you need to have your vehicle towed, contact a professional towing service or, if you are a member of a roadside assistance program, your roadside assistance service provider. We recommend the use of a wheel lift and dollies or flatbed equipment to tow your vehicle. Do not tow with a slingbelt. Ford Motor Company has not approved a slingbelt towing procedure. Vehicle damage may occur if towed incorrectly, or by any other means. Ford Motor Company produces a towing manual for all authorized tow truck operators. Have your tow truck operator refer to this manual for proper hook-up and towing procedures for your vehicle.
236
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Roadside Emergencies
It is acceptable to have your front-wheel drive vehicle towed from the front if using proper wheel lift equipment to raise the front wheels off the ground. When towing in this manner, the rear wheels can remain on the ground.
Front-wheel drive vehicles must have the front wheels placed on a tow dolly when towing your vehicle from the rear using wheel lift equipment. This prevents damage to the transmission.
Towing an all-wheel or four-wheel drive vehicle requires that all wheels be off the ground, such as using a wheel lift and dollies or flatbed equipment. This prevents damage to the transmission, all-wheel or four-wheel drive system and vehicle.
TOWING POINTS
Due to local market requirements in some countries, some vehicles may be equipped with a recovery hook.
Recovery Hook Location
If your vehicle is equipped with a screw-in recovery hook, it is with the spare tire kit or the rear under floor storage.
Installing the Recovery Hook
There is an installation point for the recovery hook located behind the fascia.
Note: The screw-in recovery hook has a left-hand thread. Turn it counterclockwise to install it. Make sure that the recovery hook is fully tightened.
E146284
E188420
Remove the recovery hook cover by prying it off at the notch with a screwdriver or similar object. Note: Use a soft cloth to cover the prying tool. This helps prevent scratch marks to the vehicle's paint.
237
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Customer Assistance
GETTING THE SERVICES YOU NEED
Warranty repairs to your vehicle must be performed by an authorized dealer. While any authorized dealer handling your vehicle line will provide warranty service, we recommend you return to your selling authorized dealer who wants to ensure your continued satisfaction.
Please note that certain warranty repairs require special training and equipment, so not all authorized dealers are authorized to perform all warranty repairs. This means that, depending on the warranty repair needed, you may have to take your vehicle to another authorized dealer.
A reasonable time must be allowed to perform a repair after taking your vehicle to the authorized dealer. Repairs will be made using Ford or Motorcraft® parts, or remanufactured or other parts that are authorized by Ford.
Away From Home
If you are away from home when your vehicle needs service, contact the Ford Customer Relationship Center or use the online resources listed below to find the nearest authorized dealer.
In the United States:
Mailing address
Ford Motor Company Customer Relationship Center P.O. Box 6248 Dearborn, MI 48126
Telephone
1-800-392-3673 (FORD) (TDD for the hearing impaired: 1-800-232-5952)
Additional information and resources are available online:
Website
www.owner.ford.com
These are some of the items that can be found online: · U.S. dealer locator by Dealer Name,
City/State or Zip Code. · Owner Manuals. · Maintenance Schedules. · Recalls. · Ford Extended Service Plans. · Ford Genuine Accessories. · Service specials and promotions. In Canada: Mailing address Customer Relationship Centre Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited P.O. Box 2000 Oakville, Ontario L6K 0C8 Telephone 1-800-565-3673 (FORD)
Website
www.ford.ca
Twitter @FordServiceCA (English Canada) @FordServiceQC (Quebec)
Additional Assistance
If you have questions or concerns, or are unsatisfied with the service you are receiving, follow these steps: 1. Contact your Sales Representative or
Service Advisor at your selling or servicing authorized dealer.
238
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Customer Assistance
2. If your inquiry or concern remains unresolved, contact the Sales Manager, Service Manager or Customer Relations Manager.
3. If you require assistance or clarification on Ford Motor Company policies, please contact the Ford Customer Relationship Center.
In order to help us serve you better, please have the following information available when contacting a Customer Relationship Center:
· Vehicle Identification Number.
· Your telephone number (home and business).
· The name of the authorized dealer and city where located.
· The vehicle's current odometer reading.
In some states within the United States, you must directly notify Ford in writing before pursuing remedies under your state's warranty laws, and Ford is also allowed a final repair attempt.
Additionally, in some states within the United States, a consumer has the option of submitting a warranty dispute to the BBB Auto Line before taking action under the Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act, or to the extent allowed by state law, before pursuing replacement or repurchase remedies provided by certain state laws. This dispute handling procedure is not required prior to enforcing state created rights or other rights which are independent of the Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act or state replacement or repurchase laws.
IN CALIFORNIA (U.S. ONLY)
California Civil Code Section 1793.2(d) requires that, if a manufacturer or its representative is unable to repair a motor vehicle to conform to the vehicle's applicable express warranty after a reasonable number of attempts, the manufacturer shall be required to either replace the vehicle with one substantially identical or repurchase the vehicle and reimburse the buyer in an amount equal to the actual price paid or payable by the consumer (less a reasonable allowance for consumer use). The consumer has the right to choose whether to receive a refund or replacement vehicle.
California Civil Code Section 1793.22(b) presumes that the manufacturer has had a reasonable number of attempts to conform the vehicle to its applicable express warranties if, within the first 18 months of ownership of a new vehicle or the first 18,000 mi (29,000 km), whichever occurs first:
1. Two or more repair attempts are made on the same non-conformity likely to cause death or serious bodily injury OR
2. Four or more repair attempts are made on the same nonconformity (a defect or condition that substantially impairs the use, value or safety of the vehicle) OR
3. The vehicle is out of service for repair of nonconformities for a total of more than 30 calendar days (not necessarily all at one time).
In the case of 1 or 2 above, the consumer must also notify the manufacturer of the need for the repair of the nonconformity at the following address:
Ford Motor Company 16800 Executive Plaza Drive Mail Drop 3NE-B Dearborn, MI 48126
239
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Customer Assistance
You are required to submit your warranty dispute to BBB AUTO LINE before asserting in court any rights or remedies conferred by California Civil Code Section 1793.22(b). You are also required to use BBB AUTO LINE before exercising rights or seeking remedies created by the Federal Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act, 15 U.S.C. sec. 2301 et seq. If you choose to seek redress by pursuing rights and remedies not created by California Civil Code Section 1793.22(b) or the Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act, resort to BBB AUTO LINE is not required by those statutes.
THE BETTER BUSINESS
BUREAU (BBB) AUTO LINE
PROGRAM (U.S. ONLY)
Your satisfaction is important to Ford Motor Company and to your dealer. If a warranty concern has not been resolved using the three-step procedure outlined earlier in this chapter in the Getting the Services you need section, you may be eligible to participate in the BBB AUTO LINE program.
The BBB AUTO LINE program consists of two parts mediation and arbitration. During mediation, a representative of the BBB will contact both you and Ford Motor Company to explore options for settlement of the claim. If an agreement is not reached during mediation or you do not want to participate in mediation, and if your claim is eligible, you may participate in the arbitration process. An arbitration hearing will be scheduled so that you can present your case in an informal setting before an impartial person. The arbitrator will consider the testimony provided and make a decision after the hearing.
Disputes submitted to the BBB AUTO LINE program are usually decided within forty days after you file your claim with the BBB. You are not bound by the decision, and may reject the decision and proceed to court where all findings of the BBB Auto Line dispute, and decision, are admissible in the court action. Should you choose to accept the BBB AUTO LINE decision, Ford is then bound by the decision, and must comply with the decision within 30 days of receipt of your acceptance letter.
BBB AUTO LINE Application: Using the information provided below, please call or write to request a program application. You will be asked for your name and address, general information about your new vehicle, information about your warranty concerns, and any steps you have already taken to try to resolve them. A Customer Claim Form will be mailed that will need to be completed, signed and returned to the BBB along with proof of ownership. Upon receipt, the BBB will review the claim for eligibility under the Program Summary Guidelines.
You can get more information by calling BBB AUTO LINE at 1-800-955-5100, or writing to:
BBB AUTO LINE 3033 Wilson Boulevard, Suite 600 Arlington, Virginia 22201
BBB AUTO LINE applications can also be requested by calling the Ford Motor Company Customer Relationship Center at 1-800-392-3673.
For additional information refer to the Better Business Bureau website.
Note: Ford Motor Company reserves the right to change eligibility limitations, modify procedures, or to discontinue this process at any time without notice and without obligation.
240
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Customer Assistance
UTILIZING THE
MEDIATION/ARBITRATION
PROGRAM (CANADA ONLY)
For vehicles delivered to authorized Canadian dealers. In those cases where you continue to feel that the efforts by Ford of Canada and the authorized dealer to resolve a factory-related vehicle service concern have been unsatisfactory, Ford of Canada participates in an impartial third party mediation/arbitration program administered by the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP).
The CAMVAP program is a straight forward and relatively speedy alternative to resolve a disagreement when all other efforts to produce a settlement have failed. This procedure is without cost to you and is designed to eliminate the need for lengthy and expensive legal proceedings.
In the CAMVAP program, impartial third-party arbitrators conduct hearings at mutually convenient times and places in an informal environment. These impartial arbitrators review the positions of the parties, make decisions and, when appropriate, render awards to resolve disputes. CAMVAP decisions are fast, fair, and final as the arbitrator's award is binding on both you and Ford of Canada.
CAMVAP services are available in all Canadian territories and provinces. For more information, without charge or obligation, call your CAMVAP Provincial Administrator directly at 1-800-207-0685 or visit www.camvap.ca.
GETTING ASSISTANCE OUTSIDE THE U.S. AND CANADA
Before exporting your vehicle to a foreign country, contact the appropriate foreign embassy or consulate. These officials can inform you of local vehicle registration regulations and where to find unleaded fuel or petrol/gas engines or the proper sulfur fuel for diesel engines.
If you cannot find the proper fuel recommended for your vehicle, contact our Customer Relationship Center.
The use of improper fuels in your vehicle without proper conversion may damage the effectiveness of your emission control system and may cause engine knocking or serious engine damage. Ford Motor Company or Ford of Canada is not responsible for any damage caused by use of improper fuel. Using improper fuels may also result in difficulty importing your vehicle back into the United States.
If your vehicle must be serviced while you are traveling or living in Asia-Pacific Region, Sub-Saharan Africa, U.S. Virgin Islands and/or Puerto Rico, Central America, the Caribbean, and Israel and the Middle East, contact the nearest authorized dealer. If the authorized dealer cannot help you, contact the corresponding Ford Customer Assistance Center:
FORD MOTOR COMPANY
Customer Relationship Centers in:
241
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Customer Assistance
Customer Relationship Center
Phone
Asia Pacific
N/A
Caribbean and Central America
+1 313 594 4857
Ford 80004443673
Lincoln 80004441067
Middle East
UAE 80004441066
Saudi Arabia 8008443673
Mobily and Zain cell phone users in Saudi
800850078
Kuwait 22280384
North Africa
N/A
Puerto Rico and U.S. Virgin Islands
+1-800-841-3673
Sub-Saharan Africa
N/A
South Korea
+82-02-1600-6003
Fax N/A
-
971 4 3327 266
N/A N/A N/A N/A
E-mail apemcrc@ford.com expcac@ford.com
menacac@ford.com
nafcrc@ford.com prcac@ford.com ssacrc@ford.com infokr1@ford.com or infokr@lincoln.com
If you buy your vehicle in North America and then relocate to any of the above locations, register your vehicle identification number (VIN) and new address with Ford Global Trade Services by emailing, expcso@ford.com.
If you are in another foreign country, contact the nearest authorized dealer. In the event your inquiry is unresolved, communicate your concern with the dealership's Sales Manager, Service Manager or Customer Relations Manager. If you require additional assistance or clarification, please contact the respective Customer Relationship Center as previously listed.
Customers in the U.S. should call 1-800-392-3673.
242
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Customer Assistance
ORDERING ADDITIONAL OWNER'S LITERATURE
To order the publications in this portfolio, contact Helm, Incorporated at:
HELM, INCORPORATED 47911 Halyard Drive Plymouth, Michigan 48170 Attention: Customer Service
Or to order a free publication catalog, call toll free: 1-800-782-4356
Monday-Friday 8:00 a.m. - 6:00 p.m. EST
Helm, Incorporated can also be reached by their website:
www.helminc.com
(Items in this catalog may be purchased by credit card, check or money order.)
Obtaining a French Owner's Manual
French Owner's Manual can be obtained from your authorized dealer or by contacting Helm, Incorporated using the contact information listed previously in this section.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS (U.S. ONLY)
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Ford Motor Company.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Ford Motor Company.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Administrator
1200 New Jersey Avenue, Southeast
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS (CANADA ONLY)
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform Transport Canada and Ford of Canada.
243
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Customer Assistance
Website Website Phone
Transport Canada Contact Information
http://www.tc.gc.ca/eng/motorvehiclesafety/reporting-defects-motorvehicles.html (English)
http://www.tc.gc.ca/fra/securiteautomobile/signaler-defauts-vehiculesautomobiles.html (French)
18003330510
Website Phone
Ford of Canada Contact Information www.ford.ca 1800565-3673
244
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Fuses
FUSE SPECIFICATION CHART
Power Distribution Box
WARNING: Always disconnect the battery before servicing high current fuses.
WARNING: To reduce risk of electrical shock, always replace the cover to the power distribution box before reconnecting the battery or refilling fluid reservoirs.
The power distribution box is in the engine compartment. It has high-current fuses that protect your vehicle's main electrical systems from overloads.
If the battery has been disconnected and reconnected, some features will need to be reset. See Changing the 12V Battery (page 270).
E190797
245
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Fuses
Fuse or Relay Number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8
9 10 11
12
13 14 15 16 17 18
Fuse Rating
30A1 --
15A3 --
20A 1 --
20A 3
20A 3
-- 20A 1 15A 2
15A 2
10A 2 10A 2
-- 20A 1 20A 1 20A 3
Protected Component
Panoramic moonroof.
Starter relay. Rain sensor.
Blower motor relay. Power point 3 - Back of console.
Not used. Powertrain control module - vehicle power 1. Powertrain control module power. Powertrain control module - vehicle power 2. Emission components. Powertrain control module relay. Power point 1 - driver front.
Powertrain control module - vehicle power 4. Ignition coils. Powertrain control module - vehicle power 3. Non-emission components. Not used (spare).
Not used (spare).
Run-start relay. Power point 2 - console.
Not used (spare).
Not used (spare).
246
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Fuses
Fuse or Relay Number 19 20 21
22 23
24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39
Fuse Rating
10A 3 10A 3 15A 3
10A 3 15A 3
-- 10A 2 10A 2 10A1
-- 5A 3 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- --
Protected Component
Run-start electronic power assist steering.
Adaptive cruise control.
Run/start transmission control. Transmission oil pump start/stop. Air conditioner clutch solenoid.
Run-start. Blind spot information system. Rear view camera. Heads-up display. Voltage stability module. Gear shift actuator. Not used. Run-start anti-lock brake system.
Run-start powertrain control module.
Not used (spare).
Not used. Mass air flow monitor.
Not used. Not used. Electric fan 1 relay. A/C clutch relay. Not used. Not used. Not used. Not used. Electric fan 2 relay. Electric fan coil 2 and 3 relay.
247
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Fuses
Fuse or Relay Number 40 41 42 43 44
45
46 47 48 49
50
51 52 53
54
55
86 1 Micro 2 fuse. 2 Micro 3 fuse. 3 M case fuse.
Fuse Rating
-- -- -- -- 20A 3 5A 3 -- -- -- 10A 3 20A 3 -- -- 10A 3 10A 2 10A 2 30A
Protected Component
Horn relay. Not used. Fuel pump coil relay. Not used. Left hand side headlamp ballast. Not used (spare). Not used. Not used. Not used. Not used (spare). Horn. Not used. Not used. Not used (spare). Brake on off switch. ALT sensor. Not used (spare).
Power Distribution Box - Bottom
There are fuses on the bottom of the fuse box. To access the bottom of the fuse box, do the following:
248
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
E145983
Fuses
1. Release the two latches, on both sides of the fuse box.
2. Raise the inboard side of the fuse box from the cradle.
3. Move the fuse box toward the center of the engine compartment.
4. Pivot the outboard side of the fuse box to access the bottom side.
E190798
249
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Fuses
Fuse or Relay Number 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76
Fuse Rating
-- -- 30A 1 30A 2 30A 2 -- 50A 2 25A 1 30A 1 20A 1 15A 1 50A 2 40A 1 30A 1 30A 1 -- 20A 1 20A 1 30A 1 25A 1 30A 1
Protected Component
Not used. Not used. Fuel pump feed. Electric fan 3 Electric fan 1 (1.5L, 2.0L, and 2.5L engines). Not used. Body control module 1. Electric fan 2 (1.5L, 2.0L, and 2.5L engines). Not used (spare). Front heated seat. Not used (spare). Body control module 2. Heated rear window. Anti-lock brake system valves. Passenger seat. Not used. Trans oil pump. Rear heated seats. Driver seat module. Wiper motor 1. Not used (spare).
250
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Fuses
Fuse or Relay Number 77
78 79
80
81 82 83
84
85
87 1 M case fuse. 2 J case fuse.
Fuse Rating
30A 1 --
40A 2 25A 1
-- -- 20A 1 30A 1 30A 1 60A 2
Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel
The fuse panel is under the instrument panel to the left of the steering column.
Protected Component
Climate control seat module. Not used. Blower motor. Wiper motor 2. Not used. Not used. TRCM shifter. Starter solenoid. Not used (spare). Anti-lock brake system pump.
Note: It may be easier to access the fuse panel if you remove the finish trim piece.
251
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Fuses
E145984
Fuse or Relay Number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
11
Fuse Rating
-- 7.5A 1 20A 1 5A 1 20A 1 10A 2 10A 2 10A 2 10A 2 5A 2
5A 2
Protected Component
Not Used Lumbar. Driver door unlock. Not used (spare). Subwoofer amplifier. Not Used (spare). Not used (spare). Not used (spare). Not used (spare). Keypad. Cellphone passport module. Not used (spare).
252
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Fuse or Relay Number 12
13
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
24 25 26 27 28 29 30
Fuses
Fuse Rating
7.5A 2
7.5A 2
10A 2 10A 2 15A 1 5A 2 5A 2 7.5A 2 7.5A 2 5A 2 5A 2 10A 1
20A 1 30A 1 30A 1 30A 1 20A 1 30A 1 30A 1
Protected Component
Climate control. Gear shift Steering wheel column lock. Cluster. Datalink logic. Extended power module. Datalink gateway module. Child lock. Not used (spare). Push button stop start switch. Extended power module. Adaptive headlamp. Humidity and incar temperature sensor. Not used (spare). Delayed accessory (moonroof logic, driver master switch). Central lock/unlock. Driver door (window, mirror). Front passenger door (window, mirror). Moonroof. Amplifier. Rear driver side door (window). Rear passenger side door (window).
253
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Fuses
Fuse or Relay Number 31 32
33 34 35 36
37 38 1 Micro 2 fuse. 2 Micro 3 fuse.
Fuse Rating 15A 1 10A 1
20A 1 30A 1 5A 1 15A 1
20A 1 30A
Protected Component
Not used (spare).
Global positioning system. Display. Voice control. Radio frequency receiver. Radio. Active noise control. Run-start bus (fuse 19, 20, 21, 22, 35, 36, 37, circuit breaker). Not used (spare).
Auto-dimming rear view mirror. Continuous control damping suspension. Rear heated seats. Heated steering wheel.
Not used.
CHANGING A FUSE Fuses
WARNING: Always replace a fuse with one that has the specified amperage rating. Using a fuse with a higher amperage rating can cause severe wire damage and could start a fire.
E217331
If electrical components in the vehicle are not working, a fuse may have blown. Blown fuses are identified by a broken wire within the fuse. Check the appropriate fuses before replacing any electrical components.
254
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Fuse Types
Fuses
E207206
Callout A B C D E F G
Fuse Type Micro 2 Micro 3 Maxi Mini M Case J Case
J Case Low Profile
255
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Maintenance
GENERAL INFORMATION
Have your vehicle serviced regularly to help maintain its roadworthiness and resale value. There is a large network of authorized dealers that are there to help you with their professional servicing expertise. We believe that their specially trained technicians are best qualified to service your vehicle properly and expertly. They are supported by a wide range of highly specialized tools developed specifically for servicing your vehicle.
If your vehicle requires professional service, an authorized dealer can provide the necessary parts and service. Check your warranty information to find out which parts and services are covered.
Use only recommended fuels, lubricants, fluids and service parts conforming to specifications. Motorcraft® parts are designed and built to provide the best performance in your vehicle.
Precautions
· Do not work on a hot engine.
· Make sure that nothing gets caught in moving parts.
· Do not work on a vehicle with the engine running in an enclosed space, unless you are sure you have enough ventilation.
· Keep all open flames and other burning material (such as cigarettes) away from the battery and all fuel related parts.
Working with the Engine Off
1. Set the parking brake and shift the transmission to park (P).
2. Switch off the engine.
3. Block the wheels.
Working with the Engine On
WARNING: To reduce the risk of vehicle damage and personal burn injuries, do not start your engine with the air cleaner removed and do not remove it while the engine is running. 1. Set the parking brake and shift the
transmission to park (P). 2. Block the wheels.
OPENING AND CLOSING THE HOOD Opening the Hood
E142457
1. Inside the vehicle, pull the hood release handle located under the left-hand side of the instrument panel.
2. Slightly lift the hood. 3. Release the hood latch by pushing the
secondary release lever to your left-hand side.
256
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Maintenance
4. Open the hood. Support the hood with the strut.
Closing the Hood 1. Remove the hood strut from the catch
and secure it correctly after use. 2. Lower the hood and allow it to drop
under its own weight for the last 8-12 in (20-30 cm). Note: Make sure that the hood is correctly closed.
E87786
UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW - 1.5L ECOBOOSTTM
E277788
257
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Maintenance
A Engine coolant reservoir. See Engine Coolant Check (page 263). B Engine oil filler cap. See Engine Oil Check (page 261). C Engine oil dipstick. See Engine Oil Dipstick (page 261). D Brake fluid reservoir. See Brake Fluid Check (page 269). E Battery. See Changing the 12V Battery (page 270). F Engine compartment fuse box. See Fuses (page 245). G Air filter. See Changing the Engine Air Filter (page 278). H Windshield washer reservoir. See Washer Fluid Check (page 270).
UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW - 2.0L ECOBOOSTTM
E159754
A Engine coolant reservoir. See Engine Coolant Check (page 263). B Engine oil dipstick. See Engine Oil Dipstick (page 261). C Engine oil filler cap. See Engine Oil Check (page 261).
258
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Maintenance
D Brake fluid reservoir. See Brake Fluid Check (page 269). E Battery. See Changing the 12V Battery (page 270). F Engine compartment fuse box. See Fuses (page 245). G Air filter. See Changing the Engine Air Filter (page 278). H Washer system fluid reservoir. See Washer Fluid Check (page 270).
UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW - 2.5L
E169801
A Engine coolant reservoir. See Engine Coolant Check (page 263). B Engine oil filler cap. See Engine Oil Check (page 261). C Engine oil dipstick. See Engine Oil Dipstick (page 261). D Brake fluid reservoir. See Brake Fluid Check (page 269). E Battery. See Changing the 12V Battery (page 270). F Engine compartment fuse box. See Fuses (page 245).
259
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Maintenance
G Air filter. See Changing the Engine Air Filter (page 278). H Washer system fluid reservoir. See Washer Fluid Check (page 270).
UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW - 2.7L ECOBOOSTTM
A
B
C
D
I
H
G
E188730
F
E
A Engine coolant reservoir. See Engine Coolant Check (page 263). B Brake fluid reservoir. See Brake Fluid Check (page 269). C Battery. See Changing the 12V Battery (page 270). D Power distribution box. See Fuses (page 245). E Air filter assembly. See Changing the Engine Air Filter (page 278). F Automatic transmission fluid dipstick. See Automatic Transmission Fluid
Check (page 267). G Engine oil dipstick. See Engine Oil Dipstick (page 261). H Engine oil filler cap. See Engine Oil Check (page 261). I Windshield washer fluid reservoir. See Washer Fluid Check (page 270).
260
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Maintenance
ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK - 1.5L ECOBOOSTTM
AB
E199415
A B
Minimum. Maximum.
ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK - 2.0L ECOBOOSTTM/2.5L/2.7L ECOBOOSTTM
E250320
A B C
Minimum. Nominal. Maximum.
ENGINE OIL CHECK
To check the engine oil level consistently and accurately, do the following:
1. Make sure the parking brake is on. Make sure the transmission is in park (P) or neutral (N).
2. Run the engine until it reaches normal operating temperature.
3. Make sure that your vehicle is on level ground.
4. Switch the engine off and wait 15 minutes for the oil to drain into the oil pan. Checking the engine oil level too soon after you switch the engine off may result in an inaccurate reading.
5. Open the hood. See Opening and Closing the Hood (page 256).
6. Remove the dipstick and wipe it with a clean, lint-free cloth. See Under Hood Overview (page 260).
7. Reinstall the dipstick and remove it again to check the oil level. See Under Hood Overview (page 260).
8. Make sure that the oil level is between the maximum and minimum marks. If the oil level is at the minimum mark, add oil immediately. See Capacities and Specifications (page 328).
9. If the oil level is correct, replace the dipstick and make sure it is fully seated.
Note: Do not remove the dipstick when the engine is running.
Note: If the oil level is between the maximum and minimum marks, the oil level is acceptable. Do not add oil.
Note: The oil consumption of new engines reaches its normal level after approximately 3,000 mi (5,000 km).
Adding Engine Oil
WARNING: Do not remove the filler cap when the engine is running.
261
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Maintenance
Do not use supplemental engine oil additives because they are unnecessary and could lead to engine damage that may not be covered by the vehicle Warranty.
E142732
Only use oils certified for gasoline engines by the American Petroleum Institute (API). An oil with this trademark symbol conforms to the current engine and emission system protection standards and fuel economy requirements of the International Lubricants Specification Advisory Committee (ILSAC). To top up the engine oil level do the following: 1. Clean the area surrounding the engine
oil filler cap before you remove it. 2. Remove the engine oil filler cap. See
Under Hood Overview (page 260). Turn it counterclockwise and remove it. 3. Add engine oil that meets our specifications. See Capacities and Specifications (page 328). You may have to use a funnel to pour the engine oil into the opening. 4. Recheck the oil level. 5. If the oil level is correct, replace the dipstick and make sure it is fully seated. 6. Replace the engine oil filler cap. Turn it clockwise until you feel a strong resistance.
Note: Do not add oil further than the maximum mark. Oil levels above the maximum mark may cause engine damage.
Note: Make sure you install the oil filler cap correctly.
Note: Soak up any spillage with an absorbent cloth immediately.
OIL CHANGE INDICATOR RESET
Use the information display controls on the steering wheel to reset the oil change indicator.
From the main menu scroll to:
Message
Action and description
Settings
Press the right arrow button, then from this menu scroll to the following message.
Vehicle
Press the right arrow button, then from this menu scroll to the following message.
Oil Life
Press the right arrow button, then from this menu scroll to the following message.
Hold OK to Press and hold the OK
Reset
button until the instrument
cluster displays the
following message.
Reset Successful
When the oil change indicator resets the instrument cluster displays 100%.
Remaining Life
{00}%
262
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Maintenance
Message
Action and description
If the instrument cluster displays one of the following messages, repeat the process.
Not Reset
Reset Cancelled
ENGINE COOLANT CHECK
WARNING: Do not remove the coolant reservoir cap when the engine is on or the cooling system is hot. Wait 10 minutes for the cooling system to cool down. Cover the coolant reservoir cap with a thick cloth to prevent the possibility of scalding and slowly remove the cap. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury.
WARNING: Do not put coolant in the windshield washer reservoir. If sprayed on the windshield, coolant could make it difficult to see through the windshield.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of personal injury, make sure the engine is cool before unscrewing the coolant pressure relief cap. The cooling system is under pressure. Steam and hot liquid can come out forcefully when you loosen the cap slightly.
WARNING: Do not add coolant further than the MAX mark.
When the engine is cold, check the concentration and level of the coolant at the intervals listed in the scheduled maintenance information. See Scheduled Maintenance (page 476).
Note: Make sure that the coolant level is between the MIN and the MAX marks on the coolant reservoir.
Note: Coolant expands when it is hot. The level may extend beyond the MAX mark.
Note: Automotive fluids are not interchangeable. Do not use coolant or windshield washer fluid outside of its specified function and vehicle location.
Note: Do not use stop leak pellets, cooling system sealants, or non-specified additives as they can cause damage to the engine cooling or heating systems. Resulting component damage may not be covered by the vehicle Warranty.
Maintain coolant concentration within 48% to 50%, which equates to a freeze point between -30°F (-34°C) and -34°F (-37°C). Coolant concentration should be checked using a refractometer. We do not recommend the use of hydrometers or coolant test strips for measuring coolant concentration.
Adding Coolant
WARNING: Do not add engine coolant when the engine is hot. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury.
WARNING: Do not remove the coolant reservoir cap when the engine is on or the cooling system is hot. Wait 10 minutes for the cooling system to cool down. Cover the coolant reservoir cap with a thick cloth to prevent the possibility of scalding and slowly remove the cap. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury.
263
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Maintenance
It is very important to use prediluted coolant meeting the correct specification in order to avoid plugging the small passageways in the engine cooling system. See Capacities and Specifications (page 328). Incorrect prediluted coolant use can cause damage not covered by the vehicle Warranty.
Note: If prediluted coolant is not available, use the approved concentrated coolant diluting it to 50/50 with distilled water. See Capacities and Specifications (page 319). Using water that has not been deionized may contribute to deposit formation, corrosion and plugging of the small cooling system passageways.
Note: Coolants marketed for all makes and models may not be approved to Ford specifications and may cause damage to the cooling system. Resulting component damage may not be covered by the vehicle Warranty.
If the coolant level is at or below the minimum mark, add prediluted coolant immediately.
To top up the coolant level do the following:
1. Unscrew the cap slowly. Any pressure escapes as you unscrew the cap.
2. Add prediluted coolant meeting the correct specification. See Capacities and Specifications (page 319).
3. Add enough prediluted coolant to reach the correct level.
4. Replace the coolant reservoir cap, turn it clockwise until you feel a strong resistance.
5. Check the coolant level in the coolant reservoir the next few times you drive your vehicle.
If you have to add more than 1.1 qt (1 L) of engine coolant per month, have your vehicle checked as soon as possible. Operating an engine with a low level of coolant can result in engine overheating and possible engine damage.
Note: During normal vehicle operation, the coolant may change color from orange to pink or light red. As long as the coolant is clear and uncontaminated, this color change does not indicate the coolant has degraded nor does it require the coolant to be drained, the system to be flushed, or the coolant to be replaced.
Do not mix different colors or types of prediluted coolant in your vehicle. Mixing of prediluted coolant or using an incorrect prediluted coolant may harm the engine or cooling system components and may not be covered by the vehicle Warranty.
In case of emergency, you can add a large amount of water without engine coolant in order to reach a vehicle service location. In this instance, qualified personnel:
1. Must drain the cooling system.
2. Chemically clean the cooling system.
3. Refill with prediluted coolant as soon as possible.
Water alone, without prediluted coolant, can cause engine damage from corrosion, overheating or freezing.
Do not use the following as a coolant substitute:
· Alcohol.
· Methanol.
· Brine.
· Any coolant mixed with alcohol or methanol antifreeze.
Alcohol and other liquids can cause engine damage from overheating or freezing.
264
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Maintenance
Do not add extra inhibitors or additives to the coolant. These can be harmful and compromise the corrosion protection of the coolant.
Recycled Coolant
We do not recommend the use of recycled coolant as an approved recycling process is not yet available.
Dispose of used engine coolant in an appropriate manner. Follow your community's regulations and standards for recycling and disposing of automotive fluids.
Severe Climates
If you drive in extremely cold climates:
· It may be necessary to increase the coolant concentration above 50%.
· A coolant concentration of 60% provides improved freeze point protection. Coolant concentrations above 60% decrease the overheat protection characteristics of the coolant and may cause engine damage.
If you drive in extremely hot climates:
· It may be necessary to decrease the coolant concentration to 40%.
· A coolant concentration of 40% provides improved overheat protection. Coolant concentrations below 40% decrease the freeze and corrosion protection characteristics of the coolant and may cause engine damage.
Vehicles driven year-round in non-extreme climates should use prediluted coolant for optimum cooling system and engine protection.
Coolant Change
At specific mileage intervals, as listed in the scheduled maintenance information, the coolant should be changed. Add prediluted coolant approved to the correct specification. See Capacities and Specifications (page 319).
Fail-Safe Cooling
Fail-safe cooling allows you to temporarily drive your vehicle before any incremental component damage occurs. The fail-safe distance depends on ambient temperature, vehicle load and terrain.
How Fail-Safe Cooling Works
If the engine begins to overheat, the coolant temperature gauge moves toward the red zone:
A warning lamp illuminates and a message may appear in the information display.
If the engine reaches a preset over-temperature condition, the engine automatically switches to alternating cylinder operation. Each disabled cylinder acts as an air pump and cools the engine.
When this occurs, your vehicle still operates, however: · Engine power is limited. · The air conditioning system turns off.
Continued operation increases the engine temperature, causing the engine to completely shut down. Your steering and braking effort increases in this situation.
When the engine temperature cools, you can re-start the engine. Have your vehicle checked as soon as possible to minimize engine damage.
265
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Maintenance
When Fail-Safe Mode Is Activated
WARNING: Fail-safe mode is for use during emergencies only. Operate your vehicle in fail-safe mode only as long as necessary to bring your vehicle to rest in a safe location and seek immediate repairs. When in fail-safe mode, your vehicle will have limited power, will not be able to maintain high-speed operation, and may completely shut down without warning, potentially losing engine power, power steering assist, and power brake assist, which may increase the possibility of a crash resulting in serious injury.
WARNING: Do not remove the coolant reservoir cap when the engine is on or the cooling system is hot. Wait 10 minutes for the cooling system to cool down. Cover the coolant reservoir cap with a thick cloth to prevent the possibility of scalding and slowly remove the cap. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury.
Your vehicle has limited engine power when in the fail-safe mode, drive your vehicle with caution. Your vehicle does not maintain high-speed operation and the engine may operate poorly.
Remember that the engine is capable of automatically shutting down to prevent engine damage. In this situation:
1. Pull off the road as soon as safely possible and switch the engine off.
2. If you are a member of a roadside assistance program, we recommend that you contact your roadside assistance service provider.
3. If this is not possible, wait a short period for the engine to cool.
4. Check the coolant level. If the coolant level is at or below the minimum mark, add prediluted coolant immediately.
5. When the engine temperature cools, you can re-start the engine. Have your vehicle checked as soon as possible to minimize engine damage.
Engine Coolant Temperature Management (If Equipped)
WARNING: To reduce the risk of crash and injury, be prepared that the vehicle speed may reduce and the vehicle may not be able to accelerate with full power until the coolant temperature reduces.
If you tow a trailer with your vehicle, the engine may temporarily reach a higher temperature during severe operating conditions, for example ascending a long or steep grade in high ambient temperatures.
At this time, you may notice the coolant temperature gauge moves toward the red zone and a message may appear in the information display.
You may notice a reduction in vehicle speed caused by reduced engine power in order to manage the engine coolant temperature. Your vehicle may enter this mode if certain high-temperature and high-load conditions take place. The amount of speed reduction depends on vehicle loading, grade and ambient temperature. If this occurs, there is no need to pull off the road. You can continue to drive your vehicle.
266
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Maintenance
The air conditioning may automatically turn on and off during severe operating conditions to protect the engine from overheating. When the coolant temperature decreases to the normal operating temperature, the air conditioning turns on.
If the coolant temperature gauge moves fully into the red zone, or if the coolant temperature warning or service engine soon messages appear in your information display, do the following:
1. Pull off the road as soon as safely possible and shift the transmission into park (P).
2. Leave the engine running until the coolant temperature gauge needle returns to the normal position. If the temperature does not drop after several minutes, follow the remaining steps.
3. Switch the engine off and wait for it to cool. Check the coolant level.
4. If the coolant level is at or below the minimum mark, add prediluted coolant immediately.
5. If the coolant level is normal, restart the engine and continue.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID CHECK - 1.5L ECOBOOSTTM/2.0L ECOBOOSTTM/2.5L
The automatic transmission does not have a transmission fluid dipstick.
Have an authorized dealer check and change the transmission fluid at the correct service interval. See Scheduled Maintenance (page 476). Your transmission does not consume fluid. However, if the transmission slips, shifts slowly or if you notice a sign of leaking fluid, contact an authorized dealer.
Do not use supplemental transmission fluid additives, treatments or cleaning agents. The use of these materials may affect transmission operation and result in damage to internal transmission components.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID CHECK - 2.7L ECOBOOSTTM
Do not use supplemental transmission fluid additives because they are unnecessary and could lead to transmission damage that may not be covered by the vehicle Warranty.
The transmission does not consume fluid. However, if the transmission slips or shifts slowly you should check the fluid level. If you notice a sign of leaking fluid, contact an authorized dealer.
Checking the Transmission Fluid Level*
Only check the transmission fluid level when the engine is at normal operating temprature 179199°F (8293°C). Normal operating temprature is reached after driving approximately 20 mi (30 km).
267
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Maintenance
AB
E190273
A Minimum. B Maximum. Note: Check the fluid level with the engine running and the transmission in park (P). 1. Make sure that your vehicle is on level ground. 2. Rotate the automatic transmission fluid cap in a counterclockwise direction. See Under Hood Overview (page 260). 3. Remove the cap and dipstick and wipe it with a clean, lint-free cloth. Replace the cap and dipstick and remove it again to check the fluid level. 4. Make sure that the fluid level is between the MIN and the MAX marks. If the fluid level is at the MIN mark, add fluid immediately. See Adding Transmission Fluid. 5. Replace the automatic transmission fluid cap and dipstick. Turn it clockwise until you feel a strong resistance.
Low Fluid Level
If the fluid level is within the minimum range (below point A) add the correct specification fluid to be within the hash mark area. See Capacities and Specifications (page 319). Note: If the fluid level is below the minimum range do not drive your vehicle. An underfill conition can damage the transmission.
Correct Fluid Level
If the fluid level is within the hash mark area (between points A and B) do not add any fluid.
High Fluid Level
If the fluid level is above the maximum range (above point B) fluid may need to be removed. High fluid levels may be caused by a overheating condition. If you have operated your vehicle at high speeds, towing a trailer or in city traffic during hot weather, allow your vehicle to cool for a minimum of 30 minutes before rechecking the level.
Note: An overfill condition can damage the transmission.
Adding Transmission Fluid*
1. Rotate the automatic transmission fluid cap in a counterclockwise direction.*
2. Remove the cap and dipstick and wipe it with a clean, lint-free cloth.
3. Add fluid that meets the Ford specifications. See Capacities and Specifications (page 339). Pour the fluid directly into the automatic transmission fluid cap and dipstick hole.
4. Replace the cap and dipstick and remove it again to check the fluid level.
5. Make sure that the fluid level is between the MIN and the MAX marks.
6. Replace the automatic transmission fluid cap and dipstick. Turn it clockwise until you feel a strong resistance.
268
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Maintenance
*Vehicles With 2.7L Turbocharger
BRAKE FLUID CHECK
WARNING: Do not start the engine with the air filter removed. This can cause damage not covered by the vehicle Warranty and can result in serious injury.
x2
E190367
1. Remove the two air filter assembly securing bolts.
2. Lift the air filter assembly to disengage the locating pins.
3. Rotate the air filter assembly slightly in a counterclockwise direction.
4. Check the fluid level. See Capacities and Specifications (page 339).
5. Install in reverse order. Tighten the two air filter assembly securing bolts until you feel a strong resistance.
WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than the recommended brake fluid as this will reduce brake efficiency. Use of incorrect fluid could result in the loss of vehicle control, serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: Only use brake fluid from a sealed container. Contamination with dirt, water, petroleum products or other materials may result in brake system damage or failure. Failure to adhere to this warning could result in the loss of vehicle control, serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: Do not allow the fluid to touch your skin or eyes. If this happens, rinse the affected areas immediately with plenty of water and contact your physician.
WARNING: A fluid level between the MAX and MIN lines is within the normal operating range and there is no need to add fluid. A fluid level not in the normal operating range could compromise the performance of the system. Have your vehicle checked immediately.
269
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Maintenance
State or local regulations on volatile organic compounds may restrict the use of methanol, a common windshield washer antifreeze additive. Washer fluids containing non-methanol antifreeze agents should be used only if they provide cold weather protection without damaging the vehicle's paint finish, wiper blades or washer system.
FUEL FILTER
Your vehicle is equipped with a lifetime fuel filter that is integrated with the fuel tank. Regular maintenance or replacement is not needed.
E170684
To avoid fluid contamination, the reservoir cap must remain in place and fully tight, unless you are adding fluid.
Only use fluid that meets Ford specifications. See Capacities and Specifications (page 319).
WASHER FLUID CHECK
WARNING: If you operate your vehicle in temperatures below 40°F (5°C), use washer fluid with antifreeze protection. Failure to use washer fluid with antifreeze protection in cold weather could result in impaired windshield vision and increase the risk of injury or accident.
Add fluid to fill the reservoir if the level is low. Only use a washer fluid that meets Ford specifications. See Capacities and Specifications (page 319).
CHANGING THE 12V BATTERY
WARNING: Batteries normally produce explosive gases which can cause personal injury. Therefore, do not allow flames, sparks or lighted substances to come near the battery. When working near the battery, always shield your face and protect your eyes. Always provide correct ventilation.
WARNING: When lifting a plastic-cased battery, excessive pressure on the end walls could cause acid to flow through the vent caps, resulting in personal injury and damage to the vehicle or battery. Lift the battery with a battery carrier or with your hands on opposite corners.
270
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Maintenance
WARNING: Keep batteries out of reach of children. Batteries contain sulfuric acid. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Shield your eyes when working near the battery to protect against possible splashing of acid solution. In case of acid contact with skin or eyes, flush immediately with water for a minimum of 15 minutes and get prompt medical attention. If acid is swallowed, call a physician immediately.
WARNING: Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and reproductive harm. Wash your hands after handling.
Your vehicle has a Motorcraft® maintenance-free battery which normally does not require additional water during its life of service.
Note: If your vehicle's battery has a cover or shield, make sure it is reinstalled after the battery has been cleaned or replaced.
Note: See an authorized dealer for low voltage battery access, testing, or replacement.
When a low voltage battery replacement is necessary, see an authorized dealer to replace the low voltage battery with a Ford recommended replacement low voltage battery that matches the electrical requirements of the vehicle.
To ensure proper operation of the battery management system (BMS), do not allow a technician to connect any electrical device ground connection directly to the low voltage battery negative post. A connection at the low voltage battery negative post can cause inaccurate measurements of the battery condition and potential incorrect system operation.
Note: If a person adds electrical or electronic accessories or components to the vehicle, the accessories or components may adversely affect the low voltage battery performance and durability and may also affect the performance of other electrical systems in the vehicle.
For longer, trouble-free operation, keep the top of the battery clean and dry. Also, make certain the battery cables are always tightly fastened to the battery terminals.
If you see any corrosion on the battery or terminals, remove the cables from the terminals and clean with a wire brush. You can neutralize the acid with a solution of baking soda and water.
When a battery replacement is required, the battery should only be replaced with a Ford recommended replacement battery that matches the electrical requirements of the vehicle.
Because your vehicle's engine is electronically-controlled by a computer, some engine control settings are maintained by power from the low voltage battery. Some engine computer settings, like the idle trim and fuel trim strategy, optimize the driveability and performance of the engine. Some other computer settings, like the clock and radio station presets, are also maintained in memory by power from the low voltage battery. When a technician disconnects and connects the low voltage battery, these settings are erased. Complete the following procedure in order to restore the settings:
271
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Maintenance
1. With the vehicle at a complete stop, set the parking brake.
2. Shift the transmission into park (P).
3. Switch off all accessories.
4. Fully press the brake pedal and start the vehicle.
5. Run the engine until it reaches normal operating temperature. While the engine is warming up, complete the following: Reset the clock. See Audio System (page 345). Reset the power windows bounce-back feature. See Windows and Mirrors (page 85). Reset the radio station presets. See Audio System (page 345).
6. Allow the engine to idle for at least one minute. If the engine turns off, press the accelerator pedal to start the engine.
7. While the engine is running, press the brake pedal and shift into neutral (N).
8. Allow the engine to run for at least one minute by pressing on the accelerator pedal.
9. Drive the vehicle at least 12 mi (20 km) to completely relearn the idle and fuel trim strategy.
Note: If you do not allow the engine to relearn the idle and fuel trim strategy, the idle quality of your vehicle may be adversely affected until the engine computer eventually relearns the idle trim and fuel trim strategy.
Make sure that you dispose of old batteries in an environmentally friendly way. Seek advice from your local authority about recycling old batteries.
CHECKING THE WIPER BLADES
E142463
Run the tip of your fingers over the edge of the blade to check for roughness. Clean the wiper blades with washer fluid or water applied with a soft sponge or cloth.
CHANGING THE WIPER BLADES
The wiper arms can be manually moved when the ignition is off. This allows for ease of blade replacement and cleaning under the blades.
1
1
E129990
2
1. Pull the wiper blade and arm away from the glass. Press the locking buttons together.
2. Rotate and remove the wiper blade.
3. Install in the reverse order.
272
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Maintenance
Note: Make sure that the wiper blade locks into place. Lower the wiper arm and blade back to the windshield. The wiper arms will automatically return to their normal position when the ignition is turned on.
Replace wiper blades at least once per year for optimum performance.
Poor wiper quality can be improved by cleaning the wiper blades and the windshield.
ADJUSTING THE HEADLAMPS
Vertical Aim Adjustment
The headlamps on your vehicle are properly aimed at the assembly plant. If your vehicle has been in an accident, the alignment of your headlamps should be checked by your authorized dealer.
Headlamp Aiming Target
Vertical Aim Adjustment Procedure
1. Park the vehicle directly in front of a wall or screen on a level surface, approximately 25 ft (7.6 m) away.
2. Measure the height of the headlamp bulb center from the ground and mark an 8 ft (2.4 m) horizontal reference line on the vertical wall or screen at this height.
Note: To see a clearer light pattern for adjusting, you may want to block the light from one headlamp while adjusting the other.
3. Turn on the low beam headlamps to illuminate the wall or screen and open the hood.
E142592
A B C D
8 feet (2.4 meters) Center height of lamp to ground 25 feet (7.6 meters) Horizontal reference line
E142465
4. On the wall or screen you will observe a flat zone of high intensity light located at the top of the right hand portion of the beam pattern. If the top edge of the high intensity light zone is not at the horizontal reference line, the headlamp will need to be adjusted.
273
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Maintenance
E145594
REMOVING A HEADLAMP
5. Locate the vertical adjuster on each headlamp. Using a Phillips #2 screwdriver, turn the adjuster either clockwise or counterclockwise in order to adjust the vertical aim of the headlamp. The horizontal edge of the brighter light should touch the horizontal reference line.
6. Close the hood and turn off the lamps.
Horizontal Aim Adjustment
Horizontal aim is not required for this vehicle and is not adjustable.
E159693
Note: To remove push pins, use a flat-bladed screwdriver to pull up the center release pin.
1. Make sure the headlamp control is in the off position and open the hood.
2. Remove the six push pins securing the front fascia to the front trim cover.
3. Remove the three bumper cover upper screws using a flat-bladed screwdriver.
4. Remove the push pin at the inboard side of the headlamp you are servicing.
274
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Maintenance
7. Remove the two outmost front bumper cover lower fasteners, only on the side of the headlamp you are servicing, by turning them counterclockwise.
E159694
5. Remove the two screws securing the headlamp using a flat-bladed screwdriver.
E159697
8. Separate the front bumper cover from the fender by gently pulling the front bumper cover to the outside of the vehicle 1.2 in (3 cm).
E159695
6. Remove the lower three wheel housing fasteners by turning them counterclockwise.
E159698
9. From the front of the vehicle, gently pull the front bumper cover forward 4 in (10 cm) by grasping it next to the headlamp to be serviced and in the lower front of the wheel opening.
E159696
275
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Maintenance
Headlamp
A
B
E159699
10. Gently pull the headlamp assembly outward to disengage it from the lower fixing point.
11. Carefully lift the headlamp and remove it from the vehicle.
12. Disconnect the electrical connector from the headlamp assembly by pushing the release tab on the connector.
CHANGING A BULB
WARNING: Switch the lamps and the ignition off. Failure to follow this warning could result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Bulbs can become hot. Let the bulb cool down before removing it. Failure to do so could result in personal injury.
Use the correct specification bulb. See Bulb Specification Chart (page 344). Install in the reverse order unless otherwise stated.
E222975
A Headlamp high beam. B Headlamp low beam. Note: LED headlamps are not serviceable. Have your vehicle checked as soon as possible.
Headlamp Low Beam
1. Carefully remove the cover. 2. Disconnect the electrical connector. 3. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise
and remove it. Note: Do not touch the bulb glass. Note: You cannot separate the bulb from the bulb holder.
Headlamp High Beam
1. Carefully remove the cover. 2. Disconnect the electrical connector. 3. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise
and remove it. Note: Do not touch the bulb glass. Note: You cannot separate the bulb from the bulb holder.
276
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Maintenance
Front Halogen Fog Lamp
E268887
Note: You cannot separate the fog lamp bulb from the bulb holder.
Note: Use caution when removing fog lamp facia cover from breaking or scratching.
1. Remove the fog lamp cover, using a flat screwdriver.
2. Remove the three fasteners using a screwdriver.
3. Remove the lamp.
E268888
4. Disconnect the electrical connector. 5. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise
and remove it. 6. Install the new bulb in reverse order.
LED Lamps
LED lamps are not serviceable. Have your vehicle checked as soon as possible. The following lamps can be LED: · Front side marker lamps. · Front direction indicators. · Daytime running lamps. · Side direction indicators. · Central high mounted brake lamp. · Rear direction indicators. · Brake and rear lamps. · Front fog lamp.
277
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Maintenance
Reversing Lamp
1. Carefully remove the plastic trim clips holding the interior cover.
3. Press the bulb in and turn the bulb counterclockwise to remove it.
License Plate Lamp
2
3
1
E258906
2. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise and remove it.
E72789
1. Use a suitable tool, for example a screwdriver, to carefully remove the lamp.
2. Remove the lamp. 3. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise
and remove it. 4. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight
out.
CHANGING THE ENGINE AIR FILTER
E258907
WARNING: To reduce the risk of vehicle damage and personal burn injuries, do not start your engine with the air cleaner removed and do not remove it while the engine is running.
When changing the air filter element, use only the air filter element listed. See Capacities and Specifications (page 319).
278
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Maintenance
For EcoBoost equipped vehicles: When servicing the air cleaner, it is important that no foreign material enter the air induction system. The engine and turbocharger are susceptible to damage from even small particles. Change the air filter element at the proper interval. See Scheduled Maintenance (page 476). Note: Failure to use the correct air filter element may result in severe engine damage. The customer warranty may be void for any damage to the engine if the correct air filter element is not used. EcoBoost Engines
E144365
2.5L Engine (If Equipped)
E146047
1. Release the clamps that secure the air filter housing cover.
2. Carefully lift the air filter housing cover. 3. Remove the air filter element from the
air filter housing. 4. Wipe any dirt or debris from the air filter
housing and cover to make sure no dirt gets in the engine and to make sure you have a good seal. 5. Install a new air filter element. Be careful not to crimp the filter element edges between the air filter housing and cover. This could cause filter damage and allow unfiltered air to enter the engine if not properly seated. 6. Install the air filter housing cover. 7. Engage the clamps to secure the air filter housing cover to the air filter housing.
279
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Vehicle Care
GENERAL INFORMATION
Your dealer has many quality products available to clean your vehicle and protect its finishes.
CLEANING PRODUCTS
Materials For best results, use the following products or products of equivalent quality:
Name
Motorcraft® Bug and Tar Remover, ZC-42 (U.S. & Canada) Motorcraft® Custom Bright Metal Cleaner, ZC-15 (U.S. & Canada) Motorcraft® Detail Wash, ZC-3-A (U.S. & Canada) Motorcraft® Engine Shampoo and Degreaser, ZC-20 (U.S.) Motorcraft® Engine Shampoo, CXC-66-A (Canada) Motorcraft® Premium Leather and Vinyl Cleaner, ZC-56 (U.S. & Canada) Motorcraft® Multi-Purpose Cleaner, CXC-101 (Canada) Motorcraft® Premium Windshield Wash Concentrate with Bitterant, ZC-32-B2 (U.S.) Motorcraft® Premium Quality Windshield Washer Fluid, CXC-37A/B/D/F (Canada) Motorcraft® Professional Strength Carpet & Upholstery Cleaner, ZC-54 (U.S. & Canada) Motorcraft® Premium Glass Cleaner, CXC-100 (Canada) Motorcraft® Spot and Stain Remover, ZC-14 (U.S.) Motorcraft® Ultra-Clear Spray Glass Cleaner, ZC-23 (U.S.) Motorcraft® Wheel and Tire Cleaner, ZC-37-A (U.S. & Canada)
Specification ESR-M5B194-B ESR-M14P4-A ESR-M14P3-A
WSS-M14P19-A WSS-M14P19-A
ESR-M14P5-A ESR-M14P5-A
CLEANING THE EXTERIOR
Wash your vehicle regularly with cool or lukewarm water and a neutral pH shampoo, we recommend Motorcraft Detail Wash.
· Never use strong household detergents or soap, for example dish washing or laundry liquid. These products can discolor and spot painted surfaces.
· Never wash your vehicle when it is hot to the touch, or during strong or direct sunlight.
280
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Vehicle Care
· Dry your vehicle with a chamois or soft terry cloth towel to eliminate water spotting.
· Immediately remove fuel spillages, bird droppings, insect deposits and road tar. These may cause damage to your vehicle's paintwork or trim over time. We recommend Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover.
· Remove any exterior accessories, for example antennas, before entering a car wash.
· When filling with AdBlue®, remove any residue on painted surfaces immediately.
Note: Suntan lotions and insect repellents can damage painted surfaces. If these substances come in contact with your vehicle, wash the affected area as soon as possible.
Cleaning the Headlamps
Note: Do not scrape the headlamp lenses or use abrasives, alcoholic solvents or chemical solvents to clean them.
Note: Do not wipe the headlamps when they are dry.
Exterior Chrome Parts
· Apply a high quality-cleaning product to bumpers and other chrome parts. Follow the manufacturer's instructions. We recommend Motorcraft Custom Bright Metal Cleaner.
· Do not apply the cleaning product to hot surfaces. Do not leave the cleaning product on chrome surfaces longer than the time recommended.
· Using non-recommended cleaners can result in severe and permanent cosmetic damage.
Note: Never use abrasive materials, for example steel wool or plastic pads as they can scratch the chrome surface.
Note: Do not use chrome cleaner, metal cleaner or polish on wheels or wheel covers.
Exterior Plastic Parts
For routine cleaning we recommend Motorcraft Detail Wash. If tar or grease spots are present, we recommend Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover.
Stripes or Graphics (If Equipped)
Hand washing your vehicle is preferred however, pressure washing may be used under the following conditions:
· Do not use water pressure higher than 2,000 psi (14,000 kPa).
· Do not use water hotter than 179°F (82°C).
· Use a spray with a 40° wide spray angle pattern.
· Keep the nozzle at a 12 in (305 mm) distance and 90° angle to your vehicle's surface.
Note: Holding the pressure washer nozzle at an angle to the vehicle's surface may damage graphics and cause the edges to peel away from the vehicle's surface.
Underbody
Regularly clean the underside of your vehicle using water. Keep body and door drain holes free of debris or foreign material.
Under Hood
For removing black rubber marks from under the hood we recommend Motorcraft Wheel and Tire Cleaner or Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover.
281
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Vehicle Care
WAXING
Regular waxing is necessary to protect your car's paint from the elements. We recommend that you wash and wax the painted surface once or twice a year.
When washing and waxing, park your vehicle in a shaded area out of direct sunlight. Always wash your vehicle before applying wax.
· Use a quality wax that does not contain abrasives.
· Follow the manufacturer's instructions to apply and remove the wax.
· Apply a small amount of wax in a back-and-forth motion, not in circles.
· Do not allow wax to come in contact with any non-body (low-gloss black) colored trim. The wax will discolor or stain the parts over time. · Roof racks. · Bumpers. · Grained door handles. · Side moldings. · Mirror housings. · Windshield cowl area.
· Do not apply wax to glass areas. · After waxing, your car's paint should
feel smooth, and be free of streaks and smudges.
CLEANING THE ENGINE
Engines are more efficient when they are clean because grease and dirt buildup keep the engine warmer than normal.
When washing:
· Take care when using a power washer to clean the engine. The high-pressure fluid could penetrate the sealed parts and cause damage.
· Do not spray a hot engine with cold water to avoid cracking the engine block or other engine components.
· Spray Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and Degreaser on all parts that require cleaning and pressure rinse clean. In Canada, use Motorcraft Engine Shampoo.
Note: If your vehicle has an engine cover remove the cover before application of Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and Degreaser. Immediately rinse away any over spray.
· Never wash or rinse the engine while it is hot or running; water in the running engine may cause internal damage.
· Never wash or rinse any ignition coil, spark plug wire or spark plug well, or the area in and around these locations.
· Cover the battery, power distribution box, and air filter assembly to prevent water damage when cleaning the engine.
CLEANING THE WINDOWS AND WIPER BLADES
Car wash chemicals and environmental fallout can result in windshield and wiper blade contamination. Dirty windshield and wipers will result in poor windshield wiper operation. Keep the windshield and wiper blades clean to maintain windshield wiper performance.
282
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Vehicle Care
To clean the windshield and wiper blades:
· Clean the windshield with a non-abrasive glass cleaner. When cleaning the interior of the windshield, avoid getting any glass cleaner on the instrument panel or door panels. Wipe any glass cleaner off these surfaces immediately.
· For windshields contaminated with tree sap, chemicals, wax or bugs, clean the entire windshield using steel wool (no greater than 0000 grade) in a circular motion and rinse with water.
· Clean the wiper blades with isopropyl rubbing alcohol or windshield washer concentrate.
Note: Do not use razor blades or other sharp objects to clean or remove decals from the inside of the heated rear window. The vehicle warranty does not cover damage caused to the heated rear window grid lines.
CLEANING THE INTERIOR
WARNING: Do not use cleaning solvents, bleach or dye on the vehicle's seatbelts, as these actions may weaken the belt webbing.
WARNING: On vehicles equipped with seat-mounted airbags, do not use chemical solvents or strong detergents. Such products could contaminate the side airbag system and affect performance of the side airbag in a crash.
For fabric, carpets, cloth seats and seats equipped with side airbags:
· Remove dust and loose dirt with a vacuum cleaner.
· Remove light stains and soil with Motorcraft Professional Strength Carpet & Upholstery Cleaner.
· If grease or tar is present on the material, spot-clean the area first with Motorcraft Spot and Stain Remover. In Canada, use Motorcraft Multi-Purpose Cleaner.
· If a ring forms on the fabric after spot cleaning, clean the entire area immediately (but do not oversaturate) or the ring will set.
· Do not use household cleaning products or glass cleaners, which can stain and discolor the fabric and affect the flame retardant abilities of the seat materials.
Mirrors
Do not clean the housing or glass of any mirror with harsh abrasives, fuel or other petroleum or ammonia-based cleaning products.
CLEANING THE INSTRUMENT PANEL AND INSTRUMENT CLUSTER LENS
WARNING: Do not use chemical solvents or strong detergents when cleaning the steering wheel or instrument panel to avoid contamination of the airbag system.
Note: Follow the same procedure as cleaning leather seats for cleaning leather instrument panels and leather interior trim surfaces. See Cleaning Leather Seats (page 284).
283
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Vehicle Care
Clean the instrument panel and cluster lens with a clean, damp and soft cloth, then use a clean, dry and soft cloth to dry these areas.
· Avoid cleaners or polishes that increase the gloss of the upper portion of the instrument panel. The dull finish in this area helps protect you from undesirable windshield reflection.
· Do not use any household cleaning products or glass cleaners as these may damage the finish of the instrument panel, interior trim and cluster lens.
· Wash or wipe your hands clean if you have been in contact with certain products such as insect repellent and suntan lotion to avoid possible damage to the interior painted surfaces.
· Do not allow air fresheners and hand sanitizers to spill onto interior surfaces. If a spill occurs, wipe off immediately. Your warranty may not cover these damages.
If a staining liquid like coffee or juice has been spilled on the instrument panel or on interior trim surfaces:
1. Wipe up spilled liquid using a clean, soft cloth as quickly as possible.
2. Use Motorcraft Premium Leather and Vinyl Cleaner or a commercially available leather cleaning product for automotive interiors. Test any cleaner or stain remover on an inconspicuous area.
3. Alternatively, wipe the surface with a clean, soft cloth and a mild soap and water solution. Dry the area with a clean, soft cloth.
4. If necessary, apply more soap and water solution or cleaning product to a clean, soft cloth and press it onto the soiled area. Allow this to set at room temperature for 30 minutes.
5. Remove the soaked cloth, then with a clean, damp cloth, use a rubbing motion for 60 seconds on the soiled area.
6. Dry the area with a clean, soft cloth.
CLEANING LEATHER SEATS (IF
EQUIPPED)
Note: Follow the same procedure as cleaning leather seats for cleaning leather instrument panels and leather interior trim surfaces.
For routine cleaning, wipe the surface with a soft, damp cloth and a mild soap and water solution. Dry the area with a clean, soft cloth.
For cleaning and removing stains such as dye transfer, use Motorcraft Premium Leather and Vinyl Cleaner or a commercially available leather cleaning product for automotive interiors.
Note: Test any cleaner or stain remover on an inconspicuous area.
You should:
· Remove dust and loose dirt with a vacuum cleaner.
· Clean and treat spills and stains as soon as possible.
Do not use the following products as these may damage the leather:
· Oil and petroleum or silicone-based leather conditioners.
· Household cleaners.
· Alcohol solutions.
· Solvents or cleaners intended specifically for rubber, vinyl and plastics.
284
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Vehicle Care
REPAIRING MINOR PAINT DAMAGE
Authorized dealers have touch-up paint to match your vehicle's color. Your vehicle color code is printed on a sticker on the front, left-hand side door jamb. Take your color code to your authorized dealer to make sure you get the correct color.
Before repairing minor paint damage, use a cleaner such as Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover to remove particles such as bird droppings, tree sap, insect deposits, tar spots, road salt and industrial fallout.
Always read the instructions before using cleaning products.
CLEANING THE WHEELS
1. Regularly clean them with a wheel cleaner. We recommend that you use Ford approved wheel cleaner if available.
2. Remove dirt and brake dust with a sponge.
3. Remove tar and grease with a bug and tar remover. We recommend that you use Ford approved bug and tar remover if available.
4. Thoroughly rinse the wheels with water after cleaning.
If you intend on parking your vehicle for an extended period after cleaning the wheels with a wheel cleaner, drive your vehicle for a few minutes before doing so. This reduces the risk of corrosion of the brake discs, brake pads and linings.
Do not clean the wheels when they are hot.
Note: Some car washes could damage wheel rims and covers.
Note: Using non-recommended cleaners, harsh cleaning products, chrome wheel cleaners or abrasive materials could damage wheel rims and covers.
VEHICLE STORAGE
If you plan on storing your vehicle for 30 days or more, read the following maintenance recommendations to make sure your vehicle stays in good operating condition.
We engineer and test all motor vehicles and their components for reliable, regular driving. Under various conditions, long-term storage may lead to degraded engine performance or failure unless you use specific precautions to preserve engine components.
General
· Store all vehicles in a dry, ventilated place.
· Protect from sunlight, if possible.
· If vehicles are stored outside, they require regular maintenance to protect against rust and damage.
Body
· Wash your vehicle thoroughly to remove dirt, grease, oil, tar or mud from exterior surfaces, rear-wheel housing and the underside of front fenders.
· Periodically wash your vehicle if it is stored in exposed locations.
· Touch-up exposed or primed metal to prevent rust.
· Cover chrome and stainless steel parts with a thick coat of auto wax to prevent discoloration. Re-wax as necessary when you wash your vehicle.
· Lubricate all hood, door and luggage compartment hinges and latches with a light grade oil.
285
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Vehicle Care
· Cover interior trim to prevent fading.
· Keep all rubber parts free from oil and solvents.
Engine
· Change the engine oil and filter prior to storage because used engine oil contains contaminates which may cause engine damage.
· Start the engine every 15 days for a minimum of 15 minutes. Run at fast idle with the climate controls set to defrost until the engine reaches normal operating temperature.
· With your foot on the brake, shift through all the gears while the engine is running.
· We recommend that you change the engine oil before you use your vehicle again.
Fuel system
· Fill the fuel tank with high-quality fuel until the first automatic shutoff of the fuel pump nozzle.
Cooling system
· Protect against freezing temperatures.
· When removing your vehicle from storage, check coolant fluid level. Confirm that there are no cooling system leaks and that fluid is at the recommended level.
Battery
· Check and recharge as necessary. Keep connections clean.
· If storing your vehicle for more than 30 days without recharging the battery, we recommend that you disconnect the battery cables to maintain battery charge for quick starting.
Note: It is necessary to reset memory features if battery cables are disconnected.
Brakes
· Make sure the brakes and parking brake release fully.
Tires
· Maintain recommended air pressure.
Miscellaneous
· Make sure all linkages, cables, levers and pins under your vehicle are covered with grease to prevent rust.
· Move vehicles at least 25 ft (7.5 m) every 15 days to lubricate working parts and prevent corrosion.
Removing Vehicle From Storage
When your vehicle is ready to come out of storage, do the following: · Wash your vehicle to remove any dirt
or grease film build-up on window surfaces. · Check windshield wipers for any deterioration. · Check under the hood for any foreign material that may have collected during storage such as mice or squirrel nests. · Check the exhaust for any foreign material that may have collected during storage. · Check tire pressures and set tire inflation per the Tire Label. · Check brake pedal operation. Drive your vehicle 15 ft (4.5 m) back and forth to remove rust build-up.
286
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Vehicle Care
· Check fluid levels (including coolant, oil and gas) to make sure there are no leaks, and fluids are at recommended levels.
· If you remove the battery, clean the battery cable ends and check for damage.
Contact an authorized dealer if you have any concerns or issues.
BODY STYLING KITS
The distance between the underside of your vehicle and the ground is less than that of other models. Drive with extreme care to avoid damage to your vehicle.
287
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Wheels and Tires
GENERAL INFORMATION
The recommended tire inflation pressures are on the tire information label on the driver side B-pillar.
Check and set the tire pressure at the ambient temperature in which you are intending to drive your vehicle and when the tires are cold. See Technical Specifications (page 317).
Note: Check your tire pressures regularly to optimize fuel economy.
Only use approved wheel and tire sizes. Using other sizes could damage your vehicle and could make the National Type Approval invalid.
Installation of any tires that are not the original equipment tire size can cause the speedometer to display incorrect vehicle speed.
TIRE CARE
Important information for 235/40R19 low-profile tires and wheels If your vehicle is equipped with 235/40R19 tires, they are low-profile tires. These tires and wheels are designed to give your vehicle a sport appearance. With low-profile tires, you may notice an increase in road noise and faster tire wear, depending on road conditions and driving styles. Due to their design, low-profile tires and wheels are more prone to road damage from potholes, rough or unpaved roads, car wash rails and curb contact than standard tires and wheels.
Note: Your vehicle's warranty does not cover these types of damage. Tires should always be kept at the correct inflation pressures and extra caution should be taken when operating on rough roads to avoid impacts that could cause wheel and tire damage. Information About Uniform Tire Quality Grading
E142542
Tire Quality Grades apply to new pneumatic passenger car tires. The Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width. For example: Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A. These Tire Quality Grades are determined by standards that the United States Department of Transportation has set.
288
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Wheels and Tires
Tire Quality Grades apply to new pneumatic passenger car tires. They do not apply to deep tread, winter-type snow tires, space-saver or temporary use spare tires, light truck or LT type tires, tires with nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches or limited production tires as defined in Title 49 Code of Federal Regulations Part 575.104 ©)(2).
U.S. Department of Transportation Tire quality grades: The U.S. Department of Transportation requires Ford Motor Company to give you the following information about tire grades exactly as the government has written it.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear 1 ½ times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices, and differences in road characteristics and climate.
Traction AA A B C
WARNING: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics.
The traction grades, from highest to lowest are AA, A, B, and C. The grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.
Temperature A B C
WARNING: The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B and C, representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
289
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Wheels and Tires
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 139. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.
Glossary of Tire Terminology
* Tire label: A label showing the original equipment tire sizes, recommended inflation pressure and the maximum weight the vehicle can carry.
*Tire Identification Number (TIN): A number on the sidewall of each tire providing information about the tire brand and manufacturing plant, tire size and date of manufacture. Also referred to as DOT code.
*Inflation pressure: A measure of the amount of air in a tire.
*Standard load: A class of P-metric or Metric tires designed to carry a maximum load at set pressure. For example: For P-metric tires 35 psi (2.4 bar) and for Metric tires 36 psi (2.5 bar). Increasing the inflation pressure beyond this pressure will not increase the tire's load carrying capability.
*Extra load: A class of P-metric or Metric tires designed to carry a heavier maximum load at 42 psi (2.9 bar). Increasing the inflation pressure beyond this pressure will not increase the tire's load carrying capability.
*kPa: Kilopascal, a metric unit of air pressure.
*PSI: Pounds per square inch, a standard unit of air pressure.
*Cold tire pressure: The tire pressure when the vehicle has been stationary and out of direct sunlight for an hour or more and prior to the vehicle being driven for 1.0 mi (1.6 km).
*Recommended inflation pressure: The cold inflation pressure found on the Safety Compliance Certification Label (affixed to either the door hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge that meets the door-latch post, next to the driver's seating position), or Tire Label located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver's door.
290
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Wheels and Tires
*B-pillar: The structural member at the side of the vehicle behind the front door.
* Bead area of the tire: Area of the tire next to the rim.
* Sidewall of the tire: Area between the bead area and the tread.
* Tread area of the tire: Area of the perimeter of the tire that contacts the road when mounted on the vehicle.
*Rim: The metal support (wheel) for a tire or a tire and tube assembly upon which the tire beads are seated.
Information Contained on the Tire Sidewall
Both United States and Canada Federal regulations require tire manufacturers to place standardized information on the sidewall of all tires. This information identifies and describes the fundamental characteristics of the tire and also provides a U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number for safety standard certification and in case of a recall.
Information on P Type Tires
B A
CD E F G H
I
M
J
L K
E142543
P215/65R15 95H is an example of a tire size, load index and speed rating. The definitions of these items are listed below. (Note that the tire size, load index and speed rating for your vehicle may be different from this example.)
A. P: Indicates a tire, designated by the Tire and Rim Association, that may be used for service on cars, sport utility vehicles, minivans and light trucks. Note: If your tire size does not begin with a letter this may mean it is designated by either the European Tire and Rim Technical Organization or the Japan Tire Manufacturing Association.
291
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Wheels and Tires
B. 215: Indicates the nominal width of the tire in millimeters from sidewall edge to sidewall edge. In general, the larger the number, the wider the tire.
C. 65: Indicates the aspect ratio which gives the tire's ratio of height to width.
D. R: Indicates a radial type tire.
E. 15: Indicates the wheel or rim diameter in inches. If you change your wheel size, you will have to purchase new tires to match the new wheel diameter.
F. 95: Indicates the tire's load index. It is an index that relates to how much weight a tire can carry. You may find this information in your owner's manual. If not, contact a local tire dealer.
Note: You may not find this information on all tires because it is not required by federal law.
G. H: Indicates the tire's speed rating. The speed rating denotes the speed at which a tire is designed to be driven for extended periods of time under a standard condition of load and inflation pressure. The tires on your vehicle may operate at different conditions for load and inflation pressure. These speed ratings may need to be adjusted for the difference in conditions. The ratings range from 81186 mph (130299 km/h). These ratings are listed in the following chart.
Note: You may not find this information on all tires because it is not required by federal law.
Letter rating
mph ( km/h)
M
81 mph (130 km/h)
N
87 mph (140 km/h)
Q
99 mph (159 km/h)
R
106 mph (171 km/h)
S
112 mph (180 km/h)
T
118 mph (190 km/h)
U
124 mph (200 km/h)
H
130 mph (210 km/h)
V
149 mph (240 km/h)
W
168 mph (270 km/h)
Y
186 mph (299 km/h)
Note: For tires with a maximum speed capability over 149 mph (240 km/h), tire manufacturers sometimes use the letters ZR. For those with a maximum speed capability over 186 mph (299 km/h), tire manufacturers always use the letters ZR.
H. U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number (TIN): This begins with the letters DOT and indicates that the tire meets all federal standards. The next two numbers or letters are the plant code designating where it was manufactured, the next two are
292
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Wheels and Tires
the tire size code and the last four numbers represent the week and year the tire was built. For example, the numbers 317 mean the 31st week of 1997. After 2000 the numbers go to four digits. For example, 2501 means the 25th week of 2001. The numbers in between are identification codes used for traceability. This information is used to contact customers if a tire defect requires a recall.
I. M+S or M/S: Mud and Snow, or
AT: All Terrain, or
AS: All Season.
J. Tire Ply Composition and Material Used: Indicates the number of plies or the number of layers of rubber-coated fabric in the tire tread and sidewall. Tire manufacturers also must indicate the ply materials in the tire and the sidewall, which include steel, nylon, polyester, and others.
K. Maximum Load: Indicates the maximum load in kilograms and pounds that can be carried by the tire. Refer to the Safety Compliance Certification Label (affixed to either the door hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge that meets the door-latch post, next to the driver's seating position), for the correct tire pressure for your vehicle.
L. Treadwear, Traction and Temperature Grades:
*Treadwear: The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100.
*Traction: The traction grades, from highest to lowest are AA, A, B, and C. The grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.
*Temperature: The temperature grades are A (the highest), B and C, representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
M. Maximum Inflation Pressure: Indicates the tire manufacturers' maximum permissible pressure or the pressure at which the maximum load can be carried by the tire. This pressure is normally higher than the vehicle manufacturer's recommended cold inflation pressure which can be found on the Safety Compliance Certification Label (affixed to either the door hinge pillar,
293
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Wheels and Tires
door-latch post, or the door edge that meets the door-latch post, next to the driver's seating position), or Tire Label which is located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver's door. The cold inflation pressure should never be set lower than the recommended pressure on the vehicle label.
The tire suppliers may have additional markings, notes or warnings such as standard load, radial tubeless, etc.
Additional Information Contained on the Tire Sidewall for LT Type Tires
Note: Tire Quality Grades do not apply to this type of tire.
B C
A
D
B
E142544
LT type tires have some additional information beyond those of P type tires; these differences are described below.
A. LT: Indicates a tire, designated by the Tire and Rim Association, that is intended for service on light trucks.
B. Load Range and Load Inflation Limits: Indicates the tire's load-carrying capabilities and its inflation limits.
C. Maximum Load Dual lb (kg) at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates the maximum load and tire pressure when the tire is used as a dual; defined as four tires on the rear axle (a total of six or more tires on the vehicle).
D. Maximum Load Single lb (kg) at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates the maximum load and tire pressure when the tire is used as a single; defined as two tires (total) on the rear axle.
Information on T Type Tires
T145/80D16 is an example of a tire size.
Note: The temporary tire size for your vehicle may be different from this example. Tire Quality Grades do not apply to this type of tire.
294
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Wheels and Tires
BCD
A
E
E142545
T type tires have some additional information beyond those of P type tires; these differences are described below:
A. T: Indicates a type of tire, designated by the Tire and Rim Association, that is intended for temporary service on cars, sport utility vehicles, minivans and light trucks.
B. 145: Indicates the nominal width of the tire in millimeters from sidewall edge to sidewall edge. In general, the larger the number, the wider the tire.
C. 80: Indicates the aspect ratio which gives the tire's ratio of height to width. Numbers of 70 or lower indicate a short sidewall.
D. D: Indicates a diagonal type tire.
R: Indicates a radial type tire.
E. 16: Indicates the wheel or rim diameter in inches. If you change your wheel size, you will have to purchase new tires to match the new wheel diameter.
Location of the Tire Label
You will find a Tire Label containing tire inflation pressure by tire size and other important information located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver's door.
Inflating Your Tires
Safe operation of your vehicle requires that your tires are properly inflated. Remember that a tire can lose up to half of its air pressure without appearing flat.
Every day before you drive, check your tires. If one looks lower than the others, use a tire gauge to check pressure of all tires and adjust if required.
At least once a month and before long trips, inspect each tire and check the tire pressure with a tire gauge (including spare, if equipped). Inflate all tires to the inflation pressure recommended by Ford Motor Company.
295
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Wheels and Tires
You are strongly urged to buy a reliable tire pressure gauge, as automatic service station gauges may be inaccurate. Ford recommends the use of a digital or dial-type tire pressure gauge rather than a stick-type tire pressure gauge.
Use the recommended cold inflation pressure for optimum tire performance and wear. Under-inflation or over-inflation may cause uneven treadwear patterns.
WARNING: Under-inflation is the most common cause of tire failures and may result in severe tire cracking, tread separation or blowout, with unexpected loss of vehicle control and increased risk of injury. Under-inflation increases sidewall flexing and rolling resistance, resulting in heat buildup and internal damage to the tire. It also may result in unnecessary tire stress, irregular wear, loss of vehicle control and accidents. A tire can lose up to half of its air pressure and not appear to be flat!
Always inflate your tires to the Ford recommended inflation pressure even if it is less than the maximum inflation pressure information found on the tire. The Ford recommended tire inflation pressure is found on the Safety Compliance Certification Label
(affixed to either the door hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge that meets the door-latch post, next to the driver's seating position), or Tire Label which is located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver's door. Failure to follow the tire pressure recommendations can cause uneven treadwear patterns and adversely affect the way your vehicle handles.
Maximum Inflation Pressure is the tire manufacturer's maximum permissible pressure and the pressure at which the maximum load can be carried by the tire. This pressure is normally higher than the manufacturer's recommended cold inflation pressure which can be found on the Safety Compliance Certification Label (affixed to either the door hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge that meets the door-latch post, next to the driver's seating position), or Tire Label which is located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver's door. The cold inflation pressure should never be set lower than the recommended pressure on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label.
296
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Wheels and Tires
When weather temperature changes occur, tire inflation pressures also change. A 10°F (6°C) temperature drop can cause a corresponding drop of 1 psi (7 kPa) in inflation pressure. Check your tire pressures frequently and adjust them to the proper pressure which can be found on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label.
To check the pressure in your tire(s):
1. Make sure the tires are cool, meaning they are not hot from driving even a mile.
Note: If you are checking tire pressure when the tire is hot, (for example, driven more than 1 mi (1.6 km)), never bleed or reduce air pressure. The tires are hot from driving and it is normal for pressures to increase above recommended cold pressures. A hot tire at or below recommended cold inflation pressure could be significantly under-inflated.
Note: If you have to drive a distance to get air for your tire(s), check and record the tire pressure first and add the appropriate air pressure when you get to the pump. It is normal for tires to heat up and the air pressure inside to go up as you drive.
2. Remove the cap from the valve on one tire, then firmly press the tire gauge onto the valve and measure the pressure.
3. Add enough air to reach the recommended air pressure.
Note: If you overfill the tire, release air by pressing on the metal stem in the center of the valve. Then recheck the pressure with your tire gauge.
4. Replace the valve cap.
5. Repeat this procedure for each tire, including the spare.
Note: Some spare tires operate at a higher inflation pressure than the other tires. For T type mini-spare tires, (see the Dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly information for a description. Store and maintain at 60 psi (4.15 bar). For full-size and dissimilar spare tires, see the Dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly information for a description. Store and maintain at the higher of the front and rear inflation pressure as shown on the Tire Label.
6. Visually inspect the tires to make sure there are no nails or other objects embedded that could poke a hole in the tire and cause an air leak.
7. Check the sidewalls to make sure there are no gouges, cuts or bulges.
297
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Wheels and Tires
Inspecting Your Tires and Wheel Valve Stems
Periodically inspect the tire treads for uneven or excessive wear and remove objects such as stones, nails or glass that may be wedged in the tread grooves. Check the tire and valve stems for holes, cracks, or cuts that may permit air leakage and repair or replace the tire and replace the valve stem. Inspect the tire sidewalls for cracking, cuts, bruises and other signs of damage or excessive wear. If internal damage to the tire is suspected, have the tire demounted and inspected in case it needs to be repaired or replaced. For your safety, tires that are damaged or show signs of excessive wear should not be used because they are more likely to blow out or fail.
Improper or inadequate vehicle maintenance can cause tires to wear abnormally. Inspect all your tires, including the spare, frequently, and replace them if one or more of the following conditions exist:
Tire Wear
E142546
When the tread is worn down to one sixteenth of an inch (2 mm), tires must be replaced to help prevent your vehicle from skidding and hydroplaning. Built-in treadwear indicators, or wear bars, which look like narrow strips of smooth rubber across the tread will appear on the tire when the tread is worn down to one sixteenth of an inch (2 millimeters) When the tire tread wears down to the same height as these wear bars, the tire is worn out and must be replaced. Damage Periodically inspect the tire treads and sidewalls for damage (such as bulges in the tread or sidewalls, cracks in the tread groove and separation in the tread or sidewall). If damage is observed
298
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Wheels and Tires
or suspected have the tire inspected by a tire professional. Tires can be damaged during off-road use, so inspection after off-road use is also recommended.
Age
WARNING: Tires degrade over time depending on many factors such as weather, storage conditions, and conditions of use (load, speed, inflation pressure) the tires experience throughout their lives.
WARNING: In general, tires should be replaced after six years regardless of tread wear. However, heat caused by hot climates or frequent high loading conditions can accelerate the aging process and may require tires to be replaced more frequently.
WARNING: You should replace your spare tire when you replace the road tires or after six years due to aging even if it has not been used.
U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number (TIN)
Both U.S. and Canada Federal regulations require tire manufacturers to place standardized information on the sidewall of all tires. This information identifies and
describes the fundamental characteristics of the tire and also provides a U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number for safety standard certification and in case of a recall.
This begins with the letters DOT and indicates that the tire meets all federal standards. The next two numbers or letters are the plant code designating where it was manufactured, the next two are the tire size code and the last four numbers represent the week and year the tire was built. For example, the numbers 317 mean the 31st week of 1997. After 2000 the numbers go to four digits. For example, 2501 means the 25th week of 2001. The numbers in between are identification codes used for traceability. This information is used to contact customers if a tire defect requires a recall.
Tire Replacement Requirements
Your vehicle is equipped with tires designed to provide a safe ride and handling capability.
WARNING: Only use replacement tires and wheels that are the same size, load index, speed rating and type (such as P-metric versus LT-metric or all-season versus all-terrain) as those originally provided by Ford. The
299
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Wheels and Tires
recommended tire and wheel size may be found on either the Safety Compliance Certification Label (affixed to either the door hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge that meets the door-latch post, next to the driver's seating position), or the Tire Label which is located on the B-Pillar or edge of the driver's door. If this information is not found on these labels, then you should contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible. Use of any tire or wheel not recommended by Ford can affect the safety and performance of your vehicle, which could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of serious injury, when mounting replacement tires and wheels, you should not exceed the maximum pressure indicated on the sidewall of the tire to set the beads without additional precautions listed below. If the beads do not seat at the maximum pressure indicated, re-lubricate and try again.
WARNING: When inflating the tire for mounting pressures up to 20 psi (1.38 bar) greater than the maximum pressure on the tire sidewall, the following precautions must be taken to protect the person mounting the tire:
· Make sure that you have the correct tire and wheel size.
· Lubricate the tire bead and wheel bead seat area again.
· Stand at a minimum of 12 feet (3.66 meters) away from the wheel and tire assembly.
· Use both eye and ear protection.
WARNING: For a mounting pressure more than 20 psi (1.38 bar) greater than the maximum pressure, a Ford dealer or other tire service professional should do the mounting.
WARNING: Always inflate steel carcass tires with a remote air fill with the person inflating standing at a minimum of 12 ft (3.66 m) away from the wheel and tire assembly.
Important: Remember to replace the wheel valve stems when the road tires are replaced on your vehicle
300
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Wheels and Tires
It is recommended that the two front tires or two rear tires generally be replaced as a pair.
The tire pressure sensors mounted in the wheels (originally installed on your vehicle) are not designed to be used in aftermarket wheels.
The use of wheels or tires not recommended by Ford Motor Company may affect the operation of your tire pressure monitoring system.
If the TPMS indicator is flashing, your TPMS is malfunctioning. Your replacement tire might be incompatible with your TPMS, or some component of the TPMS may be damaged.
Safety Practices
WARNING: If your vehicle is stuck in snow, mud or sand, do not rapidly spin the tires; spinning the tires can tear the tire and cause an explosion. A tire can explode in as little as three to five seconds.
WARNING: Do not spin the wheels at over 34 mph (55 km/h). The tires may fail and injure a passenger or bystander.
Driving habits have a great deal to do with your tire mileage and safety.
*Observe posted speed limits
*Avoid fast starts, stops and turns
*Avoid potholes and objects on the road
*Do not run over curbs or hit the tire against a curb when parking
Highway Hazards
No matter how carefully you drive there's always the possibility that you may eventually have a flat tire on the highway. Drive slowly to the closest safe area out of traffic. This may further damage the flat tire, but your safety is more important.
If you feel a sudden vibration or ride disturbance while driving, or you suspect your tire or vehicle has been damaged, immediately reduce your speed. Drive with caution until you can safely pull off the road. Stop and inspect the tires for damage. If a tire is under-inflated or damaged, deflate it, remove wheel and replace it with your spare tire and wheel. If you cannot detect a cause, have the vehicle towed to the nearest repair facility or tire dealer to have the vehicle inspected.
301
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Wheels and Tires
Tire and Wheel Alignment
A bad jolt from hitting a curb or pothole can cause the front end of your vehicle to become misaligned or cause damage to your tires. If your vehicle seems to pull to one side when you're driving, the wheels may be out of alignment. Have an authorized dealer check the wheel alignment periodically.
Wheel misalignment in the front or the rear can cause uneven and rapid treadwear of your tires and should be corrected by an authorized dealer. Front-wheel drive vehicles and those with an independent rear suspension (if equipped) may require alignment of all four wheels.
The tires should also be balanced periodically. An unbalanced tire and wheel assembly may result in irregular tire wear.
Tire Rotation
Note: If your tires show uneven wear, ask an authorized dealer to check for and correct any wheel misalignment, tire imbalance or mechanical problem involved before tire rotation.
Note: Your vehicle may be equipped with a dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly. A dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly is defined as a spare wheel and tire assembly that is different in brand, size or appearance from the road tires and wheels. If you have a dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly it is intended for temporary use only and should not be used in a tire rotation.
Note: After having your tires rotated, inflation pressure must be checked and adjusted to the vehicle requirements.
Rotating your tires at the recommended interval (as indicated in the Scheduled Maintenance chapter) will help your tires wear more evenly, providing better tire performance and longer tire life.
Front-wheel drive and all-wheel drive vehicles (front tires on the left side of the diagram)
E142547
302
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Wheels and Tires
All vehicles with directional tires (front tires on the left side of the diagram)
them in a heated space to at least 41°F (5°C) for at least 24 hours before installing them on a vehicle, or moving the vehicle with the tires installed, or checking tire inflation. Do not place tires near heaters or heating devices used to warm the room where the tires are stored. Do not apply heat or blow heated air directly on the tires. Always inspect the tires after storage periods and before use.
USING SNOW CHAINS
E147237
Sometimes irregular tire wear can be corrected by rotating the tires.
USING SUMMER TIRES
Summer tires provide superior performance on wet and dry roads. Summer tires do not have the Mud and Snow (M+S or M/S) tire traction rating on the tire side wall. Since summer tires do not have the same traction performance as All-season or Snow tires, we do not recommend using summer tires when temperatures drop to approximately 45°F (7°C) or below (depending on tire wear and environmental conditions) or in snow and ice conditions. Like any tire, summer tire performance is affected by tire wear and environmental conditions. If you must drive in those conditions, we recommend using Mud and Snow (M+S, M/S), All-season or Snow tires.
Always store your summer tires indoors at temperatures above 19°F (-7°C). The rubber compounds used in these tires lose flexibility and may develop surface cracks in the tread area at temperatures below 19°F (-7°C). If the tires have been subjected to 19°F (-7°C) or less, warm
WARNING: Snow tires must be the same size, load index and speed rating as those originally provided by Ford. Use of any tire or wheel not recommended by Ford can affect the safety and performance of your vehicle, which could result in an increased risk of loss of control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death. Additionally, the use of non-recommended tires and wheels can cause steering, suspension, axle, transfer case or power transfer unit failure. Follow the Ford recommended tire inflation pressure found on the Safety Compliance Certification Label (on the door hinge pillar, door latch post or the door edge that meets the door latch post, next to the driver seat), or Tire Label on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver door. Failure to follow the tire pressure recommendations can cause uneven treadwear patterns and adversely affect the way your vehicle handles.
The tires on your vehicle may have all-weather treads to provide traction in rain and snow. However, in some climates, you may need to use snow tires and cables. If you need to use cables, it is recommended that steel wheels (of the same size and specifications) be used, as cables may chip aluminum wheels.
303
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Wheels and Tires
Follow these guidelines when using snow tires and traction devices
· If possible, avoid fully loading your vehicle
· Purchase chains or cables from a manufacturer that clearly labels body to tire dimension restrictions.
· Use no larger than 0.59 in (15 mm) cables or chains ONLY on front axle with 215/60R16 tires. Do not use chains or cables on any other size tires.
· The snow chains or cables must be mounted in pairs on the front axle.
· When driving with tire cables do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h) or the maximum speed recommended by the chain manufacturer, whichever is less.
· Drive cautiously. If you hear the cables rub or bang against the vehicle, stop and retighten them. If this does not work, remove the cables to prevent vehicle damage.
· Remove the cables when they are no longer needed. Do not use cables on dry roads.
If you have any questions regarding snow chains or cables, please contact your authorized dealer.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM
WARNING: The tire pressure monitoring system is not a substitute for manually checking tire pressures. You should periodically check tire pressures using a pressure gauge. Failure to correctly maintain tire pressures could increase the risk of tire failure, loss of control, vehicle rollover and personal injury.
Note: You should only use tire sealants in roadside emergencies as they could cause damage to the tire pressure monitoring system sensor.
Note: If the tire pressure monitoring system sensor becomes damaged, it will not function.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires).
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and could affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
304
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Wheels and Tires
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system will not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions could occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with License exempt RSS Standards of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device will not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that could cause undesired operation.
Note: Changes or modifications not expressively approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. The term "IC:" before the radio certification number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met.
Changing Tires With a Tire Pressure Monitoring System
E142549
Note: Each road tire is equipped with a tire pressure sensor located inside the wheel and tire assembly cavity. The pressure sensor is attached to the valve stem. The pressure sensor is covered by the tire and is not visible unless the tire is removed. Take care when changing the tire to avoid damaging the sensor. You should always have your tires serviced by an authorized dealer. Check the tire pressure periodically (at least monthly) using an accurate tire gauge. See When Inflating Your Tires in this chapter. Understanding Your Tire Pressure Monitoring System
E250820
305
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Wheels and Tires
The tire pressure monitoring system measures pressure in your road tires and sends the tire pressure readings to your vehicle. You can view the tire pressure readings through the information display. See General Information (page 97). The low tire pressure warning light will turn on if the tire pressure is significantly low. Once the light is illuminated, your tires are under-inflated and need to be inflated to the manufacturer's recommended tire pressure. Even if the light turns on and a short time later turns off, your tire pressure still needs to be checked.
When Your Temporary Spare Tire is Installed
When one of your road tires needs to be replaced with the temporary spare, the system will continue to identify an issue to remind you that the damaged road wheel and tire assembly needs to be repaired and put back on your vehicle.
To restore the full function of the tire pressure monitoring system, have the damaged road wheel and tire assembly repaired and remounted on your vehicle.
When You Believe Your System is Not Operating Properly
The main function of the tire pressure monitoring system is to warn you when your tires need air. It can also warn you in the event the system is no longer capable of functioning as intended. See the following chart for information concerning your tire pressure monitoring system:
306
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Wheels and Tires
Low tire pressure warning light
Solid warning light
Flashing warning light
Possible cause Tire(s) under-inflated
Spare tire in use TPMS malfunction Tire rotation without
sensor training Spare tire in use TPMS malfunction
Customer action required
Make sure tires are at the proper pressure. See Inflating your tires in this chapter. After inflating your tires to the manufacturer's recommended pressure as shown on the Tire Label (located on the edge of driver's door or the B-Pillar), the vehicle must be driven for at least two minutes over 20 mph (32 km/h) before the light turns off.
Repair the damaged road wheel and tire assembly and reinstall it on the vehicle to restore system function. For a description on how the system functions, see When Your Temporary Spare Tire is Installed in this section.
If the tires are properly inflated and the spare tire is not in use but the light remains on, contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
On vehicles with different front and rear tire pressures, the system must be retrained following every tire rotation. See Tire Pressure Monitoring System Reset procedure later in this section.
Repair the damaged road wheel and tire assembly and reinstall it on the vehicle to restore system function. For a description on how the system functions, see When Your Temporary Spare Tire is Installed in this section.
If the tires are properly inflated and the spare tire is not in use but the light remains on, contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
307
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Wheels and Tires
When Inflating Your Tires
WARNING: Do not use the tire pressure displayed in the information display as a tire pressure gauge. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury or death.
When putting air into your tires (such as at a gas station or in your garage), the tire pressure monitoring system will not respond immediately to the air added to your tires.
It could take up to two minutes of driving over 20 mph (32 km/h) for the light to turn off after you have filled your tires to the recommended inflation pressure.
How Temperature Affects Your Tire Pressure
The tire pressure monitoring system monitors tire pressure in each pneumatic tire. While driving in a normal manner, a typical passenger tire inflation pressure could increase about 24 psi (1428 kPa) from a cold start situation. If the vehicle is stationary overnight with the outside temperature significantly lower than the daytime temperature, the tire pressure could decrease about 3 psi (21 kPa) for a drop of 30°F (17°C) in ambient temperature. This lower pressure value could be detected by the tire pressure monitoring system as being significantly lower than the recommended inflation pressure and activate the system warning light for low tire pressure. If the low tire pressure warning light is on, visually check each tire to verify that no tire is flat. If one or more tires are flat, repair as necessary. Check the air pressure in the road tires. If any tire is under-inflated, carefully drive the vehicle to the nearest location where air can be added to the tires. Inflate all the tires to the recommended inflation pressure.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Reset Procedure
WARNING: To determine the required pressure(s) for your vehicle, see the Safety Compliance Certification Label (on the door hinge pillar, door-latch post or the door edge that meets the door-latch post, next to the driver seat) or the Tire Label on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver door.
Note: You need to perform the tire pressure monitoring system reset procedure after each tire rotation.
To provide the vehicle's load carrying capability, some vehicles require different recommended tire pressures in the front tires as compared to the rear tires. The tire pressure monitoring system equipped on these vehicles is designed to illuminate the low tire pressure warning light at two different pressures; one for the front tires and one for the rear tires.
Since tires need to be rotated to provide consistent performance and maximum tire life, the tire pressure monitoring system needs to know when the tires are rotated to determine which set of tires are on the front and which are on the rear. With this information, the system can detect and properly warn of low tire pressures.
System reset tips:
308
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Wheels and Tires
· To reduce the chances of interference from another vehicle, perform the system reset procedure at least 3 ft (1 m) away from another Ford Motor Company vehicle undergoing the system reset procedure at the same time.
· Do not wait more than two minutes between resetting each tire sensor or the system can time-out and you have to repeat the entire procedure on all four wheels.
· A double horn sounds indicating the need to repeat the procedure.
Performing the System Reset Procedure
Read the entire procedure before attempting.
1. Drive the vehicle above 20 mph (32 km/h) for at least two minutes, then park in a safe location where you can easily get to all four tires and have access to an air pump.
2. Place the ignition in the off position and keep the key in the ignition.
3. Cycle the ignition to the on position with the engine off.
4. Turn the hazard flashers on then off three times. You must accomplish this within 10 seconds. If you successfully enter the reset mode, the horn sounds once, the system indicator flashes and a message shows in the information display. If this does not occur, please try again starting at step 2. If after repeated attempts to enter the reset mode, the horn does not sound, the system indicator does not flash and no message shows in the information display, seek service from your authorized dealer.
5. Train the tire pressure monitoring system sensors in the tires using the following system reset sequence starting with the left front tire in the following clockwise order: Left front driver side front tire, Right front passenger side front tire, Right rear passenger side rear tire, Left rear driver side rear tire.
6. Remove the valve cap from the valve stem on the left front tire. Decrease the air pressure until the horn sounds.
Note: The single horn tone confirms that the sensor identification code has been learned by the module for this position. If a double horn is heard, the reset procedure was unsuccessful, and you must repeat it.
7. Remove the valve cap from the valve stem on the right front tire. Decrease the air pressure until the horn sounds.
8. Remove the valve cap from the valve stem on the right rear tire. Decrease the air pressure until the horn sounds.
9. Remove the valve cap from the valve stem on the left rear tire. Decrease the air pressure until the horn sounds. Training is complete after the horn sounds for the last tire trained, driver side rear tire, the system indicator stops flashing, and a message shows in the information display.
10. Turn the ignition off. If two short horn beeps are heard, the reset procedure was unsuccessful and you must repeat it. If after repeating the procedure and two short beeps are heard when the ignition is turned to off, seek assistance from your authorized dealer.
309
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Wheels and Tires
11. Set all four tires to the recommended air pressure as indicated on the Safety Compliance Certification Label, affixed to either the door hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge that meets the door-latch post, next to the driver seating position or Tire Label located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver door.
CHANGING A ROAD WHEEL
WARNING: If the tire pressure monitor sensor becomes damaged it may not function.
Note: The tire pressure monitoring system indicator light illuminates when the spare tire is in use. To restore the full function of the monitoring system, mount all road wheels equipped with tire pressure monitoring sensors on the vehicle.
Note: You should only use tire sealants in roadside emergencies as they may cause damage to the tire pressure monitoring system sensor.
If you get a flat tire when driving, do not apply the brake heavily. Instead, gradually decrease your speed. Hold the steering wheel firmly and slowly move to a safe place on the side of the road.
Have a flat serviced by an authorized dealer to prevent damage to the tire pressure monitoring system sensors. See Tire Pressure Monitoring System (page 304). Replace the spare tire with a road tire as soon as possible. During repairing or replacing of the flat tire, have an authorized dealer inspect the tire pressure monitoring system sensor for damage.
Dissimilar Spare Wheel and Tire Assembly Information
WARNING: Failure to follow these guidelines could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, injury or death.
If you have a dissimilar spare wheel and tire, use it for temporary use only. This means that if you need to use it, you should replace it as soon as possible with a road wheel and tire assembly that is the same size and type as the road tires and wheels that originally came with your vehicle. If the dissimilar spare tire or wheel is damaged, replace it instead of repairing it.
310
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Wheels and Tires
Important Use of Spare Wheel
A dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly is a spare wheel and tire assembly that is different in brand, size or appearance from the road tires and wheels and can be one of three types:
Types of Spare Wheels
T-type mini-spare.1
Full-size dissimilar spare with label on wheel.2
Full-size dissimilar spare without label on wheel. 1 This spare tire begins with the letter T for tire size and may have Temporary Use Only molded in the sidewall. 2 This spare tire has a label on the wheel that states: THIS WHEEL AND TIRE ASSEMBLY FOR TEMPORARY USE ONLY.
Driving with a T-type Mini-spare or Fullsize Dissimilar Spare with Label on Wheel
Do not:
· Exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).
· Load the vehicle beyond maximum vehicle load rating listed on the Safety Compliance Label.
· Tow a trailer.
· Use snow chains on the end of the vehicle with the dissimilar spare tire.
· Use more than one dissimilar spare tire at a time.
· Use commercial car washing equipment.
· Try to repair the dissimilar spare tire.
Use of the above dissimilar spare wheel at any one wheel location can lead to impairment of the following:
· Handling, stability and braking performance.
· Comfort and noise.
· Ground clearance and parking at curbs.
· Winter weather driving capability.
· Wet weather driving capability. · All-wheel driving capability, if
applicable.
Driving with a Full-size Dissimilar Spare Wheel and Tire Assembly
Do not: · Exceed 70 mph (113 km/h). · Use more than one dissimilar spare
wheel and tire assembly at a time. · Use commercial car washing
equipment. · Use snow chains on the end of the
vehicle with the dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly.
Use of the above dissimilar spare wheel at any one wheel location can lead to impairment of the following: · Handling, stability and braking
performance. · Comfort and noise. · Ground clearance and parking at curbs. · Winter weather driving capability. · Wet weather driving capability. · All-wheel driving capability.
311
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Wheels and Tires
Give additional caution to the following when driving with the full-size dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly: · Towing a trailer. · Driving vehicles equipped with a
camper body. · Driving vehicles with a load on the
cargo rack.
Drive cautiously when using a full-size dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly and seek service as soon as possible.
Changing a Road Wheel Procedure
WARNING: When one of the front wheels is off the ground, the transmission alone will not prevent the vehicle from moving or slipping off the jack, even if the transmission is in park (P).
WARNING: To help prevent your vehicle from moving when changing a wheel, shift the transmission into park (P), set the parking brake and use an appropriate block or wheel chock to secure the wheel diagonally opposite to the wheel being changed. For example, when changing the front left wheel, place an appropriate block or wheel chock on the right rear wheel.
WARNING: Do not work on your vehicle when the jack is the only support. If the vehicle slips off the jack, you or someone else could be seriously injured.
WARNING: Check that the vehicle jack is not damaged or deformed and the thread is lubricated and clean.
WARNING: Never place anything between the vehicle jack and your vehicle.
WARNING: Never place anything between the vehicle jack and the ground.
WARNING: Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel.
WARNING: Park your vehicle so that you do not obstruct the flow of traffic or place yourself in any danger and set up a warning triangle.
WARNING: The jack supplied with this vehicle is only intended for changing wheels. Do not use the vehicle jack other than when you are changing a wheel in an emergency.
WARNING: Always use the jack provided as original equipment with your vehicle. If using a jack other than the one provided, make sure the jack capacity is adequate for the vehicle weight, including any vehicle cargo or modifications. If you are unsure if the jack capacity is adequate, contact the authorized dealer.
WARNING: Use only the specified jacking points. If you use other positions, you may damage the body, steering, suspension, engine, braking system or the fuel lines.
WARNING: Failure to follow these guidelines could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, injury or death.
312
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Wheels and Tires
6. Remove the spare tire, jack, and wrench from the spare tire compartment.
E166722
Note: Do not allow passengers to remain in your vehicle when using the jack on the vehicle.
1. Park on a level surface, set the parking brake and activate the hazard flashers.
2. Place the transmission in park (P) and turn the engine off. For vehicles with a manual transmission, place the transmission in reverse (R) after you turn the engine off.
E178186
7. Turn the hex nut on the jack counterclockwise to remove the lug wrench from the jack. This lowers the jack and loosens the mechanical lock.
E175447
3. Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally opposite the flat tire. For example, if the left front tire is flat, block the right rear wheel.
4. The spare tire, jack, and wrench are in the spare tire compartment under the trunk load floor.
5. Remove the spare tire bolt securing the spare tire by turning it counterclockwise.
E175694
8. Unfold the wrench for use.
E181744
313
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Wheels and Tires
9. If your vehicle has wheel trim covering the lug nuts, use the tool attached to the spare wheel retainer to remove the wheel trim.
E302004
10. If jacking on the roadside shoulder, set the warning triangle upright on the shoulder in the direction of oncoming traffic if the vehicle has a warning triangle.
11. Loosen each wheel lug nut one-half turn counterclockwise, but do not remove them until you raise the wheel off the ground.
E145908
12. You can identify the vehicle jacking points by the triangle markings on the molding as shown. The triangle marking may be on the side or the underside of the molding. On vehicles without moldings, a pair of arrows on the metal flange pointing to the jacking point between them identifies the jacking points. The warning label on the jack depicts the details.
E174939
13. Place the jack at the jacking point next to the tire you are changing. Turn the jack handle clockwise until the wheel is completely off the ground.
14. Remove the lug nuts with the lug wrench.
15. Replace the flat tire with the spare tire, making sure the valve stem is facing outward. Reinstall the lug nuts until the wheel is snug against the hub. Do not fully tighten the lug nuts until you lower the wheel. If you are using the temporary tire, the lug nut washers do not appear to be flush with the rim. This is normal only when using the temporary spare tire.
16. Lower the wheel by turning the jack handle counterclockwise.
17. Remove the jack and fully tighten the lug nuts in the order shown. See Technical Specifications (page 318).
314
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Wheels and Tires
Stowing the Flat Tire Without the Retainer Strap
1
3
4
5
2
E75442
18. To store the folded wrench on the jack, engage the bracket of the jack base on the wrench feature as shown. Swing the wrench upward and adjust the height of the jack until the pin engages the hole. Tighten the hex nut clockwise by hand until secure.
E176165
19. Put the flat tire, jack and lug wrench away. Make sure the jack is fastened securely before you drive.
20. Unblock the wheel and retrieve the warning triangle.
E227869
You can temporarily stow the full-size road wheel in the spare tire compartment.
1. Lift the carpeted wheel cover at an angle to access the spare tire compartment.
2. Place the wheel in the spare tire well with the valve stem facing down.
3. Install the shorter jack retainer bolt to the jack bolt-down bracket through the center of the wheel. Finally, wind the wheel retainer down to secure the wheel in place.
4. Place the jack and tools back into the spare tire compartment.
5. Replace the carpeted wheel cover.
315
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Wheels and Tires
Stowing the Flat Tire Using the Retainer Strap (If Equipped)
You can temporarily stow the full-size road wheel in the spare tire compartment.
1. Find the flat tire retainer strap tucked inside the jack channel.
3. Put the jack and lug wrench away. Make sure you fasten the jack so it does not rattle when you drive.
4. Stow the flat tire on the floor in the cargo area.
5. Weave the retainer strap through the wheel openings.
E224480
2. Locate the jack bolt-down bracket. Push the retainer strap through the jack bolt-down bracket.
E224479
6. Secure the flat tire by tying a flat knot.
316
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Wheels and Tires
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS - 1.5L ECOBOOSTTM/2.0L ECOBOOSTTM/2.5L
Wheel Lug Nut Torque Specifications
WARNING: When you install a wheel, always remove any corrosion, dirt or foreign materials present on the mounting surfaces of the wheel or the surface of the wheel hub, brake drum or brake disc that contacts the wheel. Make sure to secure any fasteners that attach the rotor to the hub so they do not interfere with the mounting surfaces of the wheel. Installing wheels without correct metal-to-metal contact at the wheel mounting surfaces can cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the wheel to come off while your vehicle is in motion, resulting in loss of vehicle control, personal injury or death.
Bolt size
Ib-ft (Nm)*
M12 x 1.5
100 (135)
*Torque specifications are for nut and bolt threads free of oil, dirt and rust. Use only Ford recommended replacement fasteners.
Retighten the lug nuts to the specified torque within 100 miles (160 kilometers) after any wheel disturbance (such as tire rotation, changing a flat tire, wheel removal).
E145950
A Wheel pilot bore. Inspect the wheel pilot bore and mounting surface prior to installation. Remove any visible corrosion or loose particles.
317
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Wheels and Tires
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS - 2.7L ECOBOOSTTM
Wheel Lug Nut Torque Specifications
WARNING: When a wheel is installed, always remove any corrosion, dirt or foreign materials present on the mounting surfaces of the wheel or the surface of the wheel hub, brake drum or brake disc that contacts the wheel. Make sure that any fasteners that attach the rotor to the hub are secured so they do not interfere with the mounting surfaces of the wheel. Installing wheels without correct metal-to-metal contact at the wheel mounting surfaces can cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the wheel to come off while your vehicle is in motion, resulting in loss of control.
Bolt size
Ib-ft (Nm)*
M14 x 1.5
150 (204)
*Torque specifications are for nut and bolt threads free of dirt and rust. Use only Ford recommended replacement fasteners.
Retighten the lug nuts to the specified torque within 100 miles (160 kilometers) after any wheel disturbance (such as tire rotation, changing a flat tire, wheel removal).
E145950
A Wheel pilot bore. Inspect the wheel pilot bore and mounting surface prior to installation. Remove any visible corrosion or loose particles.
318
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS - 1.5L ECOBOOSTTM
Measurement Cubic inches Firing order Compression ratio Spark plug gap Ignition system
Specification 92
1-3-4-2 10.0:1 0.0260.030 in (0.650.75 mm) Coil on plug
Drivebelt Routing
E270108
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS - 2.0L ECOBOOSTTM
Measurement Cubic inches Firing order Compression ratio Spark plug gap Ignition system
Specification 122
1-3-4-2 9.7:1
0.0280.031 in (0.70.8 mm) Coil on plug
319
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
Drivebelt Routing
A
A. Long drivebelt is on first pulley groove closest to engine
B. Short drivebelt is on second pulley groove farthest from engine
B
E161383
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS - 2.5L
Measurement Cubic inches Firing order Compression ratio Spark plug gap Ignition system
Drivebelt Routing
A
Specification 152
1-3-4-2 9.7:1
0.049-0.053 in. (1.25-1.35 mm) Coil on plug
A. Long drivebelt is on first pulley groove closest to engine
B. Short drivebelt is on second pulley groove farthest from engine
B
E161383
320
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS - 2.7L ECOBOOSTTM
Measurement Cubic inches Firing order Compression ratio Spark plug gap Ignition system
Specification 164
1-4-2-5-3-6 10.0:1
0.0280.031 in (0.70.8 mm) Coil in plug
Drivebelt Routing
E268019
MOTORCRAFT PARTS - 1.5L ECOBOOSTTM
Component Air filter element
Oil filter Battery Spark plugs Cabin air filter Windshield wiper blade
Motorcraft Part number FA-1912A FL-910S
BAGM-48H6-760 SP-539 FP-71A
WW-2601 (driver side)
321
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
Component
Motorcraft Part number
WW-2700 (passenger side)
We recommend Motorcraft replacement parts available at your Ford dealer or at fordparts.com for scheduled maintenance. These parts meet or exceed Ford Motor Company's specifications and are engineered for your vehicle. Use of other parts may impact vehicle performance, emissions and durability. Your warranty may be void for any damage related to use of other parts.
If a Motorcraft oil filter is not available, use an oil filter that meets industry performance specification SAE/USCAR-36.
For spark plug replacement, contact an authorized dealer. Replace the spark plugs at the appropriate intervals. See Scheduled Maintenance (page 476).
322
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
MOTORCRAFT PARTS - 2.0L ECOBOOSTTM
Component
Motorcraft Part number
Air filter element
FA-1912A
Oil filter
FL-910S
Battery
BXT-90T5-590* BAGM-48H6-760**
Spark plugs
SP-550
Cabin air filter
FP-71A
Windshield wiper blade
WW-2601 (driver side) WW-2700 (passenger side)
*This part is designed for vehicles with Intelligent Access.
**This part is designed for vehicles with Automatic-Start-Stop.
We recommend Motorcraft replacement parts available at your Ford dealer or at fordparts.com for scheduled maintenance. These parts meet or exceed Ford Motor Company's specifications and are engineered for your vehicle. Use of other parts may impact vehicle performance, emissions and durability. Your warranty may be void for any damage related to use of other parts.
If a Motorcraft oil filter is not available, use an oil filter that meets industry performance specification SAE/USCAR-36.
Replace the spark plugs at the appropriate intervals. See Scheduled Maintenance (page 476). For spark plug replacement, contact an authorized dealer.
323
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
MOTORCRAFT PARTS - 2.5L
Component
Motorcraft Part Number
Air filter element
FA-1912A
Oil filter
FL-910S
Battery
BXT-90T5-590
Spark plugs
SP-530
Cabin air filter
FP-71A
Windshield wiper blade
WW-2601 (driver side) WW-2700 (passenger side)
We recommend Motorcraft replacement parts available at your Ford dealer or at fordparts.com for scheduled maintenance. These parts meet or exceed Ford Motor Company's specifications and are engineered for your vehicle. Use of other parts may impact vehicle performance, emissions and durability. Your warranty may be void for any damage related to use of other parts.
If a Motorcraft oil filter is not available, use an oil filter that meets industry performance specification SAE/USCAR-36.
For spark plug replacement, contact an authorized dealer. Replace the spark plugs at the appropriate intervals. See Scheduled Maintenance (page 476). See Scheduled Maintenance (page 476).
324
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
MOTORCRAFT PARTS - 2.7L ECOBOOSTTM
Component
Motorcraft Part Number
Air filter element.
FA-1912A
Oil filter.
FL-2062
Battery.
BXT-90T5-590
Spark plugs.
SP-545
Cabin air filter.
FP-71A
Windshield wiper blade.
WW-2601 (driver side) WW-2700 (passenger side)
We recommend Motorcraft® replacement parts available at your Ford dealer or at fordparts.com for scheduled maintenance. These parts meet or exceed Ford Motor Company's specifications and are engineered for your vehicle. Use of other parts may impact vehicle performance, emissions and durability. Your warranty may be void for any damage related to use of other parts.
If a Motorcraft® oil filter is not available, use an oil filter that meets industry performance specification SAE/USCAR-36.
For spark plug replacement, contact an authorized dealer. Replace the spark plugs at the appropriate intervals. See Scheduled Maintenance (page 476).
325
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The vehicle identification number is located on the left-hand side of the instrument panel.
E142476
Please note that in the graphic, XXXX is representative of your vehicle identification number.
The Vehicle Identification Number contains the following information:
E142477
A B
C
D E F G H
World manufacturer identifier
Brake system, Gross Vehicle Weight Rating, Restraint Devices and their locations
Make, vehicle line, series, body type
Engine type
Check digit
Model year
Assembly plant
Production sequence number
326
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
VEHICLE CERTIFICATION LABEL
TRANSMISSION CODE DESIGNATION
E167469
The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration Regulations require that a Safety Compliance Certification Label be affixed to a vehicle and prescribe where the Safety Compliance Certification Label may be located. The Safety Compliance Certification Label shall be affixed to either the door hinge pillar, the door latch post, or the edge of the door near the door latch, next to the driver's seating position.
E167814
The transmission code is on the Safety Compliance Certification Label. The following table shows the transmission code along with the transmission description.
Description Six-speed automatic transmission (6F35). Six-speed automatic transmission (6F55).
Code W C
327
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
CAPACITIES AND SPECIFICATIONS - 1.5L ECOBOOSTTM
Capacities
WARNING: The air conditioning refrigerant system contains refrigerant under high pressure. Only qualified personnel should service the air conditioning refrigerant system. Opening the air conditioning refrigerant system can cause personal injury.
Item
Capacity
Engine oil (with oil filter).
4.3 qt (4.05 L)
Engine coolant.
10.9 qt (10.3 L)
Brake fluid.
Between MIN/MAX on brake fluid reservoir
Automatic transmission fluid.
9.0 qt (8.5 L) 1
Windshield washer fluid.
Fill as required
Fuel tank.
16.5 gal (62.5 L)
A/C refrigerant (U.S. and Canada).
18 oz (0.51 kg)
A/C refrigerant (Mexico).
20 oz (0.567 kg)
A/C refrigerant compressor oil.
5.24 fl oz (155 ml)
1 Approximate dry fill capacity. Actual amount could vary during fluid changes.
Specifications
Materials
Name
Specification
Motor oil (U.S.):
WSS-M2C945-B1
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-20 Premium Synthetic Blend Motor
Oil
XO-5W20-QSP
Motor oil (Canada): Motorcraft® SAE 5W-20 Super Premium Motor Oil CXO-5W20-LSP12
WSS-M2C945-B1
Motor oil (Mexico): Motorcraft® SAE 5W-20 Synthetic Motor Oil MXO-5W20-QSP
WSS-M2C945-B1
328
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
Name
Specification
Engine coolant (U.S. and Mexico): Motorcraft® Orange Prediluted Antifreeze/Coolant VC-3DIL-B
WSS-M97B44-D2
Engine coolant (Canada): Motorcraft® Orange Prediluted Antifreeze/Coolant CVC-3DIL-B
WSS-M97B44-D2
Brake fluid:
WSS-M6C65-A2
Motorcraft® DOT 4 Low Viscosity (LV) High Performance
Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid
PM-20
Automatic transmission fluid (U.S. and Mexico):
WSS-M2C938-A
Motorcraft® MERCON® LV Automatic Transmission Fluid MERCON® LV
XT-10-QLVC
Automatic transmission fluid (Canada):
WSS-M2C938-A
Motorcraft® MERCON® LV Automatic Transmission Fluid MERCON® LV
CXT-10-LV12
Windshield washer fluid (U.S. and Mexico): Motorcraft® Premium Windshield Wash Concentrate with Bitterant ZC-32-B2
WSS-M14P19-A
Windshield washer fluid (Canada):
WSS-M14P19-A
Motorcraft® Premium Quality Windshield Washer Fluid
CXC-37-(A, B, D, F)
A/C refrigerant (U.S.): R-1234yf Refrigerant YN-33-A
WSS-M17B21-A
A/C refrigerant (Canada): R-1234yf Refrigerant HS7Z-19B519-BA
WSS-M17B21-A
A/C refrigerant (Mexico): Motorcraft® R-134a Refrigerant MYN-19
WSH-M17B19-A
A/C refrigerant compressor oil (U.S. and Canada): Motorcraft® R-1234yf Refrigerant PAG Oil YN-35
WSS-M2C300-A2
A/C refrigerant compressor oil (Mexico): Motorcraft® PAG Refrigerant Compressor Oil YN-12-D
WSH-M1C231-B
329
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
Name
Multi-purpose grease: Motorcraft® Multi-Purpose Grease Spray XL-5-A
Lock cylinders (U.S.): Penetrating and Lock Lubricant XL-1
Lock cylinders (Canada): Penetrating Fluid CXC-51-A
Lock cylinders (Mexico): Penetrating and Lock Lubricant MXL-1
Specification ESB-M1C93-B -
If you use oil and fluids that do not meet the defined specification and viscosity grade, this could lead to:
· Component damage not covered by the vehicle warranty.
· Longer engine cranking periods.
· Increased emission levels.
· Reduced engine performance.
· Reduced fuel economy.
· Degraded brake performance.
We recommend Motorcraft® motor oil for your vehicle. If Motorcraft® oil is not available, use motor oils of the recommended viscosity grade that meet API SN requirements and display the API Certification Mark for gasoline engines. Do not use oil labeled with API SN service category unless the label also displays the API certification mark.
E142732
An oil that displays this symbol conforms to current engine, emission system and fuel economy performance standards of ILSAC.
Do not use supplemental engine oil additives because they are unnecessary and could lead to engine damage not covered by your vehicle warranty.
330
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
Note: We recommend using DOT 4 Low Viscosity (LV) High Performance Brake Fluid or equivalent meeting WSS-M6C65-A2. Use of any fluid other than the recommended fluid could cause degraded brake performance and not meet our performance standards. Keep brake fluid clean and dry. Contamination with dirt, water, petroleum products or other materials could result in brake system damage and possible failure.
Materials Engine Oil - SAE 0W-20
Name
Note: Only use MERCON® LV transmission fluid for automatic transmissions that require MERCON® LV transmission fluid. The use of any other fluid could cause transmission damage.
Alternative Engine Oil for Extremely Cold Climates
To improve engine cold start performance, we recommend that you use the following alternative engine oil in extremely cold climates, where the ambient temperature reaches -22°F (-30°C) or below.
Specification
WSS-M2C947-B1
E240522
CAPACITIES AND SPECIFICATIONS - 2.0L ECOBOOSTTM
Capacities
WARNING: The air conditioning refrigerant system contains refrigerant under high pressure. Only qualified personnel should service the air conditioning refrigerant system. Opening the air conditioning refrigerant system can cause personal injury.
331
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
Item
Capacity
Engine oil (with oil filter).
5.7 qt (5.4 L)
Engine coolant.
8.5 qt (8 L)
Brake fluid.
Between MIN/MAX on brake fluid reservoir
Rear differential fluid (All Wheel Drive).
2.4 pt (1.15 L)
Power Transfer Unit (PTU) fluid (All Wheel Drive).
11.8 fl oz (0.35 L)
Automatic transmission fluid.
9.0 qt (8.5 L) 1
Windshield washer fluid.
Fill as required
Fuel tank (Front Wheel Drive).
16.5 gal (62.5 L)
Fuel tank (All Wheel Drive).
18 gal (68.1 L)
A/C refrigerant (U.S. and Canada).
22 oz (0.62 kg)
A/C refrigerant (Mexico).
24 oz (0.68 kg)
A/C refrigerant compressor oil.
5.24 fl oz (155 ml)
1 Approximate dry fill capacity. Actual amount could vary during fluid changes.
Specifications
Materials
Name
Specification
Motor oil (U.S.):
WSS-M2C946-B1
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 Premium Synthetic Blend Motor
Oil
XO-5W30-QSP
Motor oil (Canada): Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 Super Premium Motor Oil CXO-5W30-LSP12
WSS-M2C946-B1
Motor oil (Mexico): Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 Synthetic Motor Oil MXO-5W30-QSP
WSS-M2C946-B1
Engine coolant (U.S. and Mexico): Motorcraft® Orange Prediluted Antifreeze/Coolant VC-3DIL-B
WSS-M97B44-D2
332
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
Name
Specification
Engine coolant (Canada): Motorcraft® Orange Prediluted Antifreeze/Coolant CVC-3DIL-B
WSS-M97B44-D2
Brake fluid:
WSS-M6C65-A2
Motorcraft® DOT 4 Low Viscosity (LV) High Performance
Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid
PM-20
Rear differential (All Wheel Drive) fluid:
WSP-M2C197-A
Motorcraft® SAE 80W-90 Premium Rear Axle Lubricant
XY-80W90-QL
Power Transfer Unit (PTU) fluid (All Wheel Drive):
WSL-M2C192-A
Motorcraft® SAE 75W-140 Synthetic Rear Axle Lubricant
XY-75W140-QL
Automatic transmission fluid (U.S. and Mexico):
WSS-M2C938-A
Motorcraft® MERCON® LV Automatic Transmission Fluid MERCON® LV
XT-10-QLVC
Automatic transmission fluid (Canada):
WSS-M2C938-A
Motorcraft® MERCON® LV Automatic Transmission Fluid MERCON® LV
CXT-10-LV12
Windshield washer fluid (U.S. and Mexico): Motorcraft® Premium Windshield Wash Concentrate with Bitterant ZC-32-B2
WSS-M14P19-A
Windshield washer fluid (Canada):
WSS-M14P19-A
Motorcraft® Premium Quality Windshield Washer Fluid
CXC-37-(A, B, D, F)
A/C refrigerant (U.S.): R-1234yf Refrigerant YN-33-A
WSS-M17B21-A
A/C refrigerant (Canada): R-1234yf Refrigerant HS7Z-19B519-BA
WSS-M17B21-A
A/C refrigerant (Mexico): Motorcraft® R-134a Refrigerant MYN-19
WSH-M17B19-A
A/C refrigerant compressor oil (U.S. and Canada): Motorcraft® R-1234yf Refrigerant PAG Oil YN-35
WSS-M2C300-A2
333
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
Name
A/C refrigerant compressor oil (Mexico): Motorcraft® PAG Refrigerant Compressor Oil YN-12-D
Multi-purpose grease: Motorcraft® Multi-Purpose Grease Spray XL-5-A
Lock cylinders (U.S.): Penetrating and Lock Lubricant XL-1
Lock cylinders (Canada): Penetrating Fluid CXC-51-A
Lock cylinders (Mexico): Penetrating and Lock Lubricant MXL-1
Specification WSH-M1C231-B ESB-M1C93-B -
If you use oil and fluids that do not meet the defined specification and viscosity grade, this could lead to:
· Component damage not covered by the vehicle warranty.
· Longer engine cranking periods.
· Increased emission levels.
· Reduced engine performance.
· Reduced fuel economy.
· Degraded brake performance.
We recommend Motorcraft® motor oil for your vehicle. If Motorcraft® oil is not available, use motor oils of the recommended viscosity grade that meet API SN requirements and display the API Certification Mark for gasoline engines. Do not use oil labeled with API SN service category unless the label also displays the API certification mark.
E142732
An oil that displays this symbol conforms to current engine, emission system and fuel economy performance standards of ILSAC.
Do not use supplemental engine oil additives because they are unnecessary and could lead to engine damage not covered by your vehicle warranty.
334
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
Note: We recommend using DOT 4 Low Viscosity (LV) High Performance Brake Fluid or equivalent meeting WSS-M6C65-A2. Use of any fluid other than the recommended fluid could cause degraded brake performance and not meet our performance standards. Keep brake fluid clean and dry. Contamination with dirt, water, petroleum products or other materials could result in brake system damage and possible failure.
Materials Engine Oil - SAE 0W-30
Name
Note: Only use MERCON® LV transmission fluid for automatic transmissions that require MERCON® LV transmission fluid. The use of any other fluid could cause transmission damage.
Alternative Engine Oil for Extremely Cold Climates
To improve engine cold start performance, we recommend that you use the following alternative engine oil in extremely cold climates, where the ambient temperature reaches -22°F (-30°C) or below.
Specification
WSS-M2C953-A1
E240523
CAPACITIES AND SPECIFICATIONS - 2.5L
Capacities
WARNING: The air conditioning refrigerant system contains refrigerant under high pressure. Only qualified personnel should service the air conditioning refrigerant system. Opening the air conditioning refrigerant system can cause personal injury.
335
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
Item
Capacity
Engine oil (with oil filter).
5.7 qt (5.4 L)
Engine coolant.
7.8 qt (7.4 L)
Brake fluid.
Between MIN/MAX on brake fluid reservoir
Automatic transmission fluid.
9.0 qt (8.5 L) 1
Windshield washer fluid.
Fill as required
Fuel tank.
16.5 gal (62.5 L)
A/C refrigerant (U.S. and Canada).
22 oz (0.62 kg)
A/C refrigerant (Mexico).
24 oz (0.68 kg)
A/C refrigerant compressor oil.
3.21 fl oz (95 ml)
1 Approximate dry fill capacity. Actual amount could vary during fluid changes.
Specifications
Materials
Name
Specification
Motor oil (U.S.):
WSS-M2C945-B1
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-20 Premium Synthetic Blend Motor
Oil
XO-5W20-QSP
Motor oil (Canada): Motorcraft® SAE 5W-20 Super Premium Motor Oil CXO-5W20-LSP12
WSS-M2C945-B1
Motor oil (Mexico): Motorcraft® SAE 5W-20 Synthetic Motor Oil MXO-5W20-QSP
WSS-M2C945-B1
Engine coolant (U.S. and Mexico): Motorcraft® Orange Prediluted Antifreeze/Coolant VC-3DIL-B
Engine coolant (Canada): Motorcraft® Orange Prediluted Antifreeze/Coolant CVC-3DIL-B
Brake fluid:
WSS-M97B44-D2 WSS-M97B44-D2 WSS-M6C65-A2
336
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
Name
Specification
Motorcraft® DOT 4 Low Viscosity (LV) High Performance Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid PM-20
Rear differential (All Wheel Drive) fluid:
WSP-M2C197-A
Motorcraft® SAE 80W-90 Premium Rear Axle Lubricant
XY-80W90-QL
Power Transfer Unit (PTU) fluid (All Wheel Drive):
WSL-M2C192-A
Motorcraft® SAE 75W-140 Synthetic Rear Axle Lubricant
XY-75W140-QL
Automatic transmission fluid (U.S. and Mexico):
WSS-M2C938-A
Motorcraft® MERCON® LV Automatic Transmission Fluid MERCON® LV
XT-10-QLVC
Automatic transmission fluid (Canada):
WSS-M2C938-A
Motorcraft® MERCON® LV Automatic Transmission Fluid MERCON® LV
CXT-10-LV12
Windshield washer fluid (U.S. and Mexico): Motorcraft® Premium Windshield Wash Concentrate with Bitterant ZC-32-B2
WSS-M14P19-A
Windshield washer fluid (Canada):
WSS-M14P19-A
Motorcraft® Premium Quality Windshield Washer Fluid
CXC-37-(A, B, D, F)
A/C refrigerant (U.S.): R-1234yf Refrigerant YN-33-A
WSS-M17B21-A
A/C refrigerant (Canada): R-1234yf Refrigerant HS7Z-19B519-BA
WSS-M17B21-A
A/C refrigerant (Mexico): Motorcraft® R-134a Refrigerant MYN-19
WSH-M17B19-A
A/C refrigerant compressor oil (U.S. and Canada): Motorcraft® R-1234yf Refrigerant PAG Oil YN-35
WSS-M2C300-A2
A/C refrigerant compressor oil (Mexico): Motorcraft® PAG Refrigerant Compressor Oil YN-12-D
WSH-M1C231-B
337
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
Name
Multi-purpose grease: Motorcraft® Multi-Purpose Grease Spray XL-5-A
Lock cylinders (U.S.): Penetrating and Lock Lubricant XL-1
Lock cylinders (Canada): Penetrating Fluid CXC-51-A
Lock cylinders (Mexico): Penetrating and Lock Lubricant MXL-1
Specification ESB-M1C93-B -
If you use oil and fluids that do not meet the defined specification and viscosity grade, this could lead to:
· Component damage which is not covered by the vehicle warranty.
· Longer engine cranking periods.
· Increased emission levels.
· Reduced engine performance.
· Reduced fuel economy.
· Degraded brake performance.
We recommend Motorcraft® motor oil for your vehicle. If Motorcraft® oil is not available, use motor oils of the recommended viscosity grade that meet API SN requirements and display the API Certification Mark for gasoline engines. Do not use oil labeled with API SN service category unless the label also displays the API certification mark.
E142732
An oil that displays this symbol conforms to current engine, emission system and fuel economy performance standards of ILSAC.
Do not use supplemental engine oil additives because they are unnecessary and could lead to engine damage that may not be covered by your vehicle warranty.
338
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
Note: We recommend using DOT 4 Low Viscosity (LV) High Performance Brake Fluid or equivalent meeting WSS-M6C65-A2. Use of any fluid other than the recommended fluid could cause degraded brake performance and not meet our performance standards. Keep brake fluid clean and dry. Contamination with dirt, water, petroleum products or other materials could result in brake system damage and possible failure.
Materials Engine Oil - SAE 0W-20
Name
Note: Only use MERCON® LV transmission fluid for automatic transmissions that require MERCON® LV transmission fluid. The use of any other fluid could cause transmission damage.
Alternative Engine Oil for Extremely Cold Climates
To improve engine cold start performance, we recommend that you use the following alternative engine oil in extremely cold climates, where the ambient temperature reaches -22°F (-30°C) or below.
Specification
WSS-M2C947-B1
E240522
CAPACITIES AND SPECIFICATIONS - 2.7L ECOBOOSTTM
Capacities
WARNING: The air conditioning refrigerant system contains refrigerant under high pressure. Only qualified personnel should service the air conditioning refrigerant system. Opening the air conditioning refrigerant system can cause personal injury.
339
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
Item
Capacity
Engine oil (with oil filter).
6.0 qt (5.7 L)
Engine coolant.
11.8 qt (11.2 L)
Brake fluid.
Between MIN/MAX on brake fluid reservoir
Rear differential fluid (All Wheel Drive).
16.020.8 fl oz (473615 ml)
Power Transfer Unit fluid (All Wheel Drive).
15.2 fl oz (450 ml) 1
Automatic transmission fluid.
11.6 qt (11 L) 2
Windshield washer fluid.
Fill as required
Fuel tank.
18 gal (68.1 L)
A/C refrigerant (U.S. and Canada).
18 oz (0.51 kg)
A/C refrigerant (Mexico).
20 oz (0.567 kg)
A/C refrigerant compressor oil.
5.24 fl oz (155 ml)
1 Contact an authorized dealer for fluid level checking and filling. 2 Approximate dry fill capacity. Actual amount could vary during fluid changes.
Specifications
Materials
Name
Specification
Motor oil (U.S.):
WSS-M2C946-B1
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 Premium Synthetic Blend Motor
Oil
XO-5W30-QSP
Motor oil (Canada): Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 Super Premium Motor Oil CXO-5W30-LSP12
WSS-M2C946-B1
Motor oil (Mexico): Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 Synthetic Motor Oil MXO-5W30-QSP
Engine coolant (U.S. and Mexico): Motorcraft® Orange Prediluted Antifreeze/Coolant VC-3DIL-B
Engine coolant (Canada):
WSS-M2C946-B1 WSS-M97B44-D2 WSS-M97B44-D2
340
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
Name
Specification
Motorcraft® Orange Prediluted Antifreeze/Coolant CVC-3DIL-B
Brake fluid:
WSS-M6C65-A2
Motorcraft® DOT 4 Low Viscosity (LV) High Performance
Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid
PM-20
Rear differential fluid (All Wheel Drive) (U.S. and Mexico): WSP-M2C197-A Motorcraft® SAE 80W-90 Premium Rear Axle Lubricant XY-80W90-QL
Rear differential fluid (All Wheel Drive) (Canada):
WSP-M2C197-A
Motorcraft® SAE 80W-90 Premium Rear Axle Lubricant
CXY-80W90-1L
Power Transfer Unit fluid (All Wheel Drive) (U.S. and WSL-M2C192-A Mexico): Motorcraft® SAE 75W-140 Synthetic Rear Axle Lubricant XY-75W140-QL
Power Transfer Unit fluid (All Wheel Drive) (Canada): WSL-M2C192-A Motorcraft® SAE 75W-140 Synthetic Rear Axle Lubricant CXY-75W140-1L
Automatic transmission fluid (U.S. and Mexico):
WSS-M2C938-A
Motorcraft® MERCON® LV Automatic Transmission Fluid MERCON® LV
XT-10-QLVC
Automatic transmission fluid (Canada):
WSS-M2C938-A
Motorcraft® MERCON® LV Automatic Transmission Fluid MERCON® LV
CXT-10-LV12
Windshield washer fluid (U.S. and Mexico): Motorcraft® Premium Windshield Wash Concentrate with Bitterant ZC-32-B2
WSS-M14P19-A
Windshield washer fluid (Canada):
WSS-M14P19-A
Motorcraft® Premium Quality Windshield Washer Fluid
CXC-37-(A, B, D, F)
A/C refrigerant (U.S.): R-1234yf Refrigerant YN-33-A
WSS-M17B21-A
A/C refrigerant (Canada): R-1234yf Refrigerant HS7Z-19B519-BA
WSS-M17B21-A
341
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
Name
Specification
A/C refrigerant (Mexico): Motorcraft® R-134a Refrigerant MYN-19
WSH-M17B19-A
A/C refrigerant compressor oil (U.S. and Canada): Motorcraft® R-1234yf Refrigerant PAG Oil YN-35
WSS-M2C300-A2
A/C refrigerant compressor oil (Mexico): Motorcraft® PAG Refrigerant Compressor Oil YN-12-D
WSH-M1C231-B
Transmission, parking brake linkage and pivots and brake ESA-M1C75-B pedal shift grease: Premium Long-Life Grease XG-1-E1
Multi-purpose grease: Motorcraft® Multi-Purpose Grease Spray XL-5-A
ESB-M1C93-B
Lock cylinders (U.S.):
-
Penetrating and Lock Lubricant
XL-1
Lock cylinders (Canada):
-
Penetrating Fluid
CXC-51-A
Lock cylinders (Mexico):
-
Penetrating and Lock Lubricant
MXL-1
If you use oil and fluids that do not meet the defined specification and viscosity grade, this could lead to:
· Component damage not covered by the vehicle warranty.
· Longer engine cranking periods.
· Increased emission levels.
· Reduced engine performance.
· Reduced fuel economy.
· Degraded brake performance.
We recommend Motorcraft® motor oil for your vehicle. If Motorcraft® oil is not available, use motor oils of the recommended viscosity grade that meet API SN requirements and display the API Certification Mark for gasoline engines. Do not use oil labeled with API SN service category unless the label also displays the API certification mark.
342
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
E142732
An oil that displays this symbol conforms to current engine, emission system and fuel economy performance standards of ILSAC.
Do not use supplemental engine oil additives because they are unnecessary and could lead to engine damage not covered by your vehicle warranty.
Materials Engine Oil - SAE 0W-30
Name
Note: We recommend using DOT 4 Low Viscosity (LV) High Performance Brake Fluid or equivalent meeting WSS-M6C65-A2. Use of any fluid other than the recommended fluid could cause degraded brake performance and not meet our performance standards. Keep brake fluid clean and dry. Contamination with dirt, water, petroleum products or other materials could result in brake system damage and possible failure.
Note: Only use MERCON® LV transmission fluid for automatic transmissions that require MERCON® LV transmission fluid.
Note: The use of any other fluid may cause transmission damage.
Alternative Engine Oil for Extremely Cold Climates
To improve engine cold start performance, we recommend that you use the following alternative engine oil in extremely cold climates, where the ambient temperature reaches -22°F (-30°C) or below.
Specification
WSS-M2C953-A1
E240523
343
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
BULB SPECIFICATION CHART
Replacement bulbs are specified in the chart below. Headlamp bulbs must be marked with an authorized "D.O.T." for
North America to make sure they have the proper lamp performance, light brightness, light pattern, and safe visibility. The correct bulbs will not damage the lamp assembly or void the lamp assembly warranty and will provide quality bulb illumination time.
Function
Trade name
Headlamp high beam (Halogen)1 Headlamp low beam (Halogen)1 Front Side marker lamp1 Front Direction indicator1 Front Fog lamp1 Tail and brake lamp - high series1 Tail and brake lamp - low series1 Reverse lamp Rear Direction indicator - high series1 Rear Direction indicator - low series1 Rear Side marker lamp1 License plate lamp
H9 H11LL LED PWY24W
H8 LED LED 921 LED LED LED W5W
Trunk lamp1
W5W or LED2
High-mount brake lamp1
LED
Side repeater lamp1
LED
Interior lamp1
LED
1 To replace these bulbs, see your authorized dealer. 2 If equipped.
To replace all instrument panel bulbs, see your authorized dealer.
344
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Audio System
GENERAL INFORMATION
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, crash and injury. We strongly recommend that you use extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle. We recommend against the use of any hand-held device while driving and encourage the use of voice-operated systems when possible. Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the use of electronic devices while driving.
Radio Frequencies and Reception Factors
AM and FM frequencies are established by the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) and the Canadian Radio and Telecommunications Commission (CRTC). Those frequencies are:
· AM: 530-1710 kHz
· FM: 87.9-107.9 MHz
Note: Listening to loud audio for long periods of time could damage your hearing.
Distance and strength Terrain Station overload
Radio Reception Factors
The further you travel from an AM or FM station, the weaker the signal and the weaker the reception.
Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freeway overpasses, parking garages, dense tree foliage and thunderstorms can interfere with the reception.
When you pass a ground-based broadcast repeating tower, a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and result in the audio system muting.
CD and CD Player Information
Note: CD units play commercially pressed 4.7 in (12 cm) audio compact discs only. Due to technical incompatibility, certain recordable and re-recordable compact discs may not function correctly when used in the vehicle's CD player.
Note: Do not insert CDs with homemade paper (adhesive) labels into the CD player as the label may peel and cause the CD to become jammed. You should use a permanent felt tip marker rather than adhesive labels on your homemade CDs. Ballpoint pens may damage CDs. Ask an authorized dealer for more information.
Note: Do not use any irregularly shaped discs or discs with a scratch protection film attached.
345
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Audio System
Always handle discs by their edges only. Clean the disc with an approved CD cleaner only. Wipe it from the center of the disc toward the edge. Do not clean in a circular motion.
Do not expose discs to direct sunlight or heat sources for extended periods.
MP3 and WMA Track and Folder Structure
Audio systems capable of recognizing and playing MP3 and WMA individual tracks and folder structures work as follows:
· There are two different modes for MP3 and WMA disc playback: MP3 and WMA track mode (system default) and MP3 and WMA folder mode.
· MP3 and WMA track mode ignores any folder structure on the MP3 and WMA disc. The player numbers each MP3 and WMA track on the disc (noted by the MP3 or WMA file extension) from T001 to a maximum of T255. The maximum number of playable MP3 and WMA files may be less depending on the structure of the CD and exact model of radio present.
· MP3 and WMA folder mode represents a folder structure consisting of one level of folders. The CD player numbers all MP3 and WMA tracks on the disc (noted by the MP3 or WMA file extension) and all folders containing MP3 and WMA files, from F001 (folder) T001 (track) to F253 T255.
· Creating discs with only one level of folders helps with navigation through the disc files.
If you are burning your own MP3 and WMA discs, it is important to understand how the system reads the structures you create. While various files may be present (files with extensions other than MP3 and WMA), only files with the MP3 and WMA
extension are played; other files are ignored by the system. This enables you to use the same MP3 and WMA disc for a variety of tasks on your work computer, home computer and your in-vehicle system. In track mode, the system displays and plays the structure as if it were only one level deep (all MP3 and WMA files play, regardless of being in a specific folder). In folder mode, the system only plays the MP3 and WMA files in the current folder.
AUDIO UNIT - VEHICLES WITH: TOUCHSCREEN DISPLAY, VEHICLES WITHOUT: SONY AUDIO SYSTEM
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, crash and injury. We strongly recommend that you use extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle. We recommend against the use of any hand-held device while driving and encourage the use of voice-operated systems when possible. Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the use of electronic devices while driving.
E287571
Note: Depending on your vehicle option package, the controls may look different from what you see here.
346
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Audio System
Note: Some features, such as satellite radio, may not be available in your location. Check with an authorized dealer.
Note: The touchscreen system controls most of the audio features.
Adjusting the Volume
In satellite radio mode, turn to find the previous or next available satellite radio station.
Playing or Pausing Media
Press and release the button to either play or pause the audio.
Switching the Audio Unit On and Off
Press and release the button.
Using Seek, Fast Forward and Reverse
E265373
Turn to adjust the volume. Changing Radio Stations
In radio mode, select a frequency band and press and release either button. The system stops at the first station it finds in that direction.
In satellite radio mode, press and release to select the next or previous satellite radio station. If you select a specific category, such as jazz, rock or news, press to find the next or previous station in that category.
AUDIO UNIT - VEHICLES WITH: SONY AUDIO SYSTEM/ TOUCHSCREEN DISPLAY
E265696
In radio mode, turn to search through the radio frequency band.
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, crash and injury. We strongly recommend that you use extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off the road. Your
347
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Audio System
primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle. We recommend against the use of any hand-held device while driving and encourage the use of voice-operated systems when possible. Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the use of electronic devices while driving.
Note: Some features, such as satellite radio, may not be available in your location. Check with an authorized dealer.
Note: The touchscreen system controls most of the audio features. See your SYNC information.
Accessing the Sound Settings
E265271
Press and release to access settings for Treble, Midrange, Bass, Fade and Balance.
Adjusting the Volume
Changing Radio Stations
E265272
In radio mode, press and release + or - to search through the radio frequency band. In satellite radio mode, press and release + or - to find the previous or next available satellite radio station. Ejecting the CD
Press and release to eject a CD.
E265032
Inserting a CD Insert a CD into the CD slot. Switching the Audio Unit On and Off
Press and release the button.
Using Seek, Fast Forward and Reverse
E265373
Turn to adjust the volume.
In radio mode, select a frequency band and press and release either button. The system stops at the first station it finds in that direction.
In CD mode, press and release to select the next or previous track. Press and hold to move quickly forward or backward through the current track.
348
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Audio System
In satellite radio mode, press and release to select the next or previous satellite radio station. If you select a specific category (such as jazz, rock or news), press to find the next or previous station in the category you select.
AUDIO UNIT - VEHICLES WITH: SYNC
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, crash and injury. We strongly recommend that you use extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle. We recommend against the use of any hand-held device while driving and encourage the use of voice-operated systems when possible. Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the use of electronic devices while driving.
Note: Some features, such as satellite radio, may not be available in your location. Check with an authorized dealer.
Accessing the Media Source Menu
E265035
Press and release to open the media source menu.
You can press this multiple times to change to a SYNC-Media device or scroll through the media sources using the arrow buttons. Press OK to select a source.
Accessing the Clock Settings
Press and release to access the
clock setting.
E265036
Use the center arrow controls to change the hours and minutes.
Accessing the Menu
Press and release to access different audio system features.
E265038
Accessing the Phone Features
Press and release to access the phone features of the SYNC E265037 system. See your SYNC information.
Accessing the Sound Settings
E142611
Press and release to access settings for Treble, Midrange, Bass, Fade and Balance.
Use the up and down arrow buttons to select the various settings. Press OK to confirm a selection, press the left and right arrow buttons to change the settings. Press OK to set or press MENU to exit. You can set sound settings for each audio source independently.
Adjusting the Volume
E265373
349
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Audio System
Turn to adjust the volume. Changing Radio Stations
Switching the Audio Unit On and Off
Press and release the button.
E265696
In radio mode, turn to search through the radio frequency band.
In satellite radio mode, turn to find the previous or next available satellite radio station.
Listening to the Radio
E265033
Press and release to listen to the radio or change radio stations.
Listening to Satellite Radio (If
Equipped)
E265034
Press and release to listen to satellite radio.
Muting the Audio (If Equipped)
Press and release to mute the
playing audio.
E265043
Playing or Pausing Media
Press and release to either play or pause the audio.
Using a Cell Phone
Press and release to either answer an incoming phone call or to make a phone call.
Press and hold to end a phone call.
E265040
Using the Display Control
Use the up and down arrow buttons to select the various settings. When you make your selection, press the left and right arrow buttons to change the settings.
Press and release to confirm a selection.
E265041
Press and release the function buttons below the display to select different functions of the audio system depending on which mode you are in (such as Radio mode or CD mode).
Using the Number Block
In radio mode, store and recall your favorite radio stations. To store a favorite station press and hold until the sound returns. In phone mode, enter a phone number.
350
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Audio System
Using Seek, Fast Forward and Reverse
In radio mode, select a frequency band and press and release either button. The system stops at the first station it finds in that direction.
In satellite radio mode, press and release to select the next or previous satellite radio station. If you select a specific category (such as jazz, rock or news), press to find the next or previous station in the category you select.
Menu Structure
Press MENU.
Press the up and down arrow buttons to scroll through the options.
Press the right arrow to enter a menu. Press the left arrow to exit a menu.
Press OK to confirm a selection.
Note: Depending on your system, some options may appear slightly different.
Radio
Manual Tune
Use the left and right arrows to go up or down the frequency band.
Scan
Select for a brief sampling of all available channels.
AST
Select to store the six strongest local stations on the AMAST and FM-AST frequency bands.
Set Category for Seek/Scan Select to have the system search by certain music categories (such as Rock, Pop or Country).
RDS Text Display
Select to view additional broadcast data, if available. This feature defaults to off. RBDS (Radio Broadcast Data System) must be on for you to set a category.
351
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Audio System
Satellite Radio
Scan
Select for a brief sampling of all available channels.
Electronic Serial Number (ESN)
Select to view your satellite radio ESN. You will need this number when communicating with your satellite radio provider to activate, modify or track your account.
Check Channel Guide
Select to view available satellite radio channels. Press OK to open a list of options that follow for this channel. Once you skip or lock a channel, you can only access it by pressing Direct Tune and entering the channel number. Locking or unlocking a channel requires your PIN.
Set Category for Seek/Scan Select to view channel categories (such as Pop, Rock or News). If you select a category, seek and scan functions only stop on channels in that category.
Alerts
Select to switch alerts on or off for songs, artists or teams. The system alerts you when the selection is playing on another channel. Save up to 20 alerts.
Unlock All Stations
Use your PIN to unlock previously locked stations.
Skip No Stations
Use to restore any channels you previously skipped.
Parental Lockout
Select to create a PIN, which allows you to lock or unlock channels. Your initial PIN is 1234.
Speed Compensated Volume
Sound
Occupancy Mode
DSP
Audio Settings
Automatically adjusts the volume to compensate for speed and wind noise. You can set the system between 0 and +7.
Select to adjust settings for Treble, Midrange, Bass, Fade or Balance.
Select to optimize sound quality for the chosen seating position.
Choose between the stereo modes.
352
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Audio System
Set Date and Time 24 Hour
Clock Settings
Select to set the time and calendar date.
Select to view clock time in a 12-hour mode or 24-hour mode.
Brightness Language
Temp. Setting
Display Settings
Select to change display brightness.
Select to display the language in English, French or Spanish.
Select to display the outside temperature in Fahrenheit or Celsius.
DIGITAL RADIO
Note: HD Radio broadcasts are not available in all markets.
HD Radio technology is the digital evolution of analog AM/FM radio. Your system has a special receiver that allows it to receive digital broadcasts, where available, in addition to the analog broadcasts, it already receives. Digital broadcasts provide a better sound quality than analog broadcasts with free, crystal-clear audio and no static or distortion. For more information, and a guide to available stations and programming, please visit www.hdradio.com.
When HD Radio is on and you tune to a station broadcasting HD Radio technology, you may notice the HD Radio logo on your screen. When this logo is available, you may also see Title and Artist fields on-screen.
The multicast indicator appears in FM mode, only, if the current station is broadcasting multiple digital broadcasts. The highlighted numbers signify available digital channels where new or different content is available. HD1 signifies the main programming status and is available in analog and digital broadcasts. Other multicast stations, HD2 through HD7, are only available digitally.
When HD Radio broadcasts are active, you can access the following functions:
· Memory presets allow you to save an active channel as a memory preset. Touch and hold a memory preset slot until the sound returns. There is a brief mute while the radio saves the station. Sound returns when finished. When switching to an HD2 or HD3 memory preset, the sound mutes before the digital audio plays, because the system has to reacquire the digital signal.
Note: As with any saved radio station, you cannot access the saved station if your vehicle is outside the station's reception area.
353
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Audio System
HD Radio Reception and Station Troubleshooting
Reception area Station blending
Potential reception issues
If you are listening to a multicast station and you are on the fringe of the reception area, the station may mute due to weak signal strength.
If you are listening to HD1, the system switches back to the analog broadcast until the digital broadcast is available again. However, if you are listening to any of the possible HD2-HD7 multicast channels, the station mutes and stays muted unless it is able to connect to the digital signal again.
When the system first receives a station, aside from HD2HD7 multicast stations, it first plays the station in the analog version. Once the receiver verifies the station is an HD Radio station, it shifts to the digital version. Depending on the station quality, you may hear a slight sound change when the station changes from analog to digital. Blending is the shift from analog to digital sound or digital back to analog sound.
In order to provide the best possible experience, use the contact form to report any station issues found while listening to a station broadcasting with HD Radio technology. Independent entities own and operate each station. These stations are responsible for the accuracy of all audio streams and data fields.
354
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Audio System
Potential station issues
Issues
Cause
Action
Echo, stutter, skip or repeat in audio. Increase or decrease in audio volume.
This is poor time alignment by the radio broadcaster.
No action required. This is a broadcast issue.
Sound fading or blending in The radio is shifting between No action required. The
and out.
analog and digital audio. reception issue may clear up
as you continue to drive.
There is an audio mute
The digital multicast is not No action required. This is
delay when selecting HD2 or available until the HD Radio normal behavior. Wait until
HD3, multicast preset or broadcast is decoded. Once the audio is available.
Direct Tune.
decoded, the audio is avail-
able.
Cannot access HD2 or HD3 multicast channel when recalling a preset or from a direct tune.
The previously stored multicast preset or direct tune is not available in your current reception area.
No action required. The station is not available in your current location.
Text information does not match currently playing audio.
Data service issue by the radio broadcaster.
Fill out the station issue form at website listed
below. 1
There is no text information Data service issue by the shown for currently selected radio broadcaster. frequency.
1 http://hdradio.com/stations/feedback
Fill out the station issue form at website listed
below.1
HD Radio Technology manufactured under license from iBiquity Digital Corporation and foreign patents. HD Radio and the HD and HD Radio logos are proprietary trademarks of DTS Ford Motor Company and DTS are not responsible for the content sent using HD Radio technology. Content may be changed, added or deleted at any time at the station owner's discretion.
SATELLITE RADIO (IF EQUIPPED)
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio broadcasts a variety of music, news, sports, weather, traffic and entertainment satellite radio channels. For more information and a complete list of SiriusXM satellite radio channels, visit www.siriusxm.com in the United States, www.siriusxm.ca in Canada, or call SiriusXM at 1-888-539-7474.
355
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Audio System
Note: This receiver includes the eCos real-time operating system. eCos is published under the eCos License.
Satellite Radio Reception Factors
Potential satellite radio reception issues
Antenna obstructions
For optimal reception performance, keep the antenna clear of snow and ice build-up and keep luggage and other material as far away from the antenna as possible.
Terrain
Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freeway overpasses, parking garages, dense tree foliage and thunderstorms can interfere with your reception.
Station overload
When you pass a ground-based broadcast-repeating tower, a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and the audio system may mute.
Satellite radio signal interfer- Your display may show ACQUIRING . . . to indicate the
ence
interference and the audio system may mute.
SiriusXM Satellite Radio Service Note: SiriusXM reserves the unrestricted right to change, rearrange, add or delete programming including canceling, moving or adding particular channels, and its prices, at any time, with or without notice to you. Ford Motor Company shall not be responsible for any such programming changes.
E208625
SiriusXM satellite radio is a subscription-based satellite radio service that broadcasts a variety of music, sports, news, weather, traffic and entertainment programming. Your factory-installed SiriusXM satellite radio system includes hardware and a limited subscription term, which begins on the date of sale or lease of your vehicle. See an authorized dealer for availability.
For more information on extended subscription terms (a service fee is required), the online media player and a complete list of SiriusXM satellite radio channels, and other features, please visit www.siriusxm.com in the United States, www.siriusxm.ca in Canada, or call SiriusXM at 1-888-539-7474.
Satellite Radio Electronic Serial Number (ESN)
You need your ESN to activate, modify or track your satellite radio account. When in satellite radio mode, tune to channel 0.
356
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Audio System
Troubleshooting
Message Acquiring...
Satellite antenna fault SIRIUS system failure
Invalid Channel Unsubscribed Channel
No Signal
Updating...
Questions? Call 1-888-539-7474 None found Check Channel Guide Subscription Updated
Condition
Action
Radio requires more than two seconds to produce audio for the selected channel.
No action required. This message should disappear shortly.
There is an internal module or system failure present.
If this message does not clear shortly, or with an ignition key cycle, your receiver may have a fault. See an authorized dealer for service.
The channel is no longer available.
Tune to another channel or choose another preset.
Your subscription does not include this channel.
Contact SiriusXM at 1-888539-7474 to subscribe to the channel, or tune to another channel.
The signal is lost from the SiriusXM satellite or SiriusXM tower to your vehicle antenna.
The signal is blocked. When you move into an open area, the signal should return.
Update of channel programming in progress.
No action required. The process may take up to three minutes.
Your satellite service is no longer available.
Contact SiriusXM at 1-888539-7474 to resolve subscription issues.
All the channels in the
Use the channel guide to
selected category are either turn off the Lock or Skip
skipped or locked.
function on that station.
SiriusXM has updated the No action required. channels available for your vehicle.
357
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Audio System
USB PORT
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, crash and injury. We strongly recommend that you use extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle. We recommend against the use of any hand-held device while driving and encourage the use of voice-operated systems when possible. Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the use of electronic devices while driving.
primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle. We recommend against the use of any hand-held device while driving and encourage the use of voice-operated systems when possible. Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the use of electronic devices while driving.
The media hub may be on the instrument panel or center console.
The media hub may contain one or more of the following inputs:
See USB Port (page 358).
E201595
The USB port allows you to plug in media playing devices, memory sticks and charge devices, if supported.
MEDIA HUB
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, crash and injury. We strongly recommend that you use extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off the road. Your
358
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
SYNCTM
GENERAL INFORMATION
E198355
SYNC is an in-vehicle communications system that works with your Bluetooth-enabled cellular phone and portable media player.
This allows you to: · Make and receive calls. · Access and play music from your
portable music player. · Use 911 Assist and applications, via
SYNC Applink .*
· Access phonebook contacts and music using voice commands.
· Stream music from your connected phone.
· Text message.
· Use the advanced voice recognition system.
· Charge your USB device (if your device supports this).
*These features are not available in all markets and may require activation. Available AppLink enabled apps vary by market.
Make sure that you review your device's manual before using it with SYNC.
Support
The SYNC support team is available to help you with any questions you cannot answer on your own.
Monday-Saturday, 8:30am-9:00pm EST.
359
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
SYNCTM
Sunday, 10:30am-7:30pm EST.
In the United States, call 1-800-392-3673.
In Canada, call 1-800-565-3673.
Times are subject to change due to holidays.
SYNC Owner Account
Why do I need a SYNC owner account?
· Essential for keeping up with the latest software downloads available for SYNC.
· Access to customer support for any questions you may have.
Driving Restrictions
For your safety, certain features are speed-dependent and restricted when your vehicle is traveling over 3 mph (5 km/h).
Safety Information
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, crash and injury. We strongly recommend that you use extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle. We recommend against the use of any hand-held device while driving and encourage the use of voice-operated systems when possible. Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the use of electronic devices while driving.
When using SYNC:
· Do not operate playing devices if the power cords or cables are broken, split or damaged. Place cords and cables out of the way, so they do not interfere with the operation of pedals, seats, compartments or safe driving abilities.
· Do not leave playing devices in your vehicle during extreme conditions as it could cause them damage. See your device's manual for further information.
· Do not attempt to service or repair the system. See an authorized dealer.
Privacy Information
When a cellular phone is connected to SYNC, the system creates a profile within your vehicle that is linked to that cellular phone. This profile is created in order to offer you more cellular features and to operate more efficiently. Among other things, this profile may contain data about your cellular phone book, text messages (read and unread), and call history, including history of calls when your cellular phone was not connected to the system. In addition, if you connect a media device, the system creates and retains an index of supported media content. The system also records a short development log of approximately 10 minutes of all recent system activity. The log profile and other system data may be used to improve the system and help diagnose any problems that may occur.
The cellular profile, media device index, and development log will remain in the vehicle unless you delete them and are generally accessible only in the vehicle when the cellular phone or media player is connected. If you no longer plan to use the system or the vehicle, we recommend you perform a Master Reset to erase all stored information.
360
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
SYNCTM
System data cannot be accessed without special equipment and access to the vehicle's SYNC module. Ford Motor Company and Ford of Canada will not access the system data for any purpose other than as described absent consent, a court order, or where required by law enforcement, other government authorities, or other third parties acting with lawful authority. Other parties may seek to access the information independently of Ford Motor Company and Ford of Canada. For further privacy information, see the section on 911 Assist. See SYNCTM Applications and Services (page 375).
USING VOICE RECOGNITION
This system helps you control many features using voice commands. This allows you to keep your hands on the wheel and focus on what is around you.
Initiating a Voice Session
E142599
Press the voice button. A list of available voice commands appears in the display.
Global Voice Commands
These voice commands are always available. You can say them at any time.
Global voice commands
(cancel | exit)
This command ends the voice session. You can also cancel a session by holding the voice button for two or more seconds.
help
This command provides you with hints, examples and instructions.
(main menu | start again)
This command restarts the voice session from the initial starting point.
You can say any of the voice commands that appear within open and close brackets that are separated by |. For example, where; (cancel | exit) appears you say; cancel or exit.
Helpful Hints
· Make sure the interior of your vehicle is as quiet as possible. Wind noise from open windows and road vibrations may prevent the system from correctly recognizing spoken commands.
· Before giving a voice command, wait for the system announcement to finish, followed by a single tone. Any command spoken before this does not register with the system.
· Speak naturally, without long pauses between words.
· You can interrupt the system at any time while it is speaking by pressing the voice button. You can cancel a voice session by pressing and holding the voice button.
361
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
SYNCTM
System Interaction and Feedback
The system provides feedback through audible tones, prompts, questions and spoken confirmations depending on the situation and the chosen level of interaction. You can customize the voice recognition system to provide more or less instruction and feedback.
The default setting is to a higher level of interaction in order to help you learn to use the system. You can change these settings at any time.
Adjusting the Interaction Level
E142599
Press the voice button. When prompted, say:
Voice Command voice settings Then either of the following: interaction mode novice
interaction mode advanced
Action and Description
Provides more detailed interaction and guidance. (Recommended for first time users.) Provides less audible interaction and guidance.
Confirmation Prompts
Confirmation prompts are short questions the system asks when it is not sure of your request or when there is more than one possible response to your request.
To adjust this setting press the voice button, when prompted say:
Voice Command
Action and Description
voice settings Then either of the following: confirmation prompts off
confirmation prompts on
Make a best guess from the command; you may still occasionally be asked to confirm settings.
Clarify your voice command with a short question.
Phone Confirmation
Using phone confirmations the system asks you to verify before placing any calls.
362
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
SYNCTM
To adjust this setting press the voice button, when prompted say:
Voice Command
Action and Description
voice settings
Then any of the following:
phone confirmation on
When enabled, this feature will prompt you to confirm any voice initiated call command prior to the call being placed.
phone confirmation off
The system will make a best guess; you may still occasionally be asked to confirm settings.
Changing the Voice Settings
In addition to using voice commands to change the voice settings, you can also use the menu in the audio display.
To change the voice settings press the Menu button then select:
Menu Item
SYNC-Settings
Voice settings
Note: Depending on the current climate control settings, the fan speed may automatically go down while issuing voice commands or while making and receiving phone calls via SYNC to reduce the amount of background noise in the vehicle. The fan speed will automatically return to normal operation once the voice session ends. Fan speed can also be adjusted normally during a voice session, simply press fan buttons (or turn fan knob) to increase or decrease fan speed to desired setting.
To disable this automatic fan speed reduction feature during voice sessions, press and hold the climate control AC and Recirculated air buttons simultaneously, release and then increase fan speed within 2 seconds. To re-enable this feature, repeat the above sequence.
USING SYNCTM WITH YOUR PHONE
Hands-free calling is one of the main features of SYNC. While the system supports a variety of features, many are dependent on your cellular phone's functionality. At a minimum, most cellular phones with Bluetooth wireless technology support the following functions:
· Answering an incoming call.
· Ending a call.
· Using privacy mode.
· Dialing a number.
· Redialing.
· Call waiting notification.
· Caller ID.
363
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
SYNCTM
Other features, such as text messaging using Bluetooth and automatic phonebook download, are phone-dependent features. To check your phone's compatibility, see your phone's manual and visit www.SYNCMyRide.com, www.SYNCMyRide.ca or www.syncmaroute.ca.
Pairing a Phone for the First Time
Wirelessly pairing your phone with SYNC allows you to make and receive hands-free calls.
Note: SYNC can support downloading up to approximately 4000 entries per Bluetooth-enabled cellular phone.
Note: Make sure to switch on the ignition and the radio. Shift the transmission into park (P) for automatic transmission or first gear for manual transmission.
Using the Audio System
Note: To scroll through the menus, press the up and down arrows on your audio system.
1. Make sure to switch on your phone's Bluetooth feature before starting the search. See your device's manual if necessary.
2. Press the PHONE button. When the audio display indicates there is no paired phone, select the option to add.
3. When a message to begin pairing appears in the audio display, search for SYNC on your phone to start the pairing process.
4. When prompted on your cell phone's display, confirm that the PIN provided by SYNC matches the PIN displayed on your cell phone. Your phone is now paired and the display indicates that the pairing was successful. If you are prompted to enter a PIN on your device, enter the PIN displayed on the screen. The display indicates when the pairing is successful.
Depending on your phone's capability and your market, the system may prompt you with questions, such as setting the current phone as the primary phone (the phone SYNC automatically tries to connect with first upon vehicle start-up) and downloading your phonebook.
Using Voice Commands
Make sure to switch on your phone's Bluetooth feature E142599 before starting the search. See your device's manual if necessary.
Press the voice and when prompted say:
Voice Command Action and Description
(pair ([Bluetooth] device | phone | Bluetooth audio) | add phone)
Follow the instructions on the audio display.
You can say any of the voice commands that appear within open and close brackets that are separated by |. For example, where; (what's | what is) appears you say; what's or what is.
The commands that have [ ] around the word means that the word is optional.
364
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
SYNCTM
Depending on your phone's capability and your market, the system may prompt you with questions, such as setting the current phone as the primary phone (the phone SYNC automatically tries to connect with first upon vehicle start-up) and downloading your phonebook.
Pairing Subsequent Phones
Note: Make sure to switch on the ignition and the radio. Shift the transmission into park (P) for automatic transmission or first gear for manual transmission.
Note: To scroll through the menus, press the up and down arrows on your audio system.
1. Make sure to switch on your phone's Bluetooth feature before starting the search. See your device's manual if necessary.
2. Press the PHONE button.
3. Select the option for Bluetooth Devices.
4. Press the OK button.
5. Select the option to add. This starts the pairing process.
6. When a message to begin pairing appears in the audio display, search for SYNC on your device.
7. When prompted on your cell phone's display, confirm that the PIN provided by SYNC matches the PIN displayed on your cell phone. Your phone is now paired and the display indicates that the pairing was successful. If you are prompted to enter a PIN on your device, enter the PIN displayed on the screen. The display indicates when the pairing is successful.
SYNC may prompt you with more cell phone options. Your cell phone may also prompt you to give SYNC permission to access information. For more information on your cell phone's capability, see your cell phone's manual and visit the website.
Phone Voice Commands
E142599
Press the voice button. When prompted, say any of the following:
Voice Command
(phone | Blackberry | iPhone)
Then say any of the following:
call (___)
call ___ at home
call ___ ((in|at) [the] office | at work)
call ___ on (cell | mobile)
call ___ on other
dial [[a] number]
1
([go to] privacy | transfer to phone 2 | privacy on)
(hold call [on] | place call on hold) 2
join (calls | call)
2
mute call [on]
2
(mute call off | un-mute call)
2
(turn ringer on | silent mode off) (turn ringer off | silent mode [on])
365
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
SYNCTM
Voice Command
[text] (messages | message)
3
help
___ is a dynamic listing that should be the name of a contact in your phonebook. For example you could say "Call Home". 1 See Dial table below.
2 These commands are only valid while in a phone call. 3 See the text message table below.
Dial Commands
Press the voice button and when prompted say any of the following commands:
Voice Commands 411 (four-one-one), 911 (nine-one-one)
700 (seven hundred) 800 (eight hundred) 900 (nine hundred) Clear (deletes all entered digits) Delete (deletes last set of digits entered)
Number <0-9> Plus
Pound (#) Star (*)
Note: To exit dial mode, press and hold the phone button or press any button on the audio system.
To access text messages say: Voice Command
[text] (messages | message) Then say any of the following: (listen to | read) ([text] message) forward (text | [text] message) reply to (text | [text] message) call [sender]
Phonebook Hints To hear how the SYNC system speaks a name browse phonebook, select a contact and press:
Menu Item Hear it
Changing Devices Using Voice Commands Using SYNC, you can easily access multiple phones, ipods, or USB devices. to switch devices say:
366
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
SYNCTM
Voice Command
(connect | device) ___
You can state the name of the desired device, such as "My iPhone","My Galaxy"
or"My iPod". SYNC may ask you to confirm the type of device (Phone, USB, or
Bluetooth Audio).
Making Calls
E142599
Press the voice button. When prompted, say:
Voice Command
call [[a] name]
dial [[a] number]
SYNC prompts you to say the numbers that you wish to dial. After you say the numbers, the system confirms it. You can then say:
When the system has stated the number, you say any of the following:
Voice Command
(dial | send) This initiates the call.
(delete | correct)
This erases the spoken digits.
To end the call, press the end call button
on the steering wheel or select the end call option in the audio display.
Receiving Calls
Accepting calls
When receiving a call, you can answer the call by pressing the accept call button on the steering wheel or use the screen.
To use the screen to accept a call select:
Menu Item
Accept
Rejecting Calls
When receiving a call, you can reject the call by pressing the reject call button on the steering wheel or use the screen.
To use the screen to reject a call select:
Reject
Menu Item
Ignore the call by doing nothing.
Phone Options during an Active Call
During an active call, you have more menu features that become available, such as putting a call on hold or joining calls.
To access this menu, choose one of the options available at the bottom of the audio display or select More to choose from the following options:
367
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
SYNCTM
Menu Item Mic. off Privacy Hold Dial a number Join calls
Phonebook
Call History
Description and action
Switch your vehicle's microphone off. To switch the microphone on, select the option again.
Switch a call from an active hands-free environment to your cellular phone for a more private conversation. When selected, the audio display indicates the call is private.
Put an active call on hold. When selected, the audio display indicates the call is on hold.
Enter numbers using the audio system's numeric keypad (for example, numbers for passwords).
Join two separate calls. The system supports a maximum of three callers on a multiparty or conference call. 1. Select the More option. 2. Access the desired contact through the system or use voice commands to place the second call. Once actively in the second call, select the More option. 3. Scroll to the option to join calls and press the OK button.
Access your phonebook contacts. 1. Select the More option. 2. Scroll to the option for phonebook and press the OK button. 3. Scroll through your phonebook contacts. 4. Press the OK button again when the desired contact appears in the audio display. 5. Press the OK button or dial button to call the selection.
Access your call history log. 1. Select the More option. 2. Scroll to the option for call history and press the OK button. 3. Scroll through your call history options (incoming, outgoing or missed). 4. Press the OK button again when the desired selection appears in the audio display. 5. Press the OK button or dial button to call the selection.
Accessing Features through the Phone Menu
You can access your call history, phonebook, sent text messages, as well as access phone and system settings.
1. Press the PHONE button to enter the phone menu.
2. Select one of the options available.
368
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
SYNCTM
Display Dial a number Phonebook
Call History
Speed Dial Text messaging BT Devices Phone settings
Description and action
Enter numbers using the audio system's numeric keypad.
Access your downloaded phonebook. 1. Press the OK button to confirm and enter. You can use the options at the bottom of the screen to access an alphabetical category quickly. You can also use the letters on the audio system's numeric keypad to jump in the list. 2. Scroll through your phonebook contacts. 3. Press the OK button again when the desired selection appears in the audio display. 4. Press the OK button or dial button to call the selection.
Access any previously dialed, received or missed calls. 1. Press the OK button to select. 2. Scroll to select incoming, outgoing or missed calls. Press the OK button to make your selection. 3. Press the OK button or dial button to call the selection.
Select 1 of 10 speed dial entries. To set a speed dial entry, go to the phonebook and then press and hold one of the numbers on the audio system's numeric keypad.
Send, download and delete text messages.
Access the option for Bluetooth Device menu listings (add, connect, set as primary, on or off, delete).
View various settings and features on your phone.
Text Messaging
Note: This is a phone-dependent feature.
SYNC allows you to receive, send, download and delete text messages. The system can also read incoming text messages to you so that you do not have to take your eyes off the road.
Receiving a Text Message
Note: This is a phone-dependent feature. Your phone must support downloading text messages using Bluetooth to receive incoming text messages.
Note: This is a speed-dependent feature and is only available when your vehicle is traveling at 3 mph (5 km/h) or less.
When a new message arrives, an audible tone sounds and the audio display indicates you have a new message.
To hear the message you can say:
Voice command
Description and action
(listen to | read) ([text] message)
Select this option to have the system read the message to you.
369
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
SYNCTM
Using the screen you also have the following options:
Menu Item
Description and action
Ignore Select this option, or do nothing, and the message goes into your text message inbox.
View
Select the view option to open the text message. Once selected, you have the ability to have the message read to you, to view other messages. For additional options select:
More... If you select this option, use the arrow button to scroll through the following options:
Reply to sender
Press the OK button to access, and then scroll through a list of pre-defined messages to send.
Call sender Press the OK button to call the sender of the message.
Forward msg.
Press the OK button to forward the message to anyone in your phonebook or call history. You can also choose to enter a number.
Sending, Downloading and Deleting Your Text Messages
1. Press the PHONE button.
2. Select the text messaging option, and then press the OK button.
Choose from the following options:
Menu Item New View
Delete
More...
Description and action
Allows you to send a new text message based on a pre-defined set of 15 messages.
Allows you to read the full message and, in addition, provides the option to have the system read the message to you. To go to the next message, select the More option. This allows you to reply to the sender, call the sender or forward the message.
Allows you to delete current text messages from the system (not your cellular phone). The audio display indicates when the system has deleted all your text messages.
Allows you to delete all messages or manually trigger a download of all unread messages from your cellular phone.
370
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
SYNCTM
Sending a Text Message
Note: You can only send a text message to one recipient at a time.
1. Select the send option when the desired selection highlights in the audio display.
2. Select the confirmation option when the contact appears.
3. Press the OK button again to confirm when the system asks if you want to send the message. A pre-defined signature appears on each text message.
Note: You can send text messages either by choosing a contact from the phonebook and selecting the text option from the audio display or by replying to a received message in the inbox.
Accessing Your Phone Settings
These are phone-dependent features. Your phone settings allow you to access and adjust features such as your ring tone and text message notification, modify your phonebook, and set up automatic download.
1. Press the PHONE button.
2. Scroll until the phone settings option appears, and then press the OK button.
Scroll to select from the following options:
Menu Item Set as master
Phone status Set ringtone
Text msg notify Phonebook pref.
Description and action
If this option is checked, the system uses the cellular phone as the master when there is more than one cellular phone paired to the system. This option can be changed for all cellular phones (not only the active phone) using the Bluetooth Devices menu.
See the cellular phone name, provider name, cellular phone number, and signal level. When done, press the left arrow buttons to return to the phone status menu.
Select which ringtone sounds during an incoming call (one of the system's tones or your cellular phone's). If your phone supports in-band ringing, your phone's ringtone sounds when you choose the cellular phone ringtone option. 1. Press the OK button to select and scroll to hear each ringtone. 2. Press the OK button to select a ringtone.
Have the option of hearing an audible tone to notify you when a text message arrives. Press the OK button to switch the audible tone off or on.
Modify the contents of your phonebook (such as add, delete or download). Press the OK button to select and scroll between the choices in the phonebook preferences table below.
371
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
SYNCTM
Menu Item Add contacts Delete Download now Auto-download
Sorting Pref.
Phonebook preferences
Push the desired contacts on your cellular phone. See your device's manual on how to push contacts. Press the OK button to add more contacts from your phonebook.
When a message asking you to delete appears, select the option to confirm. Press the OK button to delete the current phonebook and call history. The system takes you back to the menu for phone settings.
Press the OK button to select and download your phonebook to the system.
When automatic download is on, the system deletes any changes (additions or deletions) saved in the system since your last download.
When automatic download is off, the system does not download your phonebook when your cellular phone connects to SYNC.
You can only access your phonebook, call history and text messages when your paired cellular phone connects to the system. Check or uncheck this option to download your phonebook automatically each time your phone connects to the system. Download times are phonedependent and quantity-dependent.
Enabling this feature allows you to select how your contacts are displayed. You can select:
First/Last name
Last/First name
Bluetooth Devices
The Bluetooth Devices menu allows you to add, connect and delete devices as well as set a phone as primary.
1. Press the PHONE button.
2. Scroll until Bluetooth Devices appears, and then press the OK button.
Select from the following options:
Add
Menu Item
Description and action
Pair additional phones to the system. 1. Select the option to add to start the pairing process.
372
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
SYNCTM
Menu Item
Delete Master Conn. Discon.
Description and action
2. When a message to begin pairing appears in the audio display, search for SYNC on your phone. See your phone's manual if necessary. 3. When prompted on your cell phone's display, confirm that the PIN provided by SYNC matches the PIN displayed on your cell phone. Skip the next step. If you are prompted to enter a PIN on your device, it does not support Secure Simple Pairing. To pair, enter the PIN displayed on the screen. The display indicates when the pairing is successful. 4. When the option to set the phone as primary appears, select either yes or no. 5. SYNC may prompt you with more cell phone options. Your cell phone may also prompt you to give SYNC permission to access information. For more information on your cell phone's capability, see your cell phone's manual and visit the website.
Select the delete option and confirm when the system asks to delete the selected device. After deleting a phone from the list, you have to repeat the pairing process to pair it again.
The system attempts to connect with the primary cellular phone each time you switch on the ignition. When you select a cellular phone as primary, it appears first in the list, marked with an asterisk. Set a previously paired phone as master by selecting the master option and confirming it as the primary.
Connect a previously connected phone. You can only have one phone connected at a time to use the phone's functionality. When you connect another phone, the previous phone disconnects from the telephone services. The system allows you to use different Bluetooth devices for the cellular phone functionality and the Bluetooth audio music playback feature at the same time.
Disconnects the selected cellular phone. Select this option and confirm when asked. After disconnecting a phone, you can reconnect it again without repeating the full pairing process.
System Settings 1. Press the MENU button.
2. Select the SYNC settings option, and then press the OK button.
373
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
SYNCTM
Scroll to select from the following options:
Display
Description and action
Bluetooth on
Check or uncheck this option to switch the system's Bluetooth interface off or on. Select this option, and then press the OK button to change the option's status.
Set defaults
Return to the factory default settings without erasing your indexed information (such as phonebook, call history, text messages and paired devices). Select this option and confirm when prompted in the audio display.
Master reset
Completely erase all information stored in the system (such as phonebook, call history, text messages and paired devices) and return to factory default settings.
Install on SYNC
Install downloaded applications or software updates. Select this option and confirm when prompted in the audio display. There must be a valid SYNC application or update available on the USB drive in order to finish an installation successfully.
System info
Display the system's version numbers as well as its serial number. Press the OK button to select.
Voice settings
The voice settings submenu contains various options. See Using Voice Recognition (page 361).
Browse USB
Browse the actual menu structure of the connected USB device. Press the OK button and use the up and down arrow buttons to scroll through the folders and files. Use the left or right arrow buttons to enter or leave a folder. You can select media content for playback from this menu.
374
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
SYNCTM
SYNCTM APPLICATIONS AND SERVICES (IF EQUIPPED)
In order for the following features to work, your cellular phone must be compatible with SYNC. To check your phone's compatibility, visit www.SYNCMyRide.com, www.SYNCMyRide.ca or www.syncmaroute.ca.
· 911 Assist: Can alert 911 in the event of an emergency.
· SYNC AppLink: Allows you to connect to and use certain applications (if your phone is compatible).
These features may require activation. Available AppLink enabled apps vary by market.
911 Assist
WARNING: Unless the 911 Assist setting is set on before a crash, the system will not dial for help which could delay response time, potentially increasing the risk of serious injury or death after a crash.
WARNING: Do not wait for 911 Assist to make an emergency call if you can do it yourself. Dial emergency services immediately to avoid delayed response time which could increase the risk of serious injury or death after a crash. If you do not hear 911 Assist within five seconds of the crash, the system or phone may be damaged or non-functional.
WARNING: Always place your phone in a secure location in your vehicle so it does not become a projectile or get damaged in a crash. Failure to do so may cause serious injury to someone or damage the phone which could prevent 911 Assist from working properly.
Note: The SYNC 911 Assist feature must be set on before the incident.
Note: The SYNC 911 Assist feature only operates in the U.S., Canada or in a territory in which 911 is the emergency number.
Note: Before setting this feature on, make sure that you read the 911 Assist Privacy Notice later in this section for important information.
Note: If any user switches 911 Assist to on or off, that setting applies for all paired phones. If you switch on 911 Assist, either a voice message plays or a display message or an icon comes on when you start your vehicle and after a previously paired phone connects.
Note: Every phone operates differently. While SYNC 911 Assist works with most cellular phones, some may have trouble using this feature.
If a crash deploys an airbag (excluding knee airbags and rear inflatable safety belts [if equipped]) or activates the fuel pump shut-off, your SYNC-equipped vehicle may be able to contact emergency services by dialing 911 through a paired and connected Bluetooth enabled phone. You can learn more about the 911 Assist feature, visit www.SYNCMyRide.com, www.SYNCMyRide.ca or www.syncmaroute.ca.
See Supplementary Restraints System (page 44). Important information about airbag deployment is in this chapter.
375
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
SYNCTM
See Roadside Emergencies (page 232). Important information about the fuel pump shut-off is in this chapter.
Setting 911 Assist On or Off
Press Menu then select
Menu Item
Action and Description
SYNC-Applications
911 Assist Select the desired option, on or off.
If you choose not to activate this feature you will have the following options:
Menu Item
Action and Description
Voice Provides a display and voice
Reminder reminder at phone connection
ON
at vehicle start.
Voice Provides a display reminder
Reminder only without a voice reminder
OFF
at phone connection.
To make sure that 911 Assist works properly:
· SYNC must be powered and working properly at the time of the incident and throughout feature activation and use.
· The 911 Assist feature must be set on before the incident.
· You must pair and connect a Bluetooth enabled and compatible cell phone to SYNC.
· A connected Bluetooth enabled phone must have the ability to make and maintain an outgoing call at the time of the incident.
· A connected Bluetooth enabled phone must have adequate network coverage, battery power and signal strength.
· The vehicle must have battery power and be located in the U.S., Canada or in a territory in which 911 is the emergency number.
In the Event of a Crash
Not all crashes deploy an airbag or activate the fuel pump shut-off (the triggers for 911 Assist). If a connected cell phone sustains damage or loses its connection to SYNC during a crash, SYNC searches for and tries to connect to a previously paired cell phone; SYNC then attempts to call the emergency services.
Before making the call:
· SYNC provides a short window of time (about 10 seconds) to cancel the call. If you fail to cancel the call, SYNC attempts to dial 911.
· SYNC says the following, or a similar message: "SYNC will attempt to call 911, to cancel the call, press Cancel on your screen or press and hold the phone button on your steering wheel".
If you do not cancel the call, and SYNC makes a successful call, a pre-recorded message plays for the 911 operator, and then the occupant(s) in your vehicle is able to talk with the operator. Be prepared to provide your name, phone number and location immediately, because not all 911 systems are capable of receiving this information electronically.
911 Assist May Not Work If
· Your cellular phone or 911 Assist hardware sustains damage in a crash.
· The vehicle's battery or the SYNC system has no power.
· The phone(s) thrown from your vehicle are the ones paired and connected to the system.
376
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
SYNCTM
911 Assist Privacy Notice
When you switch on 911 Assist, it may disclose to emergency services that your vehicle has been in a crash involving the deployment of an airbag or activation of the fuel pump shut-off. Certain versions or updates to 911 Assist may also be capable of electronically or verbally disclosing to 911 operators your vehicle location or other details about your vehicle or crash to assist 911 operators to provide the most appropriate emergency services. If you do not want to disclose this information, do not switch the feature on.
SYNC Mobile Apps
The system enables voice and steering wheel control of SYNC AppLink enabled smartphone apps. When an app is running through AppLink, you can control main features of the app through voice commands and steering wheel controls.
Note: You must pair and connect your smartphone to SYNC to access AppLink.
Note: iPhone users need to connect the phone to the USB port.
Note: Android users need to connect the phone to SYNC using Bluetooth.
Note: For information on available apps, supported smartphone devices and troubleshooting tips please visit the local website.
Note: Availability of SYNC AppLink enabled Apps will vary by region.
Note: Make sure you have an active account for the app that you have downloaded. Some apps work automatically with no setup. Other apps want you to configure your personal settings and personalize your experience by creating stations or favorites. We recommend you do this at home or outside of your vehicle.
Note: AppLink is not available if your vehicle is equipped with the MyFord Touch system.
To Access Using the SYNC Menu
Press the MENU button to access the menu on-screen. Then select:
Menu Item
Action and Description
SYNC-Apps
Mobile Apps
Scroll through the list of available applications and select a particular app or select:
Find New Apps
Note: If you cannot find a compatible SYNC AppLink app, make sure the required app is running on the mobile device.
Accessing an App's Menu
When an app is running through SYNC, press the right arrow button on the steering wheel control to access the app menu.
You can access various app features from here, for example thumbs up and thumbs down.
Press the left arrow button on the steering wheel control to exit the app menu.
377
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
SYNCTM
To Access Using Voice Commands
Press the voice button then when prompted say:
Menu Item
Action and Description
mobile (apps | applications)
help
Say the name of the application after the tone. The app should start. When an app is running through SYNC, you can press the voice button and speak commands specific to the
app, for example "Play Playlist Road Trip".
Use this command to discover the available voice commands.
SYNC Mobile App Voice Commands
The following voice commands are always available:
Menu Item mobile (apps | applications)
Action and Description
SYNC prompts you to say the name of an app to start it on SYNC.
list [mobile] (apps | applications)
SYNC lists all of the currently available mobile apps.
find [new] [mobile] (apps | applications) Searches your connected mobile device for SYNC-compatible mobile apps.
help
You can say the name of a mobile app at any time to start the mobile app on SYNC.
App Permissions
The system organizes app permissions by groups. You can grant these group permissions individually. You can change a permission group status any time when not driving, by using the settings menu.
When you launch an app using SYNC, the system may ask you to grant certain permissions, for example:
· To allow your vehicle to provide vehicle information to the app such as, but not limited to: Fuel level, fuel economy, fuel consumption, engine speed, rain sensor, odometer, VIN, external temperature, gear position, tire pressure, and head lamp status.
· To allow your vehicle to provide driving characteristic information such as, but not limited to: MyKey, seat belt status, engine revolutions per minute, gear position, braking events, steering wheel angle, and accelerator pedal position.
378
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
SYNCTM
· To allow your vehicle to provide location information, including: GPS and speed.
· To allow the app to send push notifications using the vehicle display and voice capabilities while running in a background state. Push notifications may be particularly useful for news or
location based apps.
Note: You only need to grant permissions the first time you use an app with SYNC.
Note: We are not responsible or liable for any damages or loss of privacy relating to usage of an app, or dissemination of any vehicle data that you approve us to provide to an app.
Enabling and Disabling App Permissions Using the SYNC Menu
Press the MENU button to access the SYNC menu then select:
Menu Item
Action and Description
SYNC-Apps
Mobile Apps
All Apps
You can also select a specific app. If the app supports push notifications, this setting is listed. Select to enable or disable the feature as required.
Enabling SYNC Mobile Apps
In order to enable mobile apps, SYNC requires user consent to send and receive app authorization information and updates using the data plan associated with the connected device.
Data is sent to us in the United States through the connected device. The information is encrypted and includes your VIN, SYNC module number, anonymous usage statistics and debugging information. Updates may take place.
Note: You must enable mobile apps for each connected device the first time you select a mobile app using the system.
Note: Standard data rates apply. We are not responsible for any additional charges you may receive from your service provider, when your vehicle sends or receives data through the connected device. This includes any additional charges incurred due to driving in areas when roaming out of a home network.
App Status
You can view the current status of an app in the settings menu.
379
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
SYNCTM
There are three possible statuses: Menu Item
Update Needed
Up-To-Date Updating...
Action and Description
The system has detected a new app requiring authorization or a general
permissions update.
No update is required.
The system is trying to receive an update.
Update settings Menu Item
Request Update
Disable Updates
Action and Description
Select this option from the settings menu to manually perform a needed update.
Select this option from the settings menu to disable automatic updates.
Doing so also disables the use of Mobile Apps on SYNC.
USING SYNCTM WITH YOUR MEDIA PLAYER
You can access and play music from your digital music player over your vehicle's speaker system using the system's media menu or voice commands. You can also sort and play your music by specific categories, such as artist and album.
Note: The system is capable of indexing up to 15,000 songs.
SYNC is capable of hosting nearly any digital media player including: iPod, Zune, plays from device players, and most USB drives. SYNC also supports audio formats, such as MP3, WMA, WAV and ACC.
Confirm that the USB device has been formatted correctly and has the following specifications: · USB 2.0. · File format must be FAT16/32.
The format of the audio files on the USB device must be: · MP3. · Non DRM protected WMA. · WAV. · AAC.
Connecting Your Digital Media Player to the USB Port
Note: If your digital media player has a power switch, make sure you switch it on before plugging it in.
380
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
SYNCTM
To Connect Using Voice Commands
Plug the device into one of the vehicle's USB ports.
Press the voice button and when prompted, say:
Voice Command Action and Description
(USB [stick] | iPod | MP3 [player])
You can now play music by saying any of the appropriate voice commands. See the media voice commands.
To Connect Using the System Menu
1. Plug the device into one of the vehicle's USB ports.
2. Press the MEDIA button and select either USB 1 or USB 2 from the media source list in the audio display.
Words in brackets [ ] are optional and do not have to be spoken for the system to understand the command. For example, for where (USB [stick] | iPOD | MP3 [player]) appears, you can say USB or USB stick.
To view USB content select:
Message
Description and Action
Browse USB
Depending on how many media files are on your connected device, an indexing message may appear in the display. When indexing is complete, the selected source starts to playback audio automatically.
You can browse the files on the USB device in categories. Select BROWSE from the buttons at the bottom of the audio display and choose from the following:
Message
Play all
Playlists
Songs
Artists
Albums Genres Browse USB Reset USB
Message
Media Voice Commands
E142599
Press the voice button and when prompted say:
381
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
SYNCTM
Voice Command
Description and Action
(USB [stick] | iPod | MP3 You can now play music by saying any of the appropriate
[player])
voice commands.
You can say any of the voice commands that appear within open and close brackets that are separated by |. For example, where; (what's | what is) appears you say; what's or what is.
You must say any of the voice commands that appear outside of open and close brackets. For example, where; (what's | what is) playing, you must say either "what's playing" or "what is playing".
Command
Description and Action
pause
Pauses device playback.
play
Resumes device playback.
play [album] ___
play all
Play all media on the device from the first track to the last.
play [artist] ___
play [genre] ___
play [playlist] ___
next [track | title | song | file | podcast | Plays the next track on the current media. chapter | episode]
previous [track | title | song | file | podcast | chapter | episode]
Plays the previous track on current media.
[play] (similar music | more like this) Creates a playlist with a similar genre to the one currently playing.
play [song | track | title | file] ___
repeat off
repeat (one | track) [on]
Repeats the current track.
382
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
SYNCTM
Command
Description and Action
shuffle [all] [on]
Plays the current playlist in a random order. (Not all devices support this command.)
shuffle off
((who's | who is) this | who plays this | At any time during playback, you can press (what's | what is) playing [now] | (what the voice button and ask the system what is
| which) (song | track | artist) is this | playing. The system reads the metadata tags (who's | who is) playing | (what's | what (if populated) of the current track.
is) this)
___ is a dynamic listing, meaning that it could be the name of anything, such as a group, artist or song. For example you could say "Play artist The Beatles".
Examples of USB Commands
SYNC provides the user with many intuitive ways to find and play a song using voice. For example, if we have a song called "Penny Lane" from the album "Magical Mystery Tour" we can say the following to play this song:
· Play song "Penny Lane".
· Play "Penny Lane".
If we wanted to play the entire album, we can say:
· Play album "Magical Mystery Tour". · Play "Magical Mystery Tour".
Bluetooth Audio
The system is also capable of playing music from your cellular phone through Bluetooth.
To switch the Bluetooth Audio on, press the MEDIA button and select:
BT audio
Menu Item
Then any of the following:
Voice Command pause play next [track | title | song | file | podcast | chapter | episode] previous [track | title | song | file | podcast | chapter | episode]
Media Menu Features
The media menu allows you to select how to play your music (such as by artist, genre, shuffle or repeat), find similar music or reset the index of your USB devices.
Press the MEDIA button and select either USB 1 or USB 2 from the media source list in the audio display to start USB playback.
383
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
SYNCTM
Message Options
Description and Action This will enter the media menu.
Then any of the following:
Message Shuffle Repeat track Similar music
Reset USB
Description and Action
Choose to shuffle or repeat your music. Once you make your choice, it remains on until you switch it off.
Choose to shuffle or repeat your music. Once you make your choice, it remains on until you switch it off.
You can play similar types of music to the current playlist from the USB port. The system uses the metadata information of each track to compile a playlist. The system then creates a new list of similar tracks and then begins playing. Each track must have the metadata tags populated for this feature. With certain playing devices, if your metadata tags are not populated, the tracks will not be available in voice recognition, the play menu or this option. However, if you place these tracks onto your playing device in mass storage device mode they are available in voice recognition, the play menu or this option. The system places unknowns into any unpopulated metadata tag.
Resets the USB index. After the new indexing is complete you can choose what to play from the USB song library.
Accessing Your USB Song Library
1. Plug the device into your vehicle's USB port.
2. Press the MEDIA button (next to the audio display) to select USB playback.
Message Browse USB
Description and Action
This menu allows you to select and play your media files by artist, album, genre, playlist or track.
If there are no media files to access, the display indicates there is no media.
384
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
SYNCTM
If there are media files, you have the following options:
Display
Description and Action
Play all
Play all indexed media files from your device one at a time
in numerical order.* Press the OK button to select. The first track title appears in the display.
Playlists
Access your playlists (from formats like ASX, M3U, WPL,
or MTP).* 1. Press the OK button to select. 2. Scroll to select the desired playlist, and then press the OK button.
Songs
Search for and play a specific indexed track.* 1. Press the OK button to select. 2. Scroll to select the desired track, and then press the OK button.
Artists
Sort all indexed media files by artist. The system then lists
and plays all artists and tracks alphabetically.* 1. Press the OK button to select. 2. Scroll to select the desired artist, and then press the OK button.
Albums
Sort all indexed media files by album.* 1. Press the OK button to select. 2. Scroll to select the desired album, and then press the OK button.
Genres
Sort all indexed media files by genre (category) type.* 1. Press the OK button to select. 2. Scroll to select the desired genre, and then press the OK button.
Browse USB
Browse all supported media files on your media player connected to the USB port. You can only view media files that are compatible with SYNC. (Other files are not visible.) 1. Press the OK button to select.
385
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
SYNCTM
Display
Description and Action
2. Scroll to browse indexed media files on the device, and then press the OK button.
Reset USB
Resets the USB index. After the new indexing is complete, you can choose what to play from the USB song library.
*You can use the buttons at the bottom of the audio display to jump to a certain
alphabetical category quickly. You can also use the letters on the audio system's numeric keypad to jump in the list.
Using Voice Commands
You can access and view your USB songs using voice commands. Plug the device into your vehicle's USB port.
Press the voice button and when prompted, say any of the following commands:
Accessing and Viewing USB Media
(browse | search | show) all (album | albums)
(browse | search | show) all (artist | artists)
(browse | search | show) all (genre | genres)
(browse | search | show) all (playlist | playlists)
(browse | search | show) all (song | songs | title | titles | file | files | track | tracks)
(browse | search | show) album ___
(browse | search | show) artist ___
(browse | search | show) genre ___
(browse | search | show) playlist ___
USB 2 (If Equipped)
Your vehicle may come equipped with an additional USB port. If so, USB 1 is located at the front of the vehicle at the bottom of the instrument panel. USB 2 is located inside the storage compartment of the vehicle's center console.
You can plug in an additional USB device into the second USB port.
You can access both USB devices by using voice commands.
To access a USB device press the voice button and when prompted say:
Voice command
USB 1
USB 2
Note: SYNC only supports one connected iOS (Apple) devices at a time (whichever one you plug in first). When you connect a second iOS device, the systems charges it, but does not support playback from it.
Bluetooth Devices and System Settings
You can access these menus using the audio display. See Using SYNCTM With Your Phone (page 363).
386
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
SYNCTM
Voice Commands for Audio Sources
Your voice system allows you to change audio sources with a simple voice command.
E142599
Press the voice button and when prompted say:
Voice Command
(music | audio | entertainment) [system]
Below are a few examples of voice commands you can use.
[tune [to]] AM
[tune [to]] AM1
[tune [to]] AM (autostore | AST | autoset)
[tune [to]] AM 2
Bluetooth (audio | stereo)
(disc | CD [player]) play
[tune [to]] FM
[tune [to]] FM1
[tune [to]] FM (autostore | AST | autoset)
[tune [to]] FM 2
Radio
tune [to] SAT
*
Sirius
*
(USB [stick] | iPod | MP3 [player])
Voice Command
((who's | who is) this | who plays this | (what's | what is) playing [now] | (what | which) (song | track | artist) is this | (who's | who is) playing | (what's | what is) this)
help
* If equipped.
Radio Voice Commands
If you are listening to the radio, press the voice button, and then E142599 say any of the commands in the following table.
If you are not listening to the radio, press the voice button and, after the tone, say:
Voice Command
Radio
You can then say any of the following commands.
[tune [to]] AM
[tune [to]] AM1
[tune [to]] AM (autostore | AST | autoset)
[tune [to]] AM 2
[tune [to]] (AM ___ | ___ [AM])
[tune [to]] AM preset ___
[tune [to]] AM1 preset ___
[tune [to]] FM
[tune [to]] FM1
[tune [to]] FM (autostore | AST | autoset) preset ___
387
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
SYNCTM
Voice Command
[tune [to]] FM 2
[tune [to]] (FM ___ | ___ [FM])
[tune [to]] FM preset ___
FM ___ HD ___
*
[tune [to]] FM 2 preset ___
HD ___
*
[tune [to]] preset ___ Tune help * If equipped.
Sirius Satellite Radio Voice Commands (If equipped)
E142599
To listen to Sirius satellite radio, press the voice button and, after the tone, say:
Voice Commands Sirius
When you are listening to Sirius satellite radio, you can press the voice button, and say any of the commands in the following table.
Voice Commands tune [to] SAT [tune [to]] SAT 1 [tune [to]] SAT 2 [tune [to]] SAT 3 [tune [to]] preset ___ [tune [to]] SAT 1 preset ___
Voice Commands
[tune [to]] SAT 2 preset ___
[tune [to]] SAT 3 preset ___
tune [to] [Sirius]
Help
[tune [to]] Sirius [channel] ___
You can say the channel number (0233) to listen to that
Sirius station.
CD Voice Commands
If you are listening to a CD, press the voice button, and then say E142599 any of the commands in the following table.
If you are not listening to a CD, press the voice button and, after the tone, say:
Voice Command
(disc | CD [player]) play You can then say any of the following commands. pause play [play] next track [play] previous track [play | change to] track [number] ___ repeat (track | song) [on] repeat folder [on] repeat off (shuffle | random | mix) [on | (tracks | songs) [on]]
388
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
SYNCTM
Voice Command (shuffle | random | mix) (CD [player] | disc) [on] (shuffle | random | mix) folder [on] shuffle off
SYNCTM TROUBLESHOOTING
Your SYNC system is easy to use. However, should questions arise, see the tables below.
Use the website at any time to check your phone's compatibility, register your account and set preferences as well as access a customer representative via an online chat (during certain hours). Visit www.SYNCMyRide.com, www.SYNCMyRide.ca or www.syncmaroute.ca for more information.
Phone issues
Issue
Possible cause(s)
Possible solution(s)
There is excessive background noise during a phone
call.
The audio control settings on your phone may be
affecting SYNC performance.
Review your phone's manual about audio adjustments.
During a call, I can hear the other person but they cannot hear me.
This may be a possible phone malfunction.
Try turning off the device, resetting the device, removing the device's
battery, then trying again.
SYNC is not able to download my phonebook.
This is a phone-dependent feature.
Go to the website to review your phone's compatibility.
Try turning off the device, resetting the device or removing the device's
battery, then trying again.
This may be a possible phone malfunction.
Try pushing your phonebook contacts to SYNC by using the Add Contacts feature.
Use the SYNCmyphone feature available on the
website.
The system says Phonebook Downloaded but the phonebook in SYNC is
empty or missing contacts.
This may be a limitation on your phone's capability.
Try pushing your phonebook contacts to SYNC by using the Add Contacts feature.
389
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
SYNCTM
Issue
I am having trouble connecting my phone to
SYNC.
Phone issues
Possible cause(s)
Possible solution(s)
If the missing contacts are stored on your SIM card, try moving them to the device
memory.
Remove any pictures or special ring tones associ-
ated with the missing contact.
Depending upon your phone, you may have to grant SYNC permission to access your phonebook contacts. Make
sure to confirm when prompted by your phone
during the phonebook download.
Go to the website to review your phone's compatibility.
This is a phone-dependent feature.
Try turning off the device, resetting the device or removing the device's
battery, then trying again.
Try deleting your device from SYNC, deleting SYNC from your device and trying
again.
This may be a possible phone malfunction.
Check the security and auto accept and prompt always settings relative to the SYNC Bluetooth connection on
your phone.
Update your device's firmware.
390
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
SYNCTM
Issue
Text messaging is not working on SYNC.
Phone issues
Possible cause(s)
Possible solution(s)
Turn off the Auto phonebook download setting.
This is a phone-dependent Go to the website to review
feature.
your phone's compatibility.
This may be a possible phone malfunction.
Try turning off the device, resetting the device or removing the device's
battery, then trying again.
USB and media issues
Issue
Possible cause(s)
Possible solution(s)
Try turning off the device, resetting the device, removing the device's
battery, then trying again.
I am having trouble connecting my device.
This may be a possible device malfunction.
Make sure you are using the manufacturer's cable.
Make sure you insert the USB cable correctly into the
device and the USB port.
Make sure that the device does not have an autoinstall program or active security settings.
SYNC does not recognize my device when I turn on the This is a device limitation.
car.
Make sure you are not leaving the device in your vehicle during very hot or
cold temperatures.
Bluetooth audio does not stream.
This is a phone-dependent feature.
Review the device compatibility chart on the SYNC website to confirm your phone supports the
Bluetooth audio streaming function.
391
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
SYNCTM
USB and media issues
Issue
Possible cause(s)
Possible solution(s)
Make sure you correctly
The device is not connected.
connect the device to SYNC, and that you have pressed
play on your device.
SYNC does not recognize music that is on my device.
Your music files may not contain the correct artist, song title, album or genre
information.
The file may be corrupted.
The song may have copyright protection, which does
not allow it to play.
Make sure that all song details are populated.
Some devices require you to change the USB settings from mass storage to MTP class.
Voice command issues
Issue
Possible cause(s)
Possible solution(s)
Review the phone voice
You may be using the wrong voice commands.
commands and the media voice commands at the
beginning of their respective
sections.
SYNC does not understand what I am saying.
You may be speaking too soon or at the wrong time.
After pressing the voice icon, wait until after the tone sounds and Listening appears before saying a
command. Any command spoken before this does not
register with the system.
SYNC does not understand the name of a song or artist.
You may be using the wrong voice commands.
Review the media voice commands at the beginning
of the media section.
392
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
SYNCTM
Voice command issues
Issue
Possible cause(s)
Possible solution(s)
You may be saying the name differently than the
way you saved it.
Say the song or artist exactly as listed. If you say
"Play Artist Prince", the system does not play music by Prince and the Revolution
or Prince and the New Power Generation.
Make sure you are saying the complete title, such as
"California remix featuring Jennifer Nettles".
The system may not be reading the name the same
way you are saying it.
If the song titles are in all CAPS, you have to spell them. LOLA requires you to
say "L-O-L-A".
Do not use special characters in the title. The system does not recognize them.
Review the Phone voice commands at the beginning
of the phone section.
SYNC does not understand or is calling the wrong contact when I want to make a call.
You may be using the wrong voice commands.
You may be saying the name differently than the
way you saved it.
Make sure you are saying the contacts exactly as they are
listed. For example, if you save a contact as Joe Wilson, say "Call Joe Wilson".
Using the SYNC phone menu, open the phonebook
and scroll to the name SYNC is having trouble understanding. SYNC will read the name to you, giving you some idea of the pronunciation SYNC is
expecting.
393
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
SYNCTM
Issue
Voice command issues
Possible cause(s)
Possible solution(s)
The system may not be reading the name the same
way you are saying it.
The system works better if you list full names, such as
"Joe Wilson" rather than "Joe".
Contacts in your phonebook Do not use special charac-
may be very short and
ters, such as 123 or ICE, as
similar, or they may contain the system does not recog-
special characters.
nize them.
Your phonebook contacts may be in CAPS.
If a contact is in CAPS, you have to spell it. JAKE
requires you to say "Call JA-K-E".
AppLink issues
Issue
Possible cause(s)
Possible solution(s)
AppLink Mobile Applications: When I select "Find New Apps," SYNC does not
find any applications.
An AppLink capable phone is not connected to SYNC.
Ensure you have a compatible smartphone; an Android with OS 2.3 or higher or an iPhone 3GS or newer with iOS 5.0 or higher. Addition-
ally, ensure your phone is paired and connected to
SYNC in order to find AppLink-capable apps on your device. iPhone users
must also connect to SYNC's USB port with an
Apple USB cable.
Ensure you have down-
loaded and installed the
My phone is connected, but I still cannot find any apps.
AppLink-enabled apps are not installed and running on
your mobile device.
latest version of the app from your phone's app store. Ensure the app is running on
your phone. Some apps
require you to register or
394
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
SYNCTM
AppLink issues
Issue
Possible cause(s)
Possible solution(s)
login on the app on the phone before using them with AppLink. Also, some may have a "Ford SYNC" setting, so check the app's settings menu on the phone.
My phone is connected, my app(s) are running, but I still
cannot find any apps.
Sometime apps do not properly close and re-open their connection to SYNC,
over ignition cycles, for example.
Closing and restarting apps may help SYNC find the application if you cannot
discover it inside the vehicle. On an Android device, if
apps have an "Exit' or 'Quit' option, select that then
restart the app. If the app does not have that option,
you can also manually "Force Close" the app by going to the phone's settings menu, selecting 'Apps.' then finding the particular app and choosing 'Force stop.' Don't forget to restart the app afterwards, then select "Find New Apps" on SYNC.
On an iPhone with iOS7+, to force close an app, double tab the home button then swipe up on the app to close
it. Tab the home button again, then select the app again to restart it. After a few seconds, the app should
then appear in SYNC's Mobile App's Menu.
My Android phone is connected, my app(s) are running, I restarted them, but I still cannot find any
apps.
There is a Bluetooth bug on Reset the Bluetooth on your
some older versions of the phone by turning it off and
Android operating system then turning Bluetooth back
that may cause apps that on. If you are in your vehicle,
were found on your previous SYNC should be able to
vehicle drive to not be found automatically re-connect to
again if you have not turned your phone if you press the
off Bluetooth.
"Phone" button.
395
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
SYNCTM
AppLink issues
Issue
Possible cause(s)
Possible solution(s)
My iPhone phone is connected, my app is running, I restarted the app but I still cannot find it on
SYNC.
The USB connection to SYNC may need to be reset.
Unplug the USB cable from the phone, wait a moment,
and plug the USB cable back in to the phone. After a few seconds, the app should
appear in SYNC's Mobile Apps Menu. If not, "Force Close" the application and
restart it.
I have an Android phone. I found and started my media app on SYNC, but there is no sound or the sound is very
low.
The bluetooth volume on the phone may be low.
Try increasing the Bluetooth volume of the device by using the device's volume control buttons which are most often found on the side of the device.
Some Android devices have Force close or uninstall the
a limited number of
apps you do not want SYNC
bluetooth ports apps can to find. If the app has a "Ford
I can only see some of the use to connect. If you have SYNC" setting, disable that
AppLink apps running on my more AppLink apps on your setting in the app's settings
phone listed in SYNC's phone than the number of
menu on the phone.
Mobile Apps Menu.
available Bluetooth ports,
you will not see all of your
apps listed in SYNC's mobile
apps menu.
SYNC System Reset
The SYNC system in your vehicle has System Reset feature that can be performed if the function of a SYNC feature is lost. This reset is intended to restore functionality and will not erase any information previously stored in the system (Such as paired devices, phonebook, call history, text messages, or user settings). To perform a System Reset,
press and hold the Seek Up (>>) button while pressing and holding the Radio Power button. Release both buttons after 2-3 seconds. Please allow a few minutes for the reset to complete. After a few minutes has passed you can resume using the SYNC
system.
396
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
SYNCTM 3
GENERAL INFORMATION
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, crash and injury. We strongly recommend that you use extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle. We recommend against the use of any hand-held device while driving and encourage the use of voice-operated systems when possible. Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the use of electronic devices while driving.
Getting to Know Your System
The SYNC 3 system allows you to interact with a variety of features using the touchscreen and voice commands. By integrating with your Bluetooth enabled phone, the touchscreen provides easy interaction with audio, multimedia, climate control, navigation, and your phone's SYNC 3 compatible apps.
Using the Touchscreen
To operate the touchscreen, you can simply touch the item or option that you want to select. The button changes color when you select it.
The SYNC 3 layout allows you to quickly select the feature you wish to use.
E269856
397
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
SYNCTM 3
Item A
B C
D E
Menu Item Status Bar
Home Clock
Outside Temperature Feature Bar
Action and Description
This bar displays icons and messages pertaining to current system activities including climate settings, voice commands and phone functions such as text messages.
This button is available on the main screens. Pressing it takes you to the home screen view.
This shows the current time. You can set the clock manually or have it controlled by the vehicle's GPS location. See Settings (page 446).
This displays the current outside temperature.
You can touch any of the buttons on this bar to select a feature.
The touchscreen allows you quick access to all of your comfort, navigation, communication and entertainment options. Using the status and feature bar you can quickly select the feature you want to use.
Note: Your system is equipped with a feature that allows you to access and control audio features for 10 minutes after you switch the ignition off (and no doors open).
The Status Bar
Additional icons also display in the status bar depending on market, vehicle options and current operation. If a feature is not active, the icon does not display. Certain icons may move to the left or right depending on what options are active.
398
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
SYNCTM 3
i
E270077
Callout A B
C
D E
Item
Description
Driver Temperature
This shows the temperature the driver selects through the climate control system.
Heated steering wheel
(If equipped)
When you activate the heated steering wheel option on the touch screen, this icon displays. It only displays when there is not a physical button for the heated steering wheel.
Passenger Temperature
When the passenger's temperature has been adjusted and is no longer linked to the driver's temperature, it displays here. If Dual is turned off and the temperatures are linked, the passenger's temperature does not display.
Microphone Mute This icon displays when your phone's microphone is muted. A caller cannot hear you.
Mute
This icon displays when the audio system is muted.
399
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
SYNCTM 3
Callout F
G H I J K L
Item Download
Wi-Fi Wi-Fi in Range Signal Strength Text Message 911 Assist Off In-Call
Description
This icon appears when SYNC 3 receives a software update. Pressing the icon shows more details about the new software.
This icon appears if a Wi-Fi network is connected.
An available Wi-Fi network is within range.
This icon displays the phone signal strength and the roaming signal strength.
This icon displays when you receive a text message on your phone.
This icon displays when 911 Assist is set to off and your phone is connected to SYNC.
This icon displays when a phone call is active.
Messages may also appear in the status bar to provide you with notifications. You can select the message to view the associated feature.
Feature Bar
Audio
Feature Bar Item
Climate Phone
Navigation (If equipped)
Functions
Allows you to control the media playing in your vehicle. You can control all audio features including AM, FM and satellite radio, CDs, and media streaming over a Bluetooth device or through a USB connection.
Allows you to adjust the temperature, fan speed and airflow within the vehicle.
Allows you to make calls, receive calls, and access the phonebook of your connected device.
Allows you to see your vehicle's location on a virtual road map, get driving directions to your destination and find points of interest along your route.
400
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
SYNCTM 3
Apps
Feature Bar Item
Settings
Functions
Connect and control SYNC 3 compatible apps running on your iphone or android device. Also, access built-in additional features such as SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link (if equipped).
If your vehicle is a hybrid, plug-in hybrid, or electric this is also where your settings and power information is located.
You can customize your system with various settings for the touchscreen display, feature preferences, and how you want to interact with your vehicle.
Cleaning the Touchscreen
You can remove fingerprints with a dry, clean, soft cloth.
If dirt or fingerprints are still on the screen, apply a small amount of alcohol to the cloth and try to clean it again.
Note: Do not use detergent or any type of solvent to clean the touchscreen.
Note: Do not pour or spray alcohol onto the touchscreen.
Using Voice Recognition
Using voice commands allows you to keep your hands on the wheel and focus on what is in front of you. The system provides feedback through audible tones, prompts, questions and spoken confirmations depending on the situation and the chosen level of interaction (voice settings).
The system also asks short questions (confirmation prompts) when it is not sure of your request or when there are multiple possible responses to your request.
When using voice commands, words and icons may appear in the status bar indicating the status of the voice command session. See Using Voice Recognition (page 410).
Accessing and Adjusting Modes Through Your Vehicle Information Display (If Equipped)
Depending on your vehicle and selected options you may be able to control some of the SYNC 3 features on your information display.
You can make the following adjustments using the information display SYNC 3 screen:
Option
Information
Entertain- Information for current audio playing.
ment
Select source.
Naviga- View current road and speed limit (if information is available). tion
401
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
SYNCTM 3
Option
Information
View current route, next turn, time to your destination (depending on cluster level), distance to destination (depending on cluster level), and ability to cancel route.
If you do not have an active navigation route programed, the compass is shown.
Phone If you are not on a call, a call can be made by selecting:1
All calls
Incoming calls Outgoing calls Missed calls
If you are on a call, the call information is displayed on the information display.
If you are receiving a call, you can accept it by selecting OK on the right-hand steering wheel controls.
1 Depending on your vehicle options, all of these choices may not display.
Use the OK and arrow buttons on the right side of your steering wheel to scroll through the available modes.
The selection menu expands and different options appear.
· Press the up and down arrows to scroll through the modes.
· Press the right arrow to enter the mode, use the left arrow to exit the mode.
· Press the up and down arrows to make adjustments within the chosen mode.
· Press OK to confirm your selection.
Note: If your vehicle is not equipped with navigation, compass appears in the display instead of navigation. If you press the right arrow to go into the compass menu, you can see the compass graphic. The compass displays the direction in which the vehicle is traveling, not true direction (for example, if the vehicle is traveling west, the middle of the compass graphic displays west; north displays to the left of west though its true direction is to the right of west).
Using the Controls on the Steering Wheel
Depending on your vehicle and option package, you can use different controls on your steering wheel to interact with the touchscreen system in different ways.
VOL: Control the volume of audio output.
Mute: Mute the audio output.
Voice: Press to start a voice session. Press again to stop the voice prompt and immediately begin speaking. Press and hold to end a voice session.
SEEK NEXT:
· While in radio mode, press to seek between memory presets.
· While in USB, Bluetooth Audio or CD mode, press to seek between songs or press and hold to fast seek.
SEEK PREVIOUS:
· While in radio mode, press to seek between memory presets.
· While in USB, Bluetooth Audio or CD mode, press to seek between songs or press and hold to fast seek.
402
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
SYNCTM 3
PHONE ACCEPT: Press to answer a call or switch between calls.
PHONE REJECT: Press to end a call or reject an incoming call.
Note: On some models, SEEK NEXT may be combined with PHONE REJECT and SEEK PREVIOUS may be combined with PHONE ACCEPT.
M: Touch the control repeatedly to switch between media sources (modes).
See Steering Wheel (page 73).
Using the Controls on the Bezel
Depending on your vehicle and option package, you may also have these controls on your instrument panel:
· Power: Switch the audio system on and off.
· VOL: Control the volume of playing audio.
· Seek and Tune: Use as you normally would in audio modes.
· Eject: Eject a CD from the audio system.
· SOURCE or MEDIA: Press repeatedly to advance through available media modes.
· SOUND: Press to access the Sound menu where you can adjust sound and other audio settings.
· 1-6: Press and hold to store or press to select an AM, FM or SIRIUS memory preset. See Audio System (page 345).
· DISP: Switch the display on or off. You can also touch the screen to switch the display back on.
· Temperature, fan and climate control buttons: Control the temperature, fan speed or settings of the climate control system. See Climate Control (page 121).
911 Assist (If Equipped)
WARNING: Unless the 911 Assist setting is set on before a crash, the system will not dial for help which could delay response time, potentially increasing the risk of serious injury or death after a crash.
WARNING: Do not wait for 911 Assist to make an emergency call if you can do it yourself. Dial emergency services immediately to avoid delayed response time which could increase the risk of serious injury or death after a crash. If you do not hear 911 Assist within five seconds of the crash, the system or phone may be damaged or non-functional.
WARNING: Always place your phone in a secure location in your vehicle so it does not become a projectile or get damaged in a crash. Failure to do so may cause serious injury to someone or damage the phone which could prevent 911 Assist from working properly.
Note: The SYNC 911 Assist feature must be set on before the incident.
Note: The SYNC 911 Assist feature only operates in the U.S., Canada or in a territory in which 911 is the emergency number.
Note: Before setting this feature on, make sure that you read the 911 Assist Privacy Notice later in this section for important information.
Note: If any user sets 911 Assist to on or off, that setting applies for all paired phones. If 911 Assist is switched off and the phone is connected to SYNC, an icon displays on the status bar.
403
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
SYNCTM 3
Note: Every phone operates differently. While SYNC 911 Assist works with most cellular phones, some may have trouble using this feature.
If a crash deploys an airbag (excluding knee airbags and rear inflatable safety belts [if equipped]) or activates the fuel pump shut-off, your SYNC-equipped vehicle may be able to contact emergency services by dialing 911 through a paired and connected Bluetooth enabled phone. You can learn more about the 911 Assist feature, by visiting:
Website
www.owner.ford.com www.syncmyride.ca www.syncmaroute.ca
For important information about airbag deployment and the fuel pump shut-off please see the Supplementary Restrains and Roadside Emergencies sections of your owner manual.
To switch 911 Assist on and off please view the settings information. See Settings (page 446).
To make sure that 911 Assist works correctly:
· SYNC must be powered and working properly at the time of the incident and throughout feature activation and use.
· The 911 Assist feature must be set on before the incident.
· You must pair and connect a Bluetooth enabled and compatible cell phone to SYNC.
· A connected Bluetooth enabled phone must have the ability to make and maintain an outgoing call at the time of the incident.
· A connected Bluetooth enabled phone must have adequate network coverage, battery power and signal strength.
· The vehicle must have battery power and be located in the U.S., Canada or in a territory in which 911 is the emergency number.
In the Event of a Crash
Not all crashes will deploy an airbag or activate the fuel pump shut-off (the triggers for 911 Assist). If a connected cell phone sustains damage or loses its connection to SYNC during a crash, SYNC will search for and try to connect to a previously paired cell phone; SYNC will then attempt to call the emergency services.
Before making the call:
· SYNC provides a short window of time (about 10 seconds) to cancel the call. If you fail to cancel the call, SYNC attempts to dial 911.
· SYNC says the following, or a similar message: "SYNC will attempt to call 911, to cancel the call, press Cancel on your screen or press and hold the phone button on your steering wheel."
If you do not cancel the call, and SYNC makes a successful call, a pre-recorded message plays for the 911 operator, and then the occupant(s) in your vehicle is able to talk with the operator. Be prepared to provide your name, phone number and location immediately, because not all 911 systems are capable of receiving this information electronically.
404
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
SYNCTM 3
911 Assist May Not Work If
· Your cellular phone or 911 Assist hardware sustains damage in a crash.
· The vehicle's battery or the SYNC system has no power.
· The phone(s) thrown from your vehicle are the ones paired and connected to the system.
911 Assist Privacy Notice
When you switch on 911 Assist, it may disclose to emergency services that your vehicle has been in a crash involving the deployment of an airbag or activation of the fuel pump shut-off. Certain versions or updates to 911 Assist may also be capable of electronically or verbally disclosing to 911 operators your vehicle location or other details about your vehicle or crash to assist 911 operators to provide the most appropriate emergency services. If you do not want to disclose this information, do not switch the feature on.
Safety Information
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, crash and injury. We strongly recommend that you use extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle. We recommend against the use of any hand-held device while driving and encourage the use of voice-operated systems when possible. Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the use of electronic devices while driving.
· Do not attempt to service or repair the system. Have an authorized dealer check your vehicle.
· Do not operate playing devices if the power cords or cables are broken, split or damaged. Place cords and cables out of the way, so they do not interfere with the operation of pedals, seats, compartments or safe driving abilities.
· Do not leave playing devices in your vehicle during extreme conditions as it could cause them damage. See your device's user guide for further information.
· For your safety, some SYNC 3 functions are speed-dependent. Their use is limited to when your vehicle is traveling at speeds under 3 mph (5 km/h). Make sure that you review your device's manual before using it with SYNC 3.
Speed-restricted Features
Some features of this system may be too difficult to use while your vehicle is moving so they are restricted from use unless your vehicle is stationary.
· Screens crowded with information, such as Point of Interest reviews and ratings, SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link sports scores, movie times or ski conditions.
· Any action that requires you to use a keyboard is restricted, such as entering a navigation destination or editing information.
· All lists are limited so the user can view fewer entries (such as phone contacts or recent phone call entries).
See the following table for more specific examples.
405
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
SYNCTM 3
Cellular Phone System Functionality
Wi-Fi Text Messages Navigation
Restricted features
Pairing a Bluetooth phone. Browsing of list entries is limited for phone contacts and recent phone calls. Editing the keypad code. Enabling Valet Mode. Editing settings while the rear view camera or active park assist are active. Editing Wi-Fi settings. Editing the list of wireless networks. Connecting to a new Wi-Fi network. Viewing received text messages. Using the keyboard to enter a destination. Adding or editing Navigation Favorites entries or Avoid Areas.
Creating a SYNC Owner Account
Why do I need a SYNC owner account? · Essential for keeping up with the latest
software and connected features. · Access to customer support for any
questions you may have. · Maintain account permissions. Visit the website to sign up and register.
Website
www.owner.ford.com www.syncmyride.ca
Website
www.syncmaroute.ca
FordPassTM Connect (If Equipped)
With a FordPass-equipped vehicle, you can use FordPass to track your vehicle's location and remotely access vehicle features such as start, lock and unlock and vehicle status including fuel level and approximate mileage. You can also schedule specific times to remotely start your vehicle so it's ready to hit the road as soon as you are. FordPass is available through a free download via the Apple App Store® or Google PlayTM. Message and data rates may apply. Services may be limited by mobile phone network coverage area.
406
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
SYNCTM 3
Updating Your System
You can choose to download the update onto a USB drive or use Wi-Fi to deliver automatic updates.
USB Updates
To use the USB update you need to log into your owner account and visit the SYNC software update page.
Website
www.owner.ford.com www.syncmyride.ca www.syncmaroute.ca
The website notifies you if an update is available. You can then select to download the update.
You will need an empty USB drive. Please check the website for minimum requirements. Once you have inserted the USB drive into your computer, choose to start the download. Follow the instructions provided to download the files to the USB drive.
The installation of most files occurs in the background, and does not interrupt your use of the system. Navigation updates cannot be installed in the background, because the files are too large.
To install the update in your vehicle, remove anything that is plugged in the USB ports on the media hub and plug in the USB drive containing the update. When the USB drive is plugged in, the installation should begin immediately. After a successful installation, the update is available the next time the vehicle is started.
Please reference the website for any further actions.
Updating Over Wi-Fi
To update your System over Wi-Fi your vehicle must be connected to a Wi-Fi access point. Data rates may apply.
To connect your system to Wi-Fi, select:
Menu Item
Settings Wi-Fi
Available Wi-Fi Networks
You can then select your Wi-Fi network. You may have to enter the security code if the network is secured. The system confirms when it has connected to the network.
You must also give the system permission to update automatically. Upon vehicle delivery, the System asks you if you would like to use the automatic update feature. If you agree to automatic updates, you can press OK to confirm. If this selection does not appear upon vehicle delivery you can access it through the General Settings. See Settings (page 446). You can also perform a master reset. See SYNCTM 3 Troubleshooting (page 460).
407
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
SYNCTM 3
If you would like to switch this feature on later, select:
Menu Item
Settings
General
Automatic System Updates
From this menu, you can enable automatic updates. If you have not done so already, the system prompts you to set up a Wi-Fi connection when you enable this feature.
When the system is connected via Wi-Fi and automatic updates are enabled, your system checks for software updates periodically. If a new version is available, it downloads at that time. Software downloads can take place for up to 30 minutes after you have switched your vehicle off. The updates do not interrupt the normal use of your SYNC 3 system. If a download does not complete for any reason, the download continues where it left off at the next Wi-Fi connected opportunity. Upon activation of an update, a banner displays on the touchscreen indicating the system update. Select the icon to see more detail. This icon displays for two ignition cycles.
To switch this feature off:
Menu Item
Settings
General
Automatic System Updates
In this menu selection, you can change the selection for automatic updates to OFF.
Customer Assistance
The SYNC support team is available to help you with any questions you are not able to answer on your own.
Monday-Saturday, 8:30am-8:00pm EST.
United States: 1-800-392-3673.
Canada: 1-800-565-3673.
Mexico: 01-800-719-8466.
Times are subject to change due to holidays.
Privacy Information
When you connect a cellular phone to SYNC 3, the system creates a profile within your vehicle that links to that cellular phone. This profile helps in offering you more cellular features and operating more efficiently. Among other things, this profile may contain data about your cellular phone book, text messages (read and unread), and call history, including history of calls when your cell phone was not connected to the system. In addition, if you connect a media device, the system creates and retains an index of supported media content. The system also records a short diagnostic log of approximately 10 minutes of all recent system activity. The log profile and other system data may be used to improve the system and help diagnose any problems that may occur.
The cellular profile, media device index, and diagnostic log remain in your vehicle unless you delete them and are generally accessible only in your vehicle when the cellular phone or media player is connected.
If you no longer plan to use the system or your vehicle, we recommend you perform a Master Reset to erase all stored information. You can find more information about the Master Reset in General Settings. See Settings (page 446). System
408
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
SYNCTM 3
data cannot be accessed without special equipment and access to your vehicle's SYNC 3 module. Ford Motor Company, Ford of Canada and The Lincoln Motor Company do not access the system data for any purpose other than as described absent consent, a court order, or where
HOME SCREEN
required by law enforcement, other government authorities, or other third parties acting with lawful authority. Other parties may seek to access the information independently of Ford Motor Company, Ford of Canada and The Lincoln Motor Company.
E224962
Item A
Tile Audio
Home screen display Shows the active media source.
409
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
SYNCTM 3
Item
Tile
Home screen display
If your vehicle does not have navigation, this space contains the compass.
B
Phone
The name of the connected phone appears on the screen. The status of the phone features also appear. This includes signal strength, battery charge, text messaging and roaming.
C
Navigation * This map displays your current location or current route in
real time.
When you have navigation active, you also see the next
turn and the length of time and distance to your destina-
tion.
If your vehicle does not have navigation, this space contains
the audio information.
* If equipped.
You can touch any of the feature displays to access that feature.
Anytime you select the home button, the system returns you to this screen.
USING VOICE RECOGNITION
The SYNC 3 system allows you to use voice commands, to control features like audio and climate controls. By using voice commands, you can keep your hands on the wheel and your eyes on the road.
You can access each feature controlled by SYNC 3 through a variety of commands.
To activate the SYNC 3 voice commands push the voice E142599 button on the steering wheel and wait for the prompt.
___ is a dynamic listing, meaning that it can be the name of anything, such as artist, the name of contact or number. The context and the description of the command tell you what to say for this dynamic option.
There are some commands that work for every feature, these commands are:
Voice Command
Action and Description
Main Menu
Brings you to the main menu.
Go back
Returns you to the previous screen.
Cancel
Ends the voice session.
List of Commands Gives you a list of possible voice commands.
___ List of Commands You can name any feature and the system gives a list of commands available for the feature. For example, you could say:
410
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
SYNCTM 3
Voice Command
Next Page Previous Page Help
Action and Description
Phone List of Commands
Navigation List of Commands
You can use this command to view the next page of options on any screen where multiple pages of choices are given.
You can use this command to view the previous page of options on any screen where multiple pages of choices are given.
Gives you available commands you can use on the current screen.
Included here are some of the most popular commands for each SYNC 3 feature.
Audio Voice Commands
___ is a dynamic listing, meaning that for audio voice commands it can be the name of a Sirius channel or a channel number, a radio frequency number, or the name of an artist, album, song or a genre.
To control the media features, press the voice button and when prompted, say:
Voice command
Description
Sirius Channel ___
1 You can say the Sirius channel name or number such as "Sirius channel 16".
You can also turn to a Sirius channel by saying the channel's name, such as "The Pulse".
AM ___ FM ___
Allows you to tune to a specific FM or AM frequency such as "FM 88.7" or "AM 1580".
FM ___ HD ___
1 Allows you to tune to a specific HD frequency such as "FM 88.7 HD 1".
Bluetooth Audio
Allows you to listen to music on your Bluetooth connected device.
USB
Allows you to listen to music on your USB connected device.
Play Genre ___ Play Playlist ___ Play Artist ___ Play Album ___
For USB audio only, you can say the name of an artist, album, song or a genre to listen to that selection. Your system must finish indexing before this option is available. For example, you could say "Play artist The Beatles" or "Play song Penny Lane".
411
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
SYNCTM 3
Voice command
Description
Play Podcast ___
Play Song ___
Play Audiobook ___
Browse ___ Browse Artist ___ Browse Album ___ Browse Genre ___
For USB audio only, you can say the name of an artist, album, or a genre to browse by that selection. Your system must finish indexing before this option is available. For example you can say "Browse artist The Beatles" or "Browse genre folk".
Browse Playlist ___
Browse Audiobook ___
Browse Podcast ___ 1 This option may not be available in all markets or may require a subscription.
Climate Voice Commands(IfEquipped)
You can control the temperature of the vehicle using voice commands.
___ is a dynamic listing, meaning that for climate voice commands it can be the desired degrees for the temperature setting.
To adjust the temperature, say: Voice command
Set Temperature ___
Description
Adjust the temperature between 6085°F (15.529.5°C).
Phone Voice Commands
Pairing a Phone
You can use voice commands to connect your Bluetooth enabled phone to the system.
To pair your phone, press the voice button and when prompted, say:
Voice command Pair Phone
Description
Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the pairing process. See Settings (page 446).
412
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
SYNCTM 3
Making Calls ___ is a dynamic listing, meaning that for
phone voice commands it can be the name of the contact you wish to call or the digits you want to dial.
Press the voice button and say a command similar to the following:
Voice command Call ___ Call ___ at ___ Dial ___
Description
Allows you to call a specific contact from your phonebook such as "Call Jenny".
Allows you to call a specific contact from your phonebook at a specific location such as "Call Jenny at Home".
Allows you to dial a specific number such as "Dial 867-5309".
Please make sure that you are saying the contact name exactly as it appears in your contact list.
Once you have provided the digits of the phone number, you can say the following commands:
Voice Command <0-9>
Dial Delete Clear
Description If you did not enter the full number with the first command, you can continue saying the number. Tells SYNC 3 to make the phone call. Tells SYNC 3 to erase the last block of digits you state. Tells SYNC 3 to erase the entire number.
Text Message Voice Commands
To access text message options, press the voice button and say:
Voice command
Description
Listen to Message Listen to text message ___
Reply to Message
You can say the number of the message you would like to hear.
413
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
SYNCTM 3
Navigation Voice Commands (If
Equipped)
Setting a Destination You can use any of the following commands to set a destination or find a
point of interest.
___ is a dynamic listing, meaning that for navigation voice commands it can be a POI category or a major brand name, where major brand name is a chain with more than 20 locations
You can find an address, a point of interest (POI), or search for points of interest by category:
Voice command
Description
Find an Address
Allows you to enter the address search functionality. You can also search for an address in a specific state or province.
Find a ___
State the name of the POI category or major brand name you would like to search for such as "Find restaurants".
Find a POI
Allows you to enter the POI search functionality.
Find an Intersection Allows you to enter the intersection search functionality.
Find the Nearest <POI Category>
State the name of a POI category or major brand name you would like to search for.
Show Previous Destinations
Allows you to see a list of your previous destinations.
Show Favorites
Allows you to see a list of your favorite destinations.
Drive Home
Allows you to route to your home address.
Drive to Work
Allows you to route to your work address.
In addition, you can say these commands when a route is active:
Voice command
Description
Cancel Route
Cancels the current route.
Detour
Allows you to select an alternate route.
Repeat Instruction Repeats the last guidance prompt.
Show Route
Displays the active route.
Route Summary
Displays the list of upcoming maneuvers.
414
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
SYNCTM 3
Voice command Where Am I Zoom in Zoom out
Description Provides current location. Allows you to zoom in on the map. Allows you to zoom out from the map.
Mobile App Voice Commands (If Equipped)
The following voice commands are always available:
Voice command
Description
Mobile Apps
SYNC 3 will prompt you to say the name of an app to start it on SYNC 3.
List Mobile Apps SYNC 3 will list all of the currently available Mobile Apps.
Find Mobile Apps SYNC 3 will search and connect to compatible app(s) running on your mobile device.
There are also voice commands that you can use when app(s) are connected to SYNC 3:
Voice command
Description
Say the name of an At any time, you can say the name of a mobile app to start the
app
mobile app on SYNC 3.
Say the name of an SYNC 3 will list the available voice commands for the specified app, followed by app if the app is running on SYNC 3. help
SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link Voice Commands (If Equipped)
SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link may not be available in all markets. Activation and a subscription are required.
415
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
SYNCTM 3
You can say the following commands to access SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link:
Voice command
Description
Show Traffic
Displays a list of traffic incidents.
Show Weather Map Displays the current weather map.
Show Fuel Prices Displays a list of fuel prices.
Show 5 Day Fore- Displays the 5 day weather forecast. cast
Help
Voice Settings Commands
You can say the following commands to access the voice settings:
Voice command
Description
Voice Settings
Allows you to enter the voice settings functionality.
Interaction Mode Standard
Sets standard prompting with longer prompts.
Interaction Mode Advanced
Sets advanced prompting with shorter prompts.
Call Confirmation On Allows the system to confirm before making a phone call.
Call Confirmation Off The system does not confirm before placing a call.
Voice Command Lists On The system displays a short list of available commands.
Voice Command Lists Off The system does not display the list of commands.
You can use the volume control to adjust the volume of the system voice prompts. While prompt is active, adjust the volume control up or down to your desired setting.
Note: Depending on the current climate control settings, the fan speed may automatically go down while issuing voice commands or while making and receiving phone calls via SYNC to reduce the amount of background noise in the vehicle. The fan speed will automatically return to normal operation once the voice session ends. You can adjust the fan speed during a voice session, simply press the fan buttons (or turn the fan knob) to increase or decrease the fan speed to the setting you prefer.
416
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
SYNCTM 3
To disable this automatic fan speed reduction feature during voice sessions, press and hold the climate control AC and Recirculated air buttons simultaneously, release and then increase fan speed within 2 seconds. To re-enable this feature, repeat the above sequence.
ENTERTAINMENT
E205443
Message Message and description
A
Sources
B
Direct Tune
C
Presets
You can access these options using the touchscreen or voice commands.
Sources
Press this button to select the source of media you want to listen to.
417
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
SYNCTM 3
Menu item
AM
FM
SIRIUS *
CD
*
USB
The name of the USB that is plugged in displays here.
Bluetooth Stereo
Apps
If you have SYNC 3 compatible apps on your connected smart phone, they display here as individual source selections.
* This feature may not be available in all markets and requires an active subscription.
AM/FM Radio
Tuning a Station You can use the tune or seek controls on the radio bezel to select a station.
To tune a station using the touchscreen, select:
Menu item
Direct Tune
Once you have entered the station's call numbers, you can select:
Menu item
Action and description
Enter
Press to begin playing the station you have entered.
Cancel
Press to exit without changing the station.
A pop up appears, allowing you to type in the frequency of a station. You can only enter a valid station for the source you are currently listening to.
You can press the backspace button to delete the previously entered number.
Presets
To set a new preset, tune to the station and then press and hold one of the memory preset buttons. The audio mutes briefly while the system saves the station and then returns.
There are two preset banks available for AM and three banks for FM. To access additional presets, tap the preset button. The indicator on the preset button shows which bank of presets you are currently viewing.
418
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
SYNCTM 3
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio (If Activated) Note: This feature may not be available in all markets and requires an active subscription.
E234451
SiriusXM satellite radio is a subscription-based satellite radio service that broadcasts a variety of music, sports, news, weather, traffic and entertainment programming. Your factory-installed SiriusXM satellite radio system includes hardware and a limited subscription term that begins on the date of sale or lease of your vehicle. See an authorized dealer for availability.
For more information on extended subscription terms (a service fee is required), the online media player and a list of SiriusXM satellite radio channels, and other features, please visit www.siriusxm.com in the United States, www.siriusxm.ca in Canada, or call SiriusXM at 1-888-539-7474.
Note: SiriusXM reserves the unrestricted right to change, rearrange, add or delete programming. This includes canceling, moving or adding particular channels, and its prices, at any time, with or without notice to you. Ford Motor Company shall not be responsible for any such programming changes.
Note: This receiver includes the eCos real-time operating system. eCos is published under the eCos License.
The following buttons are available for SiriusXM:
Menu item
Action and description
Browse
Touch this button to see a list of available stations.
Direct Tune
A pop-up appears, allowing you to type in the call numbers of a station. Once you enter the stations call numbers, you can select:
Enter
The system tunes to the station you select.
Cancel
You exit the pop-up and the current station continues to play.
You can press the backspace button to delete the previous number.
419
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
SYNCTM 3
Menu item Replay
ALERT
Action and description
Replay audio on the current channel. You can replay approximately 45 minutes of audio as long as you remain tuned to the current station. Changing stations erases the previous audio.
Live
When you are in replay mode, you are not
able to select a different preset until you
return to live audio. Pressing this button
returns you to the live broadcast.
Save the current song, artist, or team as a favorite. The system alerts you when it plays again on any channel. Selecting this button allows you to enable and edit alerts. See Settings (page 446).
Memory Presets
To set a preset, tune to the station then press and hold one of the memory preset buttons. The audio mutes briefly while the system saves the station and returns once the station is stored.
There are three preset banks available for SiriusXM. To access additional presets, tap the preset button. The indicator on the preset button shows which bank of presets you are currently viewing.
Satellite Radio Electronic Serial Number (ESN)
You need your ESN to activate, modify or track your satellite radio account. See Settings (page 446).
SiriusXM Satellite Radio Reception Factors and Troubleshooting
Antenna obstructions
Terrain
Station overload
Satellite radio signal interference
Potential reception issues
For optimal reception performance, keep the antenna clear of snow and ice build-up and keep luggage and other materials as far away from the antenna as possible.
Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freeway overpasses, parking garages, dense tree foliage and thunderstorms can interfere with your reception.
When you pass a ground-based broadcast-repeating tower, a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and the audio system may mute.
Your display may show ACQUIRING... to indicate the interference and the audio system may mute.
420
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
SYNCTM 3
Troubleshooting tips
Message
Cause
Action
Acquiring Signal
Radio requires more than two No action required. This
seconds to produce audio for message should disappear
the selected channel.
shortly.
Satellite antenna fault There is an internal module or system failure present.
SIRIUS system failure
If this message does not clear shortly, or with an ignition key cycle, your receiver may have a fault. See an authorized dealer for service.
Invalid Channel
The channel is no longer avail- Tune to another channel or
able.
choose another preset.
Unsubscribed Channel Your subscription does not include this channel.
Contact SiriusXM at 1-888539-7474 to subscribe to the channel, or tune to another channel.
Satellite acquiring signal...
The signal is lost from the Siri- The signal is blocked. When
usXM satellite or SiriusXM
you move into an open area,
tower to your vehicle antenna. the signal should return.
Updating...
Update of channel programming in progress.
No action required. The process may take up to three minutes.
Questions? Call 1888-539-7474
Your satellite service is no longer available.
Contact SiriusXM at 1-888539-7474 to resolve subscription issues.
None found. Check channel guide.
All the channels in the selected Use the channel guide to turn
category are either skipped or off the Lock or Skip function on
locked.
that station.
SIRIUS Subscription updated
SiriusXM has updated the channels available for your vehicle.
No action required.
HD RadioTM Information (If Available)
Note: This feature may not be available in all markets.
To activate HD radio, please see the Radio Settings in the Settings Chapter. See Settings (page 446).
Note: HD Radio broadcasts are not available in all markets.
421
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
SYNCTM 3
HD Radio technology is the digital evolution of analog AM/FM radio. Your system has a special receiver that allows it to receive digital broadcasts (where available) in addition to the analog broadcasts, it already receives. Digital broadcasts provide a better sound quality than analog broadcasts with free, crystal-clear audio and no static or distortion. For more information, and a guide to available stations and programming, please visit:
Website
www.hdradio.com
When HD Radio is on and you tune to a station broadcasting HD Radio technology, you may notice the following indicators on your screen:
The HD logo is grey when acquiring a digital station, and then changes to orange when digital audio is playing. When this logo is available, you may also see Title and Artist fields on-screen.
The multicast indicator appears in FM mode (only) if the current station is broadcasting multiple digital broadcasts. The highlighted numbers signify available digital channels where new or different content is available. HD1 signifies the main programming status and is available in analog and digital broadcasts. Other multicast stations (HD2 through HD7) are only available digitally.
Note: There is also an additional feature for stations that have more than 1 HD multicast (For example, HD1 or HD2). The HD logo and Radio text appears as a button. Pressing this button allows you cycle through all of the HD stations on that specific frequency. For example, if you are on 101.1 and it has HD1, HD2, HD3, pressing the button repeatedly causes the radio to cycle through the HD stations in a cyclic increasing order.
E142616
When HD Radio broadcasts are active, you can access the following functions:
Message
Action and description
Presets
Allows you to save an active channel as a memory preset. Touch and hold a memory preset slot until the sound returns. There is a brief mute while the radio saves the station. Sound returns when the channel saves. When switching to an HD2 or HD3 memory preset, the sound mutes before the digital audio plays, because the system has to reacquire the digital signal.
Note: As with any station you save, you cannot access the saved station if your vehicle is outside the station's reception area.
422
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
SYNCTM 3
HD Radio Reception and Station Troubleshooting
Reception area Station blending
Potential reception issues
If you are listening to a multicast station and you are on the fringe of the reception area, the station may mute due to weak signal strength.
If you are listening to HD1, the system changes back to the analog broadcast until the digital broadcast is available again. However, if you are listening to any of the possible HD2-HD7 multicast channels, the station mutes and stays muted unless it is able to connect to the digital signal again.
When the system first receives a station (aside from HD2HD7 multicast stations), it first plays the station in the analog version. Once the receiver verifies the station is an HD Radio station, it shifts to the digital version. Depending on the station quality, you may hear a slight sound change when the station changes from analog to digital. Blending is the shift from analog to digital sound or digital back to analog sound.
In order to provide the best possible experience, use the contact form to report any station issues found while listening to a station broadcasting with HD Radio technology. Independent entities own and operate each station. These stations are responsible for ensuring all audio streams and data fields are accurate.
Potential station issues
Issues
Cause
Action
Echo, stutter, skip or This is poor time alignment by No action required. This is a
repeat in audio.
the radio broadcaster.
broadcast issue.
Increase or decrease in
audio volume.
Sound fading or blending in and out.
The radio is shifting between analog and digital audio.
No action required. The reception issue may clear up as you continue to drive.
There is an audio mute The digital multicast is not
No action required. This is
delay when selecting available until the HD Radio normal behavior. Wait until the
HD2 or HD3, multicast broadcast is decoded. Once audio is available.
preset or Direct Tune. decoded, the audio is available.
423
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
SYNCTM 3
Potential station issues
Issues
Cause
Action
Cannot access HD2 or The previously stored multicast No action required. The station
HD3 multicast channel preset or direct tune is not
is not available in your current
when recalling a preset available in your current recep- location.
or from a direct tune. tion area.
Text information does Data service issue by the radio Fill out the station issue form.
not match currently broadcaster.
*
playing audio.
There is no text
Data service issue by the radio Fill out the station issue form.
information shown for broadcaster.
*
currently selected
frequency.
HD Radio Technology manufactured under license from DTS Inc. and foreign patents. HD Radio and the HD and HD Radio logos are proprietary trademarks of DTS Inc. Ford Motor Company and DTS Inc. are not responsible for the content sent using HD Radio technology. Content may be changed, added or deleted at any time at the station owner's discretion.
* You can find the form here:
Website
http://hdradio.com/stations/feedback
CD (If equipped) Once you select this option, the system returns you to the main audio screen. The current audio information appears on the screen.
The following buttons are also available:
Button
Function
Browse
You can use the browse button to select a track.
Repeat
Select this button and a small number one displays to indicate the track is set to repeat. For MP3 CDs, this button allows you to toggle through repeat off, repeat one track (a small number one displays), and repeat current folder (a small folder displays).
Shuffle
Select the shuffle symbol to have the audio on the disk play in random order.
You can use the forward, reverse, pause or play buttons to control the audio playback.
424
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
SYNCTM 3
Bluetooth Stereo or USB Bluetooth Stereo and USB allow you to
access media that you store on your Bluetooth device or USB device such as music, audio books or podcasts.
The following buttons are available for Bluetooth and USB:
Button
Function
Repeat
Pressing the repeat button toggles the repeat setting through three modes: repeat off (button not highlighted), repeat all (button highlighted) and repeat track (button highlighted with a small number one).
Shuffle
Play the tracks in random order.
You can use the forward, reverse, pause or play buttons to control the audio playback.
To get more information about the currently playing track, press the cover art or Info button.
For some devices, SYNC 3 is able to provide 30-second skip buttons when you listen to audio books or podcasts. These buttons allow you to skip forward or backward within a track.
While playing audio from a USB device you can look for certain music by selecting the following:
Browse New Search
Button
Function
If available, displays the list of tracks in the Now Playing playlist.
This option, which is available under browse, allows you to play all tracks or to filter the available media into one of the below categories.
Play All
Playlists
Artist
Albums
Songs
Genres
Podcasts
Audio books
425
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
SYNCTM 3
A-Z Jump
Button
Explore Device
Function
Composers
This button allows you to choose a specific letter to view within the category you are browsing.
If available, this allows you to browse the folders and files on your USB device.
USB Port
E229068
The USB port is on the instrument panel. This feature allows you to plug in USB media devices, memory sticks, flash drives or thumb drives, and charge devices if they support this feature. Select this option to play audio from your USB device. Apps The system supports the use of certain audio apps such as iHeartRadio through a USB or Bluetooth enabled device. Each app gives you different on-screen options depending on the app's content. See Apps (page 443).
Supported Media Players, Formats and Metadata Information
The system is capable of hosting nearly any digital media player, including iPod, iPhone, and most USB drives.
Supported audio formats include MP3, WMA, WAV, AAC, and FLAC.
Supported audio file extensions include MP3, WMA, WAV, M4A, M4B, AAC, and FLAC.
Supported USB file systems include: FAT, exFAT, and NTFS.
SYNC 3 is also able to organize the media from your USB device by metadata tags. Metadata tags, which are descriptive software identifiers embedded in the media files, provide information about the file.
If your indexed media files contain no information embedded in these metadata tags, SYNC 3 may classify the empty metadata tags as unknown.
SYNC 3 is capable of indexing up to 50,000 songs per USB device, for up to 10 devices.
CLIMATE
Touch the climate button on the touchscreen to access your climate control features.
426
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
SYNCTM 3
Note: You can switch temperature units between Fahrenheit and Celsius. See Settings (page 446).
Accessing the Climate Control Menu
E265038
Touch the button to access additional controls for the front climate system.
Directing the Airflow
Touch the button to direct airflow to the windshield air vents and de-mister.
Touch the button to direct airflow to the instrument panel air vents.
Touch the button to direct airflow to the footwell air vents.
You can direct air through any combination of these air vents.
Setting the Blower Motor Speed
Touch up or down to increase or decrease the volume of air that circulates in your vehicle.
Setting the Temperature
Touch up or down on the left-hand temperature control to set the left-hand temperature.
Note: This control also adjusts the right-hand side temperature when you switch off dual zone mode.
Touch up or down on the right-hand temperature control to set the right-hand temperature.
Switching Auto Mode On and Off
Touch the button to switch on automatic operation, then set the temperature.
The system adjusts the blower motor speed, air distribution, air conditioning operation, and outside or recirculated air to reach and maintain the temperature you have set.
Switching the Air Conditioning On and Off
A pop-up appears on the screen to display the air conditioning options.
MAX A/C: Touch the button to activate and maximize cooling. The driver and passenger temperatures are set to LO, recirculated air flows through the instrument panel vents, air conditioning automatically turns on and the fan automatically adjusts to the highest speed.
A/C: Touch to switch the air conditioning on or off. Use A/C with recirculated air to improve cooling performance and efficiency.
Note: In certain conditions, such as maximum defrost, the air conditioning compressor may continue to operate even though you switch off the air conditioning.
Switching the Climate Control On and Off
Touch the button.
Switching the Climate Controlled Seats On and Off
E265282
Touch the button to cycle through the various climate controlled seat settings and off.
427
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
SYNCTM 3
Switching Dual Zone Mode On and Off
E265280
Touch the button to switch on temperature control for the right-hand side of the vehicle.
Switching the Heated Exterior Mirrors On and Off
Touch the button.
E266189
Switching the Heated Rear Window On and Off
E184884
Touch the button to clear the rear window of thin ice and fog.
Switching the Heated Seats On and Off
Touch the button to cycle through the various heat settings and off.
Switching the Heated Steering Wheel On and Off
Touch the button.
Switching Maximum Air Conditioning On and Off
Touch the button for maximum cooling.
Recirculated air flows through the instrument panel air vents, air conditioning turns on and the blower motor adjusts to the highest speed.
Switching Maximum Defrost On and Off
Touch the button for maximum defrosting.
Air flows through the windshield air vents, and the blower motor adjusts to the highest speed.
You can also use this setting to defog and clear the windshield of a thin covering of ice.
Note: To prevent window fogging, you cannot select recirculated air when maximum defrost is on.
Note: The heated rear window also turns on when you select maximum defrost.
Switching Recirculated Air On and Off
Touch the button to switch between outside air and recirculated air.
The air currently in the passenger compartment recirculates. This may reduce the time needed to cool the interior, when used with A/C, and reduce unwanted odors from entering your vehicle.
Note: Recirculated air may turn off, or prevent you from switching on, in all air flow modes except MAX A/C to reduce the risk of fogging. Recirculation may also turn on and off in various air distribution control combinations during hot weather to improve cooling efficiency.
Switching the Ventilated Seats On and Off
E268558
Touch the button to cycle through the various ventilated seat settings and off.
428
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
SYNCTM 3
Accessing Rear Climate Controls
E270447
Touch the button to access additional controls for the rear climate system.
Rear Climate Control Lock Indicator
Touch the button.
E265289 When on, you can only operate the rear passenger settings
through the front controls.
Switching Rear Auto Mode On and Off
Touch the button to switch on rear automatic operation, then set the temperature.
Switching the Rear Climate Controlled Seats On and Off
E265282
Touch the button to cycle through the various climate controlled seat settings and off.
Switching the Rear Heated Seats On and Off
Touch the button to cycle through the various heat settings and off.
Switching the Rear Ventilated Seats On and Off
E268558
Touch the button to cycle through the various ventilated seat settings and off.
PHONE
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, crash and injury. We strongly recommend that you use extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle. We recommend against the use of any hand-held device while driving and encourage the use of voice-operated systems when possible. Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the use of electronic devices while driving.
Hands-free calling is one of the main features of the system. Once you pair your cell phone, you can access many options using the touchscreen or voice commands. While the system supports a variety of features, many are dependent on your cell phone's functionality.
Pairing Your Cell Phone for the First Time
Pair your Bluetooth enabled phone with the system before using the functions in hands-free mode.
Switch on Bluetooth on your device to begin pairing. See your phone's manual if necessary.
To add a phone, select:
Menu Item
Add a Bluetooth Device
1. Follow the on-screen instructions. 2. A prompt alerts you to search for the
system on your phone. 3. Select your vehicle on your phone.
429
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
SYNCTM 3
4. Confirm that the six-digit number appearing on your phone matches the six-digit number on the touchscreen.
5. The touchscreen indicates when the pairing is successful.
6. Your phone may prompt you to give the system permission to access information. To check your phone's compatibility, see your phone's manual or visit the website.
Alternatively, to add a phone, select:
Menu Item
Add a Bluetooth Device
Then select:
Discover Other Bluetooth Devices
1. Follow the on-screen instructions. 2. Select your phone's name when it
appears on the touchscreen. 3. Confirm that the six-digit number
appearing on your phone matches the six-digit number on the touchscreen.
4. The touchscreen indicates when the pairing is successful.
5. Your phone may prompt you to give the system permission to access information. To check your phone's compatibility, see your phone's manual or visit the website.
At a minimum, most cell phones with Bluetooth wireless technology support the following functions:
· Answering an incoming call.
· Ending a call.
· Dialing a number.
· Call waiting notification.
· Caller identification.
Other features, such as text messaging using Bluetooth and automatic phonebook download, are phone-dependent features.
Phone Menu
This menu becomes available after pairing a phone.
430
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
SYNCTM 3
G
E251249
Item A
B
C
Menu Item
Action and Description
Recent Call List
Displays your recent calls. You can place a call by selecting an entry from this list. You can also sort the calls by selecting the drop down menu at the top of the screen. You can choose:
All
Incoming
Outgoing
Missed
Contacts All of your contacts from your phone display in alphabetical order.
A-Z Jump
Selecting this button allows you to choose a specific letter to view.
Phone Settings
Displays the name of your phone and takes you to the phone settings options. From this menu, you can pair subsequent devices, set ring tones and alerts.
431
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
SYNCTM 3
Item D E F
G
Menu Item
Action and Description
Change Device
Gives you access to the list of paired or connected Bluetooth devices allowing you to change or select a device.
Text
Displays all recent text messages.
Messages
Phone Keypad
Use this keypad to dial in a phone number. Use the backspace button to delete numbers.
Call
Press this button to begin a
call.
Do Not Disturb
Touch this button to reject all incoming calls automatically. Text message notifications do not display on the screen. All ringtones and alerts are set to silent.
Users with phones having voice services may see a button to access the feature. For example, iPhone users see a Siri button. A press and hold of the voice button on the steering wheel also accesses this feature.
Making Calls
There are many ways to make calls from the SYNC 3 system, including using voice commands. See Using Voice Recognition (page 410). You can use the touchscreen to place calls as well.
432
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
SYNCTM 3
To call a number in your contacts, select:
Menu Item Action and Description
Contacts
You can then select the name of the contact you want to call. Any numbers stored for that contact display along with any stored contact photos. You can then select the number that you want to call. The system begins the call.
To call a number from your recent calls, select:
Menu Item Action and Description
Recent Call You can then select an
List
entry that you want to call.
The system begins the call.
To call a number that is not stored in your phone, select:
Menu Item Action and Description
Phone Keypad
Select the digits of the number you wish to call.
Call
The system begins the call.
Pressing the backspace button deletes the last digit you typed.
Receiving Calls
During an incoming call, an audible tone sounds. Caller information appears in the display if it is available.
To accept the call, select:
Menu Item
Accept Note: You can also accept the call by pressing the phone button on the steering wheel.
To reject the call, select:
Menu Item
Reject Note: You can also reject the call by pressing the phone button on the steering wheel.
Ignore the call by doing nothing. SYNC 3 logs it as a missed call.
During a Phone Call
During a phone call, the contacts name and number display on the screen along with the call duration. The phone status items are also visible: · Signal Strength. · Battery. You can select any of the following during an active phone call:
433
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
SYNCTM 3
Item End Call
Keypad Mute
Immediately end a phone call. You can also press the button on the steering wheel.
Press this to access the phone keypad.
You can switch the microphone off so the caller does not hear you.
Item Privacy
Transfer the call to the cell phone or back to SYNC 3.
Text Messaging
Note: Downloading and sending text messages using Bluetooth are cell phone-dependent features.
Note: Certain features in text messaging are speed-dependent and not available when your vehicle is traveling at speeds over 3 mph (5 km/h).
Receiving a Text Message
When a new message arrives, an audible tone sounds and the screen displays a pop-up with the sender name and ID, if supported by your cell phone. You can select:
Menu Item Hear It View Call
Action and Description Have SYNC 3 read the message to you. View the text on the touchscreen. To call the sender.
Reply Close
You can select from 15 preset messages. Press the message that you would like to use and confirm to send the message. SYNC 3 confirms when the message is sent successfully.
To exit the screen.
Smartphone Connectivity(IfEquipped)
SYNC 3 allows you to use Apple CarPlay and Android Auto to access your phone.
When you use Apple CarPlay or Android Auto, you can: · Make calls. · Send and receive messages. · Listen to music. · Use your phone's voice assistant.
Apple CarPlay and Android Auto disable some SYNC 3 features.
Most Apple CarPlay and Android Auto features use mobile data.
Apple CarPlay
Apple CarPlay requires an iPhone 5 or newer with iOS 7.1 or newer. Updating to the latest iOS version is recommended.
1. Plug your phone into a USB port. See USB Port (page 358).
434
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
SYNCTM 3
2. Follow the prompts on the touchscreen.
3. Follow the prompts that appear on your phone to allow access to Apple CarPlay.
After completing the setup, your phone connects to CarPlay automatically when plugged into a USB port.
To disable this feature from the Settings screen, select:
Menu Item
Apple CarPlay Preferences
Your device is listed if SYNC detects Apple CarPlay. Select the name of your device and set the Apple CarPlay switch to off.
To return to SYNC 3, go to the Apple CarPlay home screen and select the SYNC app.
Note: Contact Apple for Apple CarPlay support.
Android Auto
Android Auto is compatible with most devices with Android 5.0 or newer.
1. Download the Android Auto app to your device from Google Play to prepare your device (this may require mobile data usage).
Note: The Android Auto App may not be available within your current market.
2. Plug your device into a USB port. See USB Port (page 358).
3. Follow the prompt on the touchscreen.
4. Follow the prompts that appear on your device.
Note: You may be prompted to update additional apps on your device (this may require mobile data usage).
To disable this feature from the Settings screen, select:
Menu Item
Android Auto Preferences
Your device is listed if SYNC detects Android Auto. Select the name of your device and set the Android Auto switch to off.
Note: You may need to slide your Settings screen to the left to select Apple CarPlay Preferences or Android Auto Preferences.
To return to SYNC 3, select the speedometer icon in the Android Auto menu bar at the bottom of the touchscreen, and then touch the option to return to SYNC.
Note: Contact Google for Android Auto support.
NAVIGATION (IF EQUIPPED)
Your navigation system is comprised of two main features, destination mode and map mode.
Map Mode
Map mode shows advanced viewing comprised of 2D city maps, 3D landmarks and 3D city models (when available). 2D city maps show detailed outlines of buildings, visible land use, landscape features, and detailed railroad infrastructure for the most essential cities around the globe.
3D landmarks appear as clear, visible objects that are typically recognizable and have a certain tourism value.
435
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
SYNCTM 3
3D city models are complete 3D models of entire city areas including navigable roads, parks, rivers and rendered buildings. 3D landmarks and city models appear in 3D map mode only. Coverage of these varies and improves with updated map releases.
Select the zoom in icon to see a closer view of the map.
E207752
Select the zoom out icon to see a farther away view of the map.
E207753
You can adjust the view in preset increments. You can also pinch to zoom in or out of the map.
The information bar tells you the names of streets, cities or landmarks as you hover over them with the crosshair curser.
You can change your view of the map by tapping on the location indicator icon on the right hand side of the screen. You can choose from the following options:
E207750
Heading up (2D map) This always shows the direction of forward travel to be upward on the screen. This view is available for map scales up to 3 mi (5 km).
E207749
North up (2D map) always shows the northern direction to be upward on the screen.
3D map mode provides an elevated perspective of the map. Adjust this viewing angle and E207748 rotate the map 180 degrees by touching the map twice, and then dragging your finger along the shaded bar with arrows at the bottom of the map.
E207751
Re-center the map by pressing this icon whenever you scroll the map away from your vehicle's current location.
E251780
Mute: Press to mute the audio navigation guidance. Press the button again to un-mute the guidance.
E251779
Points of Interest (POI) grouping icon: You can choose up to three POI icons to display E207754 on the map. If the chosen POIs are located close together or are at the same location a box is used to display a single category icon instead of repeating the same icon, in order to reduce clutter. When you select the box on the map, a pop-up appears indicating how many POIs are in this location. Select the pop up to see a list of the available POIs. You can scroll through and select POIs from this list.
If your vehicle is low on charge or fuel, station icons automatically display on the map.
If you have subscribed to SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link (where available), traffic flow will be indicated on the map by green (clear), yellow (slowing), and red (stopped) road highlights. Traffic flow is indicated where the information is available and varies across the US.
You can choose to display traffic icons on the map representing twelve different types of incidents. See Settings (page 446).
You can set a destination by hovering above a location and selecting:
436
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
SYNCTM 3
Button
Start
Button
Destination Mode
To set a destination, press:
Menu Item
Description
Destination
Enter a navigation destination in any of the following formats:
Search
Street Address
(number, street, city, state)
For example "12 Mainstreet Dearborn MI"
Partial Address (number, street) if searching in current state (number, street and zip code (or postal code in Canada)) if searching out of state You can enter unique addresses that contain door number prefixes with or without the prefix. For example, you could enter "6N340 Fairway Lane" or "340 Fairway Lane".
City
(name or zip code)
Point of Interest
(name or category)
Intersection
(street 1 / street 2) (street 1 and street 2) (street 1 & street 2) (street 1 @ street 2) (street 1 at street 2)
Latitude and Longitude
(##.###### , ##.######) This is in a decimal degrees format, one to six decimal places are accepted.
You are given autocomplete options below the address bar to select as you type.
437
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
SYNCTM 3
Menu Item
Description
If you do not give an exact destination, a menu displays with your possible selections.
Previous Destina- Collections of your last 40 navigation destinations display here.
tions
You can select any option from the list to select it as your destination.
Delete Select this option to remove all previous destinations. All
Home
Select to navigate to your set Home destination. The time it takes to travel from your current location to Home displays. To set your Home, press:
Home A prompt appears asking if you would like to create a favorite for home. Select:
Yes
Enter a location into the search bar and press:
Save
Work
Select to navigate to your set Work destination. The time it takes to travel from your current location to Work displays. To set your Work:
Work
A prompt appears asking if you would like to create a favorite for work. Select:
Yes
Enter a location into the search bar and press:
Save
Favorites
Favorites include any location you have previously saved. To add Favorites:
Add a Select this button and enter a location into the destination Favorite bar.
Search Select this option to have the system locate the address you have entered.
Save
Select this button when the address you have entered appears on the screen.
The address saves as a favorite and you see the favorites screen. You can now select this address from the favorites screen.
Point of Interest POI categories that may display (based on market and vehicle (POI) Categories configuration):
Food
438
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
SYNCTM 3
Menu Item
Description Fuel Hotel ATM See All Press to view additional categories. Once you have selected
a category, follow the menus to find what you are looking for. Inside of these categories you can search by: Nearby Along Route Near Destination In a City
Once you have chosen your destination, press:
Menu Item
Action and Description
Save
This saves the destination to your favorites.
Start
This shows you a map of your entire route. You can then choose your route from three different options.
Fastest
Uses the fastest moving roads possible.
Shortest
Uses the shortest distance possible.
Economical Route
Uses the most fuel-efficient route.
The time and distance for each route also displays.
Cancel
On the route screen, you can choose to cancel the current navigation. The system asks for confirmation then returns you to the map mode screen.
Once you have chosen your destination, press:
Menu Item
Action and Description
Start
The system uses a variety of screens and prompts to guide you to your destination.
439
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
SYNCTM 3
Menu Item
Action and Description
During Route guidance, you can press the maneuver arrow icon on the map if you want the system to repeat route guidance instructions. When the system repeats the last guidance instruction, it updates the distance to the next guidance instruction, since it detects that the vehicle is moving. The navigation map shows your estimated time of arrival, remaining travel time and the distance to your destination. SYNC 3 may not always announce vehicle arrival at the exact point of your destination and you may have to cancel a route manually.
Navigation Menu
In map mode and during active navigation you can access the navigation menu.
During active navigation, touch the bottom of the screen to view the menu and other buttons.
To access the Navigation menu, press:
Button
Menu
You can then select:
Screen View
Full Map A full screen map displays during navigation.
Highway Exit Info
Highway exit information displays on the right hand side of the screen during navigation. Points of interest icons display for restaurants, hotels, fuel stations and ATMs when they are present at the exit. You can select the POI icons to receive a listing of specific locations. You can select the POI location as a waypoint or destination if desired.
Turn List
Only available during an active route. Displays all of the turns on the current route. You can choose to avoid any road on the turn list by selecting the road from the list. A screen then appears and you can press:
Avoid
The system calculates a new route and displays a new turn list.
Traffic List
You can find the SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link information by pressing this button. This information requires an active subscription to SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link.
440
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
SYNCTM 3
Button
When a route is not active, a list of nearby traffic incidents displays (if any are present). When a route is active, you can choose to display a list of traffic nearby or on the route.
Navigation Settings
Press this button to adjust your preferences. See Settings (page 446).
Where Am I? Provides your current location city and the nearest road.
The following are only available on the menu during an active navigation route:
Cancel Route
The system asks for confirmation and then returns you to the map mode screen.
View Route
Press this to see a map of the full route.
Detour
An alternate route displays in comparison with the current route.
Edit Waypoints Only available if you have an active waypoint on your route. See Waypoints later in this section for information on how to set waypoints.
Use this button to re-order or remove your waypoints.
You can also have the system set the order for you by pressing:
Optimize Order
To return to Go your route press:
Waypoints
You can add a waypoint to a navigation route as a destination along your route. To add a waypoint:
1. Select the search icon (magnifying glass) while on an active route. This brings up the destination menu.
2. Set your destination using any of the given methods. Once the destination has been selected, the screen allows you to set the destination as a waypoint by selecting:
441
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
SYNCTM 3
Menu Item
Add Waypoint
The waypoint list then appears and you are able to re-order all of your waypoints by selecting the menu icon on the right hand side of the location. You can select up to five waypoints.
You can also have the system set the order Optimize Order for you by pressing:
To return to your route, press:
Go
SYNC AppLink
The AppLink app allows you to use some SYNC 3 navigation features on your phone.
First Mile Navigation
When you switch your ignition off, the location of your vehicle is recorded and sent to your SYNC AppLink app. The location of your vehicle can be viewed within the app. You can also view walking directions to your vehicle.
Last Mile Navigation
When you park near your destination, the system provides walking directions to your destination.
POI Search
Your paired phone can be used to access additional points of interest (POI). These points of interest can only be access when your phone is paired.
Send To Car
You can send destinations to your navigation system using a computer or phone using AppLink.
cityseeker (If Equipped) Note: cityseeker point of interest (POI) information is limited to approximately 1,110 cities (1,049 in the United States, 36 in Canada and 15 in Mexico).
E225487
cityseeker, when available, is a service that provides more information about certain points of interest such as restaurants, hotels and attractions. When you have selected a point of interest, the location and information appear, such as address, phone number and a star rating. Press More Information to see a photo, a review, a list of services and facilities, the average room or meal price and the web address. This screen displays the point of interest icons.
442
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
SYNCTM 3
For restaurants, cityseeker can provide information such as star rating, average cost, review, handicap access, hours of operation, and website address.
For hotels, cityseeker can provide information such as star rating, price category, review, check-in and checkout times, hotel service icons and website address. Hotel service icons include:
· Restaurant
· Business center
· Handicap facilities
· Laundry
· Refrigerator
· 24 hour room service
· Fitness center
· Internet access
· Pool
· Wi-Fi
Attractions include nearby landmarks, amusement parks, historic buildings and more. cityseeker can provide information such as star rating, reviews, hour of operation and admission price.
SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link (If
Equipped)
SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link is available on vehicles equipped with navigation and only in select markets. You must activate and subscribe to receive SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link information. It helps you locate the best gas prices, find movie listings, get current traffic alerts, view the weather map, get accurate ski conditions and see current sports scores. See Apps (page 443).
The system calculates a reasonable efficient route based on available speed limits, traffic, and road conditions. You may know a local short cut that is more efficient at a given time than the route provided by SYNC 3, but you should expect a slight difference in minutes or miles with the SYNC 3 route.
Navigation Map Updates
Annual navigation map updates are available for purchase through your dealership, by calling 1-866-462-8837 in the United States and Canada or 01-800-557-5539 in Mexico. You can also visit:
Website
www.navigation.com/sync
You need to specify the make and model of your vehicle to determine if there is an update available.
HERE is the digital map provider for the navigation application. If you find map data errors, you may report them directly to HERE by going to www.here.com/mapcreator. HERE evaluates all reported map errors and responds with the result of their investigation by e-mail.
Map coverage includes the USA (including Puerto Rico and the US Virgin Islands), Canada and Mexico.
APPS
The system enables voice, steering wheel, and touch screen control of SYNC 3 AppLink enabled smartphone apps.
Once an app is running through AppLink, you can control main features of the app through voice commands and steering wheel controls.
443
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
SYNCTM 3
Note: Available AppLink enabled apps will vary by market.
Note: You must pair and connect your smartphone via Bluetooth to SYNC 3 to access AppLink.
Note: iPhone users may have to connect the phone to a USB port with an Apple USB cable.
Note: For information on available apps, supported smartphone devices and troubleshooting tips please visit:
Websites
owner.ford.com www.syncmyride.ca www.syncmaroute.ca
Note: Make sure you have an active account for the app that you have downloaded. Some apps will work automatically with no setup. Other apps will want you to configure your personal settings and personalize your experience by creating stations or favorites. We recommend you do this at home or outside of your vehicle.
Note: We encourage you to review the smartphone app's terms of service and privacy policies because Ford is not responsible for your app or its use of data.
Note: AppLink is a native SYNC system feature. Accessing mobile apps through AppLink is only possible when Android Auto or Apple CarPlay are disabled. Some apps may only be accessible in the car through AppLink and others only through Android Auto or Apple CarPlay. Please refer to the Smartphone Connectivity information to disable Android Auto or Apple CarPlay.
Note: In order to use an app with SYNC 3, the app needs to be running in the background of your phone. If you shut down the app on your phone, it shuts down the app on SYNC 3 as well.
Note: If a SYNC 3 AppLink compatible app is not shown in the Apps Domain, make sure the required app is running on the mobile device.
Menu Item Find Mobile Apps
Action and Description
SYNC 3 will search and connect to compatible app(s) running on your mobile device.
Enabling SYNC 3 Mobile Apps
In order to enable mobile apps, SYNC 3 requires user consent to send and receive app authorization information and updates using the data plan associated with the connected device.
The connected device sends data to Ford in the United States. The information is encrypted and includes your VIN, SYNC 3 module number, odometer, usage statistics and debugging information. We retain this data for only as long as necessary to provide this service, troubleshoot, and improve products and services and to offer you products and services that may interest you where allowed by law.
Note: You must enable mobile apps for each connected device the first time you select a mobile app using the system.
Note: Ford reserves the right to limit functionality or deactivate mobile apps at any time.
Note: Standard data rates apply. Ford is not responsible for any additional charges you may receive from your service provider, when your vehicle sends or receives data through the connected device. This includes any additional charges incurred due to driving in areas when roaming or out of a home network.
444
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
SYNCTM 3
You can enable and disable apps through settings. See Settings (page 446).
App Permissions
The system organizes the app permissions into groups. You can change a permission group status at any time when not driving by using the settings menu. While in the settings menu, you can also see the data included in each group.
When you launch an app using SYNC 3, the system may ask you to grant certain permissions, for example, Vehicle information, Driving characteristics, GPS and Speed and Push notifications. You can enable all groups or none of them during the initial app permissions prompts. The settings menu offers individual group permission control.
Note: You are only prompted to grant permissions the first time you use an app with SYNC 3.
Note: If you disable group permissions, apps still work with SYNC 3 unless you deactivate All Apps in the settings menu.
SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link (If
Equipped)
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, crash and injury. We strongly recommend that you use extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off the road. Your
primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle. We recommend against the use of any hand-held device while driving and encourage the use of voice-operated systems when possible. Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the use of electronic devices while driving.
Note: SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link may not be available in all markets.
Note: In order to use SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link, your vehicle must have navigation.
Note: A paid subscription is required to access and use these features. Go to www.siriusxm.com/travellink for more information.
Note: Visit www.siriusxm.com/traffic and click on Coverage map and details for a complete listing of all traffic areas covered by SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link.
Note: Neither Sirius nor Ford is responsible for any errors or inaccuracies in the SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link services or its use in vehicles.
When you subscribe to SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link, it can help you locate the best gas prices, find movie listings, get current traffic alerts, view the current weather map, get accurate ski conditions and see scores to current sports games.
Menu Item Traffic on Route Traffic Nearby Fuel Prices
Action and Description
Touch these buttons to identify traffic incidents on your route, near your vehicle's current location or near any of your favorite places, if programmed.
Touch this button to view fuel prices at stations close to your vehicle's location or on an active navigation route.
445
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
SYNCTM 3
Menu Item Movie Listings Weather
Sports Info Ski Conditions
Action and Description
Touch this button to view nearby movie theaters and their show times, if available.
Touch this button to view the nearby weather, current weather, or the five-day forecast for the chosen area.
Map
Select to see the weather map, which can show storms, radar information, charts and winds.
Area
Select to choose from a listing of weather locations.
Touch this button to view scores and schedules from a variety of sports. You can also save up to 10 favorite teams for easier access. The score automatically refreshes when a game is in progress.
Touch this button to view ski conditions for a specific area.
SETTINGS
Under this menu, you can access and adjust the settings for many of the system features. To access additional settings, swipe the screen left or right.
Sound
Pressing this button allows you to adjust the following:
Sound Settings
Reset All
Returns Treble, Midrange, and Bass sound settings to factory levels.
Treble
Adjusts the high frequency level.
Midrange
Adjusts the middle frequency level.
Bass
Adjusts the low frequency level.
Balance / Fade Adjusts the sound ratio from side to side or front to back.
Speed Compensated Vol.
Adjusts the amount the audio system volume increases with speed, or turns the feature off.
Occupancy Mode Optimizes the sound based on the location of the listeners.
446
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
SYNCTM 3
Sound Settings Sound Settings Stereo
Surround Your vehicle might not have all of these features.
Media Player
This button is available when a media device such as a Bluetooth Stereo or USB device is the active audio source. Pressing the button allows you to access the following options for active devices only.
Menu Item
Action and Description
Podcast Speed
For some USB devices, SYNC 3 can adjust the playback speed of podcasts. When a podcast is playing, you can choose:
Slower
Normal
Faster
Audiobook Speed For some USB devices, SYNC 3 can adjust the playback speed of audiobooks. When an audiobook is playing, you can choose:
Slower
Normal
Faster
Cover Art Priority Media Player
Cover art displays from your device's music files. If no cover art for the files exists on the device, then the Gracenote Database provides cover art.
Gracenote®
The Gracenote Database supplied cover art is used for your music files. This overrides any cover art from your device.
Gracenote® Management
Switches on and off Gracenote® to provide metadata information such as genre, artist, album.
Gracenote® Data- This allows you to view the version level of the Gracenote Database. base Info
Device Informa- This allows you to view the manufacturer and model number of your
tion
media device.
Update Media Index
Erase the stored in media information in order to re-index.
447
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
SYNCTM 3
Clock
To adjust the time, select the up and down arrows on either side of the screen. The
arrows on the left adjust the hour and arrows on the right adjust the minute. You can then select AM or PM.
You can adjust the following features:
Menu Item
Clock Format
Auto Time Zone Update
Reset Clock to GPS Time
Action and Description
Select how time displays. When active, the clock adjusts to time zone changes. This feature is only available in vehicles with navigation. When selected, the vehicle clock resets to GPS satellite time.
The system automatically saves any updates you make to the settings.
Bluetooth
Pressing this button allows you to access the following:
Menu Item Bluetooth
Action
Turning Bluetooth off disconnects all devices and does not permit new connections.
You must activate Bluetooth to pair a Bluetooth enabled device.
The processes of pairing a Bluetooth device is the same as pairing a phone. See Pairing a Device in Phone settings for how to pair a device and the available options.
Phone
Pair your Bluetooth enabled phone with the system before using the functions in hands-free mode.
Switch on Bluetooth on your device to begin pairing. See your phone's manual if necessary.
To add a phone, select:
Menu Item
Add Phone
1. Follow the on-screen instructions. 2. A prompt alerts you to search for the
system on your phone. 3. Select your vehicle's make and model
as it displays on your phone. 4. Confirm that the six-digit number
appearing on your phone matches the six-digit number on the touchscreen. 5. The touchscreen indicates when the pairing is successful.
448
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
SYNCTM 3
6. Your phone may prompt you to give the system permission to access information. To check your phone's compatibility, see your phone's manual or visit the website.
Alternatively, to add a phone, select:
Menu Item
Add Phone
Then select:
Discover Other Bluetooth Devices
1. Follow the on-screen instructions. 2. Select your phone's name when it
appears on the touchscreen. 3. Confirm that the six-digit number
appearing on your phone matches the six-digit number on the touchscreen.
4. The touchscreen indicates when the pairing is successful.
5. Your phone may prompt you to give the system permission to access information. To check your phone's compatibility, see your phone's manual or visit the website.
Other features, such as text messaging using Bluetooth and automatic phonebook download, are phone-dependent features.
To check your phone's compatibility, see your phone's manual or visit the website:
Website
owner.ford.com www.syncmyride.ca www.syncmaroute.ca
Once you have paired a device you can adjust the following options.
Menu Item
Action and Description
View Devices
You can then select:
Add a Bluetooth You can add a Bluetooth enabled device by following the steps in
Device
the previous table.
You can select a phone by touching the name of the phone on the screen. You then have the following options:
Connect Disconnect
Depending on the status of the device, you can select either of these options to interact with the selected device.
Make Primary
Allows you to select this device to be your preferred device.
Delete
Removes the selected device from the system.
Pressing the info icon next to the device name allows you to see phone and device information
449
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
SYNCTM 3
Menu Item
Action and Description
Manage Contacts
You can then select:
Auto-Download Enable this option to have SYNC 3 periodically re-download your
Contacts
phonebook to keep your contact list up to date.
Sort By:
Choose how you would like the system to display your contacts. You can choose:
First Name
Last Name
Re-download Contacts
Select this option to re-download your contact list manually.
Delete Contacts Select this option to delete the in vehicle contact list. Deleting the in vehicle list does not erase the contact list on the connected phone.
Menu Item
Action and Description
Set Phone Ringtone
You can then select:
No Ringtone
No sound plays when a call comes to your phone.
Use Phone Ring- The currently selected ringtone on your phone plays when you receive
tone
a call. This option may not be available for all phones. If this option
is available, it is the default setting.
You can also select one of the three available ringers.
Menu Item
Action and Description
Text Messaging
You can then select:
No Alert (Silence)
No sound plays when a message comes to your phone.
You can select one of the three available notification sounds.
Voice Readout When enabled, a voice prompt alerts you when you receive a new message.
450
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
SYNCTM 3
You can enable and disable the following options as well:
Menu Item
Action and Description
Mute Audio in Privacy
When enabled, vehicle audio (such as radio or apps) is muted for the duration of the phone call even when the phone call is in privacy.
Roaming Warning
When enabled, an alert displays that your phone is roaming when you attempt to place a call.
Low Battery Notification
When enabled, a message displays when the battery on your phone is running low.
911 Assist
Note: This service is only available in the United States and Canada.
Select this button to modify the on or off setting for this feature. If the mobile phone's contacts have been downloaded, you can adjust the following option:
Menu Item
Action and Description
Set Emergency You can select up to two numbers from your mobile device's phone-
Contacts
book as emergency contacts for quick access at the end of the 911
Assist call process.
Radio
This button is available if a Radio source such as AM or FM is the active media source. Pressing the button allows you to access the following features:
451
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
SYNCTM 3
Menu Item
Action and Description
FM HD Radio Activation of this feature allows you to listen to HD radio broadcasts.
AM HD Radio
(Dependent on current radio source, If Available)
Radio Text
This feature is available when FM Radio is your active media source. Activate this feature to have the system display radio text.
Autoset Presets Refresh
(AST)
Selecting this option stores the six strongest stations in your current
location to the last preset bank of the currently tuned source.
SiriusXM
This button is available if SiriusXM is the active audio source. Pressing the button allows you to access the following features:
Menu Item
Action and Description
Set Category for If you select a category, seek functions only stop on channels in that
Seek
category.
Parental Lockout
Select to create a personal identification number (PIN), which allows you to lock or unlock channels. Your initial PIN is 1234.
Edit Alerts
Select to switch on or off songs, artists or teams alerts or delete an alert or delete all alerts.
You can also view your satellite radio Electronic Serial Number (ESN) from this screen. You will need this number when communicating with SiriusXM to activate, modify or track your account.
Navigation
You can adjust many of the Navigation preferences by selecting the following menus.
452
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
SYNCTM 3
Map Preferences
Menu Item
Action and Description
Map Preferences
Then select any of the following:
3D City Model When this option is active, the system shows 3D renderings of buildings.
Breadcrumbs When enabled, your vehicle's previously traveled route displays with white dots.
POI Icons
Enable this feature to display up to 3 POI icons on the navigation map. A rest area POI icon may display on the map regardless of this setting.
Once this feature is activated you can select Select POIs the icons you want displayed by selecting:
Incident Map Icons
This menu allows you to choose which incident icons you would like to have displayed on the navigation map.
Route Preferences
Menu Item
Second Level Messages, Actions and Descriptions
Route Preferences
Then select any of the following:
Preferred Route Choose to have the system display your chosen route type.
Shortest
Fastest
Eco
Always Use ___ Route
Bypass route selection in destination programming. The system only calculates one route based on your preferred route setting. When activated, the system uses your selected route type to calculate only one route to the desired destination.
Use HOV Lanes The system selects High Occupancy Vehicle or car pool lanes when providing route guidance.
Automatically The system searches for and displays available parking locations as Find Parking you approach your destination.
Eco Time Penalty
Select a level of cost for the calculated Eco Route. The higher the setting, the longer the time allotment is for the route.
453
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
SYNCTM 3
Menu Item
Second Level Messages, Actions and Descriptions
Dynamic Route Guidance
Enable or disable considering traffic information when planning a route. The system can find a faster route based on heavy traffic flow information or detect a Road Closed incident and find a detour route if possible.
Avoid Freeways If selected, SYNC 3 avoids freeways when computing a navigation route.
Avoid Toll Roads
If selected, SYNC 3 avoids Toll Roads when computing a navigation route.
Avoid Ferries/Car Trains
If selected, SYNC 3 avoids the use of Ferries or Trains when computing a navigation route.
Navigation Preferences
Menu Item
Action and Description
Navigation Preferences
Guidance Prompts
You can adjust how the system provides prompts.
Then select any of the following:
Voice and Tones A tone sounds followed by voice instructions.
Voice Only
Only voice instructions are given.
Tones Only
Only a tone sounds to prompt you.
Navigation Source Selection
The screen lists available alternative navigation sources using AppLink.
Mobile Apps
You can enable the control of compatible mobile apps running on your Bluetooth or USB device on SYNC 3. In order to enable mobile apps, SYNC 3 requires user consent to send and receive app authorization information and updates using the data plan associated with the connected device.
The connected devices sends data to Ford in the United States. The encrypted information includes your VIN, SYNC 3 module number, anonymous usage statistics and debugging information. Updates may take place automatically.
Note: All Mobile Apps may not be compatible with the system.
454
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
SYNCTM 3
Note: Standard data rates will apply. Ford is not responsible for any additional charges you may receive from your service provider, when your vehicle sends or receives data through the connected device. This includes any additional charges incurred due to driving in areas when roaming out of a home network.
Menu Item
Action and Description
Mobile Apps
Enable or disable the use of mobile apps on SYNC 3. Disabling mobile apps in the settings menu disables automatic updates and the use of mobile apps on SYNC 3.
You can view the status of mobile app permissions in the settings menu.
Once Mobile Apps is enabled, you have the following options:
Update Mobile This provides information on the current state of available app
Apps
updates.
There are three possible statuses:
Update Needed
Up-To-Date Updating Mobile Apps...
The system has
No update is
detected a new app required.
requiring authoriza-
tion or a general
permissions update is
required.
The system is trying to receive an update.
Request Update
Select this button if an update is required and you want to request this update manually. For example, when your mobile device is connected to a Wi-Fi hotspot, select:
455
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
SYNCTM 3
Menu Item
All Apps
There may also be SYNC 3 enabled apps listed under these options.
Action and Description
Request Update
Grant or deny permissions to all apps at once.
Grant or deny an individual app particular permissions. App permissions are organized into groups. By pressing the info book icon, you can see which signals are included in each group.
Note: Ford is not responsible or liable for any damages or loss of privacy relating to usage of an app, or dissemination of any vehicle data that you approve Ford to provide to an app.
General
Access and adjust the system settings, voice features, as well as phone, navigation and wireless settings.
Language Distance Temperature Touch Screen Beep Automatic System Updates
About SYNC Software Licenses Master Reset
Menu Item
Select to have the touchscreen display in English, Spanish or French.
Select to display units in kilometers or miles.
Select to display units in Celsius or Fahrenheit.
Select to have the system beep to confirm choices made through the touchscreen.
When you activate this option, the system automatically updates when you have an available Internet connection through a Wi-Fi network or mobile connection.
Information pertaining to the system and its software.
Documentation of the software license for the system.
Select to restore factory defaults. This erases all personal settings and personal data.
Wi-Fi & Hotspot
Access SYNC Wi-Fi and Vehicle Hotspot settings and information.
System Wi-Fi You can access the following:
456
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
SYNCTM 3
Menu Item Wi-Fi View Available Networks
Wi-Fi Available Notifications
Action and Description
Enable this option to connect to Wi-Fi for SYNC 3 vehicle software updates.
This provides you with a list of available Wi-Fi networks within range.
Clicking on a network from the list allows you to connect or disconnect from that network. The system may require a security code to connect.
When you click the information button next to a network, more information about the network displays such as the signal strength, connection status and security type.
The system alerts you when your vehicle is parked and a Wi-Fi network is within range if SYNC is not already connected.
Vehicle Hotspot (If Equipped) You can access the following:
Menu Item
Action and Description
Wi-Fi Hotspot On/Off
Allows you to turn the hotspot on and off.
Settings
Allows you to view and edit hotspot settings such as the SSID and password.
Data Usage
Allows you to view your vehicle's hotspot plan and data usage.
Manage Devices Allows you to manage devices connected to your hotspot.
Note: The Vehicle Wi-Fi Hotspot (Vehicle Hotspot) may be operational while ignition is On and may remain operational while the ignition is Off.
Note: Vehicle Hotspot services are provided by the vehicle network carrier, subject to your vehicle network carrier agreement, coverage and availability.
Note: It is the account owner's responsibility to remove the vehicle from the vehicle network carrier account when ownership of the vehicle is transferred. If the owner would like to remove the vehicle from the account for any reason, please contact your vehicle network carrier for more information.
457
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
SYNCTM 3
Note: Data, for example the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), SIM Card ID, and data plan usage, is shared between Ford and the vehicle network carrier to provide the Vehicle Hotspot service in accordance with your vehicle network carrier agreement, coverage and availability, and may be used to enable a seamless transition from an old to new embedded modem and to confirm any updates are successfully delivered.
Note: For your convenience data usage may be available for monitoring under Settings but may not reflect actual or current usage. The vehicle network carrier is responsible for providing information about your account. Please contact the vehicle network carrier for more information.
Note: Ford may need to update operating system software on your vehicle, including security updates and bug fixes, to keep connected services current, like Vehicle Hotspot, without prior notice to you.
Note: If you do not have an active vehicle hotspot data plan, open your web browser and go to a website using the HTTP protocol to be automatically redirected to the vehicle network carrier landing page where you can purchase data. Websites using HTTPS will not automatically redirect.
Ambient Lighting (If Equipped)
Tap a color once to active ambient lighting. This sets the color to the highest intensity.
You can drag the colors up and down to increase or decrease the intensity.
To switch ambient lighting off, press the active color once or drag the active color all the way down to zero intensity.
Vehicle
Note: Your vehicle may not have all of these features.
You can select the following features to update their settings.
Door Keypad Code
Select this button to add or erase a personal door keypad code. To add or erase a personal code, you first need to enter the five-digit factory set code. You can find this code on the owner's wallet card in the glove box or from your authorized dealer.
Camera Settings
To make adjustments using the touchscreen, select:
Message
Action and Description
Camera Settings
Then select from the following:
Rear Camera Delay
You can enable or disable this option using the slider.
You can find more information on the rear-view camera system in the parking aids chapter of your owner manual.
458
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
SYNCTM 3
Onboard Modem Serial Number (ESN) Selecting this button on the settings menu
shows you the ESN number for your system. You need this number for certain registrations such as Satellite Radio.
Display
To make adjustments using the touchscreen, select:
Menu Item
Action and Description
Display Off
The screen goes black and does not display anything. To switch the screen back on, simply tap the screen.
Brightness
Make the screen display brighter or dimmer.
Mode
You can select:
Auto
The screen automatically switches between day and night modes based on the outside light level.
Day
The screen displays with a light background to enhance
daytime viewing.
Night
The screen displays with a darker background to make nighttime viewing easier.
Auto Dim
Enable this option to automatically dim the display brightness based on ambient lighting conditions.
Voice Control
You can adjust the voice control settings by selecting the following options.
Advanced Mode Phone Confirmation Voice Command List
Menu Item
Enable this option to remove additional voice prompts and confirmations.
Enable this option to have the system confirm a contacts name with you before making a call.
Enable this option to have the system display a list of available voice commands when the voice button is pressed.
459
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
SYNCTM 3
Valet Mode
Valet mode allows you to lock the system. No information is accessible until the system is unlocked with the correct PIN.
When you select valet mode a pop up appears informing you that a four digit code must be entered to enable and disable valet mode. You can use any PIN you chose but you must use the same PIN to disable valet mode. The system asks you to input the code.
Note: If the system is locked and you cannot remember the PIN, please contact the Customer Relationship Center.
United States: 1-800-392-3673 Canada: 1-800-565-3673
To enable valet mode, enter your chosen PIN. The system then asks to confirm your PIN by reentering it. The system then locks.
To unlock the system, enter the same pin number. The system reconnects to your phone and all of your options are available again.
SYNCTM 3 TROUBLESHOOTING
Your SYNC 3 system is easy to use. However, should questions arise, please refer to the tables below. To check your cell phone's compatibility, visit the Ford website.
Website
owner.ford.com www.syncmyride.ca www.syncmaroute.ca
Cell phone issues
Issue
Possible cause
Possible solution
There is background noise during a phone call.
The audio control settings on your cell phone may be affecting SYNC 3 performance.
Refer to your device's manual about audio adjustments.
During a call, I
can hear the other person but they cannot
Possible cell phone malfunction.
hear me.
Try switching your cell phone off, resetting it or removing the battery, then try again.
Make sure that the microphone for SYNC 3 is not set to off. Look for the microphone icon on the phone screen.
During a call, I
To restart your system, shut down the
cannot hear the other person and they cannot
The system may need to be restarted.
engine, open and close the door, and then lock the door and wait for 2-3 minutes. Make sure that your SYNC 3 screen is black
hear me.
and the lighted USB port is off.
SYNC 3 is not This is a cell phoneable to down- dependent feature. load my phonebook.
Check your cell phone's compatibility.
460
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
SYNCTM 3
Cell phone issues
Issue
Possible cause
Possible solution
Make sure you allow SYNC 3 to retrieve contacts from your phone. Refer to your cell manual.
Possible cell phone malfunction.
You must switch on your cell phone and the automatic phonebook download feature on SYNC 3.
Try switching your cell phone off, resetting it or removing the battery, then try again.
The system says "Phonebook downloaded" but my Limitations on your cell SYNC 3 phone- phone's capability. book is empty or is missing contacts.
Make sure you allow SYNC 3 to retrieve contacts from your phone. Refer to your cell manual.
If the missing contacts are stored on your SIM card, move them to your cell phone's memory.
You must switch on your cell phone and the automatic phonebook download feature on SYNC 3.
This is a cell phonedependent feature.
Check your cell phone's compatibility.
I am having trouble connecting my cell phone to SYNC 3.
Possible cell phone malfunction.
Try switching your cell phone off, resetting it or removing the battery, then try again.
Try deleting your device from SYNC 3 and deleting SYNC from your device, then trying again.
Always check the security and auto accept prompt settings relative to the SYNC 3 Bluetooth connection on your cell phone.
Update your cell phone's firmware.
Switch the auto download setting off.
Text messaging is not working on SYNC 3.
This is a cell phonedependent feature.
Possible cell phone malfunction.
Check your cell phone's compatibility.
Try switching your cell phone off, resetting it or removing the battery, then try again.
461
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
SYNCTM 3
Issue
Cell phone issues
Possible cause
Possible solution
iPhone
· Go to your cell phone's Settings.
· Go to the Bluetooth Menu.
· Press the blue circle to the right of the device named with your vehicle make and model to enter the next menu.
· Turn Show Notifications on.
· Disconnect then reconnect your iPhone from the SYNC 3 system to activate this settings update.
Your iPhone is now set up to forward incoming text messages to SYNC 3. Repeat these steps for every other SYNC 3 vehicle that you connect. Your iPhone will only forward incoming text messages to SYNC 3 if the iPhone is not unlocked in the messaging application. Replying to text messages using SYNC 3 is not supported by iPhone. Text messages from WhatsApp and Facebook Messenger are not supported.
Audible text messages do not work on my cell phone.
This is a cell phonedependent feature.
Your cell phone must support downloading text messages through Bluetooth to receive incoming text messages.
Because each cell phone is different, refer
to your device's manual for the specific cell
This is a cell phone limita- phone you are pairing. In fact, there can be
tion.
differences between cell phones due to
brand, model, service provider and software
version.
462
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
SYNCTM 3
USB and Bluetooth Stereo issues
Issue
Possible cause
Possible solution
Disconnect the device from SYNC 3. Try switching your device off, resetting it or removing the battery, then reconnect it to SYNC 3.
I am having trouble connecting my device.
Make sure you are using the manufacturer's Possible device malfunc- cable. tion.
Make sure to correctly insert the USB cable into the device and your vehicle's USB port.
Make sure that the device does not have an auto-install program or active security settings.
The device has a lock screen enabled.
Make sure your device is unlocked before connecting it to SYNC 3.
SYNC 3 does
not recognize
Make sure you are not leaving the device in
my device when This is a device limitation. your vehicle during very hot or cold
I start my
temperatures.
vehicle.
This is a device-
Bluetooth audio dependent feature.
does not
stream.
The device is not
connected.
Make sure you connect the device to SYNC 3 and that you have started the media player on your device.
Your music files may not contain the correct artist, Make sure that all song details are popusong title, album or genre lated. information.
SYNC 3 does The file may be not recognize corrupted. music that is on
Try replacing the corrupt file with a new version.
my device.
The song may have
Some devices require you to change the
copyright protection that USB settings from mass storage to media
does not allow it to play. transfer protocol class.
The file format is not supported by SYNC 3.
Convert the file to a supported format. See Entertainment (page 417).
463
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
SYNCTM 3
USB and Bluetooth Stereo issues
Issue
Possible cause
Possible solution
The device needs to be Update media index. See Settings (page
re-indexed.
446).
The device has a lock screen enabled.
Make sure your device is unlocked before connecting it to SYNC 3.
When I connect my device, I sometimes do not hear any sound.
This is a device limitation.
Disconnect the device from SYNC 3. Try switching your device off, resetting it or removing the battery, then connect it back to SYNC 3.
To listen to Apple devices through USB, select AirPlay from the devices Control Center, then select Dock Connector.
To listen to Apple devices through Bluetooth Stereo, select AirPlay from the devices Control Center, then select SYNC.
Issue Failed connection.
Disconnecting after successful connection.
Wi-Fi Issues
Possible cause
Possible solution
Password error.
Verify password.
Weak signal.
Check for a poor Wi-Fi signal.
Multiple Access points within range with the same SSID.
Use a unique name for your SSID, don't use the default name unless it contains a unique identifier, such as part of the MAC address.
Weak signal probably due Position the vehicle close to
to distance from the
the hotspot with the front of
hotspot, obstruction or high the vehicle facing the
interference.
hotspot direction and
remove obstacles if
possible. Other Wi-Fi,
Bluetooth, microwave and
cordless phones may cause
interference.
464
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
SYNCTM 3
Wi-Fi Issues
Issue
Possible cause
Possible solution
Poor signal seen by SYNC 3 despite being near a hotspot.
There may be an obstruction between SYNC 3 and the hotspot.
If the vehicle is equipped with heated windshield, try positioning the vehicle so that the windshield is not facing the hotspot. If you have metallic window tinting but not on the windshield, position the vehicle to face the hotspot. If all windows are tinted, you can open the windows in the direction of the hotspot if that is feasible. Try to remove other obstructions that may impact signal quality such as opening the garage door.
A hotspot is not listed in the The hotspot was defined as Please set the network to
list of available networks. a hidden network.
visible and try again.
SYNC 3 is not seen when SYNC 3 does not currently searching for Wi-Fi networks provide a hotspot. from your phone or other devices.
SYNC 3 currently does not provide a hotspot
Software download takes too long.
Poor signal strength, too far Check the signal quality
from the hotspot, hotspot is (under network details), if
supporting multiple
SYNC 3 indicates good or
connections, slow Internet excellent, test with another
connection or other prob- high-speed equipped
lems.
hotspot where the environ-
ment is more predictable.
SYNC 3 seems to connect It is possible that there is no Test the connection with
with a hotspot and the
new software. The
another device, if the
signal strength is excellent connected hotspot may be hotspot requires a subscrip-
but the software is not being a managed one and it
tion, you may contact the
updated.
requires either a subscrip- service provider.
tion or agreeing to the terms
and conditions.
465
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
SYNCTM 3
AppLink issues
Issue
Possible cause(s)
Possible solution(s)
AppLink Mobile Applications: When I select "Connect Mobile Apps," SYNC 3 does not find any applications.
You did not connect an Applink Compatible phone to SYNC 3.
Make sure you have a compatible smartphone; an Android with OS 2.3 or higher or an iPhone 3GS or newer with iOS 5.0 or higher. Additionally, make sure you pair and connect your phone to SYNC 3 in order to find AppLink-capable apps on your device. iPhone users must also connect to a USB port with an Apple USB cable.
Make sure you have down-
loaded and installed the
latest version of the app
from your phone's app store.
Make sure the app is running
My phone is connected, but I still cannot find any apps.
AppLink-enabled apps are not installed and running on your mobile device.
on your phone. Some apps require you to register or login to the app on the
phone before using them
with AppLink. Also, some
may have a "Ford SYNC"
setting, so check the app's
settings menu on the phone.
Closing and restarting apps
may help SYNC 3 find the
application if you cannot
Sometimes apps do not discover it inside the vehicle.
My phone is connected, my properly close and re-open On an Android device, if
app(s) are running, but I still their connection to SYNC 3, apps have an 'Exit' or 'Quit'
cannot find any apps.
over ignition cycles, for
option, then select it and
example.
restart the app. If the app
does not have that option,
select the phone's settings
menu and select 'Apps',
466
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
SYNCTM 3
Issue
My Android phone is connected, my app(s) are running, I restarted them, but I still cannot find any apps.
AppLink issues
Possible cause(s)
Possible solution(s)
then find the particular app and choose 'Force stop.' Do not forget to restart the app afterward, then select "Connect Mobile Apps" on SYNC 3.
On an iPhone with iOS7+, to force close an app, double tap the home button then swipe up on the app to close it. Tap the home button again, then select the app again to restart it. After a few seconds, the app should then appear in SYNC 3's Mobile App's Menu.
There is a Bluetooth issue Switch Bluetooth off and
on some older versions of then on to reset it on your
the Android operating
phone. If you are in your
system that may cause apps vehicle, SYNC 3 should be
that were found on your
able to automatically re-
previous vehicle drive to not connect to your phone if you
be found again if you did not press the "Phone" button.
switch Bluetooth off.
467
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
SYNCTM 3
AppLink issues
Issue
Possible cause(s)
Possible solution(s)
My iPhone is connected, my app is running, I restarted the app but I still cannot find it on SYNC 3.
You may need to reset the USB connection to SYNC 3.
Unplug the USB cable from the phone, wait a moment, and plug the USB cable back in to the phone. After a few seconds, the app should appear in SYNC 3's Mobile Apps Menu. If not, "Force Close" the application and restart it.
I have an Android phone. I
found and started my media app on SYNC 3, but there is no sound or the sound is
The Bluetooth volume on the phone may be low.
very low.
Increase the Bluetooth volume of the device by using the device's volume control buttons which are most often found on the side of the device.
Some Android devices have Force close or uninstall the
a limited number of
apps you do not want SYNC
Bluetooth ports that apps 3 to find. If the app has a
I can only see some of the can use to connect. If you "Ford SYNC" setting, disable
AppLink apps running on my have more AppLink apps on that setting in the app's
phone listed in the SYNC 3 your phone than the number settings menu on the phone.
Mobile Apps Menu.
of available Bluetooth ports,
you will not see all of your
apps listed in the SYNC 3
mobile apps menu.
Voice command issues
Issue
Possible cause
Possible solution
SYNC 3 does not understand what I am saying.
You may be using the wrong voice commands.
Review the cell phone voice commands and the media voice commands at the beginning of their respective sections.
Refer to the audio display during an active voice session to find a list of voice commands there.
You may be speaking too Wait for the system to prompt you before
soon or at the wrong
you state your command.
time.
468
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
SYNCTM 3
Voice command issues
Issue
Possible cause
Possible solution
You may be using the Review the media voice commands at the wrong voice commands. beginning of the media section.
SYNC 3 does not understand the name of a song or artist.
You may not be saying the name exactly as it appears on your device.
Say the song or artist name exactly as it is displayed on your device. For example, say "Play Artist Prince" or "Play song Purple Rain".
Make sure you are saying the complete title such as "California remix featuring Jennifer Nettles".
If there are any abbreviations in the name, like ESPN or CNN, you have to spell those: "E-S-P-N" or "C-N-N".
The song or artist name may have some special characters that are not being recognized by SYNC 3.
Make sure that song titles, artists, album, and playlists names do not have any special characters like *, - or +.
SYNC 3 does not understand or is calling the wrong contact when I want to make a call.
You may not be saying the name exactly as it appears on your phonebook.
The contact name may contain special characters.
Make sure that you are saying the name exactly as it appears on your phone. For example, if your contact is "Joe Wilson", say "Call Joe Wilson". If your contact name is "Mom", say "Call Mom".
Make sure that your contact names do not have any special characters like *, - or +.
The SYNC 3 voice control system is having You may not be saying trouble recog- the name exactly as it nizing foreign appears on your phonenames stored book. on my cell phone.
SYNC 3 applies the phonetic pronunciation rules of the selected language to the contact names stored on your cell phone.
Helpful Hint: You can select your contact manually. Press PHONE. Select the option for phonebook and then contact name. Press the soft-key option to hear it. SYNC 3 will read the contact name to you, giving you some idea of the pronunciation it is expecting.
469
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
SYNCTM 3
Voice command issues
Issue
Possible cause
Possible solution
The SYNC 3
voice control
system is having
trouble recognizing foreign tracks, artists, albums, genres and playlist
You may be saying the foreign names using the currently selected language for SYNC 3.
names from my
media player or
USB flash drive.
SYNC 3 applies the phonetic pronunciation rules of the selected language to the names stored on your media player or USB flash drive. It is able to make some exceptions for very popular artist names (for example, U2) such that you can always use the English pronunciation for these artists.
The system generates voice prompts and the pronunciation of some words may not be accurate for my language.
SYNC 3 uses text-tospeech voice prompt technology.
SYNC 3 uses a synthetically generated voice rather than pre-recorded human voice.
SYNC 3 offers several new voice control features for a wide range of languages. Dialing a contact name directly from the phonebook without pre-recording (for example, "call John Smith") or selecting a track, artist, album, genre or playlist directly from your media player (for example, "play artist Madonna").
470
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
SYNCTM 3
General
Issue
Possible cause
Possible solution
SYNC 3 supports multiple languages in a
The language
single module for text display, voice control
selected for the
and voice prompts. The country where you
instrument
bought your vehicle dictates the languages
cluster and
based on the most popular languages
information and entertainment display does not match the SYNC 3 language (phone, USB,
SYNC 3 does not support the currently selected language for the instrument cluster and information and entertainment display.
spoken. If the selected language is not available, SYNC 3 remains in the current active language.
SYNC 3 offers several new voice control features for a wide range of languages. Dialing a contact name directly from the
Bluetooth
phonebook without pre-recording (for
audio, voice
example, "call John Smith") or selecting a
control and
track, artist, album, genre or playlist directly
voice prompts).
from your media player (for example, "play
artist Madonna").
SYNC 3 System Reset
The system has a System Reset feature that can be performed if the function of a SYNC 3 feature is lost. This reset is intended to restore functionality and will not erase any information previously stored in the system (such as paired devices, phonebook, call history, text messages, or user settings). To perform a System Reset, press and hold the Seek Up (>>|) button while pressing and holding the Radio Power button. After approximately 5 seconds the screen will go black. Allow 1-2 minutes for the system reset to complete. You may then resume using the SYNC 3 system.
For additional assistance with SYNC 3 troubleshooting please call or visit the Ford Website.
Ford Support
Customer Relation- United States: 1-800-392-3673
ship Center
Canada: 1-800-565-3673
Website
owner.ford.com www.syncmyride.ca www.syncmaroute.ca
471
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Accessories
For a complete listing of the accessories that are available for your vehicle, please contact your authorized dealer or visit the online store web site:
Web Address (United States)
www.Accessories.Ford.com
Web Address (Canada)
www.Accessories.Ford.ca
Ford Motor Company will repair or replace any properly authorized dealer-installed Ford Original Accessory found to be defective in factory-supplied materials or workmanship during the warranty period, as well as any component damaged by the defective accessories. Ford Motor Company warrants your vehicle's Ford Original Accessory through the warranty that provides the greatest benefit: · 24 months, unlimited mileage. · The remainder of your new vehicle
limited warranty. Contact an authorized dealer for details and a copy of the warranty.
Exterior Style
· Bumper protectors. · Graphics. · Hood deflector. · Rear spoiler. · Side window deflectors*. · Splash guards. · Sun shade*.
Interior Style
· Door sill plates. · Floor liners. · Premium carpeted floor mats.
Lifestyle
· Ash cup or smoker's packages. · Bluetooth speakers*. · Car covers*. · Cargo area protectors. · Cargo net. · Cargo organizers. · Interior light kit. · Rear seat entertainment*. · Roof racks and carriers*. · Tablet cradle*.
Peace of Mind
· Keyless entry keypad. · Remote start. · Roadside assistance kit*. · Vehicle security systems. · Warning sensor system*. · Wheel locks.
*Ford Licensed Accessories. The accessory manufacturer designs, develops and therefore warrants Ford Licensed Accessories, and does not design or test these accessories to Ford Motor Company engineering requirements. Contact an authorized Ford dealer for the accessory manufacturer's limited warranty details and request a copy of the Ford Licensed Accessories product limited warranty from the accessory manufacturer.
472
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Accessories
For maximum vehicle performance, keep the following information in mind when adding accessories or equipment to your vehicle: · When adding accessories, equipment,
passengers and luggage to your vehicle, do not exceed the total weight capacity of the vehicle or of the front or rear axle (GVWR or GAWR as indicated on the Safety Compliance Certification label). Ask an authorized dealer for specific weight information. · The Federal Communications Commission (FCC) and Canadian Radio Telecommunications Commission (CRTC) regulate the use of mobile communications systems that are equipped with radio transmitters, for example two-way radios, telephones and theft alarms. Any such equipment installed in your vehicle should comply with Federal Communications Commission (FCC) and Canadian Radio Telecommunications Commission (CRTC) regulations and should be installed only by an authorized dealer. · Mobile communications systems may harm the operation of your vehicle, particularly if their manufacturer did not design them specifically for automotive use. · If you or an authorized dealer add any non-Ford electrical or electronic accessories or components to your vehicle, you may adversely affect battery performance and durability. In addition, you may also adversely affect the performance of other electrical systems in the vehicle.
473
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Ford Protect
PROTECT YOURSELF FROM THE RISING COST OF VEHICLE REPAIRS WITH A FORD PROTECT EXTENDED SERVICE PLAN.
Ford Protect Extended Service Plans (U.S. Only)
Ford Protect extended service plan means peace of mind. It's the extended service plan backed by Ford Motor Company, and provides more protection beyond the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage. When you visit your Ford Dealer, Insist on Ford Protect extended service plans!
Ford Protect Can Quickly Pay for Itself
One trip to the Service Center could easily exceed the price of your Ford Protect extended service plan. With Ford Protect extended service plan you minimize your risk for unexpected repair bills and rising repair costs.
Up to 1,000+ Covered Vehicle Components
There are four mechanical Ford Protect extended service plans with different levels of coverage. Ask your authorized dealer for details.
1. PremiumCARE - Our most comprehensive coverage. With over 1,000 covered components, this plan is so complete it's probably easier to list what's not covered.
2. ExtraCARE - Covers 113 components, and includes many high-tech items.
3. BaseCARE - Covers 84 components.
4. PowertrainCARE - Covers 29 critical components.
Ford Protect extended service plans are honored by all authorized Ford dealers in the U.S., Canada and Mexico.
That means you get: · Reliable, quality service at any Ford or
Lincoln dealership. · Repairs performed by factory trained
technicians, using genuine parts.
Rental Car Reimbursement
1st day Rental Benefit
If you bring your car into your dealer for service, we'll give you a loaner to use for the day.
Extended Rental Benefits
If your vehicle is kept overnight for covered repairs, you are eligible for rental car coverage, including warranty repairs, and Field Service Actions.
Roadside Assistance
Exclusive 24/7 roadside assistance, including:
· Towing, flat-tire change and battery jump starts.
· Out of fuel and lock-out assistance. · Travel expense reimbursement for
lodging, meals and rental car. · Assistance for taxi, shuttle, rental car
coverage or other transportation.
Transferable Coverage
If you sell your vehicle before your Ford Protect extended service plan coverage expires, you can transfer any remaining coverage to the new owner. Which should give you and your potential buyer a little more peace of mind.
474
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Ford Protect
Less Cost to Properly Maintain Your Vehicle
Ford Protect extended service plan also offers a Premium Maintenance Plan that covers all scheduled maintenance, and selected wear items. The coverage is prepaid, so you never have to worry about the cost of your vehicle's maintenance.
Covered maintenance includes:
· Windshield wiper blades.
· Spark plugs.
· The clutch disc (if equipped).
· Brake pads and linings.
· Shock absorbers.
· Struts.
· Engine Belts.
· Engine coolant hoses, clamps and o-rings.
· Diesel exhaust fluid replenishment (if equipped).
· Cabin air filter replacement every 20,000 mi (32,000 km) (electric vehicles only).
Interest Free Finance Options
Just a 10% down payment will provide you with an affordable, no interest, no fee payment program allowing you all the security and benefits Ford Protect extended service plan has to offer while paying over time. You are pre-approved with no credit check or hassles. To learn more, call our Ford Protect extended service plan specialists at 800-367-3377.
Ford Protect Extended Service Plan P.O. Box 321067 Detroit, MI 48232
Ford Protect Extended Service Plan (CANADA ONLY)
You can get more protection for your vehicle by purchasing a Ford Protect extended service plan. Ford Protect extended service plan is the only service contract backed by Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited. Depending on the plan you purchase, Ford Protect extended service plan provides benefits such as:
· Rental reimbursement.
· Coverage for certain maintenance and wear items.
· Protection against repair costs after your New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage expires.
· Roadside Assistance benefits.
There are several Ford Protect extended service plans available in various time, distance and deductible combinations. Each plan is tailored to fit your own driving needs, including reimbursement for towing and rental. When you purchase Ford Protect extended service plan, you receive added peace-of-mind protection throughout Canada, the United States and Mexico, provided by a network of participating authorized Ford Motor Company dealers.
Note: Repairs performed outside of Canada, the United States and Mexico are not eligible for Ford Protect extended service plan coverage.
This information is subject to change. For more information; visit your local Ford of Canada dealer or www.ford.ca to find the Ford Protect extended service plan that is right for you.
475
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
GENERAL MAINTENANCE INFORMATION
Why Maintain Your Vehicle?
Carefully following the maintenance schedule helps protect against major repair expenses resulting from neglect or inadequate maintenance and may help to increase the value of your vehicle when you sell or trade it. Keep all receipts for completed maintenance with your vehicle.
We have established regular maintenance intervals for your vehicle based upon rigorous testing. It is important that you have your vehicle serviced at the proper times. These intervals serve two purposes; one is to maintain the reliability of your vehicle and the second is to keep your cost of owning your vehicle down.
It is your responsibility to have all scheduled maintenance performed and to make sure that the materials used meet the specifications identified in this owner's manual. See Capacities and Specifications (page 319).
Failure to perform scheduled maintenance invalidates warranty coverage on parts affected by the lack of maintenance.
Why Maintain Your Vehicle at Your Dealership?
Factory-Trained Technicians
Service technicians participate in extensive factory-sponsored certification training to help them become experts on the operation of your vehicle. Ask your dealership about the training and certification their technicians have received.
Genuine Ford and Motorcraft® Replacement Parts
Dealerships stock Ford, Motorcraft and Ford-authorized branded re-manufactured replacement parts. These parts meet or exceed our specifications. Parts installed at your dealership carry a nationwide 24-month or unlimited mile (kilometer) parts and labor limited warranty.
If you do not use our authorized parts they may not meet our specifications and depending on the part, it could affect emissions compliance.
Convenience
Many dealerships have extended evening and Saturday hours to make your service visit more convenient and they offer one stop shopping. They can perform any services that are required on your vehicle, from general maintenance to collision repairs.
Note: Not all dealers have extended hours or body shops. Please contact your dealer for details.
Protecting Your Investment
Maintenance is an investment that pays dividends in the form of improved reliability, durability and resale value. To maintain the proper performance of your vehicle and its emission control systems, make sure you have scheduled maintenance performed at the designated intervals.
Your vehicle has an Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor system, a message appears in the information display at the proper oil change interval. This interval may be up to one year or 10,000 mi (16,000 km), hybrid vehicles may exceed 10,000 mi (16,000 km).
476
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
When the oil change message appears in the information display, it is time for an oil change. Make sure you perform the oil change within two weeks or 500 mi (800 km) of the message appearing. Make sure you reset the Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor after each oil change. See Oil Change Indicator Reset (page 262).
If your information display resets prematurely or becomes inoperative, you should perform the oil change interval at six months or 5,000 mi (8,000 km) from your last oil change. Never exceed one year or 10,000 mi (16,000 km) between oil change intervals,
Your vehicle is very sophisticated and built with multiple, complex, performance systems. Every manufacturer develops these systems using different specifications and performance features. That is why it is important to rely upon your dealership to properly diagnose and repair your vehicle.
We have recommended maintenance intervals for various parts and component systems based upon engineering testing. We rely upon this testing to determine the most appropriate mileage for replacement of oils and fluids to protect your vehicle at the lowest overall cost to you and recommends against maintenance schedules that deviate from the scheduled maintenance information.
We strongly recommend the use of only genuine Ford, Motorcraft or Ford-authorized re-manufactured replacement parts engineered for your vehicle.
Additives and Chemicals
This owner's manual and the our Workshop Manual list the recommended additives and chemicals for your vehicle. We do not recommend using chemicals or additives not approved by us as part of your vehicle's normal maintenance. Please consult your warranty information.
Oils, Fluids and Flushing
In many cases, fluid discoloration is a normal operating characteristic and, by itself, does not necessarily indicate a concern or that the fluid needs to be changed. However, a qualified expert, such as the factory-trained technicians at your dealership, should inspect discolored fluids that also show signs of overheating or foreign material contamination immediately.
Make sure to change your vehicle's oils and fluids at the specified intervals or in conjunction with a repair. Flushing is a viable way to change fluid for many vehicle sub-systems during scheduled maintenance. It is critical that systems are flushed only with new fluid that is the same as that required to fill and operate the system or using a Ford-approved flushing chemical.
Owner Checks and Services
Make sure you perform the following basic maintenance checks and inspections every month or at six-month intervals.
Check Every Month Engine oil level.
Function of all interior and exterior lights. Tires (including spare) for wear and proper pressure.
477
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Check Every Month Windshield washer fluid level. Fuel and water separator. Drain if necessary (or if indicated by the information display). Holes and slots in the tail pipe to make sure they are functional and clear of debris.
Check Every Six Months Battery connections. Clean if necessary. Body and door drain holes for obstructions. Clean if necessary. Cooling system fluid level and coolant strength. Door weatherstrips for wear. Lubricate if necessary. Hinges, latches and outside locks for proper operation. Lubricate if necessary.
Parking brake for proper operation. Seatbelts and seat latches for wear and function. Safety warning lamps (brake, ABS, airbag and seatbelt) for operation. Washer spray and wiper operation. Clean or replace blades as necessary.
Multi-Point Inspection
In order to keep your vehicle running right, it is important to have the systems on your vehicle checked regularly. This can help identify potential issues and prevent major problems. We recommend having the following multi-point inspection performed at every scheduled maintenance interval to help make sure your vehicle keeps running great.
Multi-Point Inspection
Accessory drive belt(s)
Hazard warning system operation
Battery performance
Horn operation
Engine air filter
Radiator, cooler, heater and air conditioning hoses
478
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Multi-Point Inspection
Exhaust system
Suspension components for leaks or damage
Exterior lamps operation
Steering and linkage
Fluid levels1; fill if necessary
Tires (including spare) for wear and proper pressure2
For oil and fluid leaks
Windshield for cracks, chips or pits
Half-shaft dust boots
Washer spray and wiper operation
1 Brake, coolant recovery reservoir, automatic transmission and window washer
2If your vehicle is equipped with a temporary mobility kit, check the tire sealant expiration Use By date on the canister. Replace as needed.
Be sure to ask your dealership service advisor or technician about the multi-point vehicle inspection. It is a comprehensive way to perform a thorough inspection of your vehicle. Your checklist gives you immediate feedback on the overall condition of your vehicle.
NORMAL SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE
This means you do not have to remember to change the oil on a mileage-based schedule. Your vehicle lets you know when an oil change is due by displaying a message in the information display.
The following table provides examples of vehicle use and its impact on oil change intervals. It is a guideline only. Actual oil change intervals depend on several factors and generally decrease with severity of use.
Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor
Your vehicle is equipped with an Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor that determines when you should change the engine oil based on how your vehicle is used. By using several important factors in its calculations, the monitor helps reduce the cost of owning your vehicle and reduces environmental waste at the same time.
When to Expect the OIL CHANGE REQUIRED Message
Interval
Vehicle Use and Example
7,50010,000 mi (12,00016,000 km)
Normal Normal commuting with highway driving
479
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
When to Expect the OIL CHANGE REQUIRED Message
Interval
Vehicle Use and Example
No, or moderate, load or towing Flat to moderately hilly roads No extended idling
Severe
5,0007,500 mi (8,00012,000 km)
Moderate to heavy load or towing Mountainous or off-road conditions Extended idling Extended hot or cold operation
3,0005,000 mi (5,0008,000 km)
Extreme
Maximum load or towing Extreme hot or cold operation
Normal Maintenance Intervals
At Every Oil Change Interval as Indicated by the Information Display1 Change engine oil and filter.2 Rotate the tires. Perform a multi-point inspection (recommended). Inspect the automatic transmission fluid level. Consult your dealer for requirements. Inspect the brake pads, rotors, hoses and parking brake. Inspect the engine cooling system strength and hoses. Inspect the exhaust system and heat shields. Inspect the rear axle and U-joints (All-Wheel Drive only). Inspect the half-shaft boots. Inspect the steering linkage, ball joints, suspension, tie-rod ends, driveshaft and U-joints.
480
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
At Every Oil Change Interval as Indicated by the Information Display1
Inspect the tires, tire wear and measure the tread depth.
Inspect the wheels and related components for abnormal noise, wear, looseness or drag.
1 Do not exceed one year or 10,000 mi (16,000 km) between service intervals. 2 Reset the Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor after engine oil and filter changes. See Oil Change Indicator Reset (page 262).
Other Maintenance Items1
Every 20,000 mi (32,000 km)
Replace cabin air filter.
Every 30,000 mi (48,000 km)
Replace engine air filter.
At 100,000 mi (160,000 km)
Change engine coolant.2
Every 100,000 mi (160,000 km)
Replace spark plugs. Inspect accessory drive belt(s).3
Every 150,000 mi (240,000 km)
Change automatic transmission fluid. Replace accessory drive belt(s).4 Replace timing belt (1.5L engine).
1 Perform these maintenance items within 3,000 mi (4,800 km) of the last engine oil and filter change. Do not exceed the designated distance for the interval. 2 Initial replacement at six years or 100,000 mi (160,000 km), then every three years or 50,000 mi (80,000 km). 3 After initial inspection, inspect every other oil change until replaced.
4 If not replaced within the last 100,000 mi (160,000 km).
481
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
SPECIAL OPERATING CONDITIONS SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE
If you operate your vehicle primarily in any of the following conditions, you need to perform extra maintenance as indicated. If you operate your vehicle occasionally under any of these conditions, it is not necessary to perform the extra maintenance. For specific recommendations, see your dealership service advisor or technician.
Perform the services shown in the following tables when specified or within 3,000 mi (4,800 km) of the message appearing in the information display prompting you to change your oil.
· Example 1: The message comes on at 28,751 mi (46,270 km). Perform the 30,000 mi (48,000 km) automatic transmission fluid replacement.
· Example 2: The message has not come on, but the odometer reads 30,000 mi (48,000 km) (for example, the Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor was reset at 25,000 mi (40,000 km)). Perform the engine air filter replacement.
Towing a Trailer or Using a Car-top Carrier
As required
Change engine oil and filter as indicated by the information display and perform services listed in the Normal Scheduled Maintenance chart.
Inspect frequently, service Inspect rear axle and U-joints (All-Wheel Drive only). as required
Every 30,000 mi (48,000 km)
Change automatic transmission fluid.
Every 60,000 mi (96,000 km)
Replace spark plugs.
Extensive Idling or Low-speed Driving for Long Distances, as in Heavy Commercial Use (Such as Delivery, Taxi, Patrol Car or Livery)
As required
Change engine oil and filter as indicated by the information display and perform services listed in the Normal Scheduled Maintenance chart.
Inspect frequently, service Replace cabin air filter.
as required
Replace engine air filter.
Every 30,000 mi (48,000 km)
Change automatic transmission fluid.
Every 60,000 mi (96,000 km)
Replace spark plugs.
482
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Operating in Dusty or Sandy Conditions (Such as Unpaved or Dusty Roads)
Inspect frequently, service Replace cabin air filter.
as required
Replace engine air filter.
Every 5,000 mi (8,000 km) Inspect the wheels and related components for abnormal noise, wear, looseness or drag.
Rotate tires, inspect tires for wear and measure tread depth.
Every 5,000 mi (8,000 km) Change engine oil and filter.* or six months
Perform multi-point inspection.
Every 30,000 mi (48,000 km)
Change automatic transmission fluid.
*Reset your Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor after engine oil and filter changes. See Oil Change Indicator Reset (page 262).
Exceptions
There are several exceptions to the Normal Schedule:
Rear Axle and PTU Maintenance
The Power Transfer Unit (PTU) and rear axle (All-Wheel Drive only) in your vehicle does not require any normal scheduled maintenance, unless the vehicle has experienced extended periods of extreme or severe duty cycle driving or both PTU and the axle has been submerged in water. Checking the PTU and rear axle fluid is not necessary unless the unit shows signs of leakage. Contact an authorized dealer for service.
California Fuel Filter Replacement
If you register your vehicle in California, the California Air Resources Board has determined that the failure to perform this maintenance item does not nullify the emission warranty or limit recall liability before the completion of your vehicle's useful life. Ford Motor Company, however, urges you to have all recommended maintenance services performed at the specified intervals and to record all vehicle service.
Hot Climate Oil Change Intervals
Vehicles operating in the Middle East, North Africa, Sub-Saharan Africa or locations with similar climates using an American Petroleum Institute (API) Certified for Gasoline Engines (Certification mark) oil of SM or SN quality, the normal oil change interval is 3,000 mi (4,800 km).
If the available API SM or SN oils are not available, then the oil change interval is 1,800 mi (2,900 km).
483
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Engine Air Filter and Cabin Air Filter Replacement
The life of the engine air filter and cabin air filter is dependent on exposure to dusty and dirty conditions. Vehicles operated in these conditions require frequent inspection and replacement of the engine air filter and cabin air filter.
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE RECORD
After the scheduled maintenance services are performed, record the Repair Order #, Distance and Engine Hours in the boxes provided.
Repair Order #:
Dealer stamp
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended): E146852
Signature:
Repair Order #: Distance: Engine hours (optional): Multi-point inspection (recommended): E146852
Dealer stamp
Signature:
484
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Repair Order #: Distance: Engine hours (optional): Multi-point inspection (recommended): E146852
Repair Order #: Distance: Engine hours (optional): Multi-point inspection (recommended): E146852
Dealer stamp
Signature:
Dealer stamp
Signature:
485
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Repair Order #: Distance: Engine hours (optional): Multi-point inspection (recommended): E146852
Repair Order #: Distance: Engine hours (optional): Multi-point inspection (recommended): E146852
Dealer stamp
Signature:
Dealer stamp
Signature:
486
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Repair Order #: Distance: Engine hours (optional): Multi-point inspection (recommended): E146852
Repair Order #: Distance: Engine hours (optional): Multi-point inspection (recommended): E146852
Dealer stamp
Signature:
Dealer stamp
Signature:
487
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Repair Order #: Distance: Engine hours (optional): Multi-point inspection (recommended): E146852
Repair Order #: Distance: Engine hours (optional): Multi-point inspection (recommended): E146852
Dealer stamp
Signature:
Dealer stamp
Signature:
488
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Repair Order #: Distance: Engine hours (optional): Multi-point inspection (recommended): E146852
Repair Order #: Distance: Engine hours (optional): Multi-point inspection (recommended): E146852
Dealer stamp
Signature:
Dealer stamp
Signature:
489
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Repair Order #: Distance: Engine hours (optional): Multi-point inspection (recommended): E146852
Repair Order #: Distance: Engine hours (optional): Multi-point inspection (recommended): E146852
Dealer stamp
Signature:
Dealer stamp
Signature:
490
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Repair Order #: Distance: Engine hours (optional): Multi-point inspection (recommended): E146852
Repair Order #: Distance: Engine hours (optional): Multi-point inspection (recommended): E146852
Dealer stamp
Signature:
Dealer stamp
Signature:
491
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Repair Order #: Distance: Engine hours (optional): Multi-point inspection (recommended): E146852
Repair Order #: Distance: Engine hours (optional): Multi-point inspection (recommended): E146852
Dealer stamp
Signature:
Dealer stamp
Signature:
492
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Repair Order #: Distance: Engine hours (optional): Multi-point inspection (recommended): E146852
Repair Order #: Distance: Engine hours (optional): Multi-point inspection (recommended): E146852
Dealer stamp
Signature:
Dealer stamp
Signature:
493
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Appendices
ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY
WARNING: Do not place objects or mount equipment on or near the airbag cover, on the side of the seatbacks (of the front seats), or in front seat areas that may come into contact with a deploying airbag. Failure to follow these instructions may increase the risk of personal injury in the event of a crash.
WARNING: Do not fasten antenna cables to original vehicle wiring, fuel pipes and brake pipes.
Car
WARNING: Keep antenna and power cables at least 4 in (10 cm) from any electronic modules and airbags.
Note: We test and certify your vehicle to meet electromagnetic compatibility legislation (UNECE Regulation 10 or other applicable local requirements). It is your responsibility to make sure that any equipment an authorized dealer installs on your vehicle complies with applicable local legislation and other requirements.
Note: Any radio frequency transmitter equipment in your vehicle (such as cellular telephones and amateur radio transmitters) must keep to the parameters in the following table. We do not provide special provisions or conditions for installations or use.
E239120
494
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Appendices
Van
E239122 Truck
E239121
495
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Appendices
Frequency Band Maximum output power Watt (Peak
MHz
RMS)
1-30
50
50-54
50
68-88
50
142-176
50
380-512
50
806-870
10
Antenna Positions
1 2, 3 2, 3 2, 3 2, 3 2, 3
Note: After the installation of radio frequency transmitters, check for disturbances from and to all electrical equipment in your vehicle, both in the standby and transmit modes.
Check all electrical equipment:
· With the ignition ON.
· With the engine running.
· During a road test at various speeds.
Check that electromagnetic fields generated inside your vehicle cabin by the transmitter installed do not exceed applicable human exposure requirements.
END USER LICENSE
AGREEMENT
VEHICLE SOFTWARE END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT (EULA)
· You ("You" or "Your" as applicable) have acquired a vehicle having several devices, including SYNC ® and various control modules, ("DEVICES") that include software licensed or owned by Ford Motor Company and its affiliates ("FORD MOTOR COMPANY"). Those software products of FORD MOTOR COMPANY origin, as well as associated media, printed materials, and "online" or electronic documentation ("SOFTWARE") are protected by international intellectual property laws and treaties. The SOFTWARE is licensed, not sold. All rights reserved.
· The SOFTWARE may interface with and/or communicate with, or may be later upgraded to interface with and/or communicate with additional software and/or systems provided by FORD MOTOR COMPANY.
496
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Appendices
IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THIS END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT ("EULA") DO NOT USE THE DEVICES OR COPY THE SOFTWARE. ANY USE OF THE SOFTWARE, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO USE ON THE DEVICES, WILL CONSTITUTE YOUR AGREEMENT TO THIS EULA (OR RATIFICATION OF ANY PREVIOUS CONSENT).
GRANT OF SOFTWARE LICENSE: This EULA grants you the following license:
· You may use the SOFTWARE as installed on the DEVICES and as otherwise interfacing with systems and/or services provide by or through FORD MOTOR COMPANY or its third party software and service providers.
Description of Other Rights and Limitations
· Speech Recognition: If the SOFTWARE includes speech recognition component(s), you should understand that speech recognition is an inherently statistical process and that recognition errors are inherent in the process. Neither FORD MOTOR
COMPANY nor its suppliers shall be liable for any damages arising out of errors in the speech recognition process. It is your responsibility to monitor any speech recognition functions included in the system.
· Limitations on Reverse Engineering, Decompilation and Disassembly: You may not reverse engineer, decompile, translate, disassemble or attempt to discover any source code or underlying ideas or algorithms of the SOFTWARE nor permit others to reverse engineer, decompile or disassemble the SOFTWARE, except and only to the extent that such activity is expressly permitted by applicable law notwithstanding this limitation or to the extent as may be permitted by the licensing terms governing use of any open source components included with the SOFTWARE.
· Limitations on Distributing, Copying, Modifying and Creating Derivative Works: You may not distribute, copy, make modifications to or create derivative works based on the SOFTWARE, except and only to the extent that such activity is expressly permitted by applicable law notwithstanding this limitation or to the extent as may be permitted by the licensing terms governing use of any open source components included with the SOFTWARE.
· Single EULA: The end user documentation for the DEVICES and related systems and services may contain multiple EULAs, such as multiple translations and/or multiple media versions (e.g., in the user documentation and in the software). Even if you receive multiple EULAs, you are licensed to use only one (1) copy of the SOFTWARE.
497
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Appendices
· SOFTWARE Transfer: You may permanently transfer your rights under this EULA only as part of a sale or transfer of the DEVICES, provided you retain no copies, you transfer all of the SOFTWARE (including all component parts, the media and printed materials, any upgrades, and, if applicable, the Certificate(s) of Authenticity), and the recipient agrees to the terms of this EULA. If the SOFTWARE is an upgrade, any transfer must include all prior versions of the SOFTWARE.
· Termination: Without prejudice to any other rights, FORD MOTOR COMPANY may terminate this EULA if you fail to comply with the terms and conditions of this EULA.
· Internet-Based Services Components: The SOFTWARE may contain components that enable and facilitate the use of certain Internet-based services. You acknowledge and agree that FORD MOTOR COMPANY, third party software and service suppliers, its affiliates and/or its designated agent may automatically check the version of the SOFTWARE and/or its components that you are utilizing and may provide upgrades or supplements to the SOFTWARE that may be automatically downloaded to your DEVICES.
· Additional Software/Services: The SOFTWARE may permit FORD MOTOR COMPANY, third party software and service suppliers, its affiliates and/or its designated agent to provide or make available to you SOFTWARE updates, supplements, add-on components, or Internet-based services components of the SOFTWARE after the date you obtain your initial copy of the SOFTWARE ("Supplemental Components".) SOFTWARE updates may cause you to incur additional
charges from your wireless service provider. If FORD MOTOR COMPANY or third party software and services suppliers provide or make available to you Supplemental Components and no other EULA terms are provided along with the Supplemental Components, then the terms of this EULA shall apply. FORD MOTOR COMPANY, its affiliates and/or its designated agent reserve the right to discontinue without liability any Internet-based services provided to you or made available to you through the use of the SOFTWARE.
· Links to Third Party Sites: The SOFTWARE may provide you with the ability to link to third party sites. The third party sites are not under the control of FORD MOTOR COMPANY, its affiliates and/or its designated agent. Neither FORD MOTOR COMPANY nor its affiliates nor its designated agent are responsible for (I) the contents of any third party sites, any links contained in third party sites, or any changes or updates to third party sites, or (ii) webcasting or any other form of transmission received from any third party sites. If the SOFTWARE provides links to third party sites, those links are provided to you only as a convenience, and the inclusion of any link does not imply an endorsement of the third party site by FORD MOTOR COMPANY, its affiliates and/or its designated agent.
· Obligation to Drive Responsibly: You recognize your obligation to drive responsibly and keep attention on the road. You will read and abide with the DEVICES operating instructions particularly as they pertain to safety and you agree to assume any risk associated with the use of the DEVICES.
498
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Appendices
UPGRADES AND RECOVERY MEDIA: If the SOFTWARE is provided by FORD MOTOR COMPANY separate from the DEVICES on media such as a ROM chip, CD ROM disk(s) or via web download or other means, and is labeled "For Upgrade Purposes Only" or "For Recovery Purposes Only" you may install one (1) copy of such SOFTWARE onto the DEVICES as a replacement copy for the existing SOFTWARE, and use it in accordance with this EULA, including any additional EULA terms accompanying the upgrade SOFTWARE.
INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS: All title and intellectual property rights in and to the SOFTWARE (including but not limited to any images, photographs, animations, video, audio, music, text and "applets" incorporated into the SOFTWARE), the accompanying printed materials, and any copies of the SOFTWARE, are owned by FORD MOTOR COMPANY, or its affiliates or suppliers. The SOFTWARE is licensed, not sold. You may not copy the printed materials accompanying the SOFTWARE. All title and intellectual property rights in and to the content which may be accessed through use of the SOFTWARE is the property of the respective content owner and may be protected by applicable copyright or other intellectual property laws and treaties. This EULA grants you no rights to use such content outside its intended use. All rights not specifically granted under this EULA are reserved by FORD MOTOR COMPANY, its affiliates, and third party software and service providers and suppliers. Use of any on-line services which may be accessed through the SOFTWARE may be governed by the respective terms of use relating to such services. If this SOFTWARE contains documentation that is provided only in electronic form, you may print one copy of such electronic documentation.
EXPORT RESTRICTIONS: You acknowledge that the SOFTWARE is subject to U.S. and European Union export jurisdiction. You agree to comply with all applicable international and national laws that apply to the SOFTWARE, including the U.S. Export Administration Regulations, as well as end-user, end-use and destination restrictions issued by U.S. and other governments.
TRADEMARKS: This EULA does not grant you any rights in connection with any trademarks or service marks of FORD MOTOR COMPANY, its affiliates, and third party software and service providers.
PRODUCT SUPPORT: Please refer to FORD MOTOR COMPANY instructions provided in the documentation for the DEVICES product support, such as the vehicle owner guide.
Should you have any questions concerning this EULA, or if you desire to contact FORD MOTOR COMPANY for any other reason, please refer to the address provided in the documentation for the DEVICES.
No Liability for Certain Damages: EXCEPT AS PROHIBITED BY LAW, FORD MOTOR COMPANY, ANY THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE OR SERVICES SUPPLIERS, AND THEIR AFFILIATES SHALL HAVE NO LIABILITY FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES ARISING FROM OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THE SOFTWARE. THIS LIMITATION SHALL APPLY EVEN IF ANY REMEDY FAILS OF ITS ESSENTIAL PURPOSE. THERE ARE NO WARRANTIES OTHER THAN THOSE THAT MAY BE EXPRESSLY PROVIDED FOR YOUR NEW VEHICLE.
499
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Appendices
SYNC® Automotive Important Safety Information Read and follow instructions:
· Before using your SYNC® system, read and follow all instructions and safety information provided in this end user manual ("Owner Guide".) Not following precautions found in the Owner Guide can lead to an accident or other serious injuries.
General Operation
· Voice Command Control: Certain functions within the SYNC® system may be accomplished using voice commands. Using voice commands while driving helps you to operate the system without removing your hands from the wheel or eyes from the road.
· Prolonged Views of Screen: Do not access any function requiring a prolonged view of the screen while you are driving. Pull over in a safe and legal manner before attempting to access a function of the system requiring prolonged attention.
· Volume Setting: Do not raise the volume excessively. Keep the volume at a level where you can still hear outside traffic and emergency signals while driving. Driving while unable to hear these sounds could cause an accident.
· Navigation Features: Any navigation features included in the system are intended to provide turn by turn instructions to get you to a desired destination. Please make certain all persons using this system carefully read and follow instructions and safety information fully.
· Distraction Hazard: Any navigation features may require manual (non-verbal) setup. Attempting to perform such set-up or insert data while driving can distract your attention and could cause an accident or other serious injury. Stop the vehicle in a safe and legal manner before attempting these operations.
· Let Your Judgment Prevail: Any navigation features are provided only as an aid. Make your driving decisions based on your observations of local conditions and existing traffic regulations. Any such feature is not a substitute for your personal judgment. Any route suggestions made by this system should never replace any local traffic regulations or your personal judgment or knowledge of safe driving practices.
· Route Safety: Do not follow the route suggestions if doing so would result in an unsafe or illegal maneuver, if you would be placed in an unsafe situation, or if you would be directed into an area that you consider unsafe. The driver is ultimately responsible for the safe operation of the vehicle and therefore, must evaluate whether it is safe to follow the suggested directions.
· Potential Map Inaccuracy: Maps used by this system may be inaccurate because of changes in roads, traffic controls or driving conditions. Always use good judgment and common sense when following the suggested routes.
· Emergency Services: Do not rely on any navigation features included in the system to route you to emergency services. Ask local authorities or an emergency services operator for these locations. Not all emergency services such as police, fire stations, hospitals and clinics are likely to be contained in the map database for such navigation features.
500
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Appendices
Your Responsibilities and Assumptions of Risk
· You agree to each of the following:(a) Any use of the SOFTWARE while driving an automobile or other vehicle in violation of applicable law or otherwise driving in an unsafe manner presents a significant risk of distracted driving and should not be attempted under any circumstances;(b) Use of the SOFTWARE at excessive volume poses a significant risk of hearing damage and should not be attempted under any circumstances;(c) The SOFTWARE may not be compatible with new or different versions of an operating system, third party software, or third party services, and the SOFTWARE may potentially cause a critical failure of an operating system, third party software, or third party service.(d) Any third party service accessed by or third party software used with the SOFTWARE (I) may charge an additional fee for access, (ii) may not work correctly, on an uninterrupted basis, or error free, (iii) may change streaming formats or discontinue operation, (iv) may contain adult, profane or offensive content; and (v) may contain inaccurate, false or misleading traffic, weather, financial or safety information or other content; and (e) Use of the SOFTWARE may cause you to incur additional charges from your wireless service provider (WSP) and any data or minute calculators that may be included in the software program are for reference only, are not warranted in any way and should not be relied upon in anyway.
· When using the SOFTWARE, you agree to be responsible for and assume the entire risk to the items set forth in Section (a) (e) above.
Disclaimer of Warranty
YOU EXPRESSLY ACKNOWLEDGE AND AGREE THAT USE OF THE DEVICES AND SOFTWARE IS AT YOUR SOLE RISK AND THAT THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO SATISFACTORY QUALITY, PERFORMANCE, COMPATIBILITY, ACCURACY AND EFFORT IS WITH YOU. TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, THE SOFTWARE AND ANY THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE OR THIRD-PARTY SERVICES ARE PROVIDED "AS IS" AND "AS AVAILABLE", WITH ALL FAULTS AND WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, AND FORD MOTOR COMPANY HEREBY DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES AND CONDITIONS WITH RESPECT TO THE SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE, AND THIRD-PARTY SERVICES, EITHER EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR STATUTORY, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES AND/OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY, OF SATISFACTORY QUALITY, OF FITNESS FOR AN ARTICULAR PURPOSE, OF ACCURACY, OF QUIET ENJOYMENT, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD-PARTY RIGHTS. FORD MOTOR COMPANY DOES NOT WARRANT (a) AGAINST INTERFERENCE WITH YOUR ENJOYMENT OF THE SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE, OR THIRD-PARTY SERVICES, (b) THAT THE SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE, OR THIRD-PARTY SERVICES WILL MEET YOUR REQUIREMENTS, (c) THAT THE OPERATION OF THE SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE, OR THIRD-PARTY SERVICES WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR-FREE, (d) OR THAT DEFECTS IN THE SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE, OR THIRD-PARTY SERVICES WILL BE CORRECTED. NO ORAL OR WRITTEN INFORMATION OR ADVICE GIVEN BY FORD MOTOR COMPANY OR ITS AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE SHALL
501
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Appendices
CREATE A WARRANTY. SHOULD THE SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE, OR THIRD-PARTY SERVICES PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE ENTIRE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION. SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE DISCLAIMER OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR LIMITATIONS ON APPLICABLE STATUTORY RIGHTS OF A CONSUMER, SO THE ABOVE DISCLAIMER MAY NOT FULLY APPLY TO YOU. THE SOLE WARRANTY PROVIDED BY FORD MOTOR COMPANY SHALL BE FOUND IN THE WARRANTY INFORMATION INCLUDING WITH YOUR OWNER GUIDE. TO THE EXTENT THAT THERE IS ANY CONFLICT BETWEEN THE TERMS OF THIS SECTION AND THE WARRANTY BOOKLET, THE WARRANTY BOOKLET SHALL CONTROL.
Applicable Law, Venue, Jurisdiction
· The laws of the State of Michigan govern this EULA and Your use of the SOFTWARE. Your use of the SOFTWARE may also be subject to other local, state, national, or international laws. Any litigation arising out of or related to this EULA shall be brought and maintained exclusively in a court of the State of Michigan located in Wayne County or in the United States District Court for the Eastern District of Michigan. You hereby consent to submit to the personal jurisdiction of a court in the State of Michigan located in Wayne County and the United States District Court for the Eastern District of Michigan for any dispute arising out of or relating to this EULA.
Binding Arbitration and Class Action Waiver
(a) Application. This Section applies to any dispute EXCEPT IT DOES NOT INCLUDE A DISPUTE RELATING TO COPYRIGHT INFRINGEMENT, OR TO THE ENFORCEMENT OR VALIDITY OF YOUR, FORD MOTOR COMPANY, OR ANY OF FORD MOTOR COMPANY'S LICENSORS' INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS. Dispute means any dispute, action, or other controversy between You and FORD MOTOR COMPANY, other than the exceptions listed above, concerning the SOFTWARE (including its price) or this EULA, whether in contract, warranty, tort, statute, regulation, ordinance, or any other legal or equitable basis.
(b) Notice of Dispute. In the event of a Dispute, You or FORD MOTOR COMPANY must give the other a "Notice of Dispute", which is a written statement of the name, address, and contact information of the party giving it, the facts giving rise to the dispute, and the relief requested. You and FORD MOTOR COMPANY will attempt to resolve any dispute through informal negotiation within 60 days from the date the Notice of Dispute is sent. After 60 days, You or FORD MOTOR COMPANY may commence arbitration.
(c) Small claims court. You may also litigate any dispute in small claims court in your county of residence or FORD MOTOR COMPANY'S principal place of business, if the dispute meets all requirements to be heard in the small claims court. You may litigate in small claims court whether or not You negotiated informally first.
(d) Binding arbitration. If You and FORD MOTOR COMPANY, do not resolve any dispute by informal negotiation or in small claims court, any other effort to resolve the dispute will be conducted exclusively by binding arbitration. You are giving up
502
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Appendices
the right to litigate (or participate in as a party or class member) all disputes in court before a judge or jury. Instead, all disputes will be resolved before a neutral arbitrator, whose decision will be final except for a limited right of appeal under the Federal Arbitration Act. Any court with jurisdiction over the parties may enforce the arbitrator's award.
(e) Class action waiver. Any proceedings to resolve or litigate any dispute in any forum will be conducted solely on an individual basis. Neither you nor FORD MOTOR COMPANY, will seek to have any dispute heard as a class action, as a private attorney general action, or in any other proceeding in which any party acts or proposes to act in a representative capacity. No arbitration or proceeding will be combined with another without the prior written consent of all parties to all affected arbitrations or proceedings.
(f) Arbitration procedure. Any arbitration will be conducted by the American Arbitration Association (the "AAA"), under its Commercial Arbitration Rules. If You are an individual and use the SOFTWARE for personal or vehicle use, or if the value of the dispute is $75,000 or less whether or not You are an individual or how You use the SOFTWARE, the AAA Supplementary Procedures for Consumer-Related Disputes will also apply. To commence arbitration, submit a Commercial Arbitration Rules Demand for Arbitration form to the AAA. You may request a telephonic or in-person hearing by following the AAA rules. In a dispute involving $10,000 or less, any hearing will be telephonic unless the arbitrator finds good cause to hold an in-person hearing instead. For more information, see adr.org or call 1-800-778-7879. You agree to commence arbitration only in your county of residence or FORD MOTOR COMPANY'S principal place of business. The arbitrator
may award the same damages to You individually as a court could. The arbitrator may award declaratory or injunctive relief only to You individually, and only to the extent required to satisfy Your individual claim.
(g) Arbitration fees and incentives.
· I. Disputes involving $75,000 or less. FORD MOTOR COMPANY will promptly reimburse your filing fees and pay the AAA's and arbitrator's fees and expenses. If you reject FORD MOTOR COMPANY'S last written settlement offer made before the arbitrator was appointed ("last written offer"), your dispute goes all the way to an arbitrator's decision (called an "award"), and the arbitrator awards you more than the last written offer, FORD MOTOR COMPANY will give you three incentives: (1) pay the greater of the award or $1,000; (2) pay twice your reasonable attorney's fees, if any; and (3) reimburse any expenses (including expert witness fees and costs) that your attorney reasonably accrues for investigating, preparing, and pursuing your claim in arbitration. The arbitrator will determine the amounts.
· ii. Disputes involving more than $75,000. The AAA rules will govern payment of filing fees and the AAA's and arbitrator's fees and expenses.
· iii. Disputes involving any amount. In any arbitration you commence, FORD MOTOR COMPANY will seek its AAA or arbitrator's fees and expenses, or Your filing fees it reimbursed, only if the arbitrator finds the arbitration frivolous or brought for an improper purpose. In any arbitration FORD MOTOR COMPANY commences, it will pay all
503
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Appendices
filing, AAA, and arbitrator's fees and expenses. It will not seek its attorney's fees or expenses from you in any arbitration. Fees and expenses are not counted in determining how much a dispute involves.
(h) Claims or disputes must be filed within one year. To the extent permitted by law, any claim or dispute under this EULA to which this Section applies must be filed within one year in small claims court (Section c) or in arbitration (Section d). The one-year period begins when the claim or dispute first could be filed. If such a claim or dispute is not filed within one year, it is permanently barred.
(I) Severability. If the class action waiver (Section e) is found to be illegal or unenforceable as to all or some parts of a dispute, then that portion of Section e will not apply to those parts. Instead, those parts will be severed and proceed in a court of law, with the remaining parts proceeding in arbitration. If any other provision of that portion Section e is found to be illegal or unenforceable, that provision will be severed with the remainder of Section e remaining in full force and effect.
Telenav Software End User License Agreement
Please read these terms and conditions carefully before you use the TeleNav Software. Your use of the TeleNav Software indicates that you accept these terms and conditions. If you do not accept these terms and conditions, do not break the seal of the package, launch, or otherwise use the TeleNav Software. TeleNav may revise this Agreement and the privacy policy at any time, with or without notice to you. You agree to visit http://www.telenav.com from time to time to review the then current version of this Agreement and of the privacy policy.
1. Safe and Lawful Use
You acknowledge that devoting attention to the TeleNav Software may pose a risk of injury or death to you and others in situations that otherwise require your undivided attention, and you therefore agree to comply with the following when using the TeleNav Software:
(a) observe all traffic laws and otherwise drive safely;
(b) use your own personal judgment while driving. If you feel that a route suggested by the TeleNav Software instructs you to perform an unsafe or illegal maneuver, places you in an unsafe situation, or directs you into an area that you consider to be unsafe, do not follow such instructions;
(c) do not input destinations, or otherwise manipulate the TeleNav Software, unless your vehicle is stationary and parked;
(d) do not use the TeleNav Software for any illegal, unauthorized, unintended, unsafe, hazardous, or unlawful purposes, or in any manner inconsistent with this Agreement;
(e) arrange all GPS and wireless devices and cables necessary for use of the TeleNav Software in a secure manner in your vehicle so that they will not interfere with your driving and will not prevent the operation of any safety device (such as an airbag).
You agree to indemnify and hold TeleNav harmless against all claims resulting from any dangerous or otherwise inappropriate use of the TeleNav Software in any moving vehicle, including as a result of your failure to comply with the directions above.
504
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Appendices
2. Account Information
You agree: (a) when registering the TeleNav Software, to provide TeleNav with true, accurate, current, and complete information about yourself, and (b) to inform TeleNav promptly of any changes to such information, and to keep it true, accurate, current and complete.
3. Software License
· Subject to your compliance with the terms of this Agreement, TeleNav hereby grants to you a personal, non-exclusive, non-transferable license (except as expressly permitted below in connection with your permanent transfer of the TeleNav Software license), without the right to sublicense, to use the TeleNav Software (in object code form only) in order to access and use the TeleNav Software. This license shall terminate upon any termination or expiration of this Agreement. You agree that you will use the TeleNav Software only for your personal business or leisure purposes, and not to provide commercial navigation services to other parties.
3.1 License Limitations
· (a) reverse engineer, decompile, disassemble, translate, modify, alter or otherwise change the TeleNav Software or any part thereof; (b) attempt to derive the source code, audio library or structure of the TeleNav Software without the prior express written consent of TeleNav; (c) remove from the TeleNav Software, or alter, any of TeleNav's or its suppliers' trademarks, trade names, logos, patent or copyright notices, or other notices or markings; (d)
distribute, sublicense or otherwise transfer the TeleNav Software to others, except as part of your permanent transfer of the TeleNav Software; or (e) use the TeleNav Software in any manner that
I. infringes the intellectual property or proprietary rights, rights of publicity or privacy or other rights of any party,
ii. violates any law, statute, ordinance or regulation, including but not limited to laws and regulations related to spamming, privacy, consumer and child protection, obscenity or defamation, or
iii. is harmful, threatening, abusive, harassing, tortuous, defamatory, vulgar, obscene, libelous, or otherwise objectionable; and (f) lease, rent out, or otherwise permit unauthorized access by third parties to the TeleNav Software without advanced written permission of TeleNav.
4. Disclaimers
· To the fullest extent permissible pursuant to applicable law, in no event will TeleNav, its licensors and suppliers, or agents or employees of any of the foregoing, be liable for any decision made or action taken by you or anyone else in reliance on the information provided by the TeleNav Software. TeleNav also does not warrant the accuracy of the map or other data used for the TeleNav Software. Such data may not always reflect reality due to, among other things, road closures, construction, weather, new roads and other changing conditions. You are responsible for the entire risk arising out of your use of the TeleNav Software. For example but without limitation, you agree not to rely on the TeleNav Software for critical navigation in areas where the well-being or survival of you or others
505
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Appendices
is dependent on the accuracy of navigation, as the maps or functionality of the TeleNav Software are not intended to support such high risk applications, especially in more remote geographical areas.
· TELENAV EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS AND EXCLUDES ALL WARRANTIES IN CONNECTION WITH THE TELENAV SOFTWARE, WHETHER STATUTORY, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING ALL WARRANTIES WHICH MAY ARISE FROM COURSE OF DEALING, CUSTOM OR TRADE AND INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS WITH RESPECT TO THE TELENAV SOFTWARE.
· Certain jurisdictions do not permit the disclaimer of certain warranties, so this limitation may not apply to you.
5. Limitation of Liability
· TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED UNDER APPLICABLE LAW, UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL TELENAV OR ITS LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE TO YOU OR TO ANY THIRD PARTY FOR ANY INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, SPECIAL OR EXEMPLARY DAMAGES (INCLUDING IN EACH CASE, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, DAMAGES FOR THE INABILITY TO USE THE EQUIPMENT OR ACCESS DATA, LOSS OF DATA, LOSS OF BUSINESS, LOSS OF PROFITS, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION OR THE LIKE) ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THE TELENAV SOFTWARE, EVEN IF TELENAV HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY DAMAGES THAT YOU MIGHT INCUR FOR ANY
REASON WHATSOEVER (INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, ALL DAMAGES REFERENCED HEREIN AND ALL DIRECT OR GENERAL DAMAGES IN CONTRACT, TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE) OR OTHERWISE), THE ENTIRE LIABILITY OF TELENAV AND OF ALL OF TELENAV'S SUPPLIERS SHALL BE LIMITED TO THE AMOUNT ACTUALLY PAID BY YOU FOR THE TELENAV SOFTWARE. SOME STATES AND/OR JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS OR EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.
6. Arbitration and Governing Law
· You agree that any dispute, claim or controversy arising out of or relating to this Agreement or the TeleNav Software shall be settled by independent arbitration involving a neutral arbitrator and administered by the American Arbitration Association in the County of Santa Clara, California. The arbitrator shall apply the Commercial Arbitration Rules of the American Arbitration Association, and the judgment upon the award rendered by the arbitrator may be entered by any court having jurisdiction. Note that there is no judge or jury in an arbitration proceeding and the decision of the arbitrator shall be binding upon both parties. You expressly agree to waive your right to a jury trial. This Agreement and performance hereunder will be governed by and construed in accordance with the laws of the State of California, without giving effect to its conflict of law provisions. To the extent judicial action is necessary in connection with the binding arbitration, both TeleNav and you agree to submit
506
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Appendices
to the exclusive jurisdiction of the courts of the County of Santa Clara, California. The United Nations Convention on Contracts for the International Sale of Goods shall not apply.
7. Assignment
· You may not resell, assign, or transfer this Agreement or any of your rights or obligations, except in totality, in connection with your permanent transfer of the TeleNav Software, and expressly conditioned upon the new user of the TeleNav Software agreeing to be bound by the terms and conditions of this Agreement. Any such sale, assignment or transfer that is not expressly permitted under this paragraph will result in immediate termination of this Agreement, without liability to TeleNav, in which case you and all other parties shall immediately cease all use of the TeleNav Software. Notwithstanding the foregoing, TeleNav may assign this Agreement to any other party at any time without notice, provided the assignee remains bound by this Agreement.
8. Miscellaneous
8.1
This Agreement constitutes the entire agreement between TeleNav and you with respect to the subject matter hereof.
8.2
Except for the limited licenses expressly granted in this Agreement, TeleNav retains all right, title and interest in and to the TeleNav Software, including without limitation all related intellectual property rights. No licenses or other rights which are not expressly granted in this Agreement are intended to, or shall be, granted or
conferred by implication, statute, inducement, estoppel or otherwise, and TeleNav and its suppliers and licensors hereby reserve all of their respective rights other than the licenses explicitly granted in this Agreement.
8.3
By using the TeleNav Software, you consent to receive from TeleNav all communications, including notices, agreements, legally required disclosures or other information in connection with the TeleNav Software (collectively, "Notices") electronically. TeleNav may provide such Notices by posting them on TeleNav's Website or by downloading such Notices to your wireless device. If you desire to withdraw your consent to receive Notices electronically, you must discontinue your use of the TeleNav Software.
8.4
TeleNav's or your failure to require performance of any provision shall not affect that party's right to require performance at any time thereafter, nor shall a waiver of any breach or default of this Agreement constitute a waiver of any subsequent breach or default or a waiver of the provision itself.
8.5
If any provision herein is held unenforceable, then such provision will be modified to reflect the intention of the parties, and the remaining provisions of this Agreement will remain in full force and effect.
507
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Appendices
8.6
The headings in this Agreement are for convenience of reference only, will not be deemed to be a part of this Agreement, and will not be referred to in connection with the construction or interpretation of this Agreement. As used in this Agreement, the words "include" and "including" and variations thereof, will not be deemed to be terms of limitation, but rather will be deemed to be followed by the words "without limitation".
9. Other Vendors Terms and Conditions
· The Telenav Software utilizes map and other data licensed to Telenav by third party vendors for the benefit of you and other end users. This Agreement includes end-user terms applicable to these companies (included at the end of this Agreement), and thus your use of the Telenav Software is also subject to such terms. You agree to comply with the following additional terms and conditions, which are applicable to Telenav's third party vendor licensors::
9.1 End User Terms Required by HERE North America, LLC
The data ("Data") is provided for your personal, internal use only and not for resale. It is protected by copyright, and is subject to the following terms and conditions which are agreed to by you, on the one hand, and Telenav ("Telenav") and its licensors (including their licensors and suppliers) on the other hand.
© 2013 HERE. All rights reserved.
The Data for areas of Canada includes information taken with permission from Canadian authorities, including: © Her Majesty the Queen in Right of Canada, © Queen's Printer for Ontario, © Canada Post Corporation, GeoBase®, © Department of Natural Resources Canada.
HERE holds a non-exclusive license from the United States Postal Service® to publish and sell ZIP+4® information.
©United States Postal Service® 2014. Prices are not established, controlled or approved by the United States Postal Service®. The following trademarks and registrations are owned by the USPS: United States Postal Service, USPS, and ZIP+4
The Data for Mexico includes certain data from Instituto Nacional de Estadística y Geografía.
9.2 End User Terms Required by NAV2 (Shanghai) Co., Ltd
The data ("Data") is provided for your personal, internal use only and not for resale. It is protected by copyright, and is subject to the following terms and conditions which are agreed to by you, on the one hand, and NAV2 (Shanghai) Co., Ltd ("NAV2") and its licensors (including their licensors and suppliers) on the other hand. 20xx. All rights reserved
Terms and Conditions
Permitted Use. You agree to use this Data together with the Telenav Software solely for the internal business and personal purposes for which you were licensed, and not for service bureau, time-sharing or other similar purposes. Accordingly, but subject to the restrictions set forth in the following paragraphs, you agree not to otherwise reproduce, copy, modify, decompile, disassemble, create any derivative works of, or reverse engineer any portion of this Data, and may not transfer or distribute it in any form, for any purpose, except to the extent permitted by mandatory laws.
508
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Appendices
Restrictions. Except where you have been specifically licensed to do so by Telenav, and without limiting the preceding paragraph, you may not use this Data (a) with any products, systems, or applications installed or otherwise connected to or in communication with vehicles, capable of vehicle navigation, positioning, dispatch, real time route guidance, fleet management or similar applications; or (b) with or in communication with any positioning devices or any mobile or wireless-connected electronic or computer devices, including without limitation cellular phones, palmtop and handheld computers, pagers, and personal digital assistants or PDAs.
Warning. The Data may contain inaccurate or incomplete information due to the passage of time, changing circumstances, sources used and the nature of collecting comprehensive geographic data, any of which may lead to incorrect results.
No Warranty. This Data is provided to you "as is," and you agree to use it at your own risk. Telenav and its licensors (and their licensors and suppliers) make no guarantees, representations or warranties of any kind, express or implied, arising by law or otherwise, including but not limited to, content, quality, accuracy, completeness, effectiveness, reliability, fitness for a particular purpose, usefulness, use or results to be obtained from this Data, or that the Data or server will be uninterrupted or error-free.
Disclaimer of Warranty: TELENAV AND ITS LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) DISCLAIM ANY WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, OF QUALITY, PERFORMANCE, MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR NON-INFRINGEMENT. Some States, Territories and Countries do not allow certain warranty exclusions, so to that extent the above exclusion may not apply to you.
Disclaimer of Liability: TELENAV AND ITS LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) SHALL NOT BE LIABLE TO YOU: IN RESPECT OF ANY CLAIM, DEMAND OR ACTION, IRRESPECTIVE OF THE NATURE OF THE CAUSE OF THE CLAIM, DEMAND OR ACTION ALLEGING ANY LOSS, INJURY OR DAMAGES, DIRECT OR INDIRECT, WHICH MAY RESULT FROM THE USE OR POSSESSION OF THE INFORMATION; OR FOR ANY LOSS OF PROFIT, REVENUE, CONTRACTS OR SAVINGS, OR ANY OTHER DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF YOUR USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THIS INFORMATION, ANY DEFECT IN THE INFORMATION, OR THE BREACH OF THESE TERMS OR CONDITIONS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION IN CONTRACT OR TORT OR BASED ON A WARRANTY, EVEN IF TELENAV OR ITS LICENSORS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. Some States, Territories and Countries do not allow certain liability exclusions or damages limitations, so to that extent the above may not apply to you.
Export Control. You shall not export from anywhere any part of the Data or any direct product thereof except in compliance with, and with all licenses and approvals required under, applicable export laws, rules and regulations, including but not limited to the laws, rules and regulations administered by the Office of Foreign Assets Control of the U.S. Department of Commerce and the Bureau of Industry and Security of the U.S. Department of Commerce. To the extent that any such
509
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Appendices
export laws, rules or regulations prohibit HERE from complying with any of its obligations hereunder to deliver or distribute Data, such failure shall be excused and shall not constitute a breach of this Agreement.
Entire Agreement. These terms and conditions constitute the entire agreement between Telenav (and its licensors, including their licensors and suppliers) and you pertaining to the subject matter hereof, and supersedes in their entirety any and all written or oral agreements previously existing between us with respect to such subject matter.
Governing Law. The above terms and conditions shall be governed by the laws of the State of Illinois [insert "Netherlands" where European HERE Data is used], without giving effect to (i) its conflict of laws provisions, or (ii) the United Nations Convention for Contracts for the International Sale of Goods, which is explicitly excluded. You agree to submit to the jurisdiction of the State of Illinois [insert "The Netherlands" where European HERE Data is used] for any and all disputes, claims and actions arising from or in connection with the Data provided to you hereunder.
Government End Users. If the Data is being acquired by or on behalf of the United States government or any other entity seeking or applying rights similar to those customarily claimed by the United States government, this Data is a "commercial item" as that term is defined at 48 C.F.R. ("FAR") 2.101, is licensed in accordance with these End-User Terms, and each copy of Data delivered or otherwise furnished shall be marked and embedded as appropriate with the following "Notice of Use," and shall be treated in accordance with such Notice:
NOTICE OF USE
CONTRACTOR (MANUFACTURER/ SUPPLIER) NAME: HERE
CONTRACTOR (MANUFACTURER/ SUPPLIER) ADDRESS: c/o Nokia, 425 West Randolph Street, Chicago, Illinois
60606
This Data is a commercial item as defined in FAR 2.101 and is subject to these End-User Terms under which this
Data was provided.
© 1987 2014 HERE All rights reserved.
If the Contracting Officer, federal government agency, or any federal official refuses to use the legend provided herein, the Contracting Officer, federal government agency, or any federal official must notify HERE prior to seeking additional or alternative rights in the Data.
I. US/Canada Territory
A. United States Data. The End-User Terms for any Application containing Data for the United States shall contain the following notices:
"HERE holds a non-exclusive license from the United States Postal Service® to publish and sell ZIP+4® information."
"©United States Postal Service® 20XX. Prices are not established, controlled or approved by the United States Postal Service®. The following trademarks and registrations are owned by the USPS: United States Postal Service, USPS, and ZIP+4."
510
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Appendices
B. Canada Data. The following provisions apply to the Data for Canada, which may include or reflect data from third party licensors ("Third Party Data"), including Her Majesty the Queen in Right of Canada ("Her Majesty"), Canada Post Corporation ("Canada Post") and the Department of Natural Resources of Canada ("NRCan"):
1. Disclaimer and Limitation: Client agrees that its use of the Third Party Data is subject to the following provisions:
a. Disclaimer: The Third Party Data is licensed on an "as is" basis. The licensors of such data, including Her Majesty, Canada Post and NRCan, make no guarantees, representations or warranties respecting such data, either express or implied, arising by law or otherwise, including but not limited to, effectiveness, completeness, accuracy or fitness for a particular purpose.
b. Limitation on Liability: The Third Party Data licensors, including Her Majesty, Canada Post and NRCan, shall not be liable: (i) in respect of any claim, demand or action, irrespective of the nature of the cause of the claim, demand or action alleging any loss, injury or damages, direct or indirect, which may result from the use or possession of such Data; or (ii) in any way for loss of revenues or contracts, or any other consequential loss of any kind resulting from any defect in the Data.
2. Copyright Notice: In connection with each copy of all or any portion of the Data for the Territory of Canada, Client shall affix in a conspicuous manner the following copyright notice on at least one of: (i) the label for the storage media of the copy; (ii) the packaging for the copy; or (iii) other materials packaged with the copy, such as user manuals or end user license agreements: "This data includes information taken with permission from Canadian authorities, including © Her Majesty the Queen in Right of Canada, © Queen's Printer for Ontario, © Canada Post Corporation, GeoBase®, © The Department of Natural Resources Canada. All rights reserved."
3. End-User Terms: Except as otherwise agreed by the parties, in connection with the provision of any portion of the Data for the Territory of Canada to End-Users as may be authorized under the Agreement, Client shall provide such End-Users, in a reasonably conspicuous manner, with terms (set forth with other end user terms required to be provided under the Agreement, or as otherwise may be provided, by Client) which shall include the following provisions on behalf of the Third Party Data licensors, including Her Majesty, Canada Post and NRCan:
The Data may include or reflect data of licensors, including Her Majesty the Queen in the Right of Canada ("Her Majesty"), Canada Post Corporation ("Canada Post") and the Department of Natural Resources Canada ("NRCan"). Such data is licensed on an "as is" basis. The licensors, including Her Majesty, Canada Post and NRCan, make no guarantees, representations or warranties respecting such data,
511
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Appendices
either express or implied, arising by law or otherwise, including but not limited to, effectiveness, completeness, accuracy or fitness for a particular purpose. The licensors, including Her Majesty, Canada Post and NRCan, shall not be liable in respect of any claim, demand or action, irrespective of the nature of the cause of the claim, demand or action alleging any loss, injury or damages, direct or indirect, which may result from the use or possession of the data or the Data. The licensors, including Her Majesty, Canada Post and NRCan, shall not be liable in any way for loss of revenues or contracts, or any other consequential loss of any kind resulting from any defect in the data or the Data. End User shall indemnify and save harmless the licensors, including Her Majesty, Canada Post and NRCan, and their officers, employees and agents from and against any claim, demand or action, irrespective of the nature of the cause of the claim, demand or action, alleging loss, costs, expenses, damages or injuries (including injuries resulting in death) arising out of the use or possession of the data or the Data.
4. Additional Provisions: The terms contained in this Section are in addition to all of the rights and obligations of the parties under the Agreement. To the extent that any of the provisions of this Section are inconsistent with, or conflict with, any other provisions of the Agreement, the provisions of this Section shall prevail.
II. Mexico. The following provision applies to the Data for Mexico, which includes certain data from the Instituto Nacional de Estadística y Geografía ("INEGI"):
A. Any and all copies of the Data and/or packaging containing Data for Mexico shall contain the following notice: "Fuente: INEGI (Instituto Nacional de Estadística y Geografía)"
III. Latin America Territory
A. Third Party Notices. Any and all copies of the Data and/or packaging relating thereto shall include the respective Third Party Notices set forth below and used as described below corresponding to the Territory (or portion thereof) included in such copy:
Territory Notice
Argentina
IGN "INSTITUTO GEOGRAFICO NACIONAL ARGENTINO"
Ecuador
"INSTITUTO GEOGRAFICO MILITAR DEL ECUADOR AUTORIZACION N° IGM2011-01- PCO-01 DEL 25 DE ENERO DE 2011" "source: © IGN 2009 - BD TOPO ®"
Guadeloupe, French Guiana and Martinique Mexico
"Fuente: INEGI (Instituto Nacional de Estadística y Geografía)"
IV. Middle East Territory
512
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Appendices
A. Third Party Notices. Any and all copies of the Data and/or packaging relating thereto shall include the respective Third Party Notices set forth below and used as described below corresponding to the Territory (or portion thereof) included in such copy:
Country Notice
Jordan
"© Royal Jordanian Geographic Centre". The foregoing notice requirement for Jordan Data is a material term of the Agreement. If Client or any of its permitted sublicensees (if any) fail to meet such requirement, HERE shall have the right to terminate Client's license with respect to the Jordan Data.
B. Jordan Data. Client and its permitted sublicensees (if any) are restricted from licensing and/or otherwise distributing HERE's database for the country of Jordan ("Jordan Data") for use in Enterprise Applications to (i) non-Jordanian entities for use of the Jordan Data solely in Jordan or (ii) Jordan-based customers. In addition, Client, its permitted sublicensees (if any) and End-Users are restricted from using the Jordan Data in Enterprise Applications if such party is (i) a non-Jordanian entity using the Jordan Data solely in Jordan or (ii) a Jordan-based customer. For purposes of the foregoing, "Enterprise Applications" shall mean Geomarketing applications, GIS applications, mobile business asset management applications, call center applications, telematics applications, public organization Internet applications or for providing geocoding services.
V. Europe Territory
A. Use of Certain Traffic Codes in Europe
1. General Restrictions Applicable to Traffic Codes. Client acknowledges and agrees that in certain countries of the Europe Territory, Client will need to obtain rights directly from third party RDS-TMC code providers to receive and use the Traffic Codes in the Data and to deliver to End-Users Transactions in any way derived from or based on such Traffic Codes. For such countries, HERE shall deliver the Data incorporating Traffic Codes to Client only after receiving certification from Client of its having obtained such rights.
2. Display of Third Party Rights Legends for Belgium. Client shall, for each Transaction that uses Traffic Codes for Belgium, provide the following notice to the End-User: "Traffic Codes for Belgium are provided by the Ministerie van de Vlaamse Gemeenschap and the Ministèrie de l'Equipement et des Transports."
B. Paper Maps. With respect to any license granted to Client relating to making, selling or distributing paper maps (i.e., a map fixed on a paper or paper-like medium): (a) such license with respect to Data for the Territory of Great Britain is conditioned on Client's entering into and complying with a separate written agreement with the Ordnance Survey ("OS") to create and sell paper maps, Client's paying to the OS any and all applicable paper map royalties, and Client's complying with the OS copyright notice requirements; (b) such license for selling or otherwise distributing for charge with respect to Data for the Territory of Czech Republic
513
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Appendices
is conditioned on Client's obtaining prior written consent from Kartografie a.s.; (c) such license for selling or distributing with respect to Data for the Territory of Switzerland is conditioned on Client's obtaining a permit from Bundesamt für Landestopografie of Switzerland; (d) Client is restricted from using Data for the Territory of France to create paper maps with a scale between 1:5,000 and 1:250,000; and (e) Client is restricted from using any Data to create, sell or distribute paper maps that are the same or substantially similar, in terms of data content and specific use of color, symbols and scale, to paper maps published by the European national mapping agencies, including without limitation, Landervermessungämter of Germany, Topografische Dienst of the Netherlands, Nationaal Geografisch Instituut of Belgium, Bundesamt für Landestopografie of Switzerland, Bundesamt für Eich-und Vermessungswesen of Austria, and the National Land Survey of Sweden.
C. OS Enforcement. Without limiting Section IV(B) above, with respect to Data for the Territory of Great Britain, Client acknowledges and agrees that the Ordnance Survey ("OS") may bring a direct action against Client to enforce compliance with the OS copyright notice (see Section IV(D) below) and paper map requirements (see Section IV(B) above) contained in this Agreement.
D. Third Party Notices. Any and all copies of the Data and/or packaging relating thereto shall include the respective Third Party Notices set forth below and used as described below corresponding to the Territory (or portion thereof) included in such copy:
Country(ies) Notice
Austria
"© Bundesamt für Eichund Vermessungswesen"
Croatia Cyprus, Estonia, Latvia, Lithuania, Moldova, Poland, Slovenia and/or Ukraine
"© EuroGeographics"
France
"source: © IGN 2009 BD TOPO ®"
Germany
"Die Grundlagendaten wurden mit Genehmigung der zuständigen Behörden entnommen"
Great Britain "Contains Ordnance Survey data © Crown copyright and database right 2010 Contains Royal Mail data © Royal Mail copyright and database right 2010"
Greece
"Copyright Geomatics Ltd."
Hungary
"Copyright © 2003; TopMap Ltd."
Italy
"La Banca Dati Italiana è stata prodotta usando quale riferimento anche cartografia numerica ed al tratto prodotta e fornita dalla Regione Toscana."
Norway
"Copyright © 2000; Norwegian Mapping Authority"
Portugal "Source: IgeoE Portugal"
514
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Appendices
Spain
"Información geográfica propiedad del CNIG"
Sweden
"Based upon electronic data © National Land Survey Sweden."
Switzerland "Topografische Grundlage: © Bundesamt für Landestopographie.
E. Respective Country Distribution. Client acknowledges that HERE has not received approvals to distribute map data for the following countries in such respective countries: Albania, Belarus, Kyrgyzstan, Moldova and Uzbekistan. HERE may update such list from time to time. The license rights granted to Client under this TL with respect to the Data for such countries are contingent upon Client's compliance with all applicable laws and regulations, including, without limitation, any required licenses or approvals to distribute the Application incorporating such Data in such respective countries.
VI. Australia Territory
A. Third Party Notices. Any and all copies of the Data and/or packaging relating thereto shall include the respective Third Party Notices set forth below and used as described below corresponding to the Territory (or portion thereof) included in such copy:
Copyright. Based on data provided under license from PSMA Australia Limited (www.psma.com.au).
Product incorporates data which is © 20XX Telstra Corporation Limited, GM Holden Limited, Intelematics Australia Pty Ltd and Continental Pty Ltd.
B. Third Party Notices for Australia. In addition to the foregoing, the End-User Terms for any Application containing RDS-TMC Traffic Codes for Australia shall contain the following notice: "Product incorporates traffic location codes which is © 20XX Telstra Corporation Limited and its licensors."
AT&T Vehicle Network Carrier Telematics Disclosure
END USER FOR PURPOSES OF THIS SECTION MEANS YOU AND YOUR HEIRS, EXECUTORS, LEGAL PERSONAL REPRESENTATITVES AND PERMITED ASSIGNS. FOR PURPOSES OF THIS SECTION "UNDERLYING WIRELESS SERVICE CARRIER" INCLUDES ITS AFFILIATES AND CONTRACTORS AND THEIR RESPECTIVE OFFICERS, DIRECTORS, EMPLOYEES, SUCCESSORS AND ASSIGNS. END USER HAS NO CONTRACTUAL RELATIONSHIP WITH THE UNDERLYING WIRELESS SERVICE CARRIER AND END USER IS NOT A THIRD PARTY BENEFICIARY OF ANY AGREEMENT BETWEEN FORD AND UNDERLYING CARRIER. END USER UNDERSTANDS AND AGREES THAT THE UNDERLYING CARRIER HAS NO LEGAL, EQUITABLE, OR OTHER LIABILITY OF ANY KIND TO END USER. IN ANY EVENT, REGARDLESS OF THE FORM OF THE ACTION, WHETHER FOR BREACH OF CONTRACT, WARRANTY, NEGLIGENCE, STRICT LIABILITY IN TORT OR OTHERWISE, END USER'S EXCLUSIVE REMEDY FOR CLAIMS ARISING IN ANY WAY IN CONNECTION WITH THIS AGREEMENT, FOR ANY CAUSE WHATSOEVER, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY FAILURE OR
515
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Appendices
DISRUPTION OF SERVICE PROVIDED HEREUNDER, IS LIMITED TO PAYMENT OF DAMAGES IN AN AMOUNT NOT TO EXCEED THE AMOUNT PAID BY END USER FOR THE SERVICES DURING THE TWO-MONTH PERIOD PRECEDING THE DATE THE CLAIM AROSE.
(ii) END USER AGREES TO INDEMNIFY AND HOLD HARMLESS THE UNDERLYING WIRELESS SERVICE CARRIER AND ITS OFFICERS, EMPLOYEES, AND AGENTS AGAINST ANY AND ALL CLAIMS, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION CLAIMS FOR LIBEL, SLANDER, OR ANY PROPERTY DAMAGE, PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH, ARISING IN ANY WAY, DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY, IN CONNECTION WITH THIS AGREEMENT OR THE USE, FAILURE TO USE, OR INABILITY TO USE THE DEVICE EXCEPT WHERE THE CLAIMS RESULT FROM THE UNDERLYING CARRIER'S GROSS NEGLIGENCE OR WILLFUL MISCONDUCT. THIS INDEMNITY WILL SURVIVE THE TERMINATION OF THE AGREEMENT.
(iii) END USER HAS NO PROPERTY RIGHT IN ANY NUMBER ASSIGNED TO THE DEVICE.
(iv) END USER UNDERSTANDS THAT FORD AND THE UNDERLYING CARRIER CANNOT GUARANTY THE SECURITY OF WIRELESS TRANSMISSIONS, AND WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY LACK OF SECURITY RELATING TO THE USE OF THE SERVICES
THE SERVICE IS FOR [END USER'S] USE ONLY AND END USER MAY NOT RESELL THE SERVICE TO ANY OTHER PARTY END USER UNDERSTANDS THAT THE UNDERLYING CARRIER DOES NOT GUARANTEE ANY END USER UNINTERRUPTED SERVICE OR COVERAGE. THE UNDERLYING CARRIER DOES NOT WARRANT THAT END USERS CAN OR WILL BE LOCATED USING THE SERVICE. THE UNDERLYING CARRIER
MAKES NO WARRANTY, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, SUITABILITY, OR PERFORMANCE REGARDING ANY SERVICES OR GOODS, AND IN NO EVENT SHALL AT&T BE LIABLE, WHETHER OR NOT DUE TO ITS OWN NEGLIGENCE, FOR ANY: (A) ACT OR OMISSION OF A THIRD PARTY; (B) MISTAKES, OMISSIONS, INTERRUPTIONS, ERRORS, FAILURES TO TRANSMIT, DELAYS, OR DEFECTS IN THE SERVICE PROVIDED BY OR THROUGH THE UNDERLYING CARRIER; (C) DAMAGE OR INJURY CAUSED BY SUSPENSION OR TERMINATION BY THE UNDERLYING CARRIER; OR (D) DAMAGE OR INJURY CAUSED BY A FAILURE OR DELAY IN CONNECTING A CALL TO ANY ENTITY, INCLUDING 911 OR ANY OTHER EMERGENCY SERVICE. TO THE FULL EXTENT ALLOWED BY LAW, THE END USER RELEASES, INDEMNIFIES AND HOLDS THE UNDERLYING CARRIER HARMLESS FROM AND AGAINST ANY AND ALL CLAIMS OF ANY PERSON OR ENTITY FOR DAMAGES OF ANY NATURE ARISING IN ANY WAY FROM OR RELATING TO, DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY, SERVICES PROVIDED BY THE UNDERLYING CARRIER OR ANY PERSON'S USE THEREOF, INCLUDING CLAIMS ARISING IN WHOLE OR IN PART FROM THE ALLEGED NEGLIGENCE OF THE UNDERLYING CARRIER.
VII. China Territory
Personal Use Only
You agree to use this Data together with [insert name of Client Application] for the solely personal, non-commercial purposes for which you were licensed, and not for service bureau, time-sharing or other similar purposes. Accordingly, but subject to the restrictions set forth in the following paragraphs, you may copy this Data only as necessary for your personal use to (i)
516
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Appendices
view it, and (ii) save it, provided that you do not remove any copyright notices that appear and do not modify the Data in any way. You agree not to otherwise reproduce, copy, modify, decompile, disassemble or reverse engineer any portion of this Data, and may not transfer or distribute it in any form, for any purpose, except to the extent permitted by mandatory laws.
Restrictions
Except where you have been specifically licensed to do so by NAV2 , and without limiting the preceding paragraph, you may not (a) use this Data with any products, systems, or applications installed or otherwise connected to or in communication with vehicles, capable of vehicle navigation, positioning, dispatch, real time route guidance, fleet management or similar applications; or (b) with or in communication with any positioning devices or any mobile or wireless-connected electronic or computer devices, including without limitation cellular phones, palmtop and handheld computers, pagers, and personal digital assistants or PDAs. You agree to cease using this Data if you fail to comply with these terms and conditions.
Limited Warranty
NAV2 warrants that (a) the Data will perform substantially in accordance with the accompanying written materials for a period of ninety (90) days from the date of receipt, and (b) any support services provided by NAV2 shall be substantially as described in applicable written materials provided to you by NAV2, and NAV2's support engineers will make commercially reasonable efforts to solve any problem issues.
rigCustomer Remedies
NAV2 and its suppliers' entire liability and your exclusive remedy shall be, at NAV2's sole discretion, either (a) return of the price paid, if any, or (b) repair or replacement of the Data that do not meet NAV2's Limited Warranty and that are returned to NAV2 with a copy of your receipt. This Limited Warranty is void if failure of the Data has resulted from accident, abuse, or misapplication. Any replacement Data will be warranted for the remainder of the original warranty period or thirty (30) days, whichever is longer. Neither these remedies nor any product support services offered by NAV2 are available without proof of purchase from an authorized international source.
No Other Warranty:
EXCEPT FOR THE LMITED WARRANTY SET FORTH ABOVE AND TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, NAV2 AND ITS LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) DISCLAIM ANY WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, OF QUALITY, PERFORMANCE, MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, OWNERSHIP OR NON-INFRINGEMENT. Certain warranty exclusions may not be permitted under applicable law, so to that extent the above exclusion may not apply to you.
Limited Liability:
TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, NAV2 AND ITS LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) SHALL NOT BE LIABLE TO YOU: IN RESPECT OF ANY CLAIM, DEMAND OR ACTION, IRRESPECTIVE OF THE NATURE OF THE CAUSE OF THE CLAIM, DEMAND OR ACTION ALLEGING ANY LOSS, INJURY OR DAMAGES, DIRECT OR INDIRECT, WHICH MAY RESULT FROM THE USE OR POSSESSION OF THE INFORMATION; OR
517
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Appendices
FOR ANY LOSS OF PROFIT, REVENUE, CONTRACTS OR SAVINGS, OR ANY OTHER DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF YOUR USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THIS INFORMATION, ANY DEFECT IN THE INFROMATION, OR THE BREACH OF THESE TERMS OR CONDITIONS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION IN CONTRACT OR TORT OR BASED ON A WARRANTY, EVEN IF NAV2 OR ITS LICENSORS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL NAV2's OR ITS SUPPLIERS' LIABILITY HEREUNDER EXCEED THE PRICE PAID. Certain liability exclusions may not be permitted under applicable law, so to that extent the above exclusion may not apply to you.
Export Control
You agree not to export to anywhere any part of the Data provided to you or any direct product thereof except in compliance with, and with all licenses and approvals required under, applicable export laws, rules and regulations.
IP Protection
The Data are owned by NAV2 or its suppliers and are protected by applicable copyright and other intellectual property law and treaties. The Data are provided solely on the basis of a license to use, not sale.
Entire Agreement
These terms and conditions constitute the entire agreement between NAV2(and its licensors, including their licensors and suppliers) and you pertaining to the subject matter hereof, and supersedes in their entirety any and all written or oral agreements previously existing between us with respect to such subject matter.
Governing Law.
The above terms and conditions shall be governed by the laws of the People's Republic of China, without giving effect to (i) its conflict of laws provisions, or (ii) the United Nations Convention for Contracts for the International Sale of Goods, which is explicitly excluded. Any dispute arising from or in connection with the Data provided to you hereunder shall be submitted to the Shanghai International Economic and Trade Arbitration Commission for arbitration.
Gracenote® Copyright
CD and music-related data from Gracenote, Inc., copyright©
2000-2007 Gracenote. Gracenote Software, copyright © 2000-2007 Gracenote. This product and service may practice one or more of the following U.S. Patents 5,987,525; 6,061,680; 6,154,773; 6,161,132; 6,230,192; 6,230,207; 6.240,459; 6,330,593 and other patents issued or pending. Some services supplied under license from Open Globe, Inc. for U.S. Patent 6,304,523.
Gracenote and CDDB are registered trademarks of Gracenote. The Gracenote logo and logotype, and the "Powered by GracenoteTM" logo are trademarks of Gracenote.
Gracenote® End User License Agreement (EULA)
This device contains software from Gracenote, Inc. of 2000 Powell Street Emeryville, California 94608 ("Gracenote").
The software from Gracenote (the "Gracenote Software") enables this device to do disc and music file identification and obtain music-related information, including name, artist, track, and title information ("Gracenote Data") from online servers
518
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Appendices
("Gracenote Servers"), and to perform other functions. You may use Gracenote Data only by means of the intended End User functions of this device. This device may contain content belonging to Gracenote's providers. If so, all of the restrictions set forth herein with respect to Gracenote Data shall also apply to such content and such content providers shall be entitled to all of the benefits and protections set forth herein that are available to Gracenote. You agree that you will use the content from Gracenote ("Gracenote Content") , Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers for your own personal, non-commercial use only. You agree not to assign, copy, transfer or transmit the Gracenote Content, Gracenote Software or any Gracenote Data (except in a Tag associated with a music file) to any third party. YOU AGREE NOT TO USE OR EXPLOIT GRACENOTE CONTENT, GRACENOTE DATA, THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, OR GRACENOTE SERVERS, EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PERMITTED HEREIN.
You agree that your non-exclusive licenses to use the Gracenote Content, Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers will terminate if you violate these restrictions. If your licenses terminate, you agree to cease any and all use of the Gracenote Content, Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers.
Gracenote, respectively, reserve all rights in Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and the Gracenote Servers and Gracenote Content, including all ownership rights. Under no circumstances will either Gracenote become liable for any payment to you for any information that you provide,
including any copyrighted material or music file information. You agree that Gracenote may enforce its respective rights, collectively or separately, under this agreement against you, directly in each company's own name.
Gracenote uses a unique identifier to track queries for statistical purposes. The purpose of a randomly assigned numeric identifier is to allow Gracenote to count queries without knowing anything about who you are. For more information, see the web page at www.gracenote.com for the Gracenote Privacy Policy.
THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, EACH ITEM OF GRACENOTE DATA AND THE GRACENOTE CONTENT ARE LICENSED TO YOU "AS IS". NEITHER GRACENOTE MAKES ANY REPRESENTATIONS OR WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, REGARDING THE ACCURACY OF ANY GRACENOTE DATA FROM THE GRACENOTE SERVERS OR GRACENOTE CONTENT. GRACENOTE COLLECTIVELY AND SEPARATELY RESERVE THE RIGHT TO DELETE DATA AND/OR CONTENT FROM THE COMPANIES' RESPECTIVE SERVERS OR, IN THE CASE OF GRACENOTE, CHANGE DATA CATEGORIES FOR ANY CAUSE THAT GRACENOTE DEEMS SUFFICIENT. NO WARRANTY IS MADE THAT EITHER GRACENOTE CONTENT OR THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR GRACENOTE SERVERS ARE ERROR-FREE OR THAT THE FUNCTIONING OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR GRACENOTE SERVERS WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED. GRACENOTE IS NOT OBLIGATED TO PROVIDE YOU WITH ANY ENHANCED OR ADDITIONAL DATA TYPES THAT GRACENOTE MAY CHOOSE TO PROVIDE IN THE FUTURE AND IS FREE TO DISCONTINUE ITS ONLINE SERVICES AT ANY TIME. GRACENOTE DISCLAIM ALL WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
519
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Appendices
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT. NEITHER GRACENOTE WARRANTS THE RESULTS THAT WILL BE OBTAINED BY YOUR USE OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR ANY GRACENOTE SERVER. IN NO CASE WILL GRACENOTE BE LIABLE FOR ANY CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES OR FOR ANY LOST PROFITS OR LOST REVENUES FOR ANY REASON WHATSOEVER. © Gracenote 2007.
Radio Frequency Statement
FCC ID: ACJ-SYNCG3-L
IC: 216B-SYNCG3-L
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
WARNING: Changes or modifications not expressively approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. The term "IC:" before the radio certification number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met.
The antenna used for this transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.
Taiwan Territory
Note: In accordance with the management approach of low-power radio wave radiation motors:
Article 12: For approved and certified low-power radiation motor models, companies, firms or users must not alter the frequency, increase the power or change the characteristics and functions of the original design without authorization.
Article 14: The usage of low-power radio-frequency motors must not affect aviation safety and interfere with legal telecommunications. Should interference be detected, immediately stop using the device and only resume usage after ensuring that there is no longer any interference. For the legal telecommunication and wireless telecommunication of the telco, the low-power radio frequency motor must be able to tolerate legal limits of interference from telecommunication, industrial, scientific and radio wave equipment.
SUNA TRAFFIC CHANNEL TERMS AND CONDITIONS
By activating, using and/or accessing the SUNA Traffic Channel, SUNA Predictive or other content or material provided by Intelematics (together, SUNA Products and/or Services), you must accept certain terms and conditions. The following is a brief summary of the terms and conditions that apply to you. To view the full terms and conditions relevant to your use of the SUNA Products and/or Services, please consult:
Website
www.sunatraffic.com.au/termsandconditions/
1. Acceptance
520
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Appendices
By using SUNA Products and/or Services, you will be deemed to have accepted and agreed to be bound by the terms and conditions fully detailed at:
Website
www.sunatraffic.com.au/termsandconditions/
2. Intellectual Property
SUNA Products and/or Services are for your personal use. You may not record, or retransmit the content, nor use the content in association with any other traffic information or route guidance service or device not approved by Intelematics. You obtain no right of ownership in any Intellectual Property Rights (including copyright) in the data that is used to provide SUNA Products and/or Services.
3. Appropriate Use
SUNA Products and/or Services are intended as an aid to personal motoring and travel planning, and do not provide comprehensive or accurate information on all occasions. On occasions, you may experience additional delay as a result of using SUNA Products and/or Services. You acknowledge that it is not intended, or suitable, for use in applications where time of arrival or driving directions may impact the safety of the public or yourself.
4. Use of SUNA Products and Services while driving
You, and other authorised drivers of the vehicle in which SUNA Products and/or Services are available or installed and active, remain at all times responsible for observing all relevant laws and codes of safe driving. In particular, you agree to only actively operate SUNA Products and/or Services when the Vehicle is at a complete stop and it is safe to do so.
5. Service Continuity and Reception of the SUNA Traffic Channel
We will use reasonable endeavours to provide the SUNA Traffic Channel 24 hours a day, 365 days a year. The SUNA Traffic Channel may occasionally be unavailable for technical reasons or for planned maintenance. We will try to perform maintenance at times when congestion is light. We reserve the right to withdraw SUNA Products and/or Services at any time.
Also, we cannot assure the uninterrupted reception of the SUNA Traffic Channel RDS-TMC signal at any particular location.
6. Limitation of Liability
Neither Intelematics (nor its suppliers or the manufacturer of your device (the "Suppliers")) shall be liable to you or to any third party for any damages either direct, indirect, incidental, consequential or otherwise arising out of the use of or inability to use SUNA Products and/or Services even if Intelematics or a Supplier has been advised of the possibility of such damages. You also acknowledge that the neither Intelematics nor any Supplier guarantees nor make any warranties that relate to the availability, accuracy or completeness of SUNA Products and/or Services, and to the extent which it is lawful to do so, both Intelematics and each Supplier excludes any warranties which might otherwise be implied by any State or Federal legislation in relation to SUNA Products and/or Services.
7. Please Note
Great care has been taken in preparing this manual. Constant product development may mean that some information is not entirely up-to-date. The information in this document is subject to change without notice.
521
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Appendices
TYPE APPROVALS
Radio Frequency Certifications for Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor(s)
Argentina
European Union EU
E207818
Ghana
E207816
Brazil
E253824
Jordan
E197509
Canada IC: 850K-11545917 IC: 2546A-FP3
E253823
Malaysia
E253822
Mexico
E253812
522
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
E253813
Moldova
E197811
Morocco
E207821
Oman
E253817
Appendices
Philippines
E198001
Russia
E253816
Serbia
E197844
Singapore
E253820
523
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
South Africa
Appendices
United Arab Emirates
E198002
South Korea
E253819
Taiwan
E207817
United States of America FCC ID: OUC11545917 FCC ID: MRXFP3
Radio Frequency Certifications for Mid Range Radar
Argentina
E203679
Ukraine
E253818
E269659
524
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Ghana
Appendices
South Africa
E269662
Jordan
E269664
United Arab Emirates
E269660
Morocco
E269663
Radio Frequency Certifications for Passive Anti-Theft System Argentina
E269661
E274065
525
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Brazil
Appendices
Ghana
E269675
Canada IC: 850K-11545917 Djibouti
E274068
E269674
Jamaica
E274067
Jordan
E269666
526
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Malaysia
Appendices
Pakistan
E269673
Morocco
E275754
Serbia
E269670
Paraguay
E269672
Singapore
E274066
E269676
527
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
South Africa
Appendices
United States of America FCC ID: OUC11545917 Vietnam
E269667
Ukraine
E269671
United Arab Emirates
E269677
Radio Frequency Certifications for Radio Transceiver Module Canada IC: 3659A-F03AM315RX IC: 3659A-F04AM902TRX
Djibouti
E269668
E272192
528
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Jamaica
Appendices
Pakistan
E272193
Jordan
E269684
E272194
Morocco
E287633
Paraguay
E269683
E272195
529
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Serbia
Appendices
United Arab Emirates
E269681
South Africa
E269685
Ukraine
E272196
United States of America FCC ID: LTQF03AM315RX FCC ID: LTQF04AM902TRX
Radio Frequency Certifications for Blind Spot Information System
Canada RSS-310 compliant, per FCC Test report no.: 1-8707/14-01-03
Ghana
E269682
E269695
530
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Malaysia
Appendices
United States of America FCC ID: OAYSRR3B Vietnam
E269697
South Africa
E269696
United Arab Emirates
E269693
Radio Frequency Certifications for Wireless Charging United Arab Emirates
E272903
E269694
531
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
South Korea
Appendices
China
E273475
Radio Frequency Certifications for SYNC 3 Brazil
E252722
E282218
E291427
Radio Frequency Certifications for Cruise Control Module
Canada IC: 3432A-0065TR
United States of America FCC ID: L2C0065TR
Radio Frequency Certifications for Body Control Module
Canada IC: 7812A-A2C738448 Model # : M : A2C750526 Model # : M : A2C750561
United States of America FCC ID: M3NA2C738448 Model # : M : A2C750526 Model # : M : A2C750561
Radio Frequency Certification for Keys and Remote Controls
Canada IC : 7812A-A2C931423 IC: 7812A-A2C931426
532
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
IC: 3248A-A08TAA IC: 3248A-A08TDA China
Appendices
United States FCC ID: NT8-16UP375AHU
E291429
E291430
United States of America FCC ID : M3N-A2C931423 FCC ID : M3N-A2C931426 FCC ID : N5F-A08TAA FCC ID : N5F-A08TDA Radio Frequency Statement for Audio Unit Canada IC: 3043A-UP375AHU
533
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
534
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Index
A
A/C See: Climate Control...........................................121
About This Manual...........................................7 ABS
See: Brakes............................................................176 ABS driving hints
See: Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock Brakes.................................................................176
Accessories.....................................................472 Exterior Style........................................................472 Interior Style.........................................................472 Lifestyle..................................................................472 Peace of Mind......................................................472
Accessories See: Replacement Parts Recommendation............................................14
ACC See: Using Adaptive Cruise Control............198
Active Park Assist.........................................187 Using Active Park Assist..................................188
Adjusting the Headlamps.........................273 Horizontal Aim Adjustment............................274 Vertical Aim Adjustment.................................273
Adjusting the Steering Wheel....................73 Airbag Disposal...............................................52 Air Conditioning
See: Climate Control...........................................121 Air Filter
See: Changing the Engine Air Filter.............278 Alarm
See: Anti-Theft Alarm.........................................72 All-Wheel Drive...............................................171 Ambient Lighting............................................83
Adjusting the Brightness...................................84 Changing the Color.............................................84 Switching Ambient Lighting Off.....................84 Switching Ambient Lighting On......................83 Anti-Theft Alarm.............................................72 Arming the Alarm.................................................72 Disarming the Alarm............................................72 Appendices....................................................494 Apps.................................................................443 ..................................................................................443 SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link...................445 At a Glance........................................................18
Audible Warnings and Indicators.............96 Headlamps On Warning Chime.....................96 Keyless Warning Alert........................................96 Parking Brake On Warning Chime.................96
Audio Control...................................................73 Seek, Next or Previous........................................74
Audio System................................................345 General Information.........................................345
Audio Unit - Vehicles With: Sony Audio System/Touchscreen Display..............347 Accessing the Sound Settings.....................348 Adjusting the Volume......................................348 Changing Radio Stations................................348 Ejecting the CD...................................................348 Inserting a CD.....................................................348 Switching the Audio Unit On and Off........348 Using Seek, Fast Forward and Reverse.............................................................348
Audio Unit - Vehicles With: SYNC.........349 Accessing the Clock Settings........................349 Accessing the Media Source Menu.............349 Accessing the Menu.........................................349 Accessing the Phone Features.....................349 Accessing the Sound Settings......................349 Adjusting the Volume......................................349 Changing Radio Stations................................350 Listening to Satellite Radio...........................350 Listening to the Radio......................................350 Menu Structure....................................................351 Muting the Audio...............................................350 Playing or Pausing Media...............................350 Switching the Audio Unit On and Off........350 Using a Cell Phone............................................350 Using Seek, Fast Forward and Reverse..............................................................351 Using the Display Control...............................350 Using the Number Block.................................350
Audio Unit - Vehicles With: Touchscreen Display, Vehicles Without: Sony Audio System.........................................................346 Adjusting the Volume.......................................347 Changing Radio Stations................................347 Playing or Pausing Media................................347 Switching the Audio Unit On and Off.........347 Using Seek, Fast Forward and Reverse..............................................................347
535
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Index
Autolamps........................................................79 Windshield Wiper Activated Headlamps........................................................79
Automatic Climate Control - Vehicles With: Sony Audio System/Touchscreen Display...........................................................124 Setting the Blower Motor Speed..................124 Setting the Temperature..................................124 Switching Auto Mode On and Off................124 Switching Defrost On and Off........................125 Switching Maximum Air Conditioning On and Off...............................................................125 Switching Maximum Defrost On and Off........................................................................125 Switching Recirculated Air On and Off........................................................................125 Switching the Air Conditioning On and Off........................................................................124 Switching the Climate Controlled Seats On and Off...............................................................124 Switching the Climate Control On and Off........................................................................124 Switching the Heated Seats On and Off........................................................................125
Automatic Climate Control - Vehicles With: SYNC...................................................125 Directing Air to the Footwell Air Vents...................................................................125 Directing Air to the Instrument Panel Air Vents...................................................................125 Setting the Blower Motor Speed..................125 Setting the Temperature.................................126 Switching Auto Mode On and Off................126 Switching Defrost On and Off.......................126 Switching Maximum Air Conditioning On and Off...............................................................126 Switching Maximum Defrost On and Off........................................................................127 Switching Recirculated Air On and Off........................................................................127 Switching the Air Conditioning On and Off........................................................................126 Switching the Climate Control On and Off........................................................................126
Automatic Climate Control - Vehicles With: Touchscreen Display, Vehicles Without: Sony Audio System................122 Accessing the Air Distribution Controls.............................................................122 Setting the Blower Motor Speed...................122 Setting the Temperature..................................123 Switching Auto Mode On and Off................123 Switching Maximum Air Conditioning On and Off...............................................................123 Switching Maximum Defrost On and Off........................................................................123 Switching Recirculated Air On and Off........................................................................124 Switching the Air Conditioning On and Off........................................................................123 Switching the Climate Controlled Seats On and Off...............................................................123 Switching the Climate Control On and Off........................................................................123 Switching the Heated Seats On and Off........................................................................123
Automatic High Beam Control..................81 Automatic High Beam Indicator.....................82 Switching the System On and Off..................81
Automatic Transmission...........................166 Automatic Transmission Adaptive Learning.............................................................170 Brake-Shift Interlock Override.......................169 If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck In Mud or Snow...................................................................170 SelectShiftTM Automatic Transmission...................................................168 Understanding the Positions of Your Rotary Shift Transmission........................................166
Automatic Transmission Fluid Check 1.5L EcoBoostTM/2.0L EcoBoostTM/ 2.5L.................................................................267
Automatic Transmission Fluid Check 2.7L EcoBoostTM........................................267 Adding Transmission Fluid* .........................268 Checking the Transmission Fluid Level ..............................................................................267
Auto-Start-Stop............................................153 Disabling Auto-Start-Stop.............................154 Enabling Auto-Start-Stop...............................153
Autowipers........................................................76 Autowipers Settings.............................................77
536
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Index
Auxiliary Power Points................................145 110 Volt AC Power Point...................................145 12 Volt DC Power Point.....................................145 Locations...............................................................145
AWD See: All-Wheel Drive...........................................171
B
Battery See: Changing the 12V Battery.....................270
Blind Spot Information System................211 Switching the System Off and On................212 System Errors.......................................................212 Using the Blind Spot Information System................................................................211
BLIS See: Blind Spot Information System............211
Body Styling Kits..........................................287 Bonnet Lock
See: Opening and Closing the Hood..........256 Booster Seats..................................................30
Types of Booster Seats......................................30 Brake Fluid Check........................................269 Brakes................................................................176
General Information...........................................176 Breaking-In.....................................................230 Bulb Specification Chart..........................344
C
Cabin Air Filter...............................................130 Capacities and Specifications - 1.5L
EcoBoostTM.................................................328 Alternative Engine Oil for Extremely Cold
Climates............................................................331 Specifications.....................................................328 Capacities and Specifications - 2.0L EcoBoostTM..................................................331 Alternative Engine Oil for Extremely Cold
Climates...........................................................335 Specifications......................................................332 Capacities and Specifications 2.5L.................................................................335 Alternative Engine Oil for Extremely Cold
Climates...........................................................339 Specifications.....................................................336
Capacities and Specifications - 2.7L EcoBoostTM.................................................339 Alternative Engine Oil for Extremely Cold Climates...........................................................343 Specifications.....................................................340
Capacities and Specifications.................319 Car Wash
See: Cleaning the Exterior..............................280 Catalytic Converter......................................163
On-Board Diagnostics (OBD-II)...................164 Readiness for Inspection and Maintenance
(I/M) Testing...................................................164 Center Console..............................................147 Changing a Bulb...........................................276
Front Halogen Fog Lamp.................................277 Headlamp.............................................................276 LED Lamps............................................................277 License Plate Lamp...........................................278 Reversing Lamp..................................................278 Changing a Fuse..........................................254 Fuses......................................................................254 Changing a Road Wheel............................310 Changing a Road Wheel Procedure.............312 Dissimilar Spare Wheel and Tire Assembly
Information......................................................310 Stowing the Flat Tire Using the Retainer
Strap...................................................................316 Stowing the Flat Tire Without the Retainer
Strap...................................................................315 Changing the 12V Battery.........................270 Changing the Engine Air Filter.................278
2.5L Engine...........................................................279 EcoBoost Engines..............................................279 Changing the Wiper Blades......................272 Checking MyKey System Status................61 MyKey Distance.....................................................61 Number of Admin Keys......................................62 Number of MyKeys..............................................62 Checking the Wiper Blades......................272 Child Restraint and Seatbelt Maintenance.................................................42 Child Restraint Positioning.........................32 Child Safety......................................................20 General Information............................................20 Child Safety Locks..........................................33 Left-Hand Side......................................................34 Right-Hand Side...................................................34 Cleaning Leather Seats.............................284
537
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Index
Cleaning Products......................................280 Materials...............................................................280
Cleaning the Engine....................................282 Cleaning the Exterior.................................280
Cleaning the Headlamps.................................281 Exterior Chrome Parts.......................................281 Exterior Plastic Parts.........................................281 Stripes or Graphics.............................................281 Underbody............................................................281 Under Hood..........................................................281 Cleaning the Instrument Panel and Instrument Cluster Lens........................283 Cleaning the Interior...................................283 Mirrors....................................................................283 Cleaning the Wheels..................................285 Cleaning the Windows and Wiper Blades...........................................................282 Clearing All MyKeys........................................61 Climate............................................................426 Accessing Rear Climate Controls................429 Accessing the Climate Control Menu.........427 Directing the Airflow.........................................427 Rear Climate Control Lock Indicator..........429 Setting the Blower Motor Speed..................427 Setting the Temperature.................................427 Switching Auto Mode On and Off................427 Switching Dual Zone Mode On and
Off......................................................................428 Switching Maximum Air Conditioning On
and Off.............................................................428 Switching Maximum Defrost On and
Off......................................................................428 Switching Rear Auto Mode On and
Off......................................................................429 Switching Recirculated Air On and
Off......................................................................428 Switching the Air Conditioning On and
Off.......................................................................427 Switching the Climate Controlled Seats On
and Off..............................................................427 Switching the Climate Control On and
Off.......................................................................427 Switching the Heated Exterior Mirrors On
and Off.............................................................428 Switching the Heated Rear Window On and
Off......................................................................428 Switching the Heated Seats On and
Off......................................................................428
Switching the Heated Steering Wheel On and Off.............................................................428
Switching the Rear Climate Controlled Seats On and Off..........................................429
Switching the Rear Heated Seats On and Off......................................................................429
Switching the Rear Ventilated Seats On and Off.............................................................429
Switching the Ventilated Seats On and Off......................................................................428
Climate Control..............................................121 Climate Controlled Seats..........................138
Cooled Seats........................................................139 Coolant Check
See: Engine Coolant Check............................263 Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator.........51 Creating a MyKey...........................................60
Programming or Changing Configurable Settings................................................................61
Cross Traffic Alert.........................................212 Blocked Sensors..................................................214 Switching the System Off and On................214 System Errors.......................................................214 System Lights, Messages and Audible Alerts..................................................................214 System Limitations............................................214 Using the Cross Traffic Alert System...........212
Cruise Control..................................................74 Principle of Operation.......................................197 Type One..................................................................74 Type Two..................................................................74
Cruise control See: Using Cruise Control................................197
Customer Assistance.................................238
D
Data Recording..................................................9 Comfort, Convenience and Entertainment Data........................................................................11 Emergency Call System......................................13 Event Data.................................................................11 Service Data............................................................10 Services That Third Parties Provide...............12 Services That We Provide..................................12 Vehicles With a Modem......................................12 Vehicles With SYNC.............................................12
538
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Index
Daytime Running Lamps............................80 Type One - Conventional (Non-Configurable).......................................80 Type Two - Configurable...................................80
Digital Radio..................................................353 HD Radio Reception and Station Troubleshooting............................................354
Direction Indicators.......................................82 Doors and Locks.............................................64 Driver Alert.....................................................205
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION..........................205 USING DRIVER ALERT....................................205 Driver and Passenger Airbags...................45 Children and Airbags..........................................46 Proper Driver and Front Passenger Seating
Adjustment........................................................45 Driver and Passenger Knee Airbags........49 Driving Aids....................................................205 Driving Hints..................................................230 Driving Through Water...............................230 DRL
See: Daytime Running Lamps........................80
E
Economical Driving.....................................230 Electric Parking Brake..................................177
Applying the Electric Parking Brake..............177 Automatically Releasing the Electric
Parking Brake...................................................178 Manually Releasing the Electric Parking
Brake....................................................................177 Releasing the Electric Parking Brake if the
Vehicle Battery is Running Out of Charge................................................................178 Electromagnetic Compatibility..............494 Emission Law.................................................162 Noise Emissions Warranty, Prohibited Tampering Acts and Maintenance..........163 Tampering With a Noise Control System...............................................................162 End User License Agreement.................496 VEHICLE SOFTWARE END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT (EULA) ................................496 Engine Block Heater.....................................151 Using the Engine Block Heater......................152 Engine Coolant Check...............................263 Adding Coolant...................................................263
Coolant Change.................................................265 Engine Coolant Temperature
Management..................................................266 Fail-Safe Cooling...............................................265 Recycled Coolant...............................................265 Severe Climates.................................................265 Engine Emission Control............................162 Engine Immobilizer See: Passive Anti-Theft System......................71 Engine Oil Check...........................................261 Adding Engine Oil...............................................261 Engine Oil Dipstick - 1.5L EcoBoostTM..................................................261 Engine Oil Dipstick - 2.0L EcoBoostTM/ 2.5L/2.7L EcoBoostTM..............................261 Engine Specifications - 1.5L EcoBoostTM..................................................319 Drivebelt Routing................................................319 Engine Specifications - 2.0L EcoBoostTM..................................................319 Drivebelt Routing...............................................320 Engine Specifications - 2.5L....................320 Drivebelt Routing...............................................320 Engine Specifications - 2.7L EcoBoostTM..................................................321 Drivebelt Routing................................................321 Entertainment................................................417 AM/FM Radio.......................................................418 Apps.......................................................................426 Bluetooth Stereo or USB................................425 CD (If equipped)................................................424 HD RadioTM Information (If
Available)..........................................................421 SiriusXM® Satellite Radio (If
Activated).........................................................419 Sources...................................................................417 Supported Media Players, Formats and
Metadata Information................................426 USB Port...............................................................426 Environment......................................................17 EPB See: Electric Parking Brake..............................177 Essential Towing Checks..........................226 Before Towing a Trailer.....................................227 Hitches...................................................................226 Launching or Retrieving a Boat or Personal
Watercraft (PWC).........................................227 Safety Chains......................................................226
539
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Index
Trailer Brakes.......................................................226 Trailer Lamps.......................................................226 When Towing a Trailer......................................227 Event Data Recording See: Data Recording..............................................9 Export Unique Options.................................15 Exterior Mirrors................................................86 Auto-Dimming Feature......................................87 Blind Spot Monitor...............................................87 Fold-Away Exterior Mirrors...............................87 Heated Exterior Mirrors......................................87 Memory Mirrors.....................................................87 Power Exterior Mirrors........................................86 Power-Folding Mirrors........................................87 Puddle Lamps .......................................................87 Signal Indicator Mirrors......................................87
F
Fastening the Seatbelts..............................36 Rear Inflatable Seatbelt....................................38 Seatbelt Locking Modes....................................37 Using Seatbelts During Pregnancy................36
Flat Tire See: Changing a Road Wheel........................310
Floor Mats........................................................231 Fog Lamps - Front
See: Front Fog Lamps........................................82 Ford Credit.........................................................13
US Only.....................................................................13 Ford Protect...................................................474
Ford Protect Extended Service Plan (CANADA ONLY)...........................................475
Ford Protect Extended Service Plans (U.S. Only)..................................................................474
Front Fog Lamps............................................82 Front Parking Aid..........................................184
Obstacle Distance Indicator...........................185 Front Passenger Sensing System............46 Fuel and Refueling.......................................155 Fuel Consumption.........................................161
Advertised Capacity...........................................161 Fuel Economy.......................................................161 Fuel Filler Funnel Location........................156 Fuel Filter........................................................270 Fuel Quality.....................................................155 Choosing the Right Fuel...................................155 Fuel Shutoff...................................................233
Fuses................................................................245 Fuse Specification Chart..........................245
Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel.........251 Power Distribution Box....................................245
G
Garage Door Opener...................................140 Garage Door Opener
See: Universal Garage Door Opener...........140 Gauges...............................................................90
Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge.............91 Fuel Gauge...............................................................91 Information Display............................................90 Left Information Display....................................92 Type 1 and 2...........................................................90 Type 3.......................................................................92 Gearbox See: Transmission..............................................166 General Information on Radio Frequencies...................................................53 Intelligent Access.................................................53 General Maintenance Information........476 Multi-Point Inspection.....................................478 Owner Checks and Services...........................477 Protecting Your Investment...........................476 Why Maintain Your Vehicle?..........................476 Why Maintain Your Vehicle at Your
Dealership?.....................................................476 Getting Assistance Outside the U.S. and
Canada..........................................................241 Getting the Services You Need...............238
Away From Home..............................................238 Global Opening and Closing.....................86
Closing the Windows.........................................86 Opening the Windows.......................................86
H
Hazard Flashers............................................233 Headlamp Adjusting
See: Adjusting the Headlamps.....................273 Headlamp Exit Delay...................................80 Headlamp Removal
See: Removing a Headlamp..........................274 Headrest
See: Head Restraints..........................................131
540
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Index
Head Restraints..............................................131 Adjusting the Head Restraint.........................132 Tilting Head Restraints ....................................133
Heated Exterior Mirrors...............................129 Heated Rear Window..................................129 Heated Seats.................................................138 Heated Steering Wheel................................75 Heating
See: Climate Control...........................................121 Hill Start Assist..............................................178
Switching the System On and Off................179 Using Hill Start Assist........................................179 Hints on Controlling the Interior Climate...........................................................127 Defogging the Side Windows in Cold
Weather.............................................................129 General Hints........................................................127 Quickly Cooling the Interior............................128 Quickly Heating the Interior............................128 Recommended Settings for Cooling...........129 Recommended Settings for Heating..........128 Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock Brakes.............................................................176 Home Screen................................................409 Hood Lock See: Opening and Closing the Hood..........256
I
In California (U.S. Only)............................239 Information Display Control.......................75 Information Displays.....................................97
General Information............................................97 Information Messages...............................106
Active Park............................................................106 Adaptive Cruise Control...................................107 AdvanceTrac®.....................................................107 Airbag.....................................................................108 Alarm......................................................................108 All-Wheel Drive....................................................110 Automatic Engine Shutdown.........................110 Auto Start-Stop..................................................108 Battery and Charging System..........................111 Blind Spot Information and Cross Traffic
Alert System......................................................111 Doors and Locks...................................................112 Driver Alert..............................................................112 Fuel............................................................................112
Hill Start Assist.....................................................112 Keys and Intelligent Access.............................113 Lane Keeping System........................................114 Maintenance..........................................................114 MyKey.......................................................................115 Park Aid...................................................................116 Park Brake..............................................................116 Power Steering......................................................117 Pre-Collision Assist.............................................117 Remote Start.........................................................117 Seats........................................................................118 Starting System ..................................................118 Tire Pressure Monitoring System...................118 Traction Control...................................................119 Transmission.........................................................119 Installing Child Restraints...........................22 Child Seats..............................................................22 Using Lap and Shoulder Belts.........................22 Using Lower Anchors and Tethers for
CHildren (LATCH)............................................27 Using Tether Straps.............................................28 Instrument Cluster........................................90 Instrument Lighting Dimmer......................79 Vehicles With Front Fog Lamps.....................80 Vehicles Without Front Fog Lamps..............80 Instrument Panel............................................18 Interior Lamps.................................................82 Front Interior Lamp.............................................83 Rear Interior Lamps.............................................83 Interior Luggage Compartment Release...........................................................69 Interior Mirror...................................................88 Auto-Dimming Mirror.........................................88 Manual Dimming Mirror....................................88 Introduction.........................................................7
J
Jump Starting the Vehicle........................234 Connecting the Jumper Cables....................234 Jump Starting......................................................235 Preparing Your Vehicle.....................................234 Removing the Jumper Cables.......................235
541
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Index
K
Keyless Entry....................................................67 SECURICODETM Keyless Entry Keypad.................................................................67
Keyless Starting............................................148 Ignition Modes.....................................................148
Keys and Remote Controls.........................53
L
Lane Keeping System................................206 Switching the System On and Off...............207
Lighting Control..............................................78 Flashing the Headlamp High Beam..............79 Headlamp High Beam........................................78
Lighting...............................................................78 General Information............................................78
Load Carrying.................................................219 Load Limit........................................................219
Special Loading Instructions for Owners of Pick-up Trucks and Utility-type Vehicles.............................................................223
Vehicle Loading - with and without a Trailer..................................................................219
Locking and Unlocking................................64 Activating Intelligent Access............................65 Autolock..................................................................66 Autounlock..............................................................67 Battery Saver..........................................................67 Illuminated Entry..................................................67 Illuminated Exit.....................................................67 Power Door Locks................................................64 Remote Control....................................................64 Smart Unlocks for Intelligent Access Keys......................................................................66
Lug Nuts See: Changing a Road Wheel........................310
M
Maintenance.................................................256 General Information.........................................256
Manual Climate Control..............................121 Directing Air to the Footwell Air Vents.........121 Directing Air to the Instrument Panel Air Vents....................................................................121 Setting the Blower Motor Speed...................121
Setting the Temperature...................................121 Switching Defrost On and Off.........................121 Switching Maximum Air Conditioning On
and Off...............................................................122 Switching Maximum Defrost On and
Off........................................................................122 Switching Recirculated Air On and
Off........................................................................122 Switching the Air Conditioning On and
Off.........................................................................121 Switching the Climate Control On and
Off........................................................................122 Switching the Heated Seats On and
Off........................................................................122 Manual Seats.................................................133 Media Hub......................................................358 Memory Function..........................................135
Easy Entry and Exit Feature............................136 Linking a PreSet Position to your Remote
Control or Intelligent Access Key Fob......................................................................136 Saving a PreSet Position.................................136 Message Center See: Information Displays.................................97 Mirrors See: Windows and Mirrors................................85 Mobile Communications Equipment.......15 Moonroof..........................................................88 Bounce-Back.........................................................89 Opening and Closing the Moonroof.............89 Venting the Moonroof........................................89 Motorcraft Parts - 1.5L EcoBoostTM.......321 Motorcraft Parts - 2.0L EcoBoostTM.................................................323 Motorcraft Parts - 2.5L..............................324 Motorcraft Parts - 2.7L EcoBoostTM.................................................325 MyKey Troubleshooting...........................62 MyKeyTM.............................................................59 Principle of Operation........................................59
N
Navigation......................................................435 cityseeker..............................................................442 Destination Mode..............................................437 Map Mode............................................................435 Navigation Map Updates................................443
542
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Index
Navigation Menu...............................................440 SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link...................443 SYNC AppLink....................................................442 Waypoints.............................................................441 Normal Scheduled Maintenance..........479 Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor.............................479 Normal Maintenance Intervals....................480
O
Oil Change Indicator Reset......................262 Oil Check
See: Engine Oil Check.......................................261 Opening and Closing the Hood..............256
Closing the Hood................................................257 Opening the Hood.............................................256 Ordering Additional Owner's Literature......................................................243 Obtaining a French Owner's Manual..........243 Overhead Console........................................147
P
Parking Aids....................................................183 Principle of Operation.......................................183
Passive Anti-Theft System..........................71 SecuriLock®............................................................71
PATS See: Passive Anti-Theft System......................71
Perchlorate........................................................13 Personal Safety SystemTM..........................43
How Does the Personal Safety System Work?..................................................................43
Phone...............................................................429 During a Phone Call..........................................433 Making Calls........................................................432 Pairing Your Cell Phone for the First Time...................................................................429 Phone Menu........................................................430 Receiving Calls....................................................433 Smartphone Connectivity..............................434 Text Messaging...................................................434
Post-Crash Alert System..........................236 Power Door Locks
See: Locking and Unlocking.............................64 Power Seats....................................................133
10-way power seat.............................................135 6-way power seat...............................................134
Power Lumbar.....................................................135 Power Windows.............................................85
Accessory Delay...................................................86 Bounce-Back.........................................................85 One-Touch Down.................................................85 One-Touch Up.......................................................85 Window Lock.........................................................86 Pre-Collision Assist......................................216 Adjusting Pre-Collision Assist
Settings..............................................................217 Blocked Sensors..................................................217 Using the Pre-Collision Assist
System...............................................................216 Protecting the Environment........................17 Puncture
See: Changing a Road Wheel........................310
R
Rear Parking Aid............................................183 Obstacle Distance Indicator...........................184
Rear Seat Armrest........................................147 Rear Seats........................................................137 Rear View Camera.......................................193
Camera Guidelines............................................194 Camera System Settings.................................195 Enhanced Park Aids or Park Pilot.................195 Manual Zoom.......................................................195 Rear Camera Delay............................................196 Using the Rear View Camera System.........194 Rear View Camera See: Rear View Camera....................................193 Recommended Towing Weights............225 Refueling..........................................................158 Refueling System Overview...........................158 Refueling System Warning.............................160 Refueling Your Vehicle......................................159 Remote Control..............................................53 Car Finder................................................................56 Intelligent Access Key.........................................53 Remote Start..........................................................57 Replacing the Battery.........................................55 Sounding the Panic Alarm................................56 Using the Key Blade............................................54 Remote Start.................................................130 Automatic Settings............................................130 Heated and Cooled Features.........................130 Last Settings........................................................130
543
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Index
Removing a Headlamp..............................274 Repairing Minor Paint Damage..............285 Replacement Parts
Recommendation........................................14 Collision Repairs....................................................14 Scheduled Maintenance and Mechanical
Repairs..................................................................14 Warranty on Replacement Parts.....................14 Replacing a Lost Key or Remote Control............................................................58 Reporting Safety Defects (Canada Only)..............................................................243 Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. Only)..............................................................243 Roadside Assistance..................................232 Vehicles Sold in Canada: Getting Roadside
Assistance.......................................................233 Vehicles Sold in the United States: Getting
Roadside Assistance...................................232 Vehicles Sold in the United States: Using
Roadside Assistance...................................232 Roadside Emergencies..............................232 Running-In
See: Breaking-In.................................................230 Running Out of Fuel.....................................157
Adding Fuel From a Portable Fuel Container...........................................................157
Filling a Portable Fuel Container...................157
S
Safety CanopyTM............................................50 Safety Precautions.......................................155 Satellite Radio..............................................355
Satellite Radio Electronic Serial Number (ESN)................................................................356
Satellite Radio Reception Factors..............356 SiriusXM Satellite Radio Service.................356 Troubleshooting.................................................357 Scheduled Maintenance Record...........484 Scheduled Maintenance...........................476 Seatbelt Extension........................................42 Seatbelt Height Adjustment......................39 Seatbelt Reminder........................................40 Belt-MinderTM.......................................................40 Seatbelts...........................................................35 Principle of Operation.........................................35
Seatbelt Warning Lamp and Indicator Chime..............................................................40 Conditions of operation....................................40
Seats...................................................................131 Security................................................................71 Settings...........................................................446
911 Assist................................................................451 Ambient Lighting...............................................458 Bluetooth.............................................................448 Clock......................................................................448 Display...................................................................459 General..................................................................456 Media Player........................................................447 Mobile Apps.........................................................454 Navigation............................................................452 Phone....................................................................448 Radio.......................................................................451 SiriusXM................................................................452 Sound....................................................................446 Valet Mode..........................................................460 Vehicle...................................................................458 Voice Control.......................................................459 Wi-Fi & Hotspot.................................................456 Side Airbags.....................................................48 Side Sensing System..................................185 Obstacle Distance Indicator..........................186 Sitting in the Correct Position...................131 Snow Chains See: Using Snow Chains.................................303 Spare Wheel See: Changing a Road Wheel........................310 Special Notices................................................14 New Vehicle Limited Warranty.........................14 On Board Diagnostics Data Link
Connector............................................................15 Special Instructions..............................................14 Special Operating Conditions Scheduled Maintenance..............................................482 Exceptions...........................................................483 Speed Control See: Cruise Control.............................................197 Stability Control.............................................181 Principle of Operation........................................181 Starting a Gasoline Engine.......................149 Automatic Engine Shutdown........................150 Failure to Start.....................................................149 Guarding Against Exhaust Fumes.................151 Important Ventilating Information................151
544
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Index
Starting Your Vehicle.........................................149 Stopping the Engine When Your Vehicle is
Moving.................................................................151 Stopping the Engine When Your Vehicle is
Stationary.........................................................150 Starting and Stopping the Engine.........148
General Information..........................................148 Steering............................................................215
Electric Power Steering....................................215 Steering Wheel................................................73 Storage Compartments.............................147 Sunroof
See: Moonroof......................................................88 Sun Visors.........................................................88
Illuminated Vanity Mirror...................................88 Supplementary Restraints System.........44
Principle of Operation........................................44 Symbols Glossary.............................................7 SYNCTM 3........................................................397
General Information..........................................397 SYNCTM 3 Troubleshooting.....................460 SYNCTM Applications and Services.......375
911 Assist...............................................................375 SYNC Mobile Apps.............................................377 SYNCTM...........................................................359 General Information.........................................359 SYNCTM Troubleshooting.........................389
T
Technical Specifications See: Capacities and Specifications.............319
The Better Business Bureau (BBB) Auto Line Program (U.S. Only)......................240
Tire Care..........................................................288 Glossary of Tire Terminology........................290 Information About Uniform Tire Quality Grading.............................................................288 Information Contained on the Tire Sidewall.............................................................291 Temperature A B C............................................289 Traction AA A B C..............................................289 Treadwear............................................................289
Tire Pressure Monitoring System..........304 Changing Tires With a Tire Pressure Monitoring System.......................................305 Understanding Your Tire Pressure Monitoring System ......................................305
Tires See: Wheels and Tires.....................................288
Towing a Trailer.............................................224 Load Placement.................................................224
Towing Points................................................237 Installing the Recovery Hook.........................237 Recovery Hook Location..................................237
Towing the Vehicle on Four Wheels..........................................................228 Emergency Towing............................................228 Recreational Towing.........................................228 Vehicles Equipped with 1.5L, 2.0L, and 2.5L Engines.............................................................228 Vehicles Equipped with a 2.7L Engine...............................................................228
Towing..............................................................224 Traction Control............................................180
Principle of Operation......................................180 Transmission Code Designation.............327 Transmission..................................................166 Transporting the Vehicle...........................236 Type Approvals.............................................522
China.......................................................................532 Radio Frequency Certification for Keys and
Remote Controls...........................................532 Radio Frequency Certifications for Blind
Spot Information System..........................530 Radio Frequency Certifications for Body
Control Module..............................................532 Radio Frequency Certifications for Cruise
Control Module..............................................532 Radio Frequency Certifications for Mid
Range Radar...................................................524 Radio Frequency Certifications for Passive
Anti-Theft System........................................525 Radio Frequency Certifications for Radio
Transceiver Module......................................528 Radio Frequency Certifications for SYNC
3...........................................................................532 Radio Frequency Certifications for Tire
Pressure Monitoring Sensor(s)................522 Radio Frequency Certifications for Wireless
Charging............................................................531 Radio Frequency Statement for Audio
Unit.....................................................................533
545
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Index
U
Under Hood Overview - 1.5L EcoBoostTM..................................................257
Under Hood Overview - 2.0L EcoBoostTM.................................................258
Under Hood Overview - 2.5L...................259 Under Hood Overview - 2.7L
EcoBoostTM................................................260 Unique Driving Characteristics................153 Universal Garage Door Opener...............140
HomeLink Wireless Control System...........140 USB Port.........................................................358 Using Adaptive Cruise Control................198
Automatic Cancellation..................................202 Blocked Sensor..................................................203 Canceling the Set Speed.................................201 Changing the Set Speed..................................201 Detection Issues.................................................202 Following a Vehicle..........................................200 Following a Vehicle to a Complete
Stop...................................................................200 Hilly Condition Usage.......................................202 Overriding the Set Speed................................201 Park Brake Application....................................202 Resuming the Set Speed.................................201 Setting the Adaptive Cruise Speed.............199 Setting the Adaptive Cruise Speed When
Your Vehicle is Stationary...........................199 Setting the Gap Distance...............................200 Switching Adaptive Cruise Control
Off......................................................................202 Switching Adaptive Cruise Control
On........................................................................199 Switching to Normal Cruise Control..........204 System Not Available......................................203 Using All-Wheel Drive..................................171 Driving In Special Conditions With
All-Wheel Drive (AWD).................................171 Using Cruise Control....................................197
Canceling the Set Speed.................................198 Changing the Set Speed..................................197 Resuming the Set Speed.................................198 Setting the Cruise Speed.................................197 Switching Cruise Control Off.........................198 Switching Cruise Control On...........................197 Using MyKey With Remote Start Systems..........................................................62
Using Snow Chains.....................................303 Using Stability Control................................182 Using Summer Tires...................................303 Using SYNCTM With Your Media
Player............................................................380 Accessing Your USB Song Library...............384 Bluetooth Devices and System
Settings............................................................386 Connecting Your Digital Media Player to the
USB Port..........................................................380 Media Menu Features......................................383 Media Voice Commands.................................381 USB 2.....................................................................386 Voice Commands for Audio Sources.........387 Using SYNCTM With Your Phone............363 Accessing Features through the Phone
Menu.................................................................368 Accessing Your Phone Settings.....................371 Bluetooth Devices..............................................372 Making Calls.........................................................367 Pairing a Phone for the First Time..............364 Pairing Subsequent Phones..........................365 Phone Options during an Active Call.........367 Phone Voice Commands................................365 Receiving Calls....................................................367 System Settings.................................................373 Text Messaging..................................................369 Using Traction Control...............................180 Switching the System Off...............................180 System Indicator Lights and
Messages.........................................................180 Using a Switch....................................................180 Using the Information Display
Controls............................................................180 Using Voice Recognition............................361
Audio Voice Commands...................................411 Climate Voice Commands..............................412 Initiating a Voice Session.................................361 Mobile App Voice Commands.......................415 Navigation Voice Commands........................414 Phone Voice Commands.................................412 SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link Voice
Commands......................................................415 System Interaction and Feedback..............362 Voice Settings Commands.............................416 Utilizing the Mediation/Arbitration Program (Canada Only).........................241
546
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
Index
V
Vehicle Care..................................................280 General Information.........................................280
Vehicle Certification Label........................327 Vehicle Identification Number................326 Vehicle Storage............................................285
Battery...................................................................286 Body........................................................................285 Brakes....................................................................286 Cooling system...................................................286 Engine....................................................................286 Fuel system.........................................................286 General..................................................................285 Miscellaneous.....................................................286 Removing Vehicle From Storage.................286 Tires........................................................................286 Ventilation See: Climate Control...........................................121 VIN See: Vehicle Identification Number............326 Voice Control....................................................74
W
Warning Lamps and Indicators.................93 Adaptive Cruise Control.....................................93 Anti-Lock Braking System................................93 Auto Start-stop.....................................................93 Battery......................................................................93 Blind Spot Monitor..............................................93 Brake System Warning Lamp..........................93 Cruise Control........................................................94 Direction Indicator...............................................94 Door Ajar.................................................................94 Electric Park Brake...............................................94 Engine Coolant Temperature..........................94 Engine Oil................................................................94 Fasten Seatbelt....................................................94 Front Airbag...........................................................94 Front Fog Lamps..................................................94 Grade Assist...........................................................94 Heads Up Display.................................................94 High Beam..............................................................94 Hood Ajar................................................................94 Lane Keeping System Lamp............................95 Low Fuel Level.......................................................95 Low Tire Pressure Warning...............................95
Parking Lamps......................................................95 Powertrain Fault...................................................95 Service Engine Soon...........................................95 Sport Mode............................................................95 Stability Control....................................................95 Stability Control Off............................................95 Trunk Ajar................................................................96 Washer Fluid Check....................................270 Washers See: Cleaning the Exterior..............................280 See: Wipers and Washers.................................76 Waxing.............................................................282 Wheel Nuts See: Changing a Road Wheel........................310 Wheels and Tires.........................................288 General Information.........................................288 Technical Specifications - 1.5L EcoBoostTM/
2.0L EcoBoostTM/2.5L..................................317 Technical Specifications - 2.7L
EcoBoostTM......................................................318 Windows and Mirrors...................................85 Windshield Washers......................................77
Front Camera Washer.........................................77 Windshield Wipers.........................................76
Intermittent Wipe.................................................76 Speed Dependent Wipers.................................76 Wiper Blades See: Checking the Wiper Blades..................272 Wipers and Washers.....................................76
547
Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, Second-Printing
XEP 4.16 build 20090723